US Navy Department of the Navy Chief of Naval Operations N980A NAATSEA 2000 Navy Pentagon (5D453) Washington DC 20350minus2000
US Air Force HQ AFFSA 5316 S Douglas Blvd Bldg 8400 Room 232 Oklahoma City OK 73150
US Army Director USAASA (MOASminusAS) 9325 Gunston Road Suite N319 Ft Belvoir VA 22060minus5582
NOTEminus Terminal Headquarters Air Force Flight Standards Agency is the approval authority for any USAF procedures or minima that differ from those specified herein and that involve military aircraft only
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus12 Military Procedures FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus3 Use of Active Runways
Every employee is responsible to ensure the safety of equipment and procedures used in the provision of services within the National Airspace System (NAS) Risk assessment techniques and mitigations as
appropriate are intended for implementation of any planned safety significant changes within the NAS as directed by FAA Order 1100161 Air Traffic Safety Oversight Direction regarding the SMS and its application can be found in the FAA Safety Management System Manual and FAA Order 1100161 The SMS will be implemented through a period of transitional activities (Additional information pertaining to these requirements and processes can be obtained by contacting the service area offices)
When references are made to regional office organizations that are not part of the Air Traffic Organization (ie Communications Center Flight Standards Airport offices etc) the facility should contact the FAA region where the facility is physically located minus not the region where the facilityrsquos service area office is located
This order is distributed to selected offices in Washington headquarters regional offices service area offices the William J Hughes Technical Center and the Mike Monroney Aeronautical Center Also copies are sent to all air traffic field facilities and international aviation field offices and to interested aviation public
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 2 Terms of Reference
1minus2minus1 WORD MEANINGS
As used in this order
a ldquoShallrdquo or ldquomustrdquo means a procedure is mandatory
b ldquoShall notrdquo or ldquomust notrdquo means a procedure is prohibited
c ldquoShouldrdquo means a procedure is recommended
d ldquoMayrdquo or ldquoneed notrdquo means a procedure is optional
e ldquoWillrdquo means futurity not a requirement for the application of a procedure
f Singular words include the plural
g Plural words include the singular
h ldquoAircraftrdquo means the airframe crew members or both
i ldquoApproved separationrdquo means separation in accordance with the applicable minima in this order
j ldquoAltituderdquo means indicated altitude mean sea level (MSL) flight level (FL) or both
k ldquoMilesrdquo means nautical miles unless otherwise specified and means statute miles in conjunction with visibility
l ldquoCourserdquo ldquobearingrdquo ldquoazimuthrdquo ldquoheadingrdquo and ldquowind directionrdquo information must always be magnetic unless specifically stated otherwise
m ldquoTimerdquo when used for ATC operational activities is the hour and the minute in Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) Change to the next minute is made at the minute plus 30 seconds except time checks are given to the nearest quarter minute
n ldquoRunwayrdquo means the runway used by aircraft and unless otherwise specified does not include helipads andor their accompanying takeofflanding courses (See PilotController Glossary terms ndash Runway and Helipad)
o Flight operations in accordance with the options of ldquodue regardrdquo or ldquooperationalrdquo obligates the authorized state aircraft commander to
1 Separate hisher aircraft from all other air traffic and
2 Assure that an appropriate monitoring agency assumes responsibility for search and rescue actions and
3 Operate under at least one of the following conditions
(a) In visual meteorological conditions (VMC) or
(b) Wthin radar surveillance and radio communications of a surface radar facility or
(c) Be equipped with airborne radar that is sufficient to provide separation between hisher aircraft and any other aircraft heshe may be controlling and other aircraft or
(d) Operate within Class G airspace
(e) An understanding between the pilot and controller regarding the intent of the pilot and the status of the flight should be arrived at before the aircraft leaves ATC frequency
NOTEminus 1 A pilotrsquos use of the phrase ldquoGoing Tacticalrdquo does not indicate ldquoDue Regardrdquo An understanding between the pilot and controller regarding the intent of the pilot and the status of the flight should be arrived at before the aircraft leaves air traffic control (ATC) frequency
2 The above conditions provide for a level of safety equivalent to that normally given by International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) ATC agencies and fulfills US Government obligations under Article 3 of the Chicago Convention of 1944 (Reference (d)) which stipulates there must be ldquodue regard for the safety of navigation of civil aircraftrdquo when flight is not being conducted under ICAO flight procedures
p ldquoCFRrdquo means Code of Federal Regulations
Terms of Reference 1minus2minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
FIG 1minus2minus1
Divergence
1minus2minus2 COURSE DEFINITIONS
The following definitions must be used in the application of the separation criteria in this order
NOTEminus The term ldquoprotected airspacerdquo as used in this paragraph is the airspace equal to one half the required applicable lateral separation on either side of an aircraft along its projected flight path If the protected airspace of two aircraft does not overlap applicable lateral separa-tion is ensured
a SAME COURSES are courses whose protected airspaces are coincident overlap or intersect and whose angular difference is less than 45 degrees (See FIG 1minus2minus1)
b CROSSING COURSES are intersecting courses whose angular difference is 45 through 135 degrees inclusive (See FIG 1minus2minus1)
c OPPOSITERECIPROCAL COURSES are courses whose protected airspaces are coincident overlap or intersect and whose angular difference is greater than 135 degrees through 180 degrees inclusive (See FIG 1minus2minus1)
1minus2minus3 NOTES
Statements of fact or of a prefatory or explanatory nature relating to directive material are set forth as notes
Terms of Reference 1minus2minus2
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
1minus2minus4 REFERENCES
As used in this order references direct attention to an additional or supporting source of information such as FAA NWS and other agenciesrsquo orders directives notices CFRs and Advisory Circulars (ACs)
1minus2minus5 ANNOTATIONS
Revised reprinted or new pages are marked as follows
a The change number and the effective date are printed on each revised or additional page
b A page that does not require a change is reprinted in its original form
c Bold vertical lines in the margin of changed pages indicate the location of substantive revisions to the order Bold vertical lines adjacent to the title of a chapter section or paragraph means that extensive changes have been made to that chapter section or paragraph
d Paragraphssections annotated with EN ROUTE OCEANIC or TERMINAL are only to be applied by the designated type facility When they are not so designated the paragraphssections apply to all types of facilities (en route oceanic and terminal)
e The annotation USAF for the US Air Force USN for the US Navy and USA for the US Army denotes that the procedure immediately following the annotation applies only to the designated service
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus12 Military Procedures
f WAKE TURBULENCE APPLICATION in-serted within a paragraph means that the remaining information in the paragraph requires the application of wake turbulence procedures
g The annotation PHRASEOLOGY denotes the prescribed words andor phrases to be used in communications
NOTEminus Controllers may after first using the prescribed phraseology for a specific procedure rephrase the message to ensure the content is understood Good judgment must be exercised when using nonstandard phraseology
h The annotation EXAMPLE provides a sample of the way the prescribed phraseology associated with the preceding paragraph(s) will be used If the preceding paragraph(s) does (do) not include specific prescribed phraseology the EXAMPLE merely denotes suggested words andor phrases that may be used in communications
NOTEminus The use of the exact text contained in an example not preceded with specific prescribed phraseology is not mandatory However the words andor phrases are expected to the extent practical to approximate those used in the example
1minus2minus6 ABBREVIATIONS
As used in this order the abbreviations listed below have the following meanings indicated (See TBL 1minus2minus1)
TBL 1minus2minus1
FAA Order JO 711065 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
AAR Airport acceptance rate
AC Advisory Circular
ACC Area Control Center
ACEminusIDS ASOS Controller Equipmentminus Information Display System
ACL Aircraft list
ACLS Automatic Carrier Landing System
ADC Aerospace Defense Command
ADIZ Air Defense Identification Zone (to be pronounced ldquoAY DIZrdquo)
ADS Automatic Dependent Surveillance
ADSminusB Automatic Dependent Surveillance Broadcast
ADSminusC Automatic Dependent Surveillance Contract
AERT Automation Embedded Route Text
AFP Airspace Flow Program
AIDC ATS Interfacility Data Communications
AIM Aeronautical Information Manual
AIRMET Airmenrsquos meteorological information
ALDARS Automated Lightning Detection and Reporting System
ALERFA Alert phase code (Alerting Service)
ALNOT Alert notice
ALS Approach Light System
ALTRV Altitude reservation
Terms of Reference 1minus2minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
Abbreviation Meaning
AMASS Airport Movement Area Safety System
AMB AmbiguityminusA disparity greater than 2 miles exists between the position declared for a target by STARS and another facilityrsquos computer declared position during interfacility handoff
AMVER Automated Mutual Assistance Vessel Rescue System
ANG Air National Guard
APR ATC preferred route
APREQ Approval Request
ARAC Army Radar Approach Control facility (US Army)
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ARIP Air refueling initial point
ARSR Air route surveillance radar
ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center
ASD Aircraft Situation Display
ASDE Airport surface detection equipment
ASDEminusX Airport Surface Detection Equipment System minus Model X
ASF Airport Stream Filters
ASOS Automated Surface Observing System
ASR Airport surveillance radar
ASSC Airport Surface Surveillance Capability
ATC Air traffic control
ATCAA ATC assigned airspace
ATCSCC David J Hurley Air Traffic Control System Command Center
ATD AlongminusTrack Distance
ATIS Automatic Terminal Information Service
ATO Air Traffic Organization
ATO COO Air Traffic Organization Chief Operating Officer
ATOP Advanced Technologies and Oceanic Procedures
ATS Air Traffic Service
AWOS Automated Weather Observing System
BAASS Bigelow Aerospace Advanced Space Studies
BASE Cloud base
CA Conflict Alert
CARCAH Chief Aerial Reconnaissance Coordination All Hurricanes
CARF Central Altitude Reservation Function
CAT Clear air turbulence
CDT Controlled departure time
Abbreviation Meaning
CEP Central East Pacific
CERAP Combined CenterRAPCON
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CFR Call for Release
CIC ControllerminusinminusCharge
CNS Continuous
CPDLC Controller Pilot Data Link Communications
CPME Calibration Performance Monitor Equipment
CTA Control Area
CTRD Certified Tower Radar Display
CVFP Charted Visual Flight Procedure
CWA Center Weather Advisory
DETRESFA Distress Phase code (Alerting Service)
DH Decision height
DL Departure List
DME Distance measuring equipment compatible with TACAN
DOE Department of Energy
DP Instrument Departure Procedure
DR Dead reckoning
DRT Diversion recovery tool
DSR Display System Replacement
DTAS Digital Terminal Automation Systems
DTM Digital Terrain Map
DVFR Defense Visual Flight Rules
DVRSN Diversion
EA Electronic Attack
EAS En Route Automation System
EBUS Enhanced Backup Surveillance System
EDCT Expect Departure Clearance Time
EDST En Route Decision Support Tool
EFC Expect further clearance
EFVS Enhanced Flight Vision System
ELDB Enhanced Limited Data Block
ELP Emergency Landing Pattern
ELT Emergency locator transmitter
EoR Established on RNP
EOVM Emergency obstruction video map
EOS End Service
ERAM En Route Automation Modernization
ERIDS En Route Information Display System
ETA Estimated time of arrival
Terms of Reference 1minus2minus4
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
Abbreviation Meaning
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FANS Future Air Navigation System
FDB Full Data Block
FDIO Flight Data InputOutput
FDP Flight data processing
FICON Field Condition
FIR Flight Information Region
FL Flight level
FLIP Flight Information Publication
FLY Fly or flying
FMS Flight Management System
FSM Flight Schedule Monitor
FSS Flight Service Station
GCA Ground controlled approach
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System
GPD Graphics Plan Display
GPS Global Positioning System
GS Ground stop
HFRO High FrequencyRadio Operator
HIRL High intensity runway lights
IAFDOF Inappropriate Altitude for Direction of Flight
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization
IDENT Aircraft identification
IDS Information Display System
IFR Instrument flight rules IFSS International Flight Service Station ILS Instrument Landing System
INCERFA Uncertainty Phase code (Alerting Service)
INREQ Information request
INS Inertial Navigation System
IR IFR military training route
IRU Inertial Reference Unit
ISR Increased Separation Required
ITWS Integrated Terminal Weather System
JATO Jet assisted takeoff
LAHSO Land and Hold Short Operations
LOA Letter of Agreement
LLWAS Low Level Wind Shear Alert System
LLWAS NE Low Level Wind Shear Alert System Network Expansion
LLWASminusRS Low Level Wind Shear Alert System RelocationSustainment
LMF Lowmedium frequency
LORAN Long Range Navigation System
Abbreviation Meaning
Mach Mach number
MALS Medium Intensity Approach Light System
MALSR Medium Approach Light System with runway alignment indicator lights
MAP Missed approach point
MARSA Military authority assumes responsibility for separation of aircraft
MCA Minimum crossing altitude
MCI Mode C Intruder
MDA Minimum descent altitude
MDM Main display monitor
MEA Minimum en route (IFR) altitude
MEARTS Micro En Route Automated Radar Tracking System
METAR Aviation Routine Weather Report
MIA Minimum IFR altitude
MIAWS Medium Intensity Airport Weather System
MIRL Medium intensity runway lights
MNPS Minimum Navigation Performance Specification
MNT Mach Number Technique
MOA Military operations area
MOCA Minimum obstruction clearance altitude
MRA Minimum reception altitude
MSAW Minimum Safe Altitude Warning
MSL Mean sea level
MTI Moving target indicator
MTR Military training route
MVA Minimum vectoring altitude
NADIN National Airspace Data Interchange Network
NAR National Automation Request
NAS National Airspace System
NAT ICAO North Atlantic Region
NAT HLA North Atlantic High Level Airspace
NBCAP National Beacon Code Allocation Plan
NDB Nondirectional radio beacon
NHOP National Hurricane Operations Plan
NM Nautical mile
NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
NOPAC North Pacific
NORAD North American Aerospace Defense Command
NOS National Ocean Service
Terms of Reference 1minus2minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
Abbreviation Meaning
NOTAM Notice to Airmen
NOWGT No weight The weight class or wake category has not been determined
NRP North American Route Program
NRR Nonrestrictive Route
NRS Navigation Reference System
NTZ No transgression zone
NWS National Weather Service
NWSOP National Winter Storm Operations Plan
ODALS Omnidirectional Approach Lighting System
ODP Obstacle Departure Procedure
OID Operator Interface Device
OS Operations Supervisor
OTR Oceanic transition route
PAPI Precision Approach Path Indicators
PAR Precision approach radar
PAR Preferred arrival route
PBCT Proposed boundary crossing time
PCG PilotController Glossary
PDAR Preferential departure arrival route
PDC PreminusDeparture Clearance
PDR Preferential departure route
PPI Plan position indicator
PTP Pointminustominuspoint
PVD Plan view display
RA Radar Associate
RAIL Runway alignment indicator lights
RAPCON Radar Approach Control facility (USAF USN and USMC)
RATCF Radar Air Traffic Control Facility (USN and USMC)
RBS Radar bomb scoring
RCC Rescue Coordination Center
RCLS Runway Centerline System
RCR Runway condition reading
RE Recent (used to qualify weather phenomena such as rain eg recent rain = RERA)
REIL Runway end identifier lights RF RadiusminustominusFix
RNAV Area navigation
RNP Required Navigation Performance RTQC RealminusTime Quality Control
RVR Runway visual range
Abbreviation Meaning
RVSM Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum
RwyCC Runway Condition Codes
RwyCR Runway Condition Report
SAA Special Activity Airspace
SAR Search and rescue
SATCOM Satellite Communication
SDP Surveillance Data Processing
SELCAL Selective Calling System
SFA Single frequency approach
SFO Simulated flameout
SID Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET Significant meteorological information
SPA Special Posting Area
SPECI Nonroutine (Special) Aviation Weather Report
STAR Standard terminal arrival
STARS Standard Terminal Automation Replacement System
STMC Supervisory Traffic Management Coordinator
STMCIC Supervisory Traffic Management Coordinatorminusinminuscharge
STOL Short takeoff and landing
SURPIC Surface Picture
SVFR Special Visual Flight Rules
TAA Terminal arrival area
TAS Terminal Automation Systems
TACAN TACAN UHF navigational aid (omnidirectional course and distance information)
TAWS Terrain Awareness Warning System
TCAS Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
TCDD Tower cab digital display
TDLS Terminal Data Link System
TDW Tower display workstation
TDWR Terminal Doppler Weather Radar
TDZL Touchdown Zone Light System
TF TrackminustominusFix
TFMS Traffic Flow Management System
TMC Traffic Management Coordinator
TMU Traffic Management Unit
TRACON Terminal Radar Approach Control
TRSA Terminal radar service area
UFO Unidentified flying object
Terms of Reference 1minus2minus6
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
Abbreviation Meaning
UHF Ultra high frequency
USA United States Army
USAF United States Air Force
USN United States Navy
UTC Coordinated universal time
UTM Unsuccessful transmission message
UUA Urgent pilot weather report
VCI Voice Communication Indicator
VFR Visual flight rules
VHF Very high frequency
VMC Visual meteorological conditions
VNAV Vertical Navigation
VOR VHF navigational aid (omnidirectional course information)
VORDME Collocated VOR and DME navigational aids (VHF course and UHF distance information)
VORTAC Collocated VOR and TACAN navigation aids (VHF and UHF course and UHF distance information)
VR VFR military training route
VSCS Voice Switching and Control System
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
WARP Weather and Radar Processing
WATRS West Atlantic Route System
WRA Weather Reconnaissance Area
WSO Weather Service Office
WSP Weather System Processor
WST Convective SIGMET
Terms of Reference 1minus2minus7
81519 JO 711065Y
Chapter 2 General Control
Section 1 General
2minus1minus1 ATC SERVICE
a The primary purpose of the ATC system is to prevent a collision involving aircraft operating in the system
b In addition to its primary purpose the ATC system also
1 Provides a safe orderly and expeditious flow of air traffic
2 Supports National Security and Homeland Defense missions
c The ATC system must provide certain addition-al services to the extent permitted The provision of additional services is not optional on the part of the controller but rather required when the work situation permits It is recognized that the provision of these services may be precluded by various factors including but not limited to
1 Volume of traffic
2 Frequency congestion
3 Quality of surveillance
4 Controller workload
5 Higher priority duties
6 The physical inability to scan and detect situations falling in this category
d Controllers must provide air traffic control service in accordance with the procedures and minima in this order except when one or more of the following conditions exists
1 A deviation is necessary to conform with ICAO Documents National Rules of the Air or special agreements where the US provides air traffic control service in airspace outside the US and its possessions or
NOTEminus Pilots are required to abide by CFRs or other applicable regulations regardless of the application of any procedure or minima in this order
2 Other proceduresminima are prescribed in a letter of agreement FAA directive or a military document or
NOTEminus These procedures may include altitude reservations air refueling fighter interceptor operations law enforce-ment etc REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 1minus1minus10 Procedural Letters of Agreement (LOA)
3 A deviation is necessary to assist an aircraft when an emergency has been declared REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus6 Safety Alert FAA Order JO 711065 Chapter 10 Emergencies FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus1minus8 Merging Target Procedures
e Air Traffic Control services are not provided for model aircraft operating in the NAS or to any UAS operating in the NAS at or below 400ft AGL
NOTEminus 1 This does not prohibit ATC from providing services to civil and public UAS
2 The provisions of this paragraph apply to model aircraft operating at any altitude For all other UAS this paragraph applies only to those UAS operating entirely at or below 400ft AGL
REFERENCEminus PCG Term minus Model Aircraft
2minus1minus2 DUTY PRIORITY
a Give first priority to separating aircraft and issuing safety alerts as required in this order Good judgment must be used in prioritizing all other provisions of this order based on the requirements of the situation at hand REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus6 Safety Alert
NOTEminus Because there are many variables involved it is virtually impossible to develop a standard list of duty priorities that would apply uniformly to every conceivable situation Each set of circ*mstances must be evaluated on its own merit and when more than one action is required controllers must exercise their best judgment based on the facts and circ*mstances known to them That action which is most critical from a safety standpoint is performed first
General 2minus1minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
b Provide support to national security and homeland defense activities to include but not be limited to reporting of suspicious andor unusual aircraftpilot activities REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 76104 Special Operations
c Provide andor solicit weather information in accordance with procedures and requirements outlined in this order
NOTEminus Controllers are responsible to become familiar with and stay aware of current weather information needed to perform ATC duties
d Provide additional services to the extent possible contingent only upon higher priority duties and other factors including limitations of radar volume of traffic frequency congestion and workload
2minus1minus3 PROCEDURAL PREFERENCE
a Use automation procedures in preference to nonautomation procedures when workload commu-nications and equipment capabilities permit
b Use radar separation in preference to nonradar separation when it will be to an operational advantage and workload communications and equipment permit
c Use nonradar separation in preference to radar separation when the situation dictates that an operational advantage will be gained
NOTEminus One situation may be where vertical separation would preclude excessive vectoring
2minus1minus4 OPERATIONAL PRIORITY
It is recognized that traffic flow may affect the controllerrsquos ability to provide priority handling However without compromising safety good judgment must be used in each situation to facilitate the most expeditious movement of priority aircraft Provide air traffic control service to aircraft on a ldquofirst come first servedrdquo basis as circ*mstances permit except the following
NOTEminus It is solely the pilotrsquos prerogative to cancel an IFR flight plan However a pilotrsquos retention of an IFR flight plan does not afford priority over VFR aircraft For example this does not preclude the requirement for the pilot of an
arriving IFR aircraft to adjust hisher flight path as necessary to enter a traffic pattern in sequence with arriving VFR aircraft
a An aircraft in distress has the right of way over all other air traffic REFERENCEminus 14 CFR Section 91113(c)
b Treat air ambulance flights as follows
1 Provide priority handling to civil air ambulance flights when the pilot in radio transmis-sions verbally identifies the flight by stating ldquoMEDEVACrdquo followed by the FAA authorized call sign or the full civil registration lettersnumbers Good judgment must be used in each situation to facilitate the most expeditious movement of a MEDEVAC aircraft
NOTEminus If a flight plan includes the letter ldquoLrdquo for ldquoMEDEVACrdquo andor includes ldquoMEDEVACrdquo in Item 11 (Remarks) of the flight plan or Item 18 (Other Information) of an international flight plan the entries are considered informational in nature only and not an identification for operational priority REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus20 Aircraft Identification
2 Provide priority handling to AIR EVAC and HOSP flights when verbally requested by the pilot
NOTEminus If a flight plan includes ldquoHOSPrdquo or ldquoAIR EVACrdquo in either Item 11 (Remarks) or Item 18 (Other Information) of an international flight plan the entries are considered informational in nature only and not an identification for operational priority For aircraft identification in radio transmissions civilian pilots will use normal call signs when filing ldquoHOSPrdquo and military pilots will use the ldquoEVACrdquo call sign
3 Assist the pilots of MEDEVAC AIR EVAC and HOSP aircraft to avoid areas of significant weather and adverse conditions
4 If requested by a pilot provide additional assistance (ie landline notifications) to expedite ground handling of patients vital organs or urgently needed medical materials
c Provide priority handling and expedite the movement of presidential aircraft and entourage and any rescue support aircraft as well as related control messages when traffic conditions and communica-tions facilities permit
NOTEminus As used herein the terms presidential aircraft and
General 2minus1minus2
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
entourage include aircraft and entourage of the President Vice President or other public figures when designated by the White House
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus20 Aircraft Identification FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus3minus2 Departure Clearances FAA Order JO 72103 Para 5minus1minus1 Advance Coordination
d Provide priority handling and maximum assistance to SAR aircraft performing a SAR mission
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus1minus3 Providing Assistance
e Provide priority handling and maximum assistance to expedite the movement of interceptor aircraft on active air defense missions until the unknown aircraft is identified
f Provide priority handling to NIGHT WATCH aircraft when NAOC (pronounced NAminusYOCK) is indicated in the remarks section of the flight plan or in airground communications
NOTEminus The term ldquoNAOCrdquo will not be a part of the call sign but may be used when the aircraft is airborne to indicate a request for special handling
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 76104 Para 12minus1minus1 Applications
g Provide priority handling to any civil or military aircraft using the code name ldquoFLYNETrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus5 FLYNET FAA Order JO 76104 Para 12minus4minus1 ldquoFLYNETrdquo Flights Nuclear Emergency Teams
h Provide priority handling to aircraft using the code name ldquoGarden Plotrdquo only when CARF notifies you that such priority is authorized Refer any questions regarding flight procedures to CARF for resolution
NOTEminus Garden Plot flights require priority movement and are coordinated by the military with CARF State authority will contact the Regional Administrator to arrange for priority of National Guard troop movements within a particular state
i Provide priority handling to USAF aircraft engaged in aerial samplingsurveying missions using the call sign ldquoSAMPrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus17 SAMP Flights FAA Order JO 72103 Para 5minus3minus2 Aerial SamplingSurveying For Nuclear Contamination FAA Order JO 76104 Para 12minus4minus3 Aerial SamplingSurveying For Nuclear Contamination
j Provide priority handling to Special Air Mission aircraft when SCOOT is indicated in the remarks section of the flight plan or used in airground communications
NOTEminus The term ldquoSCOOTrdquo will not be part of the call sign but may be used when the aircraft is airborne to indicate a request for special handling
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 76104 Para 12minus6minus1 Applications
k When requested provide priority handling to TEAL and NOAA mission aircraft
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus19 Weather Reconnaissance Flights
l Provide priority handling to expedite the movement of OPEN SKIES Treaty observation and demonstration (F and D) flights
NOTEminus An Open Skies Treaty (F and D) aircraft has priority over all ldquoregularrdquo air traffic ldquoRegularrdquo is defined as all aircraft traffic other than
1 Emergencies 2 Aircraft directly involved in presidential movement 3 Forces or activities in actual combat 4 MEDEVAC and active SAR missions 5 AIR EVAC and HOSP aircraft that have requested
priority handling
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus22 Open Skies Treaty Aircraft FAA Order JO 72103 Para 5minus3minus5 Open Skies Treaty Aircraft Priority Flights (F and D) Treaty on Open Skies Treaty Document 102minus37
m Provide priority handling as required to expedite Flight Check aircraft
NOTEminus It is recognized that unexpected wind conditions weather or heavy traffic flows may affect controllerrsquos ability to provide priority or special handling at the specific time requested
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus1minus3 Flight Check Aircraft
n IFR aircraft must have priority over SVFR aircraft
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Chapter 7 Section 5 Special VFR (SVFR)
o Aircraft operating under the North American Route Program (NRP) are not subject to route limiting restrictions (eg published preferred IFR routes letter of agreement requirements standard operating procedures)
General 2minus1minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus3minus2 En Route Data Entries FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus2minus15 North American Route Program (NRP) Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus5 Route or Altitude Amendments FAA Order JO 72103 Chapter 18 Section 17 North American Route Program
p If able provide priority handling to diverted flights Priority handling may be requested via use of ldquoDVRSNrdquo in the remarks section of the flight plan or by the flight being placed on the Diversion Recovery Tool (DRT)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 18minus4minus5 Diversion Recovery
q If able provide priority handling to FALLEN HERO flights when ldquoFALLEN HEROrdquo is indicated in the remarks section of the flight plan or requested in airground communications
2minus1minus5 EXPEDITIOUS COMPLIANCE
a Use the word ldquoimmediatelyrdquo only when expeditious compliance is required to avoid an imminent situation
b Use the word ldquoexpediterdquo only when prompt compliance is required to avoid the development of an imminent situation If an ldquoexpediterdquo climb or descent clearance is issued by ATC and subsequently the altitude to maintain is changed or restated without an expedite instruction the expedite instruction is canceled
c In either case if time permits include the reason for this action
2minus1minus6 SAFETY ALERT
Issue a safety alert to an aircraft if you are aware the aircraft is in a positionaltitude that in your judgment places it in unsafe proximity to terrain obstructions or other aircraft Once the pilot informs you action is being taken to resolve the situation you may discontinue the issuance of further alerts Do not assume that because someone else has responsibility for the aircraft that the unsafe situation has been observed and the safety alert issued inform the appropriate controller
NOTEminus 1 The issuance of a safety alert is a first priority (see Para 2minus1minus2 Duty Priority) once the controller observes and recognizes a situation of unsafe aircraft proximity to terrain obstacles or other aircraft Conditions such as workload traffic volume the qualitylimitations of the
radar system and the available lead time to react are factors in determining whether it is reasonable for the controller to observe and recognize such situations While a controller cannot see immediately the development of every situation where a safety alert must be issued the controller must remain vigilant for such situations and issue a safety alert when the situation is recognized
2 Recognition of situations of unsafe proximity may result from MSAWEminusMSAW automatic altitude readouts ConflictMode C Intruder Alert observations on a PAR scope or pilot reports
3 Once the alert is issued it is solely the pilotrsquos prerogative to determine what course of action if any will be taken
a TerrainObstruction Alert Immediately issue initiate an alert to an aircraft if you are aware the aircraft is at an altitude that in your judgment places it in unsafe proximity to terrain andor obstructions Issue the alert as follows
PHRASEOLOGYminus LOW ALTITUDE ALERT (call sign)
CHECK YOUR ALTITUDE IMMEDIATELY
and if the aircraft is not yet on final approach
THE (as appropriate) MEAMVAMOCAMIA IN YOUR AREA IS (altitude)
REFERENCEminus PCG Term minus Final Approach minus IFR
b Aircraft ConflictMode C Intruder Alert Immediately issueinitiate an alert to an aircraft if you are aware of another aircraft at an altitude that you believe places them in unsafe proximity If feasible offer the pilot an alternate course of action When an alternate course of action is given end the transmission with the word ldquoimmediatelyrdquo
PHRASEOLOGYminus TRAFFIC ALERT (call sign) (position of aircraft) ADVISE YOU TURN LEFTRIGHT (heading)
andor
CLIMBDESCEND (specific altitude if appropriate) IMMEDIATELY
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTraffic Alert Cessna Three Four Juliet 12rsquoo clock 1 mile advise you turn left immediatelyrdquo or ldquoTraffic Alert Cessna Three-Four Juliet 12rsquoo clock 1 mile advise you turn left and climb immediatelyrdquo
General 2minus1minus4
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus14minus1 Conflict Alert (CA) and Mode C Intruder (MCI) Alert FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus14minus2 En Route Minimum Safe Altitude Warning (EminusMSAW) FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus15minus6 CAMCI FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus24 Altitude Filters FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus21 Traffic Advisories
2minus1minus7 INFLIGHT EQUIPMENT MALFUNCTIONS
a When a pilot reports an inflight equipment malfunction determine the nature and extent of any special handling desired
NOTEminus Inflight equipment malfunctions include partial or complete failure of equipment which may affect either safety separation standards andor the ability of the flight to proceed under IFR or in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) airspace in the ATC system Control-lers may expect reports from pilots regarding VOR TACAN ADF GPS RVSM capability or low frequency navigation receivers impairment of airminusground commu-nications capability or other equipment deemed appropriate by the pilot (eg airborne weather radar) Pilots should communicate the nature and extent of any assistance desired from ATC
b Provide the maximum assistance possible consistent with equipment workload and any special handling requested
c Relay to other controllers or facilities who will subsequently handle the aircraft all pertinent details concerning the aircraft and any special handling required or being provided
2minus1minus8 MINIMUM FUEL
If an aircraft declares a state of ldquominimum fuelrdquo inform any facility to whom control jurisdiction is transferred of the minimum fuel problem and be alert for any occurrence which might delay the aircraft en route
NOTEminus Use of the term ldquominimum fuelrdquo indicates recognition by a pilot that hisher fuel supply has reached a state where upon reaching destination heshe cannot accept any undue delay This is not an emergency situation but merely an advisory that indicates an emergency situation is possible should any undue delay occur A minimum fuel advisory does not imply a need for traffic priority Common sense and good judgment will determine the extent of assistance to be given in minimum fuel situations If at any time the
remaining usable fuel supply suggests the need for traffic priority to ensure a safe landing the pilot should declare an emergency and report fuel remaining in minutes
2minus1minus9 REPORTING ESSENTIAL FLIGHT INFORMATION
Report as soon as possible to the appropriate FSS airport managerrsquos office ARTCC approach control facility operations office or military operations office any information concerning components of the NAS or any flight conditions which may have an adverse effect on air safety
NOTEminus FSSs are responsible for classifying and disseminating Notices to Airmen
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus3minus3 Timely Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus1minus6 Service Limitations FAA Order JO 72103 Para 3minus1minus2 Periodic Maintenance USN See OPNAVINST 372130
2minus1minus10 NAVAID MALFUNCTIONS
a When an aircraft reports a groundminusbased NAVAID malfunction take the following actions
1 Request a report from a second aircraft
2 If the second aircraft reports normal operations continue use and inform the first aircraft Record the incident on FAA Form 7230minus4 or appropriate military form
3 If the second aircraft confirms the malfunc-tion or in the absence of a second aircraft report activate the standby equipment or request the monitor facility to activate
4 If normal operation is reported after the standby equipment is activated continue use record the incident on FAA Form 7230minus4 or appropriate military form and notify technical operations personnel (the Systems Engineer of the ARTCC when an en route aid is involved)
5 If continued malfunction is reported after the standby equipment is activated or the standby equipment cannot be activated inform technical operations personnel and request advice on whether or not the aid should be shut down In the absence of a second aircraft report advise the technical operations personnel of the time of the initial aircraft report and the estimated time a second aircraft report could be obtained
General 2minus1minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
b When an aircraft reports a GPS or WAAS anomaly request the following information andor take the following actions
1 Record the following minimum information
(a) Aircraft make model and call sign
(b) Location or position and altitude at the time where GPS or WAAS anomaly was observed
(c) Datetime of occurrence
2 Request a report from a second aircraft
3 Record the incident on FAA Form 7230minus4 or appropriate military form
4 Inform other aircraft of the anomaly as specified in paragraph 4minus8minus1j or k as applicable
PHRASEOLOGYminus ATTENTION ALL AIRCRAFT GPS REPORTED UNRELIABLE (OR WAAS UNAVAILABLE) IN VICINITYAREA (position)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAttention all aircraft GPS reported unreliable (or WAAS unavailable) in the area 30 miles south of Waco VORrdquo
c When a pilot reports a WAAS anomaly determine from the pilot what indications he or she observes and record the information in accordance with sub-paragraph b above
2minus1minus11 USE OF MARSA
a MARSA may only be applied to military operations specified in a letter of agreement or other appropriate FAA or military document
NOTEminus Application of MARSA is a military command prerogative It will not be invoked indiscriminately by individual units or pilots It will be used only for IFR operations requiring its use Commands authorizing MARSA will ensure that its implementation and terms of use are documented and coordinated with the control agency having jurisdiction over the area in which the operations are conducted Terms of use will assign responsibility and provide for separation among participating aircraft
b ATC facilities do not invoke or deny MARSA Their sole responsibility concerning the use of MARSA is to provide separation between military aircraft engaged in MARSA operations and other nonparticipating IFR aircraft
c DOD must ensure that military pilots requesting special use airspaceATCAAs have coordinated with
the scheduling agency have obtained approval for entry and are familiar with the appropriate MARSA procedures ATC is not responsible for determining which military aircraft are authorized to enter special use airspaceATCAAs
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus13 Military Aerial Refueling
2minus1minus12 MILITARY PROCEDURES
Military procedures in the form of additions modifications and exceptions to the basic FAA procedure are prescribed herein when a common procedure has not been attained or to fulfill a specific requirement They must be applied by
a ATC facilities operated by that military service
EXAMPLEminus 1 An Air Force facility providing service for an Air Force base would apply USAF procedures to all traffic regardless of class
2 A Navy facility providing service for a Naval Air Station would apply USN procedures to all traffic regardless of class
b ATC facilities regardless of their parent organization (FAA USAF USN USA) supporting a designated military airport exclusively This designation determines which military procedures are to be applied
EXAMPLEminus 1 An FAA facility supports a USAF base exclusively USAF procedures are applied to all traffic at that base
2 An FAA facility provides approach control service for a Naval Air Station as well as supporting a civil airport basic FAA procedures are applied at both locations by the FAA facility
3 A USAF facility supports a USAF base and provides approach control service to a satellite civilian airport USAF procedures are applied at both locations by the USAF facility
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 1minus2minus5 Annotations
c Other ATC facilities when specified in a letter of agreement
EXAMPLEminus A USAF unit is using a civil airport supported by an FAA facilityminus USAF procedures will be applied as specified in a letter of agreement between the unit and the FAA facility to the aircraft of the USAF unit Basic FAA procedures will be applied to all other aircraft
General 2minus1minus6
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
2minus1minus13 FORMATION FLIGHTS
Control formation flights as a single aircraft Separation responsibility between aircraft within the formation rests with the flight leader and the pilots of the other aircraft in the flight This includes transition periods when aircraft within the formation are maneuvering to attain separation from each other to effect individual control during joinminusup and breakaway
REFERENCEminus PCG Term ndash Formation Flight FAA Order JO 76104 Chapter 12 Section 11 Formation Flight ICAO Annex 2 318 Formation Flights
a Support formation flight joinminusup for two aircraft when all of the following occur
1 Requested by any participating pilot
2 All participating pilots concur
3 Either of the participating pilots reports the others in sight
EXAMPLEminus ldquoROOK01 has EAGLE03 in sight request formation joinminusup with EAGLE03 at flight level two zero zero EAGLE03 will be the leadrdquo
ldquoEAGLE03 verify requesting flight joinminusup with ROOK01rdquo
If affirmative
ldquoROOK01 climb and maintain flight level two zero zero Report (advise) when formation joinminusup is completerdquo
b If multiple single aircraft request to joinminusup multiple formations are joining as one or aircraft are joining an established formation obtain confirmation of required items listed in subparagraph 2minus1minus13a from the lead aircraft
REFERENCEminus PCG Term minus Formation Flight
c After joinminusup aircraft beacon code assignment will be determined by formation type
1 For a standard formation only the aircraft acting as the lead will squawk an ATC assigned beacon code Ensure all other aircraft squawk standby
2 For a nonstandard formation each aircraft should squawk an ATC assigned beacon code Controller discretion allows aircraft in a nonstandard
formation to squawk standby if operationally advantageous REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 76104 Paragraph 12minus11minus6 Nonstandard Formation Tactics subparagraph b3
EXAMPLEminus ldquoN123JP squawk standbyrdquo
Or
ldquoN123SP have N123JP squawk standbyrdquo
d When formation breakminusup is requested issue control instructions andor clearances which will result in approved separation through the lead or directly to the requesting aircraft in the formation
EXAMPLEminus ldquoN5871S requesting flight breakminusup with N731K N731K is changing destination to PHLrdquo ldquoN731K squawk 5432 turn right fly heading zerominussevenminus zero
ldquoCenter BAMA21 BAMA23 is requesting to RTBrdquo ldquoBAMA21 have BAMA23 squawk 5544 descend and maintain flight level oneminusninerminuszero and change to my frequencyrdquo
ldquoCenter BAMA21 BAMA23 is requesting to RTBrdquo ldquoBAMA23 squawk 5544 BAMA23 Radar contact (position if required) Cleared to SSC via direct Descend and maintain flight level oneminusninerminuszerordquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Paragraph 5minus5minus8 Additional Separation for Formation Flights PCG Termminus Formation Flight
e Military and civil formation flights in RVSM airspace
1 Utilize RVSM separation standards for a formation flight which consists of all RVSM approved aircraft
2 Utilize nonminusRVSM separation standards for a formation flight above FL 290 which does not consist of all RVSM approved aircraft
3 If aircraft are requesting to form a formation flight to FL 290 or above the controller who issues the clearance creating the formation flight is responsible for ensuring that the proper equipment suffix is entered for the lead aircraft
4 If the flight departs as a formation and is requesting FL 290 or above the first center sector must ensure that the proper equipment suffix is entered
General 2minus1minus7
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
5 If the formation flight is below FL 290 and later requests FL 290 or above the controller receiving the RVSM altitude request must ensure the proper equipment suffix is entered
6 Upon breakminusup of the formation flight the controller initiating the breakminusup must ensure that all aircraft or flights are assigned their proper equipment suffix
2minus1minus14 COORDINATE USE OF AIRSPACE
a Ensure that the necessary coordination has been accomplished before you allow an aircraft under your control to enter another controllerrsquos area of jurisdiction
b Before you issue a control instruction directly to a pilot that will change the aircraftrsquos heading route speed or altitude you must ensure that coordination has been completed with all controllers whose area of jurisdiction is affected by those instructions unless otherwise specified by a letter of agreement or facility directive If your control instruction will be relayed to the pilot through a source other than another radar controller (FSS ARINC another pilot etc) you are still responsible to ensure that all required coordina-tion is completed
NOTEminus 1 It is good operating practice for controllers to confirm that required coordination has beenwill be effected especially in unusual circ*mstances such as recently modified sector configurations airspace changes route changes etc
2 Ensuring that all required coordination has been completed does not necessarily imply that the controller issuing the control instruction directly to the pilot has to perform the coordination action
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus15 Control Transfer FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus10 Adjacent Airspace FAA Order JO 711065 Para5minus4minus5 Transferring Controller Handoff FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus6 Receiving Controller Handoff
2minus1minus15 CONTROL TRANSFER
a Transfer control of an aircraft in accordance with the following conditions
1 At a prescribed or coordinated location time fix or altitude or
2 At the time a radar handoff and frequency change to the receiving controller have been completed and when authorized by a facility directive
or letter of agreement which specifies the type and extent of control that is transferred
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus14 Coordinate Use of Airspace FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus5 Transferring Controller Handoff FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus6 Receiving Controller Handoff
b Transfer control of an aircraft only after eliminating any potential conflict with other aircraft for which you have separation responsibility
c Assume control of an aircraft only after it is in your area of jurisdiction unless specifically coordin-ated or as specified by letter of agreement or a facility directive
2minus1minus16 SURFACE AREAS
a Coordinate with the appropriate nonapproach control tower on an individual aircraft basis before issuing a clearance which would require flight within a surface area for which the tower has responsibility unless otherwise specified in a letter of agreement
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 4minus3minus1 Letters of Agreement 14 CFR Section 91127 Operating on or in the Vicinity of an Airport in Class E Airspace PCG Termminus Surface Area
b Coordinate with the appropriate control tower for transit authorization when you are providing radar traffic advisory service to an aircraft that will enter another facilityrsquos airspace
NOTEminus The pilot is not expected to obtain hisher own authorization through each area when in contact with a radar facility
c Transfer communications to the appropriate facility if required prior to operation within a surface area for which the tower has responsibility
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus17 Radio Communications Transfer FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus11 Surface Area Restrictions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus6minus1 Application 14 CFR Section 91129 Operations in Class D Airspace
2minus1minus17 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
a Transfer radio communications before an aircraft enters the receiving controllerrsquos area of jurisdiction unless otherwise coordinated or specified by a letter of agreement or a facility directive
b Transfer radio communications by specifying the following
General 2minus1minus8
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
NOTEminus Radio communications transfer procedures may be specified by a letter of agreement or contained in the route description of an MTR as published in the DOD Planning AP1B (AP3)
1 The facility name or location name and terminal function to be contacted TERMINAL Omit the location name when transferring communications to another controller within your facility or when the tower and TRACON share the same name (for example Phoenix Tower and Phoenix TRACON)
EXCEPTION Controllers must include the name of the facility when instructing an aircraft to change frequency for final approach guidance
2 Frequency to use except the following may be omitted
(a) FSS frequency
(b) Departure frequency if previously given or published on a SID chart for the procedure issued
(c) TERMINAL
(1) Ground or local control frequency if in your opinion the pilot knows which frequency is in use
(2) The numbers preceding the decimal point if the ground control frequency is in the 121 MHz bandwidth
EXAMPLEminus ldquoContact Towerrdquo ldquoContact Groundrdquo ldquoContact Ground Point Sevenrdquo ldquoContact Ground One Two Zero Point Eightrdquo ldquoContact Huntington Radiordquo ldquoContact Departurerdquo ldquoContact Los Angeles Center One Two Three Point Fourrdquo
3 Time fix altitude or specifically when to contact a facility You may omit this when compliance is expected upon receipt
NOTEminus AIM Paragraph 5minus3minus1 ARTCC Communications informs pilots that they are expected to maintain a listening watch on the transferring controllerrsquos frequency until the time fix or altitude specified
PHRASEOLOGYminus CONTACT (facility name or location name and terminal function) (frequency)
If required
AT (time fix or altitude)
c Controllers must within a reasonable amount of time take appropriate action to establishrestore communications with all aircraft for which a communications transfer or initial contact to hisher sector is expectedrequired
NOTEminus For the purposes of this paragraph a reasonable amount of time is considered to be 5 minutes from the time the aircraft enters the controllerrsquos area of jurisdiction or comes within range of radiocommunications coverage Commu-nications include twominusway VHF or UHF radio contact data link or high frequency (HF) radio through an approved thirdminusparty provider such as ARINC
d ERAM facilities beginning with initial audio contact with an aircraft must utilize the voice communication indicator to reflect the current status of voice communications
e In situations where an operational advantage will be gained and following coordination with the receiving controller you may instruct aircraft on the ground to monitor the receiving controllerrsquos frequency
EXAMPLEminus ldquoMonitor Towerrdquo ldquoMonitor Groundrdquo ldquoMonitor Ground Point Sevenrdquo ldquoMonitor Ground One Two Zero Point Eightrdquo
f In situations where a sector has multiple frequencies or when sectors are combined using multiple frequencies and the aircraft will remain under your jurisdiction transfer radio communica-tion by specifying the following
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Identification) CHANGE TO MY FREQUENCY (state frequency)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited two twenty-two change to my frequency one two three point fourrdquo REFERENCEminus AIM Para 4minus2minus3 Contact Procedures
g Avoid issuing a frequency change to helicopters known to be single-piloted during air-taxiing hovering or low-level flight Whenever possible relay necessary control instructions until the pilot is able to change frequency
NOTEminus Most light helicopters are flown by one pilot and require the constant use of both hands and feet to maintain control
General 2minus1minus9
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
Although Flight Control Friction Devices assist the pilot changing frequency near the ground could result in inadvertent ground contact and consequent loss of control Pilots are expected to advise ATC of their single-pilot status if unable to comply with a frequency change
REFERENCEminus AIM Para 4minus3minus14 Communications
h In situations where the controller does not want the pilot to change frequency but the pilot is expecting or may want a frequency change use the following phraseology
PHRASEOLOGYminus REMAIN THIS FREQUENCY
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus1 Clearance Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus12minus9 Communication Transfer
2minus1minus18 OPERATIONAL REQUESTS
Respond to a request from another controller a pilot or vehicle operator by one of the following verbal means
a Restate the request in complete or abbreviated terms followed by the word ldquoAPPROVEDrdquo The phraseology ldquoAPPROVED AS REQUESTEDrdquo may be substituted in lieu of a lengthy readback
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Requested operation) APPROVED
or
APPROVED AS REQUESTED
b State restrictions followed by the word ldquoAPPROVEDrdquo
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Restriction andor additional instructions requested operation) APPROVED
c State the word ldquoUNABLErdquo and time permit-ting a reason
PHRASEOLOGYminus UNABLE (requested operation)
and when necessary
(reason andor additional instructions)
d State the words ldquoSTAND BYrdquo
NOTEminus ldquoSTAND BYrdquo is not an approval or denial The controller acknowledges the request and will respond at a later time
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus21 Traffic Advisories FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus5 Route or Altitude Amendments FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus9minus3 Methods
2minus1minus19 WAKE TURBULENCE
a Apply wake turbulence procedures to an aircraft operating behind another aircraft when wake turbulence separation is required
NOTEminus Para 5minus5minus4 Minima subparagraphs g and h specify the required radar wake turbulence separations Time-based separations are contained in Para 3minus9minus6 Same Runway Separation Para 3minus9minus7 Wake Turbulence Separation for Intersection Departures Para 3minus9minus8 Intersecting Runway Separation Para 3minus9minus9 Nonintersecting Converging Runway Operations Para 3minus10minus3 Same Runway Separation Para 3minus10minus4 Intersecting Runway Separa-tion Para 6minus1minus4 Adjacent Airport Operation Para 6minus1minus5 Arrival Minima and Para 6minus7minus5 Interval Minima
b The separation minima must continue to touchdown for all IFR aircraft not making a visual approach or maintaining visual separation
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus9minus5 Approach Separation Responsibility
2minus1minus20 WAKE TURBULENCE CAUTIONARY ADVISORIES
a Issue wake turbulence cautionary advisories including the position altitude if known and direction of flight to aircraft operating behind an aircraft that requires wake turbulence separation when
REFERENCEminus AC 90minus23 Aircraft Wake Turbulence Pilot Responsibility Para 11 FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus4 Minima subpara g
1 TERMINAL VFR aircraft not being radar vectored are behind the larger aircraft
2 IFR aircraft accept a visual approach or visual separation
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus4minus1 Visual Approach
3 TERMINAL VFR arriving aircraft that have previously been radar vectored and the vectoring has been discontinued
b Issue cautionary information to any aircraft if in your opinion wake turbulence may have an adverse effect on it When traffic is known to be a Super aircraft include the word Super in the description
General 2minus1minus10
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
When traffic is known to be a Heavy aircraft include the word Heavy in the description
NOTEminus Wake turbulence is generated when an aircraft produces lift Because the location of wake turbulence is difficult to determine the controller is not responsible for anticipating its existence or effect Aircraft flying through a SuperHeavy aircraftrsquos flight path may have an increased chance of a wake encounter
REFERENCEminus AC 90minus23 Aircraft Wake Turbulence PCG Termminus Aircraft Classes PCG Termminus Wake Turbulence
PHRASEOLOGYminus CAUTION WAKE TURBULENCE (traffic information)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus2minus1 Visual Separation
2minus1minus21 TRAFFIC ADVISORIES
Unless an aircraft is operating within Class A airspace or omission is requested by the pilot issue traffic advisories to all aircraft (IFR or VFR) on your frequency when in your judgment their proximity may diminish to less than the applicable separation minima Where no separation minima applies such as for VFR aircraft outside of Class BClass C airspace or a TRSA issue traffic advisories to those aircraft on your frequency when in your judgment their proximity warrants it Provide this service as follows
a To radar identified aircraft
1 Azimuth from aircraft in terms of the 12minushour clock or
2 When rapidly maneuvering aircraft prevent accurate issuance of traffic as in 1 above specify the direction from an aircraftrsquos position in terms of the eight cardinal compass points (N NE E SE S SW W and NW) This method must be terminated at the pilotrsquos request
3 Distance from aircraft in miles
4 Direction in which traffic is proceeding andor relative movement of traffic
NOTEminus Relative movement includes closing converging parallel same direction opposite direction diverging overtaking crossing left to right crossing right to left
5 If known type of aircraft and altitude REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus21 Description of Aircraft Types
PHRASEOLOGYminus TRAFFIC (number) OrsquoCLOCK
or when appropriate
(direction) (number) MILES (direction)minusBOUND andor (relative movement)
and if known
(type of aircraft and altitude)
or
When appropriate
(type of aircraft and relative position) (number of feet) FEET ABOVEBELOW YOU
If altitude is unknown
ALTITUDE UNKNOWN
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTraffic eleven orsquoclock one zero miles southbound converging Boeing Seven Twenty Seven one seven thousandrdquo ldquoTraffic twelve orsquoclock one five miles opposite direction altitude unknownrdquo ldquoTraffic ten orsquoclock one two miles southeast bound one thousand feet below yourdquo
6 When requested by the pilot issue radar vectors to assist in avoiding the traffic provided the aircraft to be vectored is within your area of jurisdiction or coordination has been effected with the sectorfacility in whose area the aircraft is operating
7 If unable to provide vector service inform the pilot REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus18 Operational Requests
8 Inform the pilot of the following when traffic you have issued is not reported in sight
(a) The traffic is no factor
(b) The traffic is no longer depicted on radar
PHRASEOLOGYminus TRAFFIC NO FACTORNO LONGER OBSERVED
or
(number) OrsquoCLOCK TRAFFIC NO FACTORNO LONGER OBSERVED
General 2minus1minus11
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
or
(direction) TRAFFIC NO FACTORNO LONGER OBSERVED
b To aircraft that are not radar identified
1 Distance and direction from fix
2 Direction in which traffic is proceeding
3 If known type of aircraft and altitude
4 ETA over the fix the aircraft is approaching if appropriate
PHRASEOLOGYminus TRAFFIC (number) MILESMINUTES (direction) OF (airport or fix) (direction)minusBOUND
and if known
(type of aircraft and altitude)
ESTIMATED (fix) (time)
or
TRAFFIC NUMEROUS AIRCRAFT VICINITY (location)
If altitude is unknown
ALTITUDE UNKNOWN
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTraffic one zero miles east of Forsythe VminusOminusR Southbound MminusD Eighty descending to one six thousandrdquo ldquoTraffic reported one zero miles west of Downey VminusOminusR northbound Apache altitude unknown estimated Joliet VminusOminusR one three one fiverdquo ldquoTraffic eight minutes west of Chicago Heights VminusOminusR westbound Mooney eight thousand estimated Joliet VminusOminusR two zero three fiverdquo ldquoTraffic numerous aircraft vicinity of Delia airportrdquo
c For aircraft displaying Mode C not radar identified issue indicated altitude
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTraffic one orsquoclock six miles eastbound altitude indicates six thousand five hundredrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus6 Traffic Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus2minus1 Visual Separation FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus6minus10 VFR Departure Information
2minus1minus22 UNMANNED AIRCRAFT SYSTEM (UAS) ACTIVITY INFORMATION
a Issue UAS advisory information for known UAS activity when in your judgment their proximity warrants it If known include position distance course type of unmanned aircraft (UA) and altitude
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUminusAminusS activity 12 orsquoclock 1 mile southbound quad copter 400 feet and belowrdquo ldquoUnmanned aircraft system activity 2 miles east of Brandywine Airport 300 feet and belowrdquo
b Issue UAS advisory information for pilotminusre-ported or towerminusobserved activity when in your judgment their proximity warrants it If known include position altitude course and type Continue to issue advisories to potentially impacted aircraft for at least 15 minutes following the last report
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUminusAminusS activity reported 12 orsquoclock 1 mile altitude reported one thousand two hundredrdquo ldquoUnmanned aircraft system activity observed 1 mile east of Trenton Airport altitude unknownrdquo
2minus1minus23 BIRD ACTIVITY INFORMATION
a Issue advisory information on pilot-reported tower-observed or radar-observed and pilot-verified bird activity Include position species or size of birds if known course of flight and altitude Do this for at least 15 minutes after receipt of such information from pilots or from adjacent facilities unless visual observation or subsequent reports reveal the activity is no longer a factor
EXAMPLEminus ldquoFlock of geese one orsquoclock seven miles northbound last reported at four thousandrdquo ldquoFlock of small birds southbound along Mohawk River last reported at three thousandrdquo ldquoNumerous flocks of ducks vicinity Lake Winnebago altitude unknownrdquo
b Relay bird activity information to adjacent facilities and to FSSs whenever it appears it will become a factor in their areas
2minus1minus24 TRANSFER OF POSITION RESPONSIBILITY
The transfer of position responsibility must be accomplished in accordance with the ldquoStandard Operating Practice (SOP) for the Transfer of Position
General 2minus1minus12
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
Responsibilityrdquo and appropriate facility directives each time operational responsibility for a position is transferred from one specialist to another
2minus1minus25 WHEELS DOWN CHECK
USAUSN
Remind aircraft to check wheels down on each approach unless the pilot has previously reported wheels down for that approach
NOTEminus The intent is solely to remind the pilot to lower the wheels not to place responsibility on the controller
a Tower must issue the wheels down check at an appropriate place in the pattern
PHRASEOLOGYminus CHECK WHEELS DOWN
b Approacharrival control GCA must issue the wheels down check as follows
1 To aircraft conducting ASR PAR or radar monitored approaches before the aircraft starts descent on final approach
2 To aircraft conducting instrument approaches and remaining on the radar facilityrsquos frequency before the aircraft passes the outer markerfinal approach fix
PHRASEOLOGYminus WHEELS SHOULD BE DOWN
2minus1minus26 SUPERVISORY NOTIFICATION
Ensure supervisorcontroller-in-charge (CIC) is aware of conditions which impact sectorposition operations including but not limited to the following
a Weather
b Equipment status
c Potential sector overload
d Emergency situations
e Special flightsoperations
f Possible suspicious aircraftpilot activity as prescribed in FAA Order JO 76104 paragraph 7minus3minus1
2minus1minus27 PILOT DEVIATION NOTIFICATION
When it appears that the actions of a pilot constitute a pilot deviation notify the pilot workload permitting
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Identification) POSSIBLE PILOT DEVIATION ADVISE YOU CONTACT (facility) AT (telephone number)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 802016 Air Traffic Organization Aircraft Accident and Aircraft Incident Notification Investigation and Reporting Chapter 11 Para 3 Air Traffic Facility Responsibilities
2minus1minus28 TCAS RESOLUTION ADVISORIES
a When an aircraft under your control jurisdiction informs you that it is responding to a TCAS Resolution Advisory (RA) do not issue control instructions that are contrary to the RA procedure that a crew member has advised you that they are executing Provide safety alerts regarding terrain or obstructions and traffic advisories for the aircraft responding to the RA and all other aircraft under your control jurisdiction as appropriate
b Unless advised by other aircraft that they are also responding to a TCAS RA do not assume that other aircraft in the proximity of the responding aircraft are involved in the RA maneuver or are aware of the responding aircraftrsquos intended maneuvers Continue to provide control instructions safety alerts and traffic advisories as appropriate to such aircraft
NOTEminus When notified by the pilot of an RA the controller is not prohibited from issuing traffic advisories and safety alerts
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus6 Safety Alert FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus21 Traffic Advisories
c Once the responding aircraft has begun a maneuver in response to an RA the controller is not responsible for providing approved separation between the aircraft that is responding to an RA and any other aircraft airspace terrain or obstructions Responsibility for approved separation resumes when one of the following conditions are met
1 The responding aircraft has returned to its assigned altitude or
2 A crew member informs you that the TCAS maneuver is completed and you observe that approved separation has been reestablished or
General 2minus1minus13
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
3 The responding aircraft has executed an alternate clearance and you observe that approved separation has been reestablished
NOTEminus 1 AC 120minus55 Air Carrier Operational Approval and Use of TCAS II suggests pilots use the following phraseology to notify controllers during TCAS events When a TCAS RA may affect an ATC clearance inform ATC when beginning the maneuver or as soon as workload permits
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoNew York Center United 321 TCAS RArdquo
NOTEminus 2 When the RA has been resolved the flight crew should advise ATC they are returning to their previously assigned clearance or subsequent amended clearance
EXAMPLEminus 2 ldquoNew York Center United 321 clear of conflict returning to assigned altituderdquo
2minus1minus29 RVSM OPERATIONS
Controller responsibilities must include but not be limited to the following
a NonminusRVSM aircraft operating in RVSM airspace
1 Ensure non-RVSM aircraft are not permitted in RVSM airspace unless they meet the criteria of excepted aircraft and are previously approved by the operations supervisorCIC The following aircraft are excepted DOD DOD-certified aircraft operated by NASA (T38 F15 F18 WB57 S3 and U2 aircraft only) MEDEVAC manufacturer aircraft being flown for developmentcertification and Foreign State aircraft These exceptions are accommodated on a workload or traffic-permitting basis
NOTEminus The operations supervisorCIC is responsible for system acceptance of a nonminusRVSM aircraft beyond the initial sectorminustominussector coordination following the pilot request to access the airspace Operations supervisorCIC responsibilities are defined in FAA Order JO 72103 Chapter 6 Section 9 Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM)
2 Ensure sectorminustominussector coordination for all nonminusRVSM aircraft operations within RVSM airspace
3 Inform the operational supervisorCIC when a nonminusRVSM exception flight is denied clearance into RVSM airspace or is removed from RVSM airspace
b NonminusRVSM aircraft transitioning RVSM air-space
Ensure that operations supervisorsCICs are made aware when nonminusRVSM aircraft are transitioning through RVSM airspace
c Apply appropriate separation standards and remove any aircraft from RVSM airspace that advises it is unable RVSM due to equipment while en route
d Use ldquonegative RVSMrdquo in all verbal groundminustominus ground communications involving nonminusRVSM aircraft while cleared to operate within RVSM airspace
EXAMPLEminus ldquoPoint out Baxter1 climbing to FL 360 negative RVSMrdquo
e For the following situations use the associated phraseology
1 To deny clearance into RVSM airspace
PHRASEOLOGYminus ldquoUNABLE CLEARANCE INTO RVSM AIRSPACErdquo
2 To request a pilot to report when able to resume RVSM
PHRASEOLOGYminus ldquoREPORT ABLE TO RESUME RVSMrdquo
f In the event of a change to an aircraftrsquos RVSM eligibility amend the RVSM qualifier (ldquoWrdquo) in the ICAO equipment string in order to properly identify nonminusRVSM aircraft on the controller display
NOTEminus Changing the equipment suffix instead of amending the equipment string may result in incorrect revisions to other ICAO qualifiers REFERENCEminus AIM Para 5minus1minus9 International Flight Plan (FAA Form 7233minus4) IFR Flights (For Domestic or International Flights) AIM TBL 5minus1minus4 Aircraft COM NAV and Approach Equipment Qualifiers
g ATC may allow aircraft to remain in RVSM airspace using reduced vertical separation minima after the loss of a transponder or Mode C altitude reporting
NOTEminus In a transponder out situation the aircraftrsquos altitudeminuskeep-ing capabilities required for flight in RVSM airspace should remain operational REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus5minus1 Vertical Separation Minima FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus3minus8 Aircraft Equipment Suffix 14 CFR Section 91215 ATC Transponder and Altitude Reporting Equipment and Use Advisory Circular AC 91minus85B Authorization of Aircraft and
General 2minus1minus14
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
Operators for Flight in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) Airspace
2minus1minus30 TERRAIN AWARENESS WARNING SYSTEM (TAWS) ALERTS
a When an aircraft under your control jurisdiction informs you that it is responding to a TAWS (or other onminusboard low altitude) alert do not issue control instructions that are contrary to the TAWS procedure that a crew member has advised you that they are executing Provide safety alerts regarding terrain or obstructions and traffic advisories for the aircraft responding to the TAWS alert and all other aircraft under your control jurisdiction as appropriate
b Once the responding aircraft has begun a maneuver in response to TAWS alert the controller is not responsible for providing approved separation between the aircraft that is responding to a TAWS alert and any other aircraft airspace terrain or
obstructions Responsibility for approved separation resumes when one of the following conditions are met
1 The responding aircraft has returned to its assigned altitude or
2 A crew member informs you that the TAWS maneuver is completed and you observe that approved separation has been reestablished or
3 The responding aircraft has executed an alternate clearance and you observe that approved separation has been reestablished
2minus1minus31 ldquoBLUE LIGHTNINGrdquo EVENTS
Ensure that the supervisorcontrollerminusinminuscharge (CIC) is notified of reports of possible human trafficking These may be referred to as ldquoBlue Lightningrdquo events
General 2minus1minus15
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 2 Flight Plans and Control Information
2minus2minus1 RECORDING INFORMATION
a Record flight plan information required by the type of flight plan and existing circ*mstances Use authorized abbreviations when possible
NOTEminus Generally all military overseas flights are required to clear through a specified military base operations office (BASOPS) Pilots normally will not file flight plans directly with an FAA facility unless a BASOPS is not available BASOPS will in turn forward the IFR flight notification message to the appropriate center
b EN ROUTE When flight plans are filed directly with the center record all items given by the pilot either on a flight progress stripflight data entry or on a voice recorder If the latter enter in box 26 of the initial flight progress strip the sector or position number to identify where the information may be found in the event search and rescue (SAR) activities become necessary
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus3minus2 En Route Data Entries
2minus2minus2 FORWARDING INFORMATION
a Except during EAS FDP operation forward the flight plan information to the appropriate ATC facility FSS or BASOPS and record the time of filing and delivery on the form
b EN ROUTE During EAS FDP operation the above manual actions are required in cases where the data is not forwarded automatically by the computer
NOTEminus During EAS FDP operation data is exchanged between interfaced automated facilities and both the data and time of transmission are recorded automatically
c EN ROUTE Forward proposed tower en route flight plans and any related amendments to the appropriate departure terminal facility
2minus2minus3 FORWARDING VFR DATA
TERMINAL
Forward aircraft departure times to FSSs or military operations offices when they have requested them Forward other VFR flight plan data only if requested by the pilot
2minus2minus4 MILITARY DVFR DEPARTURES
TERMINAL
Forward departure times on all DVFR departures from joint-use airports to the military operations office
NOTEminus 1 Details for handling air carrier and nonscheduled civil DVFR flight data are contained in FAA Order JO 76104 Special Operations
2 Civil pilots departing DVFR from a joint-use airport will include the phrase ldquoDVFR to (destination)rdquo in their initial call-up to an FAA-operated tower
2minus2minus5 IFR TO VFR FLIGHT PLAN CHANGE
Request a pilot to contact the appropriate FSS if the pilot informs you of a desire to change from an IFR to a VFR flight plan
2minus2minus6 IFR FLIGHT PROGRESS DATA
Forward control information from controller to controller within a facility then to the receiving facility as the aircraft progresses along its route Where appropriate use computer equipment in lieu of manual coordination procedures Do not use the remarks section of flight progress strips in lieu of voice coordination to pass control information Ensure that flight plan and control information is correct and up-to-date When covered by a letter of agreementfacility directive the time requirements of subpara a may be reduced and the time requirements of subpara b1 and para 2minus2minus11 Forwarding Amended and UTM Data subpara a may be increased up to 15 minutes when facilitated by automated systems or mandatory radar handoffs or if operationally necessary because of manual data processing or nonradar operations the time require-ments of subpara a may be increased
NOTEminus 1 The procedures for preparing flight plan and control information related to altitude reservations (ALTRVs) are contained in FAA Order JO 72103 para 8minus1minus2 Facility Operation and Administration ALTRV Flight Data Processing Development of the methods for assuring the accuracy and completeness of ALTRV flight plan and control information is the responsibility of the military liaison and security officer
Flight Plans and Control Information 2minus2minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
2 The term facility in this paragraph refers to centers and terminal facilities when operating in an en route capacity
a Forward the following information at least 15 minutes before the aircraft is estimated to enter the receiving facilityrsquos area
1 Aircraft identification
2 Number of aircraft if more than one heavy aircraft indicator ldquoHrdquo if appropriate type of aircraft and aircraft equipment suffix
3 Assigned altitude and ETA over last reporting pointfix in transferring facilityrsquos area or assumed departure time when the departure point is the last pointfix in the transferring facilityrsquos area
4 Altitude at which aircraft will enter the receiving facilityrsquos area if other than the assigned altitude
5 True airspeed
6 Point of departure
7 Route of flight remaining
8 Destination airport and clearance limit if other than destination airport
9 ETA at destination airport (not required for military or scheduled air carrier aircraft)
10 Altitude requested by the aircraft if assigned altitude differs from requested altitude (within a facility only)
NOTEminus When an aircraft has crossed one facilityrsquos area and assignment at a different altitude is still desired the pilot will reinitiate the request with the next facility
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus5minus8 Anticipated Altitude Changes
11 When flight plan data must be forwarded manually and an aircraft has been assigned a beacon code by the computer include the code as part of the flight plan
NOTEminus When an IFR aircraft or a VFR aircraft that has been assigned a beacon code by the EAS and whose flight plan will terminate in another facilityrsquos area cancels ATC service or does not activate the flight plan send a remove strips (RS) message on that aircraft via the EAS keyboard the FDIO keyboard or call via service F
12 Longitudinal separation being used in nonminusradar operations between aircraft at the same
altitude if it results in these aircraft having less than 10 minutes separation at the facilitiesrsquo boundary unless (otherwise) specified in a Letter of Agreement (LOA)
13 Any additional nonroutine operational information pertinent to flight safety
NOTEminus EN ROUTE This includes alerting the receiving controller that the flight is conducting celestial navigation training
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus2 Celestial Navigation Training
b Forward position report over last reporting point in the transferring facilityrsquos area if any of the following conditions exist
1 Time differs more than 3 minutes from estimate given
2 Requested by receiving facility
3 Agreed to between facilities
2minus2minus7 MANUAL INPUT OF COMPUTER-ASSIGNED BEACON CODES
When a flight plan is manually entered into the computer and a computer-assigned beacon code has been forwarded with the flight plan data insert the beacon code in the appropriate field as part of the input message
2minus2minus8 ALTRV INFORMATION
EN ROUTE
When an aircraft is a part of an approved ALTRV forward only those items necessary to properly identify the flight update flight data contained in the ALTRV APVL or revise previously given information
2minus2minus9 COMPUTER MESSAGE VERIFICATION
EN ROUTE
Unless your facility is equipped to automatically obtain acknowledgment of receipt of transferred data when you transfer control information by computer message obtain via Service F acknowledgment that the receiving center has received the message and verification of the following
2minus2minus2 Flight Plans and Control Information
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
a Within the time limits specified by a letter of agreement or when not covered by a letter of agreement at least 15 minutes before the aircraft is estimated to enter the receiving facilityrsquos area or at the time of a radar handoff or coordination for transfer of control
1 Aircraft identification
2 Assigned altitude
3 Departure or coordination fix time
b Any cancellation of IFR or EAS generated VFR flight plan
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus2minus6 IFR Flight Progress Data
2minus2minus10 TRANSMIT PROPOSED FLIGHT PLAN
EN ROUTE
a Transmit proposed flight plans which fall within an ARTCCrsquos Proposed Boundary Crossing Time (PBCT) parameter to adjacent ARTCCrsquos via the Computer B network during hours of inter-center computer operation In addition when the route of flight of any proposed flight plan exceeds 20 ele-ments external to the originating ARTCCrsquos area NADIN must be used to forward the data to all affected centers
b During nonautomated operation the proposed flight plans must be sent via NADIN to the other centers involved when any of the following conditions are met
1 The route of flight external to the originating centerrsquos area consists of 10 or more elements and the flight will enter 3 or more other center areas
NOTEminus An element is defined as either a fix or route as specified in FAA Order JO 711010 Flight Services para 5minus3minus3 IFR Flight Plan Control Messages
2 The route of flight beyond the first point of exit from the originating centerrsquos area consists of 10 or more elements which are primarily fixes described in fix-radial-distance or latitudelongitude format regardless of the number of other center areas entered
3 The flight plan remarks are too lengthy for interphone transmission
2minus2minus11 FORWARDING AMENDED AND UTM DATA
a Forward any amending data concerning previ-ously forwarded flight plans except that revisions to ETA information in Paragraph 2minus2minus6 IFR Flight Progress Data need only be forwarded when the time differs by more than 3 minutes from the estimate given
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Identification) REVISED (revised information)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAmerican Two revised flight level three three zerordquo
ldquoUnited Eight Ten revised estimate Front Royal two zero zero fiverdquo
ldquoDouglas Five Zero One Romeo revised altitude eight thousandrdquo
ldquoUS Air Eleven Fiftyminusone revised type heavy Boeing Seven Sixty-sevenrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus2minus6 IFR Flight Progress Data
b Computer acceptance of an appropriate input message fulfills the requirement for sending amended data During EAS FDP operations the amendment data are considered acknowledged on receipt of a computer update message or a computerminusgenerated flight progress strip containing the amended data
NOTEminus 1 The successful utilization of automation equipment requires timely and accurate insertion of changes andor new data
2 If a pilot is not issued a computer-generated ADRADARAAR and if amendment data is not entered into the computer the next controller will have incorrect route information
c Forward any amended control information and record the action on the appropriate flight progress strip Additionally when a route or altitude in a previously issued clearance is amended within 30 minutes of an aircraftrsquos proposed departure time the facility that amended the clearance must coordinate the amendment with the receiving facility via verbal AND automated means to ensure timely passage of the information If the automated means of coordination are unavailable then verbal coordina-tion is sufficient
Flight Plans and Control Information 2minus2minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
NOTEminus The term ldquoreceivingrdquo facility means the ATC facility that is expected to transmit the amended clearance to the intended aircraftpilot
d EN ROUTE Effect manual coordination on any interfacility flight plan data that is not passed through automated means
e EN ROUTE When a controller receives a UTM notification to an FDIO only facility they must effect manual coordination for the flight plan data In addition the controller must verify the flight plan data to the receiving facility within three minutes of the transfer of control point estimate
NOTEminus FDIO only facilities are facilities with FDIO but without STARS
2minus2minus12 AIRBORNE MILITARY FLIGHTS
Forward to FSSs the following information received from airborne military aircraft
a IFR flight plans and changes from VFR to IFR flight plans
b Changes to an IFR flight plan as follows
1 Change in destination
(a) Aircraft identification and type
(b) Departure point
(c) Original destination
(d) Position and time
(e) New destination
(f) ETA
(g) Remarks including change in fuel exhaus-tion time
(h) Revised ETA
2 Change in fuel exhaustion time
NOTEminus This makes current information available to FSSs for relay to military bases concerned and for use by centers in the event of twominusway radio communications failure
2minus2minus13 FORWARDING FLIGHT PLAN DATA BETWEEN US ARTCCs AND CANADIAN ACCs
EN ROUTE
a Domestic (Continental USCanadian airspace except Alaska) Proposed departure flight plans and en route estimates will be handled on a 30 minute lead time (or as bilaterally agreed) between any ACC and ARTCC
b International Any route changes (except SIDs) must be forwarded to the appropriate OceanicPre-oceanic ACC or ARTCC with an optimum lead time of 30 minutes or as soon as this information becomes available
c Initially if a flight goes from US airspace into Canadian airspace and returns to US airspace the ACC will be responsible for forwarding the flight plan data to the appropriate ARTCC by voice transmission except for flights which traverse mutually agreed on airwaysfixes These airways fixes will be determined on a case-by-case basis and will be based on time and distance considerations at the service area office
2minus2minus14 TELETYPE FLIGHT DATA FORMATminus US ARTCCs minus CANADIAN ACCs
EN ROUTE
The exchange of flight plan data between Canadian ACCs and US ARTCCs must be made as follows
a The US ARTCCs will transmit flight data to the Canadian ACCs in one of the following formats
1 NADIN II input format as described in the NAS Management Directives (MDs) for
(a) Flight Plan Messages
(1) Active
(2) Proposed
(b) Amendment messages
(c) Cancellation messages
(d) Response Messages to Canadian Input
(1) Acknowledgment messages
(2) Error messages
(3) Rejection messages
2minus2minus4 Flight Plans and Control Information
81519 JO 711065Y
2 Transport Canada (TC) ACC Flight Strip Format Where the data to be printed on the ACC strip form exceeds the strip form field size the NADIN II input format in 1 above will be used Input sequentially fields 1 through 8 in Paragraph 2minus2minus6 IFR Flight Progress Data subpara a
b TCrsquos ACCs will transmit flight data to the FAA ARTCCs in the following format
1 NADIN II input format as described in NAS MDs for
(a) Flight Plan Messages
(1) Active
(2) Proposed
(b) Amendment messages
(c) Cancellation messages
(d) Correction messages
2minus2minus15 NORTH AMERICAN ROUTE PROGRAM (NRP) INFORMATION
a ldquoNRPrdquo must be retained in the remarks section of the flight plan if the aircraft is moved due to weather traffic or other tactical reasons
NOTEminus Every effort should be made to ensure the aircraft is returned to the original filed flight planaltitude as soon as conditions warrant
b If the route of flight is altered due to a pilot request ldquoNRPrdquo must be removed from the remarks section of the flight plan
c ldquoNRPrdquo must not be entered in the remarks section of a flight plan unless prior coordination is accomplished with the ATCSCC or as prescribed by international NRP flight operations procedures
d The en route facility within which an international flight entering the conterminous US requests to participate in the NRP must enter ldquoNRPrdquo in the remarks section of the flight plan
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus4 Operational Priority FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus3minus2 En Route Data Entries FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus5 Route or Altitude Amendments FAA Order JO 72103 Chapter 18 Section 17 North American Route Program
Flight Plans and Control Information 2minus2minus5
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 3 Flight Progress Strips
2minus3minus1 GENERAL
Unless otherwise authorized in a facility directive use flight progress strips to post current data on air traffic and clearances required for control and other air traffic control services To prevent misinterpretation when data is hand printed use standard hand-printed characters En route Flight progress strips must be posted REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 6minus1minus6 Flight Progress Strip Usage
a Maintain only necessary current data and remove the strips from the flight progress boards when no longer required for control purposes To correct update or preplan information
1 Do not erase or overwrite any item Use an ldquoXrdquo to delete a climbdescend and maintain arrow an at or abovebelow symbol a cruise symbol and unwanted altitude information Write the new altitude information immediately adjacent to it and within the same space
2 Do not draw a horizontal line through an altitude being vacated until after the aircraft has
reported or is observed (valid Mode C) leaving the altitude
3 Preplanning may be accomplished in red pencil
b Manually prepared strips must conform to the format of machine-generated strips and manual strip preparation procedures will be modified simultan-eously with the operational implementation of changes in the machine-generated format (See FIG 2minus3minus1)
c Altitude information may be written in thousands of feet provided the procedure is authorized by the facility manager and is defined in a facility directive ie 5000 feet as 5 and 2800 as 28
NOTEminus A slant line crossing through the number zero and underline of the letter ldquosrdquo on handwritten portions of flight progress strips are required only when there is reason to believe the lack of these markings could lead to misunderstanding A slant line crossing through the number zero is required on all weather data
Flight Progress Strips 2minus3minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
FIG 2minus3minus1
Standard Recording of Hand-printed Characters
Hand Printed Typed Typed Hand Printed
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
1
2
3
4
5
N
Q
S S
R
P
O
6
7
8
9
U
2minus3minus2 Flight Progress Strips
81519 JO 711065Y
2minus3minus2 EN ROUTE DATA ENTRIES FIG 2minus3minus2
Flight Progress Strip (7230minus19)
a Information recorded on the flight progress strips (FAA Forms 7230minus19) must be entered in the correspondingly numbered spaces
TBL 2minus3minus1
Block Information Recorded
1 Verification symbol if required
2 Revision number DSRminusNot used
3 Aircraft identification
4 Number of aircraft if more than one heavy aircraft indicator ldquoHrdquo if appropriate type of aircraft and aircraft equipment suffix
5 Filed true airspeed
6 Sector number
7 Computer identification number if required
8 Estimated ground speed
9 Revised ground speed or strip request (SR) originator
10 Strip number DSRminus Strip numberRevision number
11 Previous fix
12 Estimated time over previous fix
13 Revised estimated time over previous fix
Block Information Recorded
14 Actual time over previous fix or actual departure time entered on first fix posting after departure
14a Plus time expressed in minutes from the previous fix to the posted fix
15 Centerminusestimated time over fix (in hours and minutes) or clearance information for departing aircraft
16 Arrows to indicate if aircraft is departing (uarr) or arriving (darr)
17 Pilotminusestimated time over fix
18 Actual time over fix time leaving holding fix arrival time at nonapproach control airport or symbol indicating cancellation of IFR flight plan for arriving aircraft or departure time (actual or assumed)
19 Fix For departing aircraft add proposed departure time
20 Altitude information (in hundreds of feet) or as noted below
NOTEminus Altitude information may be written in thousands of feet provided the procedure is authorized by the facility manager and is defined in a facility directive ie FL 330 as 33 5000 feet as 5 and 2800 as 28
Flight Progress Strips 2minus3minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
Block Information Recorded
20a OPTIONAL USE when voice recorders are operational REQUIRED USE when the voice recorders are not operating and strips are being use at the facility This space is used to record reported RA events The letters RA followed by a climb or descent arrow (if the climb or descent action is reported) and the time (hhmm) the event is reported
21 Next posted fix or coordination fix
22 Pilotrsquos estimated time over next fix
23 Arrows to indicate north (uarr) south (darr) east (rarr) or west (larr) direction of flight if required
24 Requested altitude
NOTEminus Altitude information may be written in thousands of feet provided the procedure is authorized by the facility manager and is defined in a facility directive ie FL 330 as 33 5000 feet as 5 and 2800 as 28
25 Point of origin route as required for control and data relay and destination
Block Information Recorded
26 Pertinent remarks minimum fuel point outradar vectorspeed adjustment information or sectorposition number (when applicable in accordance with para 2minus2minus1 Recording In-formation) or NRP
27 Mode 3A beacon code if applicable
28 Miscellaneous control data (expected further clearance time time cleared for approach etc)
29minus30 Transfer of control data and coordination indicators
b Latitudelongitude coordinates may be used to define waypoints and may be substituted for nonadapted NAVAIDs in space 25 of domestic en route flight progress strips provided it is necessary to accommodate a random RNAV or GNSS route request
c Facility air traffic managers may authorize the optional use of spaces 13 14 14a 22 23 24 and 28 for point out information radar vector information speed adjustment information or transfer of control data
2minus3minus4 Flight Progress Strips
81519 JO 711065Y
2minus3minus3 OCEANIC DATA ENTRIES
FIG 2minus3minus3
a The ATOP system displays information on electronic flight progress strips and in the event of a catastrophic system failure will print flight progress strips with data in the corresponding numbered spaces
TBL 2minus3minus2
Block Information Recorded
1 Mode 3A beacon code if applicable
2 Number of aircraft if more than one and type of aircraft
3 Aircraft identification
4 Reduced separation flags Indicators are available for M minus Mach Number Technique (MNT) R minus Reduced MNT D or 3 minus Distanceminusbased longitudinal separation using 50 NM (D) or 30 NM (3) and Wminus Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) These flags are selectable for aircraft whose flight plans contain the required equipment qualifiers for each separation criteria
5 Controlling sector number
6 Filed airspeed or assigned Mach numberTrue airspeed
7 Reported flight level May contain an indicator for a flight that is climbing (uarr) or descending (darr) Reports from Mode C ADS or position reports are displayed in that order of preference
8 Cleared flight level May contain an indicator for a future conditional altitude ( ) that cannot be displayed
b Standard annotations and abbreviations for Field 22 may be specified by facility directives
Block Information Recorded
9 Requested flight level if applicable
10 Previously reported position
11 Actual time over previously reported position
12 Last reported position
13 Actual time over last reported position
14 Next reporting position
15 Inminusconformance pilotrsquos estimate or controllerminusaccepted pilotrsquos estimate for next reporting position
16 Future reporting position(s)
17 System estimate for future reporting position(s)
18 Departure airport or point of origin
19 Destination airport or filed point of flight termination
20 Indicators Indicators and toggles for displaying or suppressing the display of the route of flight (F) second flight profile (2) radar contact (A) annotations (amp) degraded Required Navigation Performance (RNP indicator R) and clearance restrictions (X)
21 Coordination indicator(s)
22 Annotations
23 Clearance restrictions and conditions (may be multiple lines)
24 Strip number and total number of strips (printed strips only)
Flight Progress Strips 2minus3minus5
JO 711065Y 81519
2minus3minus4 TERMINAL DATA ENTRIES a Arrivals
Information recorded on the flight progress strips (FAA Forms 7230minus71 7230minus72 and 7230minus8) must be entered in the correspondingly numbered spaces
Facility managers can authorize omissions andor optional use of spaces 2A 8A 8B 9A 9B 9C and 10minus18 if no misunderstanding will result These omissions andor optional uses must be specified in a facility directive
FIG 2minus3minus4
TBL 2minus3minus3
Block Information Recorded
1 Aircraft identification
2 Revision number (FDIO locations only)
2A Strip request originator (At FDIO locations this indicates the sector or position that requested a strip be printed)
3 Number of aircraft if more than one heavy aircraft indicator ldquoHrdquo if appropriate type of aircraft and aircraft equipment suffix
4 Computer identification number if required
5 Secondary radar (beacon) code assigned
6 (FDIO Locations) The previous fix will be printed (NonminusFDIO Locations) Use of the inbound airway This function is restricted to facilities where flight data is received via interphone when agreed upon by the center and terminal facilities
7 Coordination fix
8 Estimated time of arrival at the coordination fix or destination airport
8A OPTIONAL USE
Block Information Recorded
8B OPTIONAL USE when voice recorders are operational REQUIRED USE when the voice recorders are not operating and strips are being used at the facility This space is used to record reported RA events when the voice recorders are not operational and strips are being used at the facility The letters RA followed by a climb or descent arrow (if the climb or descent action is reported) and the time (hhmm) the event is reported
9 Altitude (in hundreds of feet) and remarks
NOTEminus Altitude information may be written in thousands of feet provided the procedure is authorized by the facility manager and is defined in a facility directive i e FL 230 as 23 5000 feet as 5 and 2800 as 28
9A Minimum fuel destination airportpoint out radar vectorspeed adjustment information Air traffic managers may authorize in a facility directive the omission of any of these items except minimum fuel if no misunderstanding will result
NOTEminus Authorized omissions and optional use of spaces must be specified in the facility directive concerning strip marking procedures
9B OPTIONAL USE 9C OPTIONAL USE 10minus18 Enter data as specified by a facility directive
Radar facility personnel need not enter data in these spaces except when nonradar procedures are used or when radio recording equipment is inoperative
2minus3minus6 Flight Progress Strips
81519 JO 711065Y
b Departures Facility managers can authorize omissions andor optional use of spaces 2A 8A 8B 9A 9B 9C and
Information recorded on the flight progress strips 10minus18 if no misunderstanding will result These (FAA Forms 7230minus71 7230minus72 and 7230minus8) shall omissions andor optional uses shall be specified in a be entered in the correspondingly numbered spaces facility directive
FIG 2minus3minus5
TBL 2minus3minus4
Block Information Recorded
1 Aircraft identification
2 Revision number (FDIO locations only)
2A Strip request originator (At FDIO locations this indicates the sector or position that requested a strip be printed)
3 Number of aircraft if more than one heavy aircraft indicator ldquoHrdquo if appropriate type of aircraft and aircraft equipment suffix
4 Computer identification number if required
5 Secondary radar (beacon) code assigned
6 Proposed departure time
7 Requested altitude
NOTEminus Altitude information may be written in thousands of feet provided the procedure is authorized by the facility manager and is defined in a facility directive i e FL 230 as 23 5000 feet as 5 and 2800 as 28
8 Departure airport
8A OPTIONAL USE
Block Information Recorded
8B OPTIONAL USE when voice recorders are operational REQUIRED USE when the voice recorders are not operating and strips are being used at the facility This space is used to record reported RA events when the voice recorders are not operational and strips are being used at the facility The letters RA followed by a climb or descent arrow (if the climb or descent action is reported) and the time (hhmm) the event is reported
9 Computerminusgenerated Route destination and remarks Manually enter altitudealtitude restrictions in the order flown if appropriate and remarks
9 Handminusprepared Clearance limit route altitudealtitude restrictions in the order flown if appropriate and remarks
NOTEminus Altitude information may be written in thousands of feet provided the procedure is authorized by the facility manager and is defined in a facility directive ie FL 230 as 23 5000 feet as 5 and 2800 as 28
9A OPTIONAL USE 9B OPTIONAL USE 9C OPTIONAL USE 10minus18 Enter data as specified by a facility directive
Items such as departure time runway used for takeoff check marks to indicate information forwarded or relayed may be entered in these spaces
Flight Progress Strips 2minus3minus7
JO 711065Y 81519
c Overflights Facility managers can authorize omissions andor optional use of spaces 2A 8A 8B 9A 9B 9C and
Information recorded on the flight progress strips 10minus18 if no misunderstanding will result These (FAA Forms 7230minus71 7230minus72 and 7230minus8) shall omissions andor optional uses shall be specified in a be entered in the correspondingly numbered spaces facility directive
FIG 2minus3minus6
TBL 2minus3minus5
Block Information Recorded
1 Aircraft identification
2 Revision number (FDIO locations only)
2A Strip request originator (At FDIO locations this indicates the sector or position that requested a strip be printed)
3 Number of aircraft if more than one heavy aircraft indicator ldquoHrdquo if appropriate type of aircraft and aircraft equipment suffix
4 Computer identification number if required
5 Secondary radar (beacon) code assigned
6 Coordination fix
7 Overflight coordination indicator (FDIO locations only)
NOTEminus The overflight coordination indicator identifies the facility to which flight data has been forwarded
8 Estimated time of arrival at the coordination fix
8A OPTIONAL USE
Block Information Recorded
8B OPTIONAL USE when voice recorders are operational REQUIRED USE when the voice recorders are not operating and strips are being used at the facility This space is used to record reported RA events when the voice recorders are not operational and strips are being used at the facility The letters RA followed by a climb or descent arrow (if the climb or descent action is reported) and the time (hhmm) the event is reported
9 Altitude and route of flight through the terminal area
NOTEminus Altitude information may be written in thousands of feet provided the procedure is authorized by the facility manager and is defined in a facility directive ie FL 230 as 23 5000 feet as 5 and 2800 as 28
9A OPTIONAL USE 9B OPTIONAL USE 9C OPTIONAL USE 10minus18 Enter data as specified by a facility directive
NOTEminus National standardization of items (10 through 18) is not practical because of regional and local variations in operating methods eg single fix multiple fix radar tower en route control etc
2minus3minus8 Flight Progress Strips
81519 JO 711065Y
d Air traffic managers at automated terminal radar facilities may waive the requirement to use flight progress strips provided
1 Backup systems such as multiple radar sitessystems or single site radars with CENRAP are utilized
2 Local procedures are documented in a facility directive These procedures should include but not be limited to
(a) Departure areas andor procedures
(b) Arrival procedures
(c) Overflight handling procedures
(d) Transition from radar to nonradar
(e) Transition from ARTS to nonminusARTS
(f) Transition from ASR to CENRAP
(g) Transition to or from ESL
3 No misunderstanding will occur as a result of no strip usage
4 Unused flight progress strips facility de-veloped forms andor blank notepads shall be provided for controller use
5 Facilities shall revert to flight progress strip usage if backup systems referred to in subpara d1 are not available
e Air traffic managers at FDIO locations may authorize reduced lateral spacing between fields so as to print all FDIO data to the left of the strip perforation When using FAA Form 7230minus72 all items will retain the same relationship to each other as they do when the full length strip (FAA Form 7230minus71) is used
2minus3minus5 AIRCRAFT IDENTITY
Indicate aircraft identity by one of the following using combinations not to exceed seven alphanumer-ic characters
a Civil aircraft including the air-carrier letter-di-git registration number which can include the letter ldquoTrdquo for air taxi the letter ldquoLrdquo for MEDEVAC or the 3-letter company designator specified in FAA Order JO 73402 Contractions followed by the trip or flight number Use the operating air carrierrsquos company name in identifying equipment interchange flights
EXAMPLEminus ldquoN12345rdquo ldquoTN5552Qrdquo ldquoAAl192rdquo ldquoLN751Brdquo
NOTEminus The letter ldquoLrdquo is not to be used for air carrierair taxi MEDEVAC aircraft
b Military Aircraft
1 Prefixes indicating branch of service andor type of mission followed by the last 5 digits of the serial number (the last 4 digits for CFC and CTG) (See TBL 2minus3minus6 and TBL 2minus3minus7)
2 Pronounceable words of 3 4 5 and 6 letters followed by a 4minus 3minus 2minus or 1minusdigit number
EXAMPLEminus ldquoSAMP Three One Sixrdquo
3 Assigned double-letter 2minusdigit flight number
4 Navy or Marine fleet and training command aircraft one of the following
(a) The service prefix and 2 letters (use phonetic alphabet equivalent) followed by 2 or 3 digits
TBL 2minus3minus6
Branch of Service Prefix
Prefix Branch
A US Air Force
C US Coast Guard
G Air or Army National Guard
R US Army
VM US Marine Corps
VV US Navy
CFC Canadian Forces
CTG Canadian Coast Guard
TBL 2minus3minus7
Military Mission Prefix
Prefix Mission
E Medical Air Evacuation
F Flight Check
L LOGAIR (USAF Contract)
RCH AMC (Air Mobility Command)
S Special Air Mission
(b) The service prefix and a digit and a letter (use phonetic alphabet equivalent) followed by 2 or 3 digits
Flight Progress Strips 2minus3minus9
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
5 Aircraft carrying the President Vice President andor their family members will use the identifiers in the following tables See TBL 2minus3minus8 and TBL 2minus3minus9
TBL 2minus3minus8
President and Family
Service President Family
Air Force AF1 EXEC1F
Marine VM1 EXEC1F
Navy VV1 EXEC1F
Army RR1 EXEC1F
Coast Guard C1 EXEC1F
Guard G1 EXEC1F
Commercial EXEC1 EXEC1F
TBL 2minus3minus9
Vice President and Family
Service Vice President Family
Air Force AF2 EXEC2F
Marine VM2 EXEC2F
Navy VV2 EXEC2F
Army RR2 EXEC2F
Coast Guard C2 EXEC2F
Guard G2 EXEC2F
Commercial EXEC2 EXEC2F
c Special-use Approved special-use identifiers
2minus3minus6 AIRCRAFT TYPE
Use the approved aircraft type designator in accordance with FAA Order 73601 Aircraft Type Designators
2minus3minus7 USAFUSN UNDERGRADUATE PILOTS
To identify aircraft piloted by solo USAFUSN undergraduate student pilots (who may occasionally request revised clearances because they normally are restricted to flight in VFR conditions) the aircraft identification in the flight plan shall include the letter ldquoZrdquo as a suffix Do not use this suffix however in ground-to-air communication
NOTEminus USAF solo students who have passed an instrument certification check may penetrate cloud layers in climb or descent only Requests for revised clearances to avoid clouds in level flight can still be expected This does not
change the requirement to use the letter ldquoZrdquo as a suffix to the aircraft identification REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus20 Aircraft Identification FAA Order JO 76104 Chapter 12 Section 10 USAF Undergraduate Flying Training (UFT)Pilot Instructor Training (PIT)Introduction To Fighter Fundamentals
2minus3minus8 AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT SUFFIX
a The aircraft equipment suffix identifying communication navigation and surveillance (CNS) capability is generated by automation using the equipment codes of the ICAO flight plan To change a suffix the CNS equipment codes must be modified allowing automation to translate them into the proper suffix If using unsupported automation platforms (OFDPS and FDP2000) verbally coordinate changes with adjacent supported facilities
b ERAM and ATOP are best suited for making changes to the equipment codes in an ICAO flight plan For FDIO entries if uncertain of the proper format to correctly amend an equipment code verbally coordinate the change with the appropriate en route facility NOTEminus Directly changing the equipment suffix with a symbol preceded by a slant instead of amending the aircraft equipment codes may unintentionally alter or delete other equipment codes
c For VFR operations indicate the aircraftrsquos transponder and navigation capabilities by adding the appropriate symbol preceded by a slant (See TBL 2minus3minus10)
d GNSS-equipped aircraft
1 Have an equipment suffix of G L S or V
2 May be determined by executing an ICAO flight plan readout and verifying a filed ldquoGrdquo in the ICAO equipment list
3 May be determined by verifying with the pilot that the aircraft is GNSS-equipped
e When forwarding this information state the aircraft type followed by the word ldquoslantrdquo and the appropriate phonetic letter equivalent of the suffix EXAMPLEminus ldquoCessna Threeminusten slant Tangordquo ldquoAminusTen slant Novemberrdquo ldquoFminusSixteen slant Papardquo ldquoSevenminussixtyminusseven slant Golfrdquo
NOTEminus H and O are intended for ATC use only These suffixes are not published in the Aeronautical Information Manual
2minus3minus10 Flight Progress Strips
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
2minus3minus9 CLEARANCE STATUS holding instructions have been included in the aircraftrsquos original clearance Show detailed holding
Use an appropriate clearance symbol followed by a information following the dash when holding differs dash (minus) and other pertinent information to clearly from the established pattern for the fix ie turns leg show the clearance status of an aircraft To indicate lengths etc delay status use
b The symbols ldquoFrdquo or ldquoOrdquo to indicate the a The symbol ldquoHrdquo at the clearance limit when clearance limit when a delay is not anticipated
TBL 2minus3minus10
Aircraft Equipment Suffixes
Separation Standard
Navigation Capability Transponder Capability Suffix
RVSM
Any Failed transponder H
Any Failed Mode C O
No RNAV No GNSS Transponder with Mode C W
RNAV No GNSS Transponder with Mode C Z
GNSS Transponder with Mode C L
NonminusRVSM
No DME No transponder X
Transponder no Mode C T Transponder with Mode C U
DME No transponder D
Transponder no Mode C B Transponder with Mode C A
TACAN No transponder M
Transponder no Mode C N Transponder with Mode C P
RNAV
No GNSS
No transponder Y Transponder no Mode C C
Transponder with Mode C I
GNSS No transponder V
Transponder no Mode C S Transponder with Mode C G
Flight Progress Strips 2minus3minus11
JO 711065Y 81519
2minus3minus10 CONTROL SYMBOLOGY TBL 2minus3minus12
Miscellaneous Abbreviations Use authorized control and clearance symbols or abbreviations for recording clearances reports and instructions Control status of aircraft must always be current You may use
a Plain language markings when it will aid in understanding information
b Locally approved identifiers Use these only within your facility and not on teletypewriter or interphone circuits
c Plain sheets of paper or locally prepared forms to record information when flight progress strips are not used (See TBL 2minus3minus11 and TBL 2minus3minus12)
d Control Information Symbols (See FIG 2minus3minus7 and FIG 2minus3minus8) REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus5minus3 Exceptions
TBL 2minus3minus11
Clearance Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
A Cleared to airport (point of intended landing)
B Center clearance delivered
C ATC clears (when clearance relayed through nonminusATC facility)
CAF Cleared as filed
D Cleared to depart from the fix
F Cleared to the fix
H Cleared to hold and instructions issued
L Cleared to land
N Clearance not delivered
O Cleared to the outer marker
PD Cleared to climbdescend at pilotrsquos discretion
Q Cleared to fly specified sectors of a NAVAID defined in terms of courses bearings radials or quadrants within a designated radius
T Cleared through (for landing and takeoff through intermediate point)
V Cleared over the fix
X Cleared to cross (airway route radial) at (point)
Z Tower jurisdiction
Abbreviation Meaning
BC Back course approach
CT Contact approach
FA Final approach
FMS Flight management system approach
GPS GPS approach
I Initial approach
ILS ILS approach
MA Missed approach
NDB Nondirectional radio beacon approach
OTP VFR conditionsminusonminustop
PA Precision approach
PT Procedure turn
RA Resolution advisory (Pilot reported TCAS event)
RH Runway heading
RNAV Area navigation approach
RP Report immediately upon passing (fixaltitude)
RX Report crossing
SA Surveillance approach
SI Straightminusin approach
TA TACAN approach
TL Turn left
TR Turn right
VA Visual approach
VR VOR approach
2minus3minus12 Flight Progress Strips
81519 JO 711065Y
FIG 2minus3minus7
Control Information Symbols [Part 1]
Flight Progress Strips 2minus3minus13
JO 711065Y 81519
FIG 2minus3minus8
Control Information Symbols [Part 2]
2minus3minus14 Flight Progress Strips
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 4 Radio and Interphone Communications
2minus4minus1 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS
Use radio frequencies for the special purposes for which they are intended A single frequency may be used for more than one function except as follows
TERMINAL When combining positions in the tower do not use ground control frequency for airborne communications
NOTEminus Due to the limited number of frequencies assigned to towers for the ground control function it is very likely that airborne use of a ground control frequency could cause interference to other towers or interference to your aircraft from another tower When combining these functions it is recommended combining them on local control The ATIS may be used to specify the desired frequency
2minus4minus2 MONITORING
Monitor interphones and assigned radio frequencies continuously
NOTEminus Although all FAA facilities including RAPCONs and RATCFs are required to monitor all assigned frequencies continuously USAF facilities may not monitor all unpublished discrete frequencies
2minus4minus3 PILOT ACKNOWLEDGMENTREAD BACK
Ensure pilots acknowledge all Air Traffic Clearances and ATC Instructions When a pilot reads back an Air Traffic Clearance or ATC Instruction
a Ensure that items read back are correct
b Ensure the read back of hold short instructions whether a part of taxi instructions or a LAHSO clearance
c Ensure pilots use call signs andor registration numbers in any read back acknowledging an Air Traffic Clearance or ATC Instruction
NOTEminus 1 ATC ClearanceInstruction Read Back guidance for pilots in the AIM states a Although pilots should read back the ldquonumbersrdquo unless otherwise required by procedure or controller request pilots may acknowledge clearances control instructions
or other information by using ldquoWilcordquo ldquoRogerrdquo ldquoAffirmativerdquo or other words or remarks with their aircraft identification
b Altitudes contained in charted procedures such as departure procedures instrument approaches etc need not be read back unless they are specifically stated by the controller
c Initial read back of a taxi departure or landing clearance should include the runway assignment including left right center etc if applicable 2 Until a pilot acknowledges a controllerrsquos clearance or instruction a controller cannot know if a pilot will comply with the clearance or remain as previously cleared
EXAMPLEminus ldquoClimbing to Flight Level three three zero United Twelverdquo or ldquoNovember Five Charlie Tango roger cleared to land runway four leftrdquo
REFERENCEminus PCG Term ndash Air Traffic Clearance PCG Term ndash ATC Instructions FAA Order JO 711065 3minus7minus2 Taxi and Ground Movement Operations FAA Order JO 711065 10minus4minus4 Communications Failure AIM Para 4-2-3 Contact Procedures AIM Para 4-4-7 Pilot Responsibility upon Clearance Issuance AIM Para 6-4-1 Two-way Radio Communications Failure Federal Register April 1 1999 14 CFR Part 91 Pilot Responsibility for Compliance with ATC Clearances and Instructions
2minus4minus4 AUTHORIZED INTERRUPTIONS
As necessary authorize a pilot to interrupt hisher communications guard
NOTEminus Some users have adopted procedures to ensure uninterrup-ted receiving capability with ATC when a pilot with only one operative communications radio must interrupt hisher communications guard because of a safety related problem requiring airborne communications with hisher company In this event pilots will request approval to abandon guard on the assigned ATC frequency for a mutually agreeable time period Additionally they will inform controllers of the NAVAID voice facility and the company frequency they will monitor
2minus4minus5 AUTHORIZED TRANSMISSIONS
Transmit only those messages necessary for air traffic control or otherwise contributing to air safety
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 3minus2minus2 Authorized Messages Not Directly Associated with Air Traffic Services
Radio and Interphone Communications 2minus4minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
2minus4minus6 FALSE OR DECEPTIVE COMMUNICATIONS
Take action to detect prevent and report false deceptive or phantom controller communications to an aircraft or controller The following must be accomplished when false or deceptive communica-tions occur
a Correct false information
b Broadcast an alert to aircraft operating on all frequencies within the area where deceptive or phantom transmissions have been received
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAttention all aircraft False ATC instructions have been received in the area of Long Beach Airport Exercise extreme caution on all frequencies and verify instructionsrdquo
c Collect pertinent information regarding the incident
d Notify the operations supervisor of the false deceptive or phantom transmission and report all relevant information pertaining to the incident
2minus4minus7 AUTHORIZED RELAYS
a Relay operational information to aircraft or aircraft operators as necessary Do not agree to handle such messages on a regular basis Give the source of any such message you relay
b Relay official FAA messages as required
NOTEminus The FAA Administrator and Deputy Administrator will sometimes use code phrases to identify themselves in air-to-ground communications as follows
Administrator ldquoSAFEAIR ONErdquo Deputy Administrator ldquoSAFEAIR TWOrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoMiami Center Jetstar One this is SAFEAIR ONE (message)rdquo
c Relay operational information to military aircraft operating on or planning to operate on IRs
2minus4minus8 RADIO MESSAGE FORMAT
Use the following format for radio communications with an aircraft
a Sectorposition on initial radio contact
1 Identification of aircraft
2 Identification of ATC unit
3 Message (if any)
4 The word ldquooverrdquo if required
b Subsequent radio transmissions from the same sectorposition must use the same format except the identification of the ATC unit may be omitted
TERMINAL You may omit aircraft identification after initial contact when conducting the final portion of a radar approach REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus20 Aircraft Identification
2minus4minus9 ABBREVIATED TRANSMISSIONS
Transmissions may be abbreviated as follows
a Use the identification prefix and the last 3 digits or letters of the aircraft identification after communications have been established with a US civil aircraft using the aircraft registration as identification
b Do not abbreviate
1 Similar sounding aircraft identifications
2 Aircraft call signs including
(a) Aircraft having an International Civil Aviation Organization three letter designator (ICAO 3LD) and other aircraft with an FAA authorized call sign (US special or local)
(b) Aircraft with a military call sign
3 Foreign aircraft using the foreign civil registration number as identification REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus15 Emphasis for Clarity FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus20 Aircraft Identification FAA Order JO 761012 Assignment and Authorization of Call Sign Designators and Associated Telephonies
c Omit the facility identification after communi-cation has been established
d Transmit the message immediately after the callup (without waiting for the aircraftrsquos reply) when the message is short and receipt is generally assured
e Omit the word ldquooverrdquo if the message obviously requires a reply
2minus4minus10 INTERPHONE TRANSMISSION PRIORITIES
Give priority to interphone transmissions as follows
2minus4minus2 Radio and Interphone Communications
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
a First priority Emergency messages including essential information on aircraft accidents or suspected accidents After an actual emergency has passed give a lower priority to messages relating to that accident
b Second priority Clearances and control instructions
c Third priority Movement and control messages using the following order of preference when possible
1 Progress reports
2 Departure or arrival reports
3 Flight plans
d Fourth priority Movement messages on VFR aircraft
2minus4minus11 PRIORITY INTERRUPTION
Use the words ldquoemergencyrdquo or ldquocontrolrdquo for interrupting lower priority messages when you have an emergency or control message to transmit
2minus4minus12 INTERPHONE MESSAGE FORMAT
Use the following format for interphone intrainterfa-cility communications
a Both the caller and receiver identify their facility andor position in a manner that ensures they will not be confused with another position
NOTEminus Other means of identifying a position such as substituting departure or arrival gatefix names for position identifica-tion may be used However it must be operationally beneficial and the procedure fully covered in a letter of agreement or a facility directive as appropriate
EXAMPLEminus Caller ldquoAlbuquerque Center Sixty Three Amarillo Departurerdquo
Receiver ldquoAlbuquerque Centerrdquo
b Between two facilities which utilize numeric position identification the caller must identify both facility and position
EXAMPLEminus Caller ldquoAlbuquerque Sixty Three Fort Worth Eighty Twordquo
c Caller states the type of coordination to be accomplished when advantageous For example handoff or APREQ
d The caller states the message
e The receiver states the response to the callerrsquos message followed by the receiverrsquos operating initials
f The caller states his or her operating initials
EXAMPLEminus 1 Caller ldquoDenver High R Twentyminusfiverdquo
Receiver ldquoDenver Highrdquo
Caller ldquoRequest direct Denver for Northwest Three Twentyminuseightrdquo
Receiver ldquoNorthwest Three Twentyminuseight direct Denver approved HFrdquo
Caller ldquoGMrdquo
2 Receiver ldquoDenver High Go ahead overriderdquo
Caller ldquoR Twentyminusfive Request direct Denver for Northwest Three Twentyminuseightrdquo
Receiver ldquoNorthwest Three Twentyminuseight direct Denver approved HFrdquo
Caller ldquoGMrdquo
3 Caller (ldquoBolosrdquo is a departure gate in Houston ARTCCrsquos Sabine sector)minusldquoBolos Houston localrdquo
Receiver ldquoBolosrdquo
Caller ldquoRequest Flight Level three five zero for American Twentyminusfiverdquo
Receiver ldquoAmerican Twentyminusfive Flight Level three five zero approved ACrdquo
Caller ldquoGMrdquo
4 Caller ldquoSector Twelve Ontario Approach APREQrdquo
Receiver ldquoSector Twelverdquo
Caller ldquoCactus Five fortyminustwo heading one three zero and climbing to one four thousandrdquo
Radio and Interphone Communications 2minus4minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
Receiver ldquoCactus Five fortyminustwo heading one three zero and climbing to one four thousand approved BNrdquo
Caller ldquoAMrdquo
5 Caller ldquoZanesville Columbus seventyminusthree line handoffrdquo
Receiver ldquoZanesvillerdquo
Caller ldquoFive miles east of Appleton VOR United Three Sixtyminussixrdquo
Receiver ldquoUnited Three Sixtyminussix radar contact AZrdquo
Caller ldquoMErdquo
g Identify the interphone voice line on which the call is being made when two or more such lines are collocated at the receiving operating position
EXAMPLEminus ldquoWashington Center Washington Approach on the Fifty Seven linerdquo
ldquoChicago Center OrsquoHare Tower handoff on the Departure West linerdquo
h TERMINAL The provisions of subparas a b c e f g and Paragraph 2minus4minus13 Interphone Message Termination may be omitted provided
1 Abbreviated standard coordination proce-dures are contained in a facility directive describing the specific conditions and positions that may utilize an abbreviated interphone message format and
2 There will be no possibility of misunder-standing which positions are using the abbreviated procedures
2minus4minus13 INTERPHONE MESSAGE TERMINATION
Terminate interphone messages with your operating initials
2minus4minus14 WORDS AND PHRASES
a Use the words or phrases in radiotelephone and interphone communication as contained in the PCG or within areas where Controller Pilot Data Link Communications (CPDLC) is in use the phraseology contained in the applicable CPDLC message set
b The word super must be used as part of the identification in all communications with or about super aircraft
c The word heavy must be used as part of the identification in all communications with or about heavy aircraft
d EN ROUTE The use of the words super or heavy may be omitted except as follows
1 In communications with a terminal facility about super or heavy aircraft operations
2 In communications with or about super or heavy aircraft with regard to an airport where the en route center is providing approach control service
3 In communications with or about super or heavy aircraft when the separation from a following aircraft may become less than 5 miles by approved procedure
4 When issuing traffic advisories
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited FiftyminusEight Heavyrdquo
NOTEminus Most airlines will use the word ldquosuperrdquo or ldquoheavyrdquo following the company prefix and flight number when establishing communications or when changing frequen-cies within a terminal facilityrsquos area
e When in radio communications with ldquoAir Force Onerdquo or ldquoAir Force Twordquo do not add the heavy designator to the call sign State only the call sign ldquoAir Force OneTwordquo regardless of the type aircraft
2minus4minus15 EMPHASIS FOR CLARITY
a Treat aircraft with similar sounding aircraft identifications by emphasizing appropriate digits letters or similar sounding words to aid in distinguishing between similar sounding aircraft identifications Do not abbreviate similar sounding aircraft identifications REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus20 Aircraft Identification FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus9 Abbreviated Transmissions
b Treat aircraft with similar sounding call signs by restating the call sign after the flight number
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Thirtyminusone Unitedrdquo ldquoAmerican Thirtyminusone Americanrdquo
NOTEminus Similar sounding call signs procedures may apply to ICAO 3LD US special local or military call sign
2minus4minus4 Radio and Interphone Communications
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
c Notify each pilot concerned when communicat-ing with aircraft having similar sounding identifications
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Thirtyminusone United Miami Center US Air Thirtyminusone is also on this frequency acknowledgerdquo
ldquoUS Air Thirtyminusone US Air Miami Center United Thirtyminusone is also on this frequency acknowledgerdquo
d Notify the operations supervisorminusinminuscharge of any duplicate call signs or phonetically similarminus sounding call signs when the aircraft are operating simultaneously within the same sector REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 2minus1minus14 Aircraft Identification Problems
2minus4minus16 ICAO PHONETICS
Use the ICAO pronunciation of numbers and individual letters (See the ICAO radiotelephony alphabet and pronunciation in TBL 2minus4minus1)
TBL 2minus4minus1
ICAO Phonetics
Character Word Pronunciation
0 Zero ZEminusRO
1 One WUN
2 Two TOO
3 Three TREE
4 Four FOWminusER
5 Five FIFE
6 Six SIX
7 Seven SEVminusEN
8 Eight AIT
9 Nine NINminusER
A Alfa ALFAH
B Bravo BRAHVOH
C Charlie CHARLEE
D Delta DELLTAH
E Echo ECKOH
F Foxtrot FOKSTROT
G Golf GOLF
H Hotel HOHTELL
I India INDEE AH
J Juliett JEWLEE ETT
K Kilo KEYLOH
L Lima LEEMAH
M Mike MIKE
N November NOVEMBER
O Oscar OSSCAH
P Papa PAHPAH
Q Quebec KEHBECK
R Romeo ROWME OH
S Sierra SEEAIRAH
T Tango TANGGO
U Uniform YOUNEE FORM
V Victor VIKTAH
W Whiskey WISSKEY
X Xminusray ECKSRAY
Y Yankee YANGKEY
Z Zulu ZOOLOO
NOTEminus Syllables to be emphasized in pronunciation are in bold face
2minus4minus17 NUMBERS USAGE
State numbers as follows
a Serial numbers The separate digits
EXAMPLEminus
Number Statement
11495 ldquoOne one four niner fiverdquo
20069 ldquoTwo zero zero six ninerrdquo
b Altitudes or flight levels
1 Altitudes Pronounce each digit in the number of hundreds or thousands followed by the word ldquohundredrdquo or ldquothousandrdquo as appropriate
EXAMPLEminus
Number Statement
10000 ldquoOne zero thousandrdquo
11000 ldquoOne one thousandrdquo
17900 ldquoOne seven thousand niner hundredrdquo
NOTEminus Altitudes may be restated in group form for added clarity if the controller chooses
EXAMPLEminus
Number Statement
10000 ldquoTen thousandrdquo
11000 ldquoEleven thousandrdquo
17900 ldquoSeventeen thousand niner hundredrdquo
Radio and Interphone Communications 2minus4minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
2 Flight levels The words ldquoflight levelrdquo followed by the separate digits of the flight level
EXAMPLEminus
Flight Level Statement
180 ldquoFlight level one eight zerordquo
275 ldquoFlight level two seven fiverdquo
3 MDADH Altitudes The separate digits of the MDADH altitude
EXAMPLEminus
MDADH Altitude Statement
1320 ldquoMinimum descent altitude one three two zerordquo
486 ldquoDecision height four eight sixrdquo
c Time
1 General time information The four separate digits of the hour and minutes in terms of UTC
EXAMPLEminus
UTC Time (12 hour) Statement
0715 115 am CST ldquoZero seven one fiverdquo
1915 115 pm CST ldquoOne niner one fiverdquo
2 Upon request The four separate digits of the hours and minutes in terms of UTC followed by the local standard time equivalent or the local time equivalent only Local time may be based on the 24minushour clock system and the word ldquolocalrdquo or the time zone equivalent must be stated when other than UTC is referenced The term ldquoZULUrdquo may be used to denote UTC
EXAMPLEminus
UTC Time Time Statement (24 hour) (12 hour)
2230 1430 PST 230 pm ldquoTwo two three zero one four three zero Pacific or Localrdquo or ldquoTwominusthirty PminusMrdquo
3 Time check The word ldquotimerdquo followed by the four separate digits of the hour and minutes and nearest quarter minute Fractions of a quarter minute less than eight seconds are stated as the preceding quarter minute fractions of a quarter minute of eight
seconds or more are stated as succeeding quarter minute
EXAMPLEminus
Time Statement
141506 ldquoTime one four one fiverdquo
141510 ldquoTime one four one five and oneminusquarterrdquo
4 Abbreviated time The separate digits of the minutes only
EXAMPLEminus
Time Statement
1415 ldquoOne fiverdquo
1420 ldquoTwo zerordquo
d Field elevation The words ldquofield elevationrdquo followed by the separate digits of the elevation
EXAMPLEminus
Elevation Statement
17 feet ldquoField elevation one sevenrdquo
817 feet ldquoField elevation eight one sevenrdquo
2817 feet ldquoField elevation two eight one sevenrdquo
e The number ldquo0rdquo as ldquozerordquo except where it is used in approved ldquogroup formrdquo for authorized aircraft call signs and in stating altitudes
EXAMPLEminus
As Zero As Group
ldquoField elevation one six zerordquo ldquoHeading three zero zerordquo ldquoOne zero thousand five hundredrdquo
ldquoWestern five thirtyrdquo ldquoEMAIR One Tenrdquo ldquoTen thousand five hundredrdquo
f Altimeter setting The word ldquoaltimeterrdquo fol-lowed by the separate digits of the altimeter setting
EXAMPLEminus
Setting Statement
3001 ldquoAltimeter three zero zero onerdquo
g Surface wind The word ldquowindrdquo followed by the separate digits of the indicated wind direction to the nearest 10minusdegree multiple the word ldquoatrdquo and the separate digits of the indicated velocity in knots to include any gusts
2minus4minus6 Radio and Interphone Communications
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
EXAMPLEminus ldquoWind zero three zero at two fiverdquo ldquoWind two seven zero at one five gusts three fiverdquo
h Heading The word ldquoheadingrdquo followed by the three separate digits of the number of degrees omitting the word ldquodegreesrdquo Use heading 360 degrees to indicate a north heading
EXAMPLEminus
Heading Statement
5 degrees ldquoHeading zero zero fiverdquo
30 degrees ldquoHeading zero three zerordquo
360 degrees ldquoHeading three six zerordquo
i Radar beacon codes The separate digits of the 4minusdigit code
EXAMPLEminus
Code Statement
1000 ldquoOne zero zero zerordquo
2100 ldquoTwo one zero zerordquo
j Runways The word ldquorunwayrdquo followed by the separate digits of the runway designation For a parallel runway state the word ldquoleftrdquo ldquorightrdquo or ldquocenterrdquo if the letter ldquoLrdquo ldquoRrdquo or ldquoCrdquo is included in the designation
EXAMPLEminus
Designation Statement
3 ldquoRunway Threerdquo
8L ldquoRunway Eight Leftrdquo
27R ldquoRunway Two Seven Rightrdquo
k Frequencies
1 The separate digits of the frequency inserting the word ldquopointrdquo where the decimal point occurs
(a) Omit digits after the second digit to the right of the decimal point
(b) When the frequency is in the LMF band include the word ldquokiloHertzrdquo
EXAMPLEminus
Frequency Statement
12655 MHz ldquoOne two six point five fiverdquo
3690 MHz ldquoThree six niner point zerordquo
1215 MHz ldquoOne two one point fiverdquo
135275 MHz ldquoOne three five point two sevenrdquo
302 kHz ldquoThree zero two kiloHertzrdquo
2 USAFUSN Local channelization numbers may be used in lieu of frequencies for locally based aircraft when local procedures are established to ensure that local aircraft and ATC facilities use the same channelization
EXAMPLEminus
Frequency Statement
2758 MHz ldquoLocal channel one sixrdquo
3 Issue TACAN frequencies by stating the assigned two or threeminusdigit channel number
l Speeds
1 The separate digits of the speed followed by ldquoknotsrdquo except as required by Paragraph 5minus7minus2 Methods
EXAMPLEminus
Speed Statement
250 ldquoTwo five zero knotsrdquo
190 ldquoOne niner zero knotsrdquo
2 The separate digits of the Mach number preceded by ldquoMachrdquo
EXAMPLEminus
Mach Number Statement
15 ldquoMach one point fiverdquo
064 ldquoMach point six fourrdquo
07 ldquoMach point sevenrdquo
m Miles The separate digits of the mileage followed by the word ldquomilerdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoThree zero mile arc east of Nottinghamrdquo ldquoTraffic one orsquoclock two five miles northbound DminusC Eight flight level two seven zerordquo
2minus4minus18 NUMBER CLARIFICATION
a If deemed necessary for clarity and after stating numbers as specified in Paragraph 2minus4minus17 Numbers Usage controllers may restate numbers using either group or single-digit form
Radio and Interphone Communications 2minus4minus7
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
EXAMPLEminus ldquoOne Seven Thousand Seventeen Thousandrdquo ldquoAltimeter Two Niner Niner Two Twenty Nine Ninety Twordquo ldquoOne Two Six Point Five Five One Twenty Six Point Fifty Fiverdquo
2minus4minus19 FACILITY IDENTIFICATION
Identify facilities as follows
a Airport traffic control towers State the name of the facility followed by the word ldquotowerrdquo Where military and civil airports are located in the same general area and have similar names state the name of the military service followed by the name of the military facility and the word ldquotowerrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoColumbus Towerrdquo ldquoBarksdale Towerrdquo ldquoNavy Jacksonville Towerrdquo
b Air route traffic control centers State the name of the facility followed by the word ldquocenterrdquo
c Approach control facilities including RAPCONs RATCFs and ARACs State the name of the facility followed by the word ldquoapproachrdquo Where military and civil facilities are located in the same general area and have similar names state the name of the military service followed by the name of the military facility and the word ldquoapproachrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDenver Approachrdquo ldquoGriffiss Approachrdquo ldquoNavy Jacksonville Approachrdquo
d Functions within a terminal facility State the name of the facility followed by the name of the function
EXAMPLEminus ldquoBoston Departurerdquo ldquoLaGuardia Clearance Deliveryrdquo ldquoOrsquoHare Groundrdquo
e When calling or replying on an interphone line which connects only two nonminusVSCS equipped facilities you may omit the facility name
EXAMPLEminus ldquoBradford High Handoffrdquo
f Flight service stations State the name of the station followed by the word ldquoradiordquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoLeesburg Radiordquo
g Radar facilities having ASR or PAR but not providing approach control service State the name of the facility followed by the letters ldquoGminusCminusArdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCorpus Christi GminusCminusArdquo ldquoDavison GminusCminusArdquo
2minus4minus20 AIRCRAFT IDENTIFICATION
Use the full identification in reply to aircraft with similar sounding identifications For other aircraft the same identification may be used in reply that the pilot used in hisher initial callup except use the correct identification after communications have been established Identify aircraft as follows
a US registry aircraft State one of the following REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus8 Radio Message Format FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus9 Abbreviated Transmissions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus15 Emphasis for Clarity FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus17 Numbers Usage
1 Civil State the prefix ldquoNovemberrdquo when establishing initial communications with US registered aircraft followed by the ICAO phonetic pronunciation of the numbersletters of the aircraft registration The controller may state the aircraft type the model the manufacturerrsquos name followed by the ICAO phonetic pronunciation of the numbersletters of the aircraft registration if used by the pilot on the initial or subsequent call
EXAMPLEminus Air traffic controllerrsquos initiated call
ldquoNovember One Two Three Four Golfrdquo ldquoNovember One Two Three Fourrdquo
Responding to pilotrsquos initial or subsequent call
ldquoJet Commander One Two Three Four Papardquo ldquoBonanza One Two Three Four Tangordquo ldquoSikorsky Six Three Eight Mike Foxtrotrdquo
NOTEminus If aircraft identification becomes a problem when the procedures specified above are used see paragraph 2minus4minus15 Emphasis for Clarity
2 Aircraft having an ICAO 3LD and other FAA authorized call sign (US special or local) State the call sign followed by the flight number in group form
NOTEminus ldquoGroup formrdquo is the pronunciation of a series of numbers as the whole number or pairs of numbers they represent rather than pronouncing each separate digit The use of
2minus4minus8 Radio and Interphone Communications
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
group form may however be negated by four-digit identifiers or the placement of zeros in the identifier
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAmerican FiftyminusTwordquo ldquoDelta One Hundredrdquo ldquoEastern Metro One Tenrdquo ldquoGeneral Motors Thirty Fifteenrdquo ldquoUnited One Zero Onerdquo ldquoDelta Zero One Zerordquo ldquoTWA Ten Zero Fourrdquo
NOTEminus For clarity aircraft having an ICAO 3LD and other FAA authorized call sign may be pronounced using single digits if necessary
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Five One Sevenrdquo ldquoUnited Five Seven Zerordquo
NOTEminus For procedures that address similar sounding call signs see paragraph 2minus4minus15 Emphasis for Clarity
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 761012 Assignment and Authorization of Call Sign Designators and Associated Telephonies
3 Air taxi and commercial operators not having FAA authorized call signs State the prefix ldquoTANGOrdquo on initial contact if used by the pilot followed by the registration number The prefix may be dropped in subsequent communications
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTango Mooney Five Five Five Two Quebecrdquo ldquoTango November One Two Three Fourrdquo
4 Air carriertaxi ambulance State the prefix ldquoMEDEVACrdquo if used by the pilot followed by the call sign and flight number in group form
EXAMPLEminus ldquoMEDEVAC Delta Fifty-Onerdquo
5 Civilian air ambulance State the word ldquoMEDEVACrdquo followed by the numbersletters of the registration number
EXAMPLEminus ldquoMEDEVAC Two Six Four Sixrdquo
6 US military State one of the following
(a) The service name followed by the word ldquocopterrdquo when appropriate and the last 5 digits of the serial number
EXAMPLEminus ldquoNavy Five Six Seven One Threerdquo ldquoCoast Guard Six One Three Two Sevenrdquo
ldquoAir Guard One Three Five Eight Sixrdquo ldquoArmy Copter Three Two One Seven Sixrdquo
NOTEminus If aircraft identification becomes a problem the procedures reflected in FAA Order JO 72103 Facility Operation and Administration Paragraph 2minus1minus14 Air-craft Identification Problems will apply
(b) Special military operations State one of the following followed by the last 5 digits of the serial number
(c) Air evacuation flights ldquoAIR EVACrdquo ldquoMARINE AIR EVACrdquo or ldquoNAVY AIR EVACrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAir Evac One Seven Six Five Twordquo
(d) Rescue flights (Service name) ldquoRESCUErdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAir Force Rescue Six One Five Seven Ninerrdquo
(e) Air Mobility Command ldquoREACHrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoReach Seven Eight Five Six Twordquo
(f) Special Air Mission ldquoSAMrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoSam Niner One Five Six Twordquo
(g) USAF Contract Aircraft ldquoLOGAIRrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoLogair Seven Five Eight Two Sixrdquo
(h) Military tactical and training
(1) US Air Force Air National Guard Military District of Washington priority aircraft and USAF civil disturbance aircraft Pronounceable words of 3 to 6 letters followed by a 1 to 5 digit number
EXAMPLEminus ldquoPaul Two Zerordquo ldquoPat One Five Sevenrdquo ldquoGaydog Fourrdquo
NOTEminus When the ldquoZrdquo suffix described in para 2minus3minus7 USAFUSN Undergraduate Pilots is added to identify aircraft piloted by USAF undergraduate pilots the call sign will be limited to a combination of six characters
(2) Navy or Marine fleet and training command aircraft The service name and 2 letters or a digit and a letter (use letter phonetic equivalents) followed by 2 or 3 digits
Radio and Interphone Communications 2minus4minus9
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
EXAMPLEminus ldquoNavy Golf Alfa Two Onerdquo ldquoMarine Four Charlie Two Three Sixrdquo
7 Presidential aircraft and Presidential family aircraft
(a) When the President is aboard a military aircraft state the name of the military service followed by the word ldquoOnerdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAir Force Onerdquo ldquoArmy Onerdquo ldquoMarine Onerdquo
(b) When the President is aboard a civil aircraft state the words ldquoExecutive Onerdquo
(c) When a member of the Presidentrsquos family is aboard any aircraft if the US Secret Service or the White House Staff determines it is necessary state the words ldquoExecutive One Foxtrotrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus4 Operational Priority
8 Vice Presidential aircraft
(a) When the Vice President is aboard a military aircraft state the name of the military service followed by the word ldquoTwordquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAir Force Twordquo ldquoArmy Twordquo ldquoMarine Twordquo
(b) When the Vice President is aboard a civil aircraft state the words ldquoExecutive Twordquo
(c) When a member of the Vice Presidentrsquos family is aboard any aircraft if the US Secret Service or the White House Staff determines it is necessary state the words ldquoExecutive Two Foxtrotrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus4 Operational Priority
9 DOT and FAA flights The following alphanumeric identifiers and radiointerphone call signs are established for use in airground communi-cations when the Secretary of Transportation Deputy Secretary of Transportation FAA Administrator or FAA Deputy Administrator have a requirement to identify themselves (See TBL 2minus4minus2)
TBL 2minus4minus2
DOT and FAA Alphanumeric Identifiers and Call Signs
Official Identifier Call Sign
Secretary of Transportation DOTminus1 Transportminus1
Deputy Secretary of Transportation
DOTminus2 Transportminus2
Administrator Federal Aviation Administration
FAAminus1 Safeairminus1
Deputy Administrator Federal Aviation Administration
FAAminus2 Safeairminus2
10 Other Special Flights
(a) Flight Inspection of navigational aids State the call sign ldquoFLIGHT CHECKrdquo followed by the digits of the registration number
EXAMPLEminus ldquoFlight Check Three Niner Six Five Fourrdquo
(b) USAF aircraft engaged in aerial sam-plingsurveying missions State the call sign ldquoSAMPrdquo followed by the last three digits of the serial number
EXAMPLEminus ldquoSAMP Three One Sixrdquo REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus17 SAMP Flights
11 Use a pilotrsquos name in identification of an aircraft only in special or emergency situations
b Foreign registry State one of the following
1 Civil State the aircraft type or the manufac-turerrsquos name followed by the lettersnumbers of the full aircraft registration or state the letters or digits of the full aircraft registration Do not abbreviate EXAMPLEminus ldquoCitation CminusGminusLminusRminusBrdquo ldquoCminusGminusLminusRminusBrdquo
NOTEminus 1 Letters may be spoken individually or phonetically
2 Some foreign civil aircraft registrations begin with a number REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus9 Abbreviated Transmissions
2 ICAO 3LD State the associated telephony followed by the flight number in group form or separate digits may be used if that is the format used by the pilot Do not abbreviate EXAMPLEminus ldquoScandinavian Sixtyminuseightrdquo ldquoScandinavian Six Eightrdquo
3 Foreign Military Except for military services identified in FAA Order JO 73402 Contractions
2minus4minus10 Radio and Interphone Communications
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
state the name of the country and the military service followed by the separate digits or letters of the registration or call sign For military services listed in FAA Order JO 73402 state the approved telephony followed by the separate digits of the flight number
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCanforce Five Six Two Sevenrdquo ldquoBrazilian Air Force Five Three Two Sevenrdquo
2minus4minus21 DESCRIPTION OF AIRCRAFT TYPES
Except for super and heavy aircraft describe aircraft as follows when issuing traffic information
a Military
1 Military designator with numbers spoken in group form or
2 Service and type or
3 Type only if no confusion or misidentifica-tion is likely
b Air Carrier
1 Manufacturerrsquos model or type designator
2 Add the manufacturerrsquos name company name or other identifying features when confusion or misidentification is likely
EXAMPLEminus ldquoLminusTenminusElevenrdquo ldquoAmerican MDminusEighty Seven ThirtyminusSevenrdquo ldquoBoeing Seven FiftyminusSevenrdquo
NOTEminus Pilots of ldquointerchangerdquo aircraft are expected to inform the tower on the first radio contact the name of the operating company and trip number followed by the company name as displayed on the aircraft and the aircraft type
c General Aviation and Air Taxi
1 Manufacturerrsquos model or type designator
2 Manufacturerrsquos name or add color when considered advantageous
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTriminusPacerrdquo ldquoP A TwentyminusTwordquo ldquoCessna FourminusOhminusOnerdquo ldquoBlue and white King Airrdquo ldquoAirlinerrdquo ldquoSikorsky SminusSeventyminusSixrdquo
d When issuing traffic information to aircraft following a super aircraft specify the word super before the manufacturerrsquos name and model
e When issuing traffic information to aircraft following a heavy aircraft specify the word heavy before the manufacturerrsquos name and model
EXAMPLEminus ldquoSuper A-Three-Eightyrdquo or ldquoSuper A-three-eighty-eightrdquo ldquoHeavy C-Seventeenrdquo ldquoHeavy Boeing Seven Forty-Sevenrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus21 Traffic Advisories
2minus4minus22 AIRSPACE CLASSES
A B C D E and G airspace are pronounced in the ICAO phonetics for clarification The term ldquoClassrdquo may be dropped when referring to airspace in pilotcontroller communications
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCessna 123 Mike Romeo cleared to enter Bravo airspacerdquo ldquoSikorsky 123 Tango Sierra cleared to enter New York Bravo airspacerdquo
Radio and Interphone Communications 2minus4minus11
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 5 Route and NAVAID Description
2minus5minus1 AIR TRAFFIC SERVICE (ATS) ROUTES
Describe ATS routes as follows
a VORVORTACTACAN airways or jet routes State the word ldquoVictorrdquo or the letter ldquoJrdquo followed by the number of the airway or route in group form
EXAMPLEminus ldquoVictor Twelverdquo ldquoJ Five ThirtyminusThreerdquo
b VORVORTACTACAN alternate airways State the word ldquoVictorrdquo followed by the number of the airway in group form and the alternate direction
EXAMPLEminus ldquoVictor Twelve Southrdquo
c ColoredLMF airways State the color of the airway followed by the number in group form
EXAMPLEminus ldquoBlue EightyminusOnerdquo
d Named Routes State the words ldquoNorth American Routerdquo or ldquoBahama Routerdquo followed by the number of the route in group form
EXAMPLEminus ldquoNorth American Route SixtyminusSeven Bravordquo ldquoBahama Route FiftyminusFive Victorrdquo
e Air Traffic Service (ATS) routes State the letter(s) of the route phonetically followed by the number of the route in group form
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRomeo Twentyrdquo ldquoAlfa Fiftyrdquo ldquoGolf Sixtyminusonerdquo ldquoAlfa Seven Hundredrdquo
f Military Training Routes (MTRs) State the letters ldquoIminusRrdquo or ldquoVminusRrdquo followed by the number of the route in group form
EXAMPLEminus ldquoIminusR Five Thirtyminusonerdquo ldquoVminusR Fiftyminustwordquo
g Published RNAV routes
1 High Altitude minus State the letter ldquoQrdquo followed by the route number in group form
EXAMPLEminus ldquoQ One Fortyminusfiverdquo
2 Low Altitude minus State the letter of the route phonetically followed by the number of the route in group form
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTango Two Tenrdquo
2minus5minus2 NAVAID TERMS
a Describe NAVAIDs as follows
1 State the name or phonetic alphabet equival-ent (location identifier) of a NAVAID when using it in a routing
EXAMPLEminus ldquoV6 Victor Whiskey Victor (Waterville) V45 Jacksonrdquo
2 When utilized as the clearance limit state the name of the NAVAID followed by the type of NAVAID if the type is known
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (NAVAID name and type)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCleared to Grand Rapids VORrdquo
b Describe radials arcs courses bearings and quadrants of NAVAIDs as follows
1 VORVORTACTACANGPS Waypoint State the name of the NAVAID or GPS Waypoint followed by the separate digits of the radialazimuth bearing (omitting the word ldquodegreesrdquo) and the word ldquoradialazimuthbearingrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAppleton Zero Five Zero Radialrdquo
2 Arcs about VOR-DMEVORTACTACAN NAVAIDs State the distance in miles from the NAVAID followed by the words ldquomile arcrdquo the direction from the NAVAID in terms of the eight principal points of the compass the word ldquoofrdquo and the name of the NAVAID
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTwo Zero mile arc southwest of Kirksville VORrdquo
3 Quadrant within a radius of NAVAID State direction from NAVAID in terms of the quadrant eg NE SE SW NW followed by the distance in miles from the NAVAID
Route and NAVAID Description 2minus5minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCleared to fly northeast quadrant of Phillipsburg VORTAC within Four Zero mile radiusrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus4minus1 Route Use PCG Termminus Quadrant
4 Nondirectional beacons State the course to or the bearing from the radio beacon omitting the word ldquodegreerdquo followed by the words ldquocourse tordquo or ldquobearing fromrdquo the name of the radio beacon and the words ldquoradio beaconrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoThree Four Zero bearing from Randolph Radio Beaconrdquo
5 MLS State the azimuth to or azimuth from the MLS omitting the word ldquodegreerdquo followed by the words ldquoazimuth tordquo or ldquoazimuth fromrdquo the name of the MLS and the term MLS
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTwo Six Zero azimuth to Linburgh Runway Two Seven MLSrdquo
6 Navigation Reference System (NRS) Waypo-int State the single letter corresponding to the ICAO Flight Information Region (FIR) identifier followed by the letter corresponding to the FIR subset (ARTCC area for the conterminous US) the latitude
increment in single digit or group form and the longitude increment
EXAMPLEminus ldquoKilo Delta Three Four Uniformrdquo ldquoKilo Delta Thirty Four Uniformrdquo
2minus5minus3 NAVAID FIXES
Describe fixes determined by reference to a radiallocalizerazimuth and distance from a VOR-DMEVORTACTACANILS-DME as follows
a When a fix is not named state the name of the NAVAID followed by a specified radiallocalizer azimuth and state the distance in miles followed by the phrase ldquomile fixrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAppleton Zero Five Zero radial Three Seven mile fixrdquo ldquoReno localizer back course Four mile fixrdquo
b When a fix is charted on a SID STAR en route chart or approach plate state the name of the fix
c Use specific terms to describe a fix Do not use expressions such as ldquopassing Victor Twelverdquo or ldquopassing J Elevenrdquo
2minus5minus2 Route and NAVAID Description
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
Section 6 Weather Information
2minus6minus1 FAMILIARIZATION
Controllers must become familiar with pertinent weather information when coming on duty and stay aware of current and forecasted weather information needed to perform ATC duties
NOTEminus Every phase of flight has the potential to be impacted by weather and emphasis must be placed on gathering reporting and disseminating weather information
2minus6minus2 PIREP SOLICITATION AND DISSEM-INATION
Emphasis must be placed on the solicitation and dissemination of Urgent (UUA) and Routine (UA) PIREPs Timely dissemination of PIREPs alerts pilots to weather conditions and provides information useful to forecasters in the development of aviation forecasts PIREPs also provide information required by ATC in the provision of safe and efficient use of airspace This includes reports of strong frontal activity squall lines thunderstorms light to severe icing wind shear and turbulence (including clear air turbulence) of moderate or greater intensity braking action volcanic eruptions and volcanic ash clouds detection of sulfur gases in the cabin and other conditions pertinent to flight safety Controllers must provide the information in sufficient detail to assist pilots in making decisions pertinent to flight safety
NOTEminus Routine PIREPs indicating a lack of forecasted weather conditions for example a lack of icing or turbulence are also valuable to aviation weather forecasters and pilots This is especially true when adverse conditions are expected or forecasted but do not develop or no longer exist
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus8 Low Level Wind ShearMicroburst Advisories FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus3minus4 Braking Action PCG Termminus Braking Action FAA Order JO 72103 Para 6minus3minus1 Handling of SIGMETs CWAs and PIREPs AIM Para 7minus5minus9 Flight Operations in Volcanic Ash FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus3minus1 SIGMET and PIREP Handling FAA Order JO 711010 Chapter 8 Section 2 Pilot Weather Report (UAUUA)
a Solicit PIREPs when requested deemed necessary or any of the following conditions exists or is forecast for your area of jurisdiction
1 Ceilings at or below 5000 feet These PIREPs must include cloud bases tops and cloud coverage when available Additionally when provid-ing approach control services ensure that at least one descentclimbndashout PIREP and other related phenom-ena is obtained each hour
2 Visibility (surface or aloft) at or less than 5 miles
3 Thunderstorms and related phenomena
4 Turbulence of moderate degree or greater
5 Icing of light degree or greater
6 Wind shear
7 Braking action reports
8 Volcanic ash clouds
9 Detection of sulfur gases (SO2 or H2S) associated with volcanic activity in the cabin
NOTEminus 1 The smell of sulfur gases in the co*ckpit may indicate volcanic activity that has not yet been detected or reported andor possible entry into an ashminusbearing cloud SO2 is identifiable as the sharp acrid odor of a freshly struck match H2S has the odor of rotten eggs
2 Pilots may forward PIREPs regarding volcanic activity using the format described in the Volcanic Activity Reporting Form (VAR) as depicted in the AIM Appendix 2
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711010 Para 8minus2minus5 Soliciting PIREPs
b Record with the PIREPs
1 Time
2 Aircraft position
3 Type aircraft
4 Altitude
5 When the PIREP involves icing include
(a) Icing type and intensity
(b) Air temperature in which icing is occurring
Weather Information 2minus6minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
c Obtain PIREPs directly from the pilot or if the PIREP has been requested by another facility you may instruct the pilot to deliver it directly to that facility
PHRASEOLOGYminus REQUESTSAY FLIGHT CONDITIONS Or if appropriate REQUESTSAY (specific conditions ie ride cloud visibility etc) CONDITIONS If necessary OVER (fix)
or
ALONG PRESENT ROUTE
or
BETWEEN (fix) AND (fix)
d Disseminate PIREPs as follows
1 Relay pertinent PIREP information to concerned aircraft in a timely manner
NOTEminus Use the word gain andor loss when describing to pilots the effects of wind shear on airspeed
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDelta Seven Twentyminusone a Boeing Seven Thirtyminusseven previously reported wind shear loss of two five knots at four hundred feetrdquo ldquoAlaska One a Boeing Seven Thirtyminusseven previously reported wind shear gain of twominusfive knots between niner hundred and six hundred feet followed by a loss of five zero knots between five hundred feet and the surfacerdquo
REFERENCEminus AIM Para 7minus1minus22 Wind Shear PIREPs
2 EN ROUTE Relay all operationally signifi-cant PIREPs to the facility weather coordinator
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 6minus3minus1 Handling of SIGMETs CWAs and PIREPs
3 TERMINAL Relay all operationally signifi-cant PIREPs to
(a) The appropriate intrafacility positions
(b) The OSCIC for long line dissemination via an FAA approved electronic system (for example AISminusR or similar systems) or
(c) Outside Alaska The overlying ARTCCrsquos Flight Data Unit for longminusline dissemination
(d) Alaska Only The FSS serving the area in which the report was obtained
NOTEminus The FSS in Alaska is responsible for long line dissemination REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus2 Duty Priority
(e) Other concerned terminal or en route ATC facilities including nonminusFAA facilities
2minus6minus3 REPORTING WEATHER CONDI-TIONS
a When the prevailing visibility at the usual point of observation or at the tower level is less than 4 miles tower personnel must take prevailing visibility observations and apply the observations as follows
1 Use the lower of the two observations (tower or surface) for aircraft operations
2 Forward tower visibility observations to the weather observer
3 Notify the weather observer when the tower observes the prevailing visibility decrease to less than 4 miles or increase to 4 miles or more
b Describe the wind as calm when the wind velocity is less than three knots REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus5minus3 Tailwind Components FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus4 Intersecting RunwayIntersecting Flight Path Separation
c Forward current weather changes to the appropriate control facility as follows
1 When the official weather changes to a condition
(a) Less than a 1000minusfoot ceiling or below the highest circling minimum whichever is greater
(b) Where the visibility is less than 3 miles
(c) Where conditions improve to values greater than those listed in (a) and (b)
2 When changes which are classified as special weather observations during the time that weather conditions are below 1000minusfoot ceiling or the highest circling minimum whichever is greater or less than 3 miles visibility
d Towers at airports where military turbominusjet en route descents are routinely conducted must also report the conditions to the ARTCC even if it is not the controlling facility
Weather Information 2minus6minus2
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
e If the receiving facility informs you that weather reports are not required for a specific time period discontinue the reports
f EN ROUTE When you determine that weather reports for an airport will not be required for a specific time period inform the FSS or tower of this determination
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus2 Forwarding Approach Information by Nonapproach Control Facilities
2minus6minus4 ISSUING WEATHER AND CHAFF AREAS
a Controllers must issue pertinent information on observedreported weather and chaff areas to potentially affected aircraft Define the area of coverage in terms of
1 Azimuth (by referring to the 12minushour clock) and distance from the aircraft andor
2 The general width of the area and the area of coverage in terms of fixes or distance and direction from fixes
NOTEminus Weather significant to the safety of aircraft includes conditions such as funnel cloud activity lines of thunderstorms embedded thunderstorms large hail wind shear microbursts moderate to extreme turbulence (including CAT) and light to severe icing
REFERENCEminus AIM Para 7minus1minus12 ATC Inflight Weather Avoidance Assistance
PHRASEOLOGYminus WEATHERCHAFF AREA BETWEEN (number) OrsquoCLOCK AND (number) OrsquoCLOCK (number) MILES andor (number) MILE BAND OF WEATHERCHAFF FROM (fix or number of miles and direction from fix) TO (fix or number of miles and direction from fix)
b Inform any tower for which you provide approach control services of observed precipitation on radar which is likely to affect their operations
c Use the term ldquoprecipitationrdquo when describing radarminusderived weather Issue the precipitation intensity from the lowest descriptor (LIGHT) to the highest descriptor (EXTREME) when that informa-tion is available Do not use the word ldquoturbulencerdquo in describing radarminusderived weather
1 LIGHT
2 MODERATE
3 HEAVY
4 EXTREME
NOTEminus Weather and Radar Processor (WARP) does not display light intensity
PHRASEOLOGYminus AREA OF (Intensity) PRECIPITATION BETWEEN (number) OrsquoCLOCK AND (number) OrsquoCLOCK (number) MILES MOVING (direction) AT (number) KNOTS TOPS (altitude) AREA IS (number) MILES IN DIAMETER
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoArea of heavy precipitation between ten orsquoclock and two orsquoclock one five miles Area is two five miles in diameterrdquo
2 ldquoArea of heavy to extreme precipitation between ten orsquoclock and two orsquoclock one five miles Area is two five miles in diameterrdquo REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Precipitation Radar Weather Descriptions
d TERMINAL In STARS correlate precipitation descriptors from subparagraph c as follows
1 Level 1 = LIGHT
2 Level 2 = MODERATE
3 Levels 3 and 4 = HEAVY
4 Levels 5 and 6 = EXTREME
e When precipitation intensity information is not available
PHRASEOLOGYminus AREA OF PRECIPITATION BETWEEN (number) OrsquoCLOCK AND (number) OrsquoCLOCK (number) MILES MOVING (direction) AT (number) KNOTS TOPS (altitude) AREA IS (number) MILES IN DIAMETER INTENSITY UNKNOWN
EXAMPLEminus ldquoArea of precipitation between one orsquoclock and three orsquoclock three five miles moving south at one five knots tops flight level three three zero Area is three zero miles in diameter intensity unknownrdquo
NOTEminus Phraseology using precipitation intensity descriptions is only applicable when the radar precipitation intensity information is determined by NWS radar equipment or NAS ground based digitized radar equipment with weather capabilities This precipitation may not reach the surface
f EN ROUTE When issuing Air Route Surveil-lance Radar (ARSR) precipitation intensity use the following
1 Describe the lowest displayable precipitation intensity as MODERATE
Weather Information 2minus6minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
2 Describe the highest displayable precipita-tion intensity as HEAVY to EXTREME
PHRASEOLOGYminus AREA OF (Intensity) PRECIPITATION BETWEEN (number) OrsquoCLOCK and (number) OrsquoCLOCK (number) MILES MOVING (direction) AT (number) KNOTS TOPS (altitude) If applicable AREA IS (number) MILES IN DIAMETER
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoArea of moderate precipitation between ten orsquoclock and one orsquoclock three zero miles moving east at two zero knots tops flight level three seven zero
2 ldquoArea of moderate precipitation between ten orsquoclock and three orsquoclock two zero miles Area is two five miles in diameterrdquo
g Controllers must ensure that the highest available level of precipitation intensity within their area of jurisdiction is displayed unless operational equipment limitations exist
h When requested by the pilot provide radar navigational guidance andor approve deviations around weather or chaff areas In areas of significant weather plan ahead and be prepared to suggest upon pilot request the use of alternative routesaltitudes
1 An approval for lateral deviation authorizes the pilot to maneuver left or right within the limits of the lateral deviation area
REFERENCEminus AIM Subpara 7minus1minus12b1(a) ATC Inflight Weather Avoidance Assistance
2 When approving a weather deviation for an aircraft that had previously been issued a crossing altitude including climb via or descend via clearances issue an altitude to maintain and if necessary assign a speed along with the clearance to deviate If you intend on clearing the aircraft to resume the procedure advise the pilot
PHRASEOLOGYminus DEVIATION (restrictions if necessary) APPROVED MAINTAIN (altitude) (if necessary) MAINTAIN (speed) (if applicable) EXPECT TO RESUME (SIDSTAR etc) AT (NAVAID fixwaypoint)
NOTEminus After a climb via or descend via clearance has been issued a vectordeviation off of a SIDSTAR cancels all published altitude and speed restrictions on the procedure The aircraftrsquos Flight Management System (FMS) may be unable to process crossing altitude restrictions once the aircraft leaves the SIDSTAR lateral path Without an assigned altitude the aircraftrsquos FMS may revert to leveling off at the
altitude set by the pilot which may be the SIDSTAR published top or bottom altitude REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus5 Route or Altitude Amendments FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus6minus1 Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus6minus2 Methods
3 If a pilot enters your area of jurisdiction already deviating for weather advise the pilot of any additional weather which may affect the route NOTEminus When aircraft are deviating around weather and transitioning from sector to sector unless previously coordinated the receiving controller should not assume that the transferring controller has issued weather affecting the aircraftrsquos route of flight
4 If traffic and airspace (ie special use airspace boundaries LOA constraints) permit combine the approval for weather deviation with a clearance on course PHRASEOLOGYminus DEVIATION (restrictions if necessary) APPROVED WHEN ABLE PROCEED DIRECT (name of NAVAIDWAYPOINTFIX)
or
DEVIATION (restrictions if necessary) APPROVED WHEN ABLE FLY HEADING (degrees) VECTOR TO JOIN (airway) AND ADVISE
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoDeviation 20 degrees right approved when able proceed direct OrsquoNeill VORTAC and adviserdquo En Route The corresponding fourth line entry is ldquoD20RONLrdquo or ldquoD20RFrdquo
2 ldquoDeviation 30 degrees left approved when able fly heading zero niner zero vector to join J324 and adviserdquo En Route In this case the free text character limitation prevents use of fourth line coordination and verbal coordination is required
5 If traffic or airspace prevents you from clearing the aircraft on course at the time of the approval for a weather deviation instruct the pilot to advise when clear of weather PHRASEOLOGYminus DEVIATION (restrictions if necessary) APPROVED ADVISE CLEAR OF WEATHER
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDeviation North of course approved advise clear of weatherrdquo En Route In this case the corresponding fourth line entry is ldquoDNrdquo and the receiving controller must provide a clearance to rejoin the route in accordance with paragraph 2minus1minus15c
Weather Information 2minus6minus4
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
i When a deviation cannot be approved as requested because of traffic take an alternate course of action that provides positive control for traffic resolution and satisfies the pilotrsquos need to avoid weather
PHRASEOLOGYminus UNABLE REQUESTED DEVIATION FLY HEADING (heading) ADVISE CLEAR OF WEATHER
or
UNABLE REQUESTED DEVIATION TURN (number of degrees) DEGREES (left or right) VECTOR FOR TRAFFIC ADVISE CLEAR OF WEATHER
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnable requested deviation turn thirty degrees right vector for traffic advise clear of weatherrdquo
j When forwarding weather deviation informa-tion the transferring controller must clearly coordinate the nature of the route guidance service being provided This coordination should include but is not limited to assigned headings suggested headings pilotminusinitiated deviations Coordination can be accomplished by verbal automated or predetermined procedures Emphasis should be made between controller assigned headings suggested headings or pilot initiated deviations
EXAMPLEminus ldquo(call sign) assigned heading three three zero for weather avoidancerdquo ldquo(call sign) deviating west pilot requestedhelliprdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus14 Coordinate Use Of Airspace FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus5 Transferring Controller Handoff FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus6 Receiving Controller Handoff FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus9 Prearranged Coordination FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus10 En Route Fourth Line Data Block Usage
k En Route Fourth Line Data Transfer
1 The inclusion of a NAVAID waypoint or F in the fourth line data indicates that the pilot has been authorized to deviate for weather and must rejoin the route at the next NAVAID or waypoint in the route of flight
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus10 En Route Fourth Line Data Block Usage
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDeviation twenty degrees right approved when able proceed direct OrsquoNeill VORTAC and adviserdquo In this case
the corresponding fourth line entry is ldquoD20RONLrdquo or ldquoD20RFrdquo
2 The absence of a NAVAID waypoint or F in the fourth line indicates that
(a) The pilot has been authorized to deviate for weather only and the receiving controller must provide a clearance to rejoin the route in accordance with paragraph 2minus1minus15c
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDeviation twenty degrees right approved advise clear of weatherrdquo
(b) The free text character limitation prevents the use of fourth line coordination Verbal coordina-tion is required
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDeviation 30 degrees left approved when able fly heading zero niner zero vector to join J324 and adviserdquo
l The supervisory traffic management coordinatorminusinminuschargeoperations supervisor controllerminusinminuscharge must verify the digitized radar weather information by the best means available (eg pilot reports local tower personnel etc) if the weather data displayed by digitized radar is reported as questionable or erroneous Errors in weather radar presentation must be reported to the technical operations technician and the air traffic supervisor must determine if the digitized radar derived weather data is to be displayed and a NOTAM distributed
NOTEminus Anomalous propagation (AP) is a natural occurrence affecting radar and does not in itself constitute a weather circuit failure
2minus6minus5 DISSEMINATING OFFICIAL WEATH-ER INFORMATION
TERMINAL Observed elements of weather informa-tion must be disseminated as follows
a General weather information such as ldquolarge breaks in the overcastrdquo ldquovisibility lowering to the southrdquo or similar statements which do not include specific values and any elements derived directly from instruments pilots or radar may be transmitted to pilots or other ATC facilities without consulting the weather reporting station
b Specific values such as ceiling and visibility may be transmitted if obtained by one of the following means
Weather Information 2minus6minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
1 You are properly certificated and acting as official weather observer for the elements being reported
NOTEminus USAF controllers do not serve as official weather observers
2 You have obtained the information from the official observer for the elements being reported
3 The weather report was composed or verified by the weather station
4 The information is obtained from a FAA approved automation surface weather system
c Differences between weather elements ob-served from the tower and those reported by the weather station must be reported to the official observer for the element concerned
2minus6minus6 HAZARDOUS INFLIGHT WEATHER ADVISORY
Controllers must advise pilots of hazardous weather that may impact operations within 150 NM of their sector or area of jurisdiction Hazardous weather information contained in the advisories includes Airmenrsquos Meteorological Information (AIRMET) Significant Meteorological Information (SIGMET) Convective SIGMET (WST) Urgent Pilot Weather Reports (UUA) and Center Weather Advisories (CWA) Facilities must review alert messages to determine the geographical area and operational impact of hazardous weather information Advisories are not required if aircraft on your frequency(s) will not be affected
a Controllers must broadcast a hazardous inflight weather advisory on all frequencies except emergen-cy frequency upon receipt of hazardous weather information Controllers are required to disseminate data based on the operational impact on the sector or area of control jurisdiction Pilots requesting additional information must be directed to contact the nearest Flight Service
NOTEminus The inclusion of the type and number of weather advisory responsible for the hazardous inflight weather advisory is optional
PHRASEOLOGYminus ATTENTION ALL AIRCRAFT HAZARDOUS WEATHER INFORMATION (SIGMET Convective SIGMET AIRMET Urgent Pilot Weather Report (UUA) or Center Weather Advisory (CWA) Number or Numbers) FOR (specific weather phenomenon) WITHIN (geographical area) AVAILABLE ON FLIGHT SERVICE FREQUENCIES
b Terminal facilities have the option to limit hazardous weather information broadcasts as fol-lows Tower cab and approach control facilities may opt to broadcast hazardous weather information alerts only when any part of the area described is within 50 NM of the airspace under their jurisdiction REFERENCEminus AIM Chapter 7 Section 1 Meteorology Para 7minus1minus5 through Para 7minus1minus7
c EN ROUTE ERAM Controllers must electron-ically acknowledge hazardous weather information messages after appropriate action has been taken
NOTEminus EN ROUTE While hazardous weather information is commonly distributed via the SIGMET View it is possible to receive the information via the GI View
Weather Information 2minus6minus6
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 7 Altimeter Settings
2minus7minus1 CURRENT SETTINGS
a Current altimeter settings must be obtained from direct-reading instruments or directly from weather reporting stations
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Chapter 2 Section 10 WindAltimeter Information
b If a pilot requests the altimeter setting in millibars ask the nearest weather reporting station for the equivalent millibar setting
c USAFUSA Use the term ldquoEstimated Altim-eterrdquo for altimeter settings reported or received as estimated
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus1 Departure Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus1 Landing Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus10 Approach Information
2minus7minus2 ALTIMETER SETTING ISSUANCE BELOW LOWEST USABLE FL
a TERMINAL Identify the source of an altimeter setting when issued for a location other than the aircraftrsquos departure or destination airport
b EN ROUTE Identify the source of all altimeter settings when issued
PHRASEOLOGYminus (If the altimeter is one hour old or less) THE (facility name) ALTIMETER (setting)
or
(If the altimeter is more than one hour old) THE (facility name) ALTIMETER (setting) MORE THAN ONE HOUR OLD
c Issue the altimeter setting
1 To en route aircraft at least one time while operating in your area of jurisdiction Issue the setting for the nearest reporting station along the aircraftrsquos route of flight
NOTEminus 14 CFR Section 91121(1) requires that the pilot set hisher altimeter to the setting of a station along hisher route of flight within 100 miles of the aircraft if one is available However issuance of the setting of an adjacent station during periods that a steep gradient exists will serve to inform the pilot of the difference between the setting heshe
is using and the pressure in the local area and better enable himher to choose a more advantageous setting within the limitations of 14 CFR Section 91121
2 TERMINAL To all departures Unless spe-cifically requested by the pilot the altimeter setting need not be issued to local aircraft operators who have requested this omission in writing or to scheduled air carriers REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus1 Departure Information
3 TERMINAL To arriving aircraft on initial contact or as soon as possible thereafter The tower may omit the altimeter if the aircraft is sequenced or vectored to the airport by the approach control having jurisdiction at that facility REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus10 Approach Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus10minus2 Approach Information
4 EN ROUTE For the destination airport to arriving aircraft approximately 50 miles from the destination if an approach control facility does not serve the airport
5 In addition to the altimeter setting provided on initial contact issue changes in altimeter setting to aircraft executing a nonprecision instrument approach as frequently as practical when the official weather report includes the remarks ldquopressure falling rapidlyrdquo
d If the altimeter setting must be obtained by the pilot of an arriving aircraft from another source instruct the pilot to obtain the altimeter setting from that source
NOTEminus 1 The destination altimeter setting whether from a local or remote source is the setting upon which the instrument approach is predicated
2 Approach charts for many locations specify the source of altimeter settings as nonminusFAA facilities such as UNICOMs
e When issuing clearance to descend below the lowest usable flight level advise the pilot of the altimeter setting of the weather reporting station nearest the point the aircraft will descend below that flight level Local directives may delegate this responsibility to an alternate sector when Optimized Profile Descents (OPD) commence in sectors consisting entirely of Class A airspace
Altimeter Settings 2minus7minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
f Department of Defense (DOD) aircraft that are authorized to operate in restricted areas MOAs and ATC assigned airspace areas on ldquosingle altimeter settingsrdquo (CFR Exemption 2861A) must be issued altimeter settings in accordance with standard procedures while the aircraft are en route to and from the restricted areas MOAs and ATC assigned airspace areas
NOTEminus The DOD is responsible for conducting all ldquosingle altimeter settingrdquo operations within the boundaries of MOAs restricted areas and ATCAAs Under an LOA the DOD provides safe altitude clearance between DOD aircraft and other aircraft operating within above and below the MOAs restricted areas and ATCAAs with appropriate clearance of terrain
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 76104 Appendix 22 Grant of Exemption No 2861A -Single Altimeter Setting For Frequent Transit of FL180
g When the barometric pressure is greater than 3100 inches Hg issue the altimeter setting and
1 En RouteArrivals Advise pilots to remain set on altimeter 3100 until reaching final approach segment
2 Departures Advise pilots to set altimeter 3100 prior to reaching any mandatorycrossing altitude or 1500 feet AGL whichever is lower
PHRASEOLOGYminus ALTIMETER THREE ONE TWO FIVE SET THREE ONE ZERO ZERO UNTIL REACHING THE FINAL APPROACH FIX
or
ALTIMETER THREE ONE ONE ZERO SET THREE ONE ZERO ZERO PRIOR TO REACHING ONE THOUSAND THREE HUNDRED
NOTEminus 1 Aircraft with Mode C altitude reporting will be displayed on the controllerrsquos radar scope with a uniform altitude offset above the assigned altitude With an actual altimeter of 3128 inches Hg the Mode C equipped aircraft will show 3300 feet when assigned 3000 feet This will occur unless local directives authorize entering the altimeter setting 3100 into the computer system regardless of the actual barometric pressure
2 Flight Standards will implement high barometric pressure procedures by NOTAM defining the geographic area affected
3 Airports unable to accurately measure barometric pressures above 3100 inches Hg will report the barometric pressure as ldquomissingrdquo or ldquoin excess of 3100 inches of Hgrdquo Flight operations to or from those airports are restricted to VFR weather conditions
REFERENCEminus AIM Para 7minus2minus2 Procedures FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus1 Landing Information
2minus7minus2 Altimeter Settings
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
Section 8 Runway Visibility Reportingminus Terminal
2minus8minus1 FURNISH RVR VALUES
Where RVR equipment is operational irrespective of subsequent operation or nonoperation of navigational or visual aids for the application of RVR as a takeoff or landing minima furnish the values for the runway in use in accordance with Paragraph 2minus8minus3 Terminology
NOTEminus Readout capability of different typemodel RVR equipment varies For example older equipment minimum readout value is 600 feet Newer equipment may have minimum readout capability as low as 100 feet Readout value increments also may differ Older equipment have minimum readout increments of 200 feet New equipment increments below 800 feet are 100 feet
REFERENCEminus FAA Order 656010 Runway Visual Range (RVR) FAA Order 675024 Instrument Landing System (ILS) and Ancillary Electronic Component Configuration amp Perf Req
2minus8minus2 ARRIVALDEPARTURE RUNWAY VISIBILITY
a Issue current touchdown RVR for the runway(s) in use
1 When prevailing visibility is 1 mile or less regardless of the value indicated
2 When RVR indicates a reportable value regardless of the prevailing visibility
NOTEminus Reportable values are RVR 6000 feet or less
3 When it is determined from a reliable source that the indicated RVR value differs by more than 400 feet from the actual conditions within the area of the transmissometer the RVR data is not acceptable and must not be reported
NOTEminus A reliable source is considered to be a certified weather observer automated weather observing system air traffic controller flight service specialist or pilot
4 When the observer has reliable reports or has otherwise determined that the instrument values are
not representative of the associated runway the data must not be used
b Issue both mid-point and roll-out RVR when the value of either is less than 2000 feet and the touchdown RVR is greater than the midminuspoint or rollminusout RVR
c Local control must issue the current RVR to each aircraft prior to landing or departure in accordance with subparagraphs a and b
2minus8minus3 TERMINOLOGY
a Provide RVR information by stating the runway the abbreviation RVR and the indicated value When issued along with other weather elements transmit these values in the normal sequence used for weather reporting
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway One Four RVR Two Thousand Four Hundredrdquo
b When two or more RVR systems serve the runway in use report the indicated values for the different systems in terms of touchdown mid and rollout as appropriate
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway Two Two Left RVR Two Thousand rollout One Thousand Eight Hundredrdquo
ldquoRunway Two Seven Right RVR One Thousand mid Eight Hundred rollout Six Hundredrdquo
c When there is a requirement to issue an RVR value and a visibility condition greater or less than the reportable values of the equipment is indicated state the condition as ldquoMORE THANrdquo or ldquoLESS THANrdquo the appropriate minimum or maximum readable value
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway Three Six RVR more than Six Thousandrdquo
ldquoRunway Niner RVR One Thousand rollout less than Six Hundredrdquo
Runway Visibility Reportingminus Terminal 2minus8minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
d When a readout indicates a rapidly varying EXAMPLEminus visibility condition (1000 feet or more for RVR) ldquoRunway Two Four RVR Two Thousand variable
One Thousand Six Hundred to Three Thousandrdquo report the current value followed by the range of REFERENCEminus visibility variance FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus8minus1 Furnish RVR Values
2minus8minus2 Runway Visibility Reportingminus Terminal
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
Section 9 Automatic Terminal Information Service Procedures
2minus9minus1 APPLICATION
Use the ATIS where available to provide advance noncontrol airportterminal area and meteorological information to aircraft
a Identify each ATIS message by a phonetic letter code word at both the beginning and the end of the message Automated systems will have the phonetic letter code automatically appended Exceptions may be made where omissions are required because of special programs or equipment
1 Each alphabet letter phonetic word must be used sequentially except as authorized in subpara a2 beginning with ldquoAlphardquo ending with ldquoZulurdquo and repeated without regard to the beginning of a new day Identify the first resumed broadcast message with ldquoAlphardquo or the first assigned alphabet letter word in the event of a broadcast interruption of more than 12 hours
2 Specific sequential portions of the alphabet may be assigned between facilities or an arrival and departure ATIS when designated by a letter of agreement or facility directive REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus4minus1 Automatic Terminal Information Service (ATIS)
b The ATIS recording must be reviewed for completeness accuracy speech rate and proper enunciation before being transmitted
c Arrival and departure messages when broad-cast separately need only contain information appropriate for that operation
2minus9minus2 OPERATING PROCEDURES
Maintain an ATIS message that reflects the most current arrival and departure information
a Make a new recording when any of the following occur
1 Upon receipt of any new official weather regardless of whether there is or is not a change in values
2 When runway braking action reports are received that indicate runway braking is worse than that which is included in the current ATIS broadcast
3 When there is a change in any other pertinent data such as runway change instrument approach in use new or canceled NOTAMsPIREPs update etc
b When a pilot acknowledges that heshe has received the ATIS broadcast controllers may omit those items contained in the broadcasts if they are current Rapidly changing conditions will be issued by ATC and the ATIS will contain the following
EXAMPLEminus ldquoLatest ceilingvisibilityaltimeterwind(other condi-tions) will be issued by approach controltowerrdquo
c Controllers must ensure that pilots receive the most current pertinent information by taking the following actions as applicable
1 When a pilot does not state the appropriate ATIS code on initial contact ask the pilot to confirm receipt of the current ATIS information
EXAMPLEminus ldquoVerify you have information CHARLIErdquo ldquoInformation CHARLIE current Advise when you have CHARLIErdquo
2 When a pilot is unable to receive the ATIS issue the current weather runway in use approach departure information pertinent NOTAMs and airport conditions
EXAMPLEminus ldquoWind two five zero at one zero Visibility one zero Ceiling four thousand five hundred broken Temperature three four Dew point two eight Altimeter three zero one zero ILSminusDME Runway Two Seven Approach in use Departing Runway Two Two Right Hazardous Weather Information for (geographical area) available on Flight Service Frequencies Braking Action advisories are in effectrdquo
d Advise aircraft of changes to the ATIS code by broadcasting the change on all appropriate frequen-cies The broadcast must include changes to pertinent operational information when known that necessi-tated the ATIS change
Automatic Terminal Information Service Procedures 2minus9minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAttention all aircraft information ALPHA currentrdquo
ldquoAttention all aircraft information BRAVO current MICROBURST advisories in effectrdquo
ldquoAttention all aircraft information CHARLIE current Numerous flocks of ducks in the immediate vicinity of (name) airport altitude unknownrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus9minus3 Content
NOTEminus 1 No additional acknowledgement is required when a controller broadcasts information subsequent to the pilotrsquos initial acknowledgement of the ATIS Requiring each aircraft to acknowledge receipt of pertinent changes (broadcast) after initial confirmation of the ATIS could significantly impact workload
2 Pertinent conditions are those that have a clear decisive relevance to the safety of air traffic As noted in Paragraph 2minus1minus2 Duty Priority there are many variables involved that make it virtually impossible to develop a standard list of changes that are classified as relevant to every conceivable situation Each set of circ*mstances must be evaluated on its own merit and when more than one action is required controllers must exercise their best judgment based on the facts and circ*mstances known to them
2minus9minus3 CONTENT
a Include the following in ATIS broadcast as appropriate
1 Airportfacility name
2 Phonetic letter code
3 Time of the latest weather sequence (UTC)
4 Weather information consisting of
(a) Wind direction and velocity
(b) Visibility
(c) Obstructions to vision
(d) Present weather consisting of sky condi-tion temperature dew point altimeter a density altitude advisory when appropriate and other pertinent remarks included in the official weather observation Always include weather observation remarks of lightning cumulonimbus and towering cumulus clouds
NOTEminus ASOSAWOS is to be considered the primary source of wind direction velocity and altimeter data for weather
observation purposes at those locations that are so equipped The ASOS Operator Interface Device (OID) displays the magnetic wind as ldquoMAG WNDrdquo in the auxiliary data location in the lower leftminushand portion of the screen Other OID displayed winds are true and are not to be used for operational purposes
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 79005 Surface Weather Observing Table 3minus2 FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus2minus1 Position Duties and Responsibilities
5 Instrument approach and runway in use
b ManminusPortable Air Defense Systems (MANPADS) alert and advisory Specify the nature and location of threat or incident whether reported or observed and by whom time (if known) and notification to pilots to advise ATC if they need to divert
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoMANPADS alert Exercise extreme caution MANPADS threat reported by TSA Chicago areardquo ldquoAdvise on initial contact if you want to divertrdquo
2 ldquoMANPADS alert Exercise extreme caution MANPADS attack observed by tower oneminushalf mile northwest of airfield at oneminustwominusfiveminuszero Zulurdquo ldquoAdvise on initial contact if you want to divertrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus2minus13 MANPADS Alert FAA Order JO 72103 Para 2minus1minus10 Handling MANPADS Incidents
c Terminal facilities must include reported unauthorized laser illumination events on the ATIS broadcast for one hour following the last report Include the time location altitude color and direction of the laser as reported by the pilot
PHRASEOLOGYminus UNAUTHORIZED LASER ILLUMINATION EVENT (UTC time) (location) (altitude) (color) (direction)
EXAMPLEminus UNAUTHORIZED LASER ILLUMINATION EVENT AT 0100z 8 MILE FINAL RUNWAY 18R AT 3000 FEET GREEN LASER FROM THE SOUTHWEST
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus2minus14 Unauthorized Laser Illumination of Aircraft FAA Order JO 72103 Para 2minus1minus29 Reporting Unauthorized Laser Illumination of Aircraft
d The ceilingsky condition visibility and obstructions to vision may be omitted if the ceiling is above 5000 feet and the visibility is more than 5 miles
EXAMPLEminus A remark may be made ldquoThe weather is better than five thousand and fiverdquo
Automatic Terminal Information Service Procedures 2minus9minus2
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
e Instrumentvisual approaches in use Specify landing runways unless the runway is that to which the instrument approach is made Before advertising non-precision approaches priority should be given to available precision then APV approaches
f Departure runways (to be given only if different from landing runways or in the instance of a ldquodeparture onlyrdquo ATIS)
g Taxiway closures which affect the entrance or exit of active runways other closures which impact airport operations other NOTAMs and PIREPs pertinent to operations in the terminal area Inform pilots of where hazardous weather is occurring and how the information may be obtained Include available information of known bird activity
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 2minus1minus23 Bird Activity Information
h When a runway length has been temporarily or permanently shortened ensure that the word ldquoWARNINGrdquo prefaces the runway number and that the word ldquoshortenedrdquo is also included in the text of the message
1 Available runway length as stated in the NOTAM must be included in the ATIS broadcast This information must be broadcast for the duration of the construction project
2 For permanently shortened runways facilit-ies must continue to broadcast this information for a minimum of 30 days or until the Chart Supplement US has been updated whichever is longer
PHRASEOLOGYminus WARNING RUNWAY (number) HAS BEEN SHORTENED (length in feet) FEET AVAILABLE
EXAMPLEminus ldquoWarning Runway One-Zero has been shortened niner-thousand eight hundred and fifty feet availablerdquo
i Runway Condition Codes (RwyCC) when provided Include the time of the report
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) condition codes (first value second value third value) AT (time)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway Two Seven condition codes two two one at one zero one eight Zulurdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus3minus1 Landing Area Condition
j Runway Condition Codes ldquo333rdquo and the statement ldquoSlippery When Wetrdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway (number) condition codes three three three Slippery When Wet at one two five five Zulurdquo
NOTEminus A Slippery When Wet FICON NOTAM indicates a runway has failed a friction survey for example due to excessive rubber buildminusup Airport Operators will notify ATCT operational personnel of this concern and issue a FICON NOTAM prior to the expected arrival of rain The FICON NOTAM will be canceled when the rain has ended and the runway environment is determined to be dry by the Airport Operator
k Runway Condition codes ldquoXXXrdquo When a FICON NOTAM indicates these values the statement ldquoRunway Condition Codes Missingrdquo must be included on the ATIS broadcast
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway (number) condition codes missing at one three four seven Zulurdquo
NOTEminus A FICON NOTAM may be generated with ldquoXXXrdquo instead of Runway Condition Codes This will occur when the NOTAM user interface is not functioning correctly however a FICON NOTAM is still present
l Other optional information as local conditions dictate in coordination with ATC This may include such items as VFR arrival frequencies temporary airport conditions LAHSO operations being conminus ducted or other perishable items that may appear only for a matter of hours or a few days on the ATIS message
m When all 3 runway segments (touchdown midpoint and rollout) are reporting a code of 6 the Airport Operator will notify ATC that runway condition codes are no longer reportable
n Low level wind shearmicroburst when repor-ted by pilots or is detected on a wind shear detection system REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus8 Low Level Wind ShearMicroburst Advisories
o A statement which advises the pilot to read back instructions to hold short of a runway The air traffic manager may elect to remove this requirement 60 days after implementation provided that removing the statement from the ATIS does not result in increased requests from aircraft for read back of hold short instructions
Automatic Terminal Information Service Procedures 2minus9minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
p Instructions for the pilot to acknowledge receipt of the ATIS message by informing the controller on initial contact EXAMPLEminus ldquoBoston Tower Information Delta One four zero zero Zulu Wind two five zero at one zero Visibility one zero Ceiling
four thousand five hundred broken Temperature three four Dew point two eight Altimeter three zero one zero ILSminusDME Runway Two Seven Approach in use Departing Runway Two Two Right Hazardous Weather Information for (geographical area) available on Flight Service Frequencies Advise on initial contact you have Deltardquo
Automatic Terminal Information Service Procedures 2minus9minus4
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 10 Team Position Responsibilities
2minus10minus1 EN ROUTE OR OCEANIC SECTOR TEAM POSITION RESPONSIBILITIES
a En Route or Oceanic Sector Team Concept and Intent There are no absolute divisions of responsibilities regarding position operations The tasks to be completed remain the same whether one two or three people are working positions within a sector The team as a whole has responsibility for the safe and efficient operation of that sector
b Terms The following terms will be used in en route facilities for the purpose of standardization
1 Sector The area of control responsibility (delegated airspace) of the en route sector team and the team as a whole
2 Radar Position (R) That position which is in direct communication with the aircraft and which uses radar information as the primary means of separation
3 Radar Associate (RA) That position some-times referred to as ldquoDminusSiderdquo or ldquoManual Controllerrdquo
4 Radar Coordinator Position (RC) That position sometimes referred to as ldquoCoordinatorrdquo ldquoTrackerrdquo or ldquoHandoff Controllerrdquo (En Route)
5 Radar Flight Data (FD) That position commonly referred to as ldquoAssistant Controllerrdquo or ldquoAminusSiderdquo position
6 Nonradar Position (NR) That position which is usually in direct communication with the aircraft and which uses nonradar procedures as the primary means of separation
c Primary responsibilities of the En Route Sector Team Positions
1 Radar Position
(a) Ensure separation
(b) Initiate control instructions
(c) Monitor and operate radios
(d) Accept and initiate automated handoffs
(e) Assist the radar associate position with nonautomated handoff actions when needed
(f) Assist the radar associate position in coordination when needed
(g) Scan radar display Correlate with flight progress strip information or EDST data as applicable
(h) Ensure computer entries are completed on instructions or clearances you issue or receive
(i) Ensure strip marking andor electronic flight data entries are completed on instructions or clearances you issue or receive
(j) Adjust equipment at radar position to be usable by all members of the team
(k) The radar controller must not be respon-sible for GG communications when precluded by VSCS split functionality
(l) At ERAM facilities ensure the situation display accurately reflects the status of all SAAs that impact their area of control responsibility
2 Radar Associate Position
(a) Ensure separation
(b) Where available use EDST to plan organize and expedite the flow of traffic
(c) Initiate control instructions
(d) Operate interphones
(e) Accept and initiate nonautomated hand-offs and ensure radar position is made aware of the actions
(f) Assist the radar position by accepting or initiating automated handoffs which are necessary for the continued smooth operation of the sector and ensure that the radar position is made immediately aware of any action taken
(g) Coordinate including pointouts
(h) Monitor radios when not performing higher priority duties
(i) Scan flight progress strips andor EDST data Correlate with radar data
(j) Manage flight progress strips andor electronic flight data
Team Position Responsibilities 2minus10minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
(k) Ensure computer entries are completed on instructions issued or received Enter instructions issued or received by the radar position when aware of those instructions
(l) As appropriate ensure strip marking andor EDST data entries are completed on instructions issued or received and record instruc-tions issued or received by the radar position when aware of them
(m) Adjust equipment at radar associate position to be usable by all members of the team
(n) Where authorized perform EDST data entries to keep the activation status of designated Airspace Configuration Elements current
(o) At ERAM facilities scan the radar associate display for electronically distributed information evaluate the information and take action as appropriate
3 Radar Coordinator Position
(a) Perform interfacilityintrafacilitysector position coordination of traffic actions
(b) Advise the radar position and the radar associate position of sector actions required to accomplish overall objectives
(c) Perform any of the functions of the en route sector team which will assist in meeting situation objectives
(d) The RC controller must not be responsible for monitoring or operating radios when precluded by VSCS split functionality
NOTEminus The Radar Position has the responsibility for managing the overall sector operations including aircraft separation and traffic flows The Radar Coordinator Position assumes responsibility for managing traffic flows and the Radar Position retains responsibility for aircraft separation when the Radar Coordinator Position is staffed
4 Radar Flight Data
(a) Operate interphone
(b) Assist Radar Associate Position in managing flight progress strips
(c) Receiveprocess and distribute flight progress strips
(d) Ensure flight data processing equipment is operational except for EDST capabilities
(e) Requestreceive and disseminate weather NOTAMs NAS status traffic management and Special Use Airspace status messages
(f) Manually prepare flight progress strips when automation systems are not available
(g) Enter flight data into computer
(h) Forward flight data via computer
(i) Assist facilitysector in meeting situation objectives
5 En Route Nonradar Position
(a) Ensure separation
(b) Initiate control instructions
(c) Monitor and operate radios
(d) Accept and initiate transfer of control communications and flight data
(e) Ensure computer entries are completed on instructions or clearances issued or received
(f) Ensure strip marking is completed on instructions or clearances issued or received
(g) Facilities utilizing nonradar positions may modify the standards contained in the radar associate radar coordinator and radar flight data sections to accommodate facilitysector needs ie nonradar coordinator nonradar data positions
2minus10minus2 TERMINAL RADARNONRADAR TEAM POSITION RESPONSIBILITIES
a Terminal Radar Team Concept and Intent There are no absolute divisions of responsibilities regarding position operations The tasks to be completed remain the same whether one two or three people are working positions within a facilitysector The team as a whole has responsibility for the safe and efficient operation of that facilitysector
b Terms The following terms will be used in terminal facilities for the purposes of standardization
1 FacilitySector The area of control responsi-bility (delegated airspace) of the radar team and the team as a whole
2 Radar Position (R) That position which is in direct communication with the aircraft and which uses radar information as the primary means of separation
2minus10minus2 Team Position Responsibilities
81519 JO 711065Y
3 Radar Associate Position (RA) That position commonly referred to as ldquoHandoff Controllerrdquo or ldquoRadar Data Controllerrdquo
4 Radar Coordinator Position (RC) That position commonly referred to as ldquoCoordinatorrdquo ldquoTrackerrdquo ldquoSequencerrdquo or ldquoOverheadrdquo
5 Radar Flight Data (FD) That position commonly referred to as ldquoFlight Datardquo
6 Nonradar Position (NR) That position which is usually in direct communication with the aircraft and which uses nonradar procedures as the primary means of separation
c Primary Responsibilities of the Terminal Radar Team Positions
1 Radar Position
(a) Ensure separation
(b) Initiate control instructions
(c) Monitor and operate radios
(d) Accept and initiate automated handoffs
(e) Assist the Radar Associate Position with nonautomated handoff actions when needed
(f) Assist the Radar Associate Position in coordination when needed
(g) Scan radar display Correlate with flight progress strip information
(h) Ensure computer entries are completed on instructions or clearances you issue or receive
(i) Ensure strip marking is completed on instructions or clearances you issue or receive
(j) Adjust equipment at Radar Position to be usable by all members of the team
2 Radar Associate Position
(a) Ensure separation
(b) Initiate control instructions
(c) Operate interphones
(d) Maintain awareness of facilitysector activities
(e) Accept and initiate nonautomated handoffs
(f) Assist the Radar Position by accepting or initiating automated handoffs which are necessary for
the continued smooth operation of the facilitysector and ensure that the Radar Position is made immediately aware of any actions taken
(g) Coordinate including point outs
(h) Scan flight progress strips Correlate with radar data
(i) Manage flight progress strips
(j) Ensure computer entries are completed on instructions issued or received and enter instructions issued or received by the Radar Position when aware of those instructions
(k) Ensure strip marking is completed on instructions issued or received and write instructions issued or received by the Radar Position when aware of them
(l) Adjust equipment at Radar Associate Position to be usable by all members of the Radar Team
3 Radar Coordinator Position
(a) Perform interfacilitysectorposition coordination of traffic actions
(b) Advise the Radar Position and the Radar Associate Position of facilitysector actions required to accomplish overall objectives
(c) Perform any of the functions of the Radar Team which will assist in meeting situation objectives
NOTEminus The Radar Position has the responsibility of managing the overall sector operations including aircraft separation and traffic flows The Radar Coordinator Position assumes responsibility for managing traffic flows and the Radar Position retains responsibility for aircraft separation when the Radar Coordinator Position is staffed
4 Radar Flight Data
(a) Operate interphones
(b) Process and forward flight plan information
(c) Compile statistical data
(d) Assist facilitysector in meeting situation objectives
5 Terminal Nonradar Position
(a) Ensure separation
(b) Initiate control instructions
Team Position Responsibilities 2minus10minus3
JO 711065Y 81519
(c) Monitor and operate radios
(d) Accept and initiate transfer of control communications and flight data
(e) Ensure computer entries are completed on instructions or clearances issued or received
(f) Ensure strip marking is completed on instructions or clearances issued or received
(g) Facilities utilizing nonradar positions may modify the standards contained in the radar associate radar coordinator and radar flight data sections to accommodate facilitysector needs ie nonradar coordinator nonradar data positions
2minus10minus3 TOWER TEAM POSITION RESPONSIBILITIES
a Tower Team Concept and Intent There are no absolute divisions of responsibilities regarding position operations The tasks to be completed remain the same whether one two or three people are working positions within a facilitysector The team as a whole has responsibility for the safe and efficient operation of that facilitysector
b Terms The following terms will be used in terminal facilities for the purpose of standardization
1 Tower Cab The area of control responsibility (delegated airspace andor airport surface areas) of the tower team and the team as a whole
2 Tower Position(s) (LC or GC) That position which is in direct communications with the aircraft and ensures separation of aircraft inon the area of jurisdiction
3 Tower Associate Position(s) That position commonly referred to as ldquoLocal Assistrdquo ldquoGround Assistrdquo ldquoLocal Associaterdquo or ldquoGround Associaterdquo
4 Tower Cab Coordinator Position (CC) That position commonly referred to as ldquoCoordinatorrdquo
5 Flight Data (FD) That position commonly referred to as ldquoFlight Datardquo
6 Clearance Delivery (CD) That position commonly referred to as ldquoClearancerdquo
c Primary responsibilities of the Tower Team Positions
1 Tower Position(s) (LC or GC)
(a) Ensure separation
(b) Initiate control instructions
(c) Monitor and operate communications equipment
(d) Utilize tower radar display(s)
(e) Utilize alphanumerics
(f) Assist the Tower Associate Position with coordination
(g) Scan tower cab environment
(h) Ensure computer entries are completed for instructions or clearances issued or received
(i) Ensure strip marking is completed for instructions or clearances issued or received
(j) Process and forward flight plan information
(k) Perform any functions of the Tower Team which will assist in meeting situation objectives
2 Tower Associate Position(s)
(a) Ensure separation
(b) Operate interphones
(c) Maintain awareness of tower cab activities
(d) Utilize alphanumerics
(e) Utilize tower radar display(s)
(f) Assist Tower Position by accepting initiating coordination for the continued smooth operation of the tower cab and ensure that the Tower Position is made immediately aware of any actions taken
(g) Manage flight plan information
(h) Ensure computer entries are completed for instructions issued or received and enter instructions issued or received by a Tower Position
(i) Ensure strip marking is completed for instructions issued or received and enter instructions issued or received by a Tower Position
3 Tower Coordinator Position
(a) Perform interfacilityposition coordina-tion for traffic actions
(b) Advise the tower and the Tower Associate Position(s) of tower cab actions required to accomplish overall objectives
2minus10minus4 Team Position Responsibilities
81519 JO 711065Y
(c) Perform any of the functions of the Tower Team which will assist in meeting situation objectives
NOTEminus The Tower Positions have the responsibility for aircraft separation and traffic flows The Tower Coordinator Position assumes responsibility for managing traffic flows and the Tower Positions retain responsibility for aircraft separation when the Tower Coordinator Position is staffed
4 Flight Data
(a) Operate interphones
(b) Process and forward flight plan information
(c) Compile statistical data
(d) Assist tower cab in meeting situation objectives
(e) Observe and report weather information
(f) Utilize alphanumerics
5 Clearance Delivery
(a) Operate communications equipment
(b) Process and forward flight plan information
(c) Issue clearances and ensure accuracy of pilot read back
(d) Assist tower cab in meeting situation objectives
(e) Operate tower equipment
(f) Utilize alphanumerics
NOTEminus The Tower Positions have the responsibility for aircraft separation and traffic flows The Tower Coordinator Position assumes responsibility for managing traffic flows and the Tower Positions retain responsibility for aircraft separation when the Tower Coordinator Position is staffed
Team Position Responsibilities 2minus10minus5
81519 JO 711065Y
Chapter 3 Airport Traffic Controlminus Terminal
Section 1 General
3minus1minus1 PROVIDE SERVICE
Provide airport traffic control service based only upon observed or known traffic and airport conditions
NOTEminus When operating in accordance with CFRs it is the responsibility of the pilot to avoid collision with other aircraft However due to the limited space around terminal locations traffic information can aid pilots in avoiding collision between aircraft operating within Class B Class C or Class D surface areas and the terminal radar service areas and transiting aircraft operating in proximity to terminal locations
3minus1minus2 PREVENTIVE CONTROL
Provide preventive control service only to aircraft operating in accordance with a letter of agreement When providing this service issue advice or instructions only if a situation develops which requires corrective action
NOTEminus 1 Preventive control differs from other airport traffic control in that repetitious routine approval of pilot action is eliminated Controllers intervene only when they observe a traffic conflict developing
2 Airfield Operating instructions Memorandums of Understanding or other specific directives used exclus-ively by the Department of Defense (DOD) satisfies the criteria in paragraph 3minus1minus2 above
3minus1minus3 USE OF ACTIVE RUNWAYS
The local controller has primary responsibility for operations conducted on the active runway and must control the use of those runways Positive coordina-tion and control is required as follows
NOTEminus Exceptions may be authorized only as provided in Paragraph 1minus1minus11 Constraints Governing Supplements and Procedural Deviations and FAA Order JO 72103 Facility Operation and Administration Paragraph 10minus1minus7 Use of Active Runways where justified by extraordinary circ*mstances at specific locations
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 1minus1minus11 Constraints Governing Supplements and Procedural Deviations FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus1minus7 Use of Active Runways
a Ground control must obtain approval from local control before authorizing an aircraft or a vehicle to cross or use any portion of an active runway The coordination must include the pointintersection at the runway where the operation will occur
PHRASEOLOGYminus CROSS (runway) AT (pointintersection)
b When the local controller authorizes another controller to cross an active runway the local controller must verbally specify the runway to be crossed and the pointintersection at the runway where the operation will occur preceded by the word ldquocrossrdquo
PHRASEOLOGYminus CROSS (runway) AT (pointintersection)
c The ground controller must advise the local controller when the coordinated runway operation is complete This may be accomplished verbally or through visual aids as specified by a facility directive
d USAUSAFUSN NOT APPLICABLE Autho-rization for aircraftvehicles to taxiproceed on or along an active runway for purposes other than crossing must be provided via direct communica-tions on the appropriate local control frequency This authorization may be provided on the ground control frequency after coordination with local control is completed for those operations specifically described in a facility directive
NOTEminus The USA USAF and USN establish local operating procedures in accordance with respectively USA USAF and USN directives
e The local controller must coordinate with the ground controller before using a runway not previously designated as active
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus4 Coordination Between Local and Ground Controllers
General 3minus1minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
3minus1minus4 COORDINATION BETWEEN LOCAL AND GROUND CONTROLLERS
Local and ground controllers must exchange information as necessary for the safe and efficient use of airport runways and movement areas This may be accomplished via verbal means flight progress strips other written information or automation displays As a minimum provide aircraft identification and applicable runwayintersectiontaxiway information as follows
a Ground control must notify local control when a departing aircraft has been taxied to a runway other than one previously designated as active
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus3 Use of Active Runways FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus1minus6 Selecting Active Runways
b Ground control must notify local control of any aircraft taxied to an intersection for takeoff This notification may be accomplished by verbal means or by flight progress strips
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus7 Wake Turbulence Separation for Intersection Departures
c When the runways in use for landingdeparting aircraft are not visible from the tower or the aircraft using them are not visible on radar advise the localground controller of the aircraftrsquos location before releasing the aircraft to the other controller
3minus1minus5 VEHICLESEQUIPMENTPERSON-NEL NEARON RUNWAYS
a Vehicles equipment and personnel in direct communications with the control tower may be authorized to operate up to the edge of an active runway surface when necessary Provide advisories as specified in Paragraph 3minus1minus6 Traffic Information and Paragraph 3minus7minus5 Precision Approach Critical Area as appropriate
PHRASEOLOGYminus PROCEED AS REQUESTED (and if necessary additional instructions or information)
b Ensure that the runway to be used is free of all known ground vehicles equipment and personnel before a departing aircraft starts takeoff or a landing aircraft crosses the runway threshold
NOTEminus ldquoPROCEED AS REQUESTEDrdquo is not approved phraseol-ogy for instructing aircraft vehicles equipment or personnel to cross or operate on a runway
NOTEminus Establishing hold linessigns is the responsibility of the airport manager Standards for surface measurements markings and signs are contained in the following Advisory Circulars AC 1505300minus13 Airport Design AC 1505340minus1 Standards for Airport Markings and AC 1505340minus18 Standards for Airport Sign Systems The operator is responsible to properly position the aircraft vehicle or equipment at the appropriate hold linesign or designated point The requirements in Para 3minus1minus12 Visually Scanning Runways remain valid as appropriate
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus7minus4 Runway Proximity FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus8minus2 Touch-and-Go or Stop-and-Go or Low Approach FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus10 Altitude Restricted Low Approach AC 1505300minus13 Airport Design AC 1505340minus1G Standards for Airport Markings 14 CFR Section 91129 Operations in Class D Airspace AIM Para 2minus2minus3 Obstruction Lights PCG Termminus Runway in UseActive RunwayDuty Runway
3minus1minus6 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
a Describe vehicles equipment or personnel on or near the movement area in a manner which will assist pilots in recognizing them
EXAMPLEminus ldquoMower left of runway two sevenrdquo ldquoTrucks crossing approach end of runway two fiverdquo ldquoWorkman on taxiway Bravordquo ldquoAircraft left of runway one eightrdquo
b Describe the relative position of traffic in an easy to understand manner such as ldquoto your rightrdquo or ldquoahead of yourdquo
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoTraffic US Air MDminusEighty on downwind leg to your leftrdquo 2 ldquoKing Air inbound from outer marker on straight-in approach to runway one sevenrdquo 3 ldquoTraffic Boeing 737 on 2minusmile final to the parallel runway runway two six right cleared to land Caution wake turbulencerdquo
c When using a CTRD you may issue traffic advisories using the standard radar phraseology prescribed in Paragraph 2minus1minus21 Traffic Advisories
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus10 Altitude Restricted Low Approach
General 3minus1minus2
81519 JO 711065Y
3minus1minus7 POSITION DETERMINATION
Determine the position of an aircraft personnel or equipment before issuing taxi instructions takeoff clearance or authorizing personnel andor equip-ment to proceed onto the movement area
NOTEminus When possible positions of aircraft vehicles equipment andor personnel may be determined visually or through use of a display system When ATC is unable to determine position visually or via a display system position reports may be used
3minus1minus8 LOW LEVEL WIND SHEAR MICROBURST ADVISORIES
a When low level wind shearmicroburst is reported by pilots Integrated Terminal Weather System (ITWS) or detected on wind shear detection systems such as LLWAS NE++ LLWASminusRS WSP or TDWR controllers must issue the alert to all arriving and departing aircraft Continue the alert to aircraft until it is broadcast on the ATIS and pilots indicate they have received the appropriate ATIS code A statement must be included on the ATIS for 20 minutes following the last report or indication of the wind shearmicroburst
PHRASEOLOGYminus LOW LEVEL WIND SHEAR (or MICROBURST as appropriate) ADVISORIES IN EFFECT
NOTEminus Some aircraft are equipped with Predictive Wind Shear (PWS) alert systems that warn the flight crew of a potential wind shear up to 3 miles ahead and 25 degrees either side of the aircraft heading at or below 1200rsquo AGL Pilot reports may include warnings received from PWS systems
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus6minus2 PIREP Solicitation and Dissemination FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus9minus3 Content FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus1 Landing Information
b At facilities without ATIS ensure that wind shearmicroburst information is broadcast to all arriving and departing aircraft for 20 minutes following the last report or indication of wind shearmicroburst
1 At locations equipped with LLWAS the local controller must provide wind information as follows
NOTEminus The LLWAS is designed to detect low level wind shear
conditions around the periphery of an airport It does not detect wind shear beyond that limitation
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus3minus3 Low Level Wind ShearMicroburst Detection Systems
(a) If an alert is received issue the airport wind and the displayed field boundary wind
PHRASEOLOGYminus WIND SHEAR ALERT AIRPORT WIND (direction) AT (velocity) (Location of sensor) BOUNDARY WIND (direction) AT (velocity)
(b) If multiple alerts are received issue an advisory that there are wind shear alerts in twoseveralall quadrants After issuing the advisory issue the airport wind in accordance with para 3minus9minus1 Departure Information followed by the field boundary wind most appropriate to the aircraft operation
PHRASEOLOGYminus WIND SHEAR ALERTS TWOSEVERALALL QUADRANTS AIRPORT WIND (direction) AT (velocity) (Location of sensor) BOUNDARY WIND (direction) AT (velocity)
(c) If requested by the pilot issue specific field boundary wind information even though the LLWAS may not be in alert status
NOTEminus The requirements for issuance of wind information remain valid as appropriate under this paragraph Paragraph 3minus9minus1 Departure Information and Paragraph 3minus10minus1 Landing Information
2 Wind shear detection systems including TDWR WSP LLWAS NE++ and LLWASminusRS provide the capability of displaying microburst alerts wind shear alerts and wind information oriented to the threshold or departure end of a runway When detected the associated ribbon display allows the controller to read the displayed alert without any need for interpretation
(a) If a wind shear or microburst alert is received for the runway in use issue the alert information for that runway to arriving and departing aircraft as it is displayed on the ribbon display
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Runway) (arrivaldeparture) WIND SHEAR MICROBURST ALERT (windspeed) KNOT GAINLOSS (location)
EXAMPLEminus 17A MBA 40K minus 3MF
General 3minus1minus3
JO 711065Y 81519
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY 17 ARRIVAL MICROBURST ALERT 40 KNOT LOSS 3 MILE FINAL
EXAMPLEminus 17D WSA 25K+ 2MD
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY 17 DEPARTURE WIND SHEAR ALERT 25 KNOT GAIN 2 MILE DEPARTURE
(b) If requested by the pilot or deemed appropriate by the controller issue the displayed wind information oriented to the threshold or departure end of the runway
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Runway) DEPARTURETHRESHOLD WIND (direction) AT (velocity)
(c) LLWAS NE++ or LLWASminusRS may detect a possible wind shearmicroburst at the edge of the system but may be unable to distinguish between a wind shear and a microburst A wind shear alert message will be displayed followed by an asterisk advising of a possible wind shear outside of the system network
NOTEminus LLWAS NE++ when associated with TDWR can detect wind shearmicrobursts outside the network if the TDWR fails
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Appropriate wind or alert information) POSSIBLE WIND SHEAR OUTSIDE THE NETWORK
(d) If unstable conditions produce multiple alerts issue an advisory of multiple wind shear microburst alerts followed by specific alert or wind information most appropriate to the aircraft opera-tion
PHRASEOLOGYminus MULTIPLE WIND SHEARMICROBURST ALERTS (specific alert or wind information)
(e) The LLWAS NE++ and LLWASminusRS are designed to operate with as many as 50 percent of the total sensors inoperative When all three remote sensors designated for a specific runway arrival or departure wind display line are inoperative then the LLWAS NE++ and LLWASminusRS for that runway arrivaldeparture must be considered out of service When a specific runway arrival or departure wind display line is inoperative and wind shearmicroburst activity is likely (for example frontal activity convective storms PIREPs) the following statement must be included on the ATIS ldquoWIND SHEAR AND
MICROBURST INFORMATION FOR RUNWAY (runway number) ARRIVALDEPARTURE NOT AVAILABLErdquo NOTEminus The geographic situation display (GSD) is a supervisory planning tool and is not intended to be a primary tool for microburst or wind shear
c Wind Shear Escape Procedures
1 If an aircraft under your control informs you that it is performing a wind shear escape do not issue control instructions that are contrary to pilot actions ATC should continue to provide safety alerts regarding terrain or obstacles and traffic advisories for the escape aircraft as appropriate EXAMPLEminus ldquoDenver Tower United 1154 wind shear escaperdquo
NOTEminus Aircraft that execute a wind shear escape maneuver will usually conduct a full power climb straight ahead and will not accept any control instructions until onboard systems advise the crew or the pilot in command (PIC) advises ATC that the escape maneuver is no longer required REFERENCEminus PCG Term ndash Wind Shear Escape
2 Unless advised by additional aircraft that they are also performing an escape procedure do not presume that other aircraft in the proximity of the escape aircraft are responding to wind shear alertsevents as well Continue to provide control instructions safety alerts and traffic advisories as appropriate
3 Once the responding aircraft has initiated a wind shear escape maneuver the controller is not responsible for providing approved separation between the aircraft that is responding to an escape and any other aircraft airspace terrain or obstacle Responsibility for approved separation resumes when one of the following conditions are met
(a) Departures
(1) A crew member informs ATC that the wind shear escape maneuver is complete and ATC observes that approved separation has been re-estab-lished or
(2) A crew member informs ATC that the escape maneuver is complete and has resumed a previously assigned departure clearancerouting
(b) Arrivals
(1) A crew member informs ATC that the escape maneuver is complete and
General 3minus1minus4
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
(2) The aircrew has executed an alternate clearance or requested further instructions
NOTEminus When the escape procedure is complete the flight crew must advise ATC they are returning to their previously assigned clearance or request further instructions
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDenver Tower United 1154 wind shear escape complete resuming last assigned heading(name) DPclearancerdquo
Or
ldquoDenver Tower United 1154 wind shear escape complete request further instructionsrdquo
3minus1minus9 USE OF TOWER RADAR DISPLAYS
a Uncertified tower display workstations must be used only as an aid to assist controllers in visually locating aircraft or in determining their spatial relationship to known geographical points Radar services and traffic advisories are not to be provided using uncertified tower display workstations General information may be given in an easy to understand manner such as ldquoto your rightrdquo or ldquoahead of yourdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoFollow the aircraft ahead of you passing the river at the stacksrdquo ldquoKing Air passing left to rightrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus5minus3 Functional Use of Certified Tower Radar Displays
b Local controllers may use certified tower radar displays for the following purposes
1 To determine an aircraftrsquos identification exact location or spatial relationship to other aircraft
NOTEminus This authorization does not alter visual separation procedures When employing visual separation the provisions of Para 7minus2minus1 Visual Separation apply unless otherwise authorized by the Service Area Director of Air Traffic Operations
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus2 Primary Radar Identification Methods FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus4 Terminal Automation Systems Identification Methods
2 To provide aircraft with radar traffic advisories
3 To provide a direction or suggested headings to VFR aircraft as a method for radar identification or as an advisory aid to navigation
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Identification) PROCEED (direction)minusBOUND (other instructions or information as necessary)
or
(identification) SUGGESTED HEADING (degrees) (other instructions as necessary)
NOTEminus It is important that the pilot be aware of the fact that the directions or headings being provided are suggestions or are advisory in nature This is to keep the pilot from being inadvertently misled into assuming that radar vectors (and other associated radar services) are being provided when in fact they are not
4 To provide information and instructions to aircraft operating within the surface area for which the tower has responsibility
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTURN BASE LEG NOWrdquo
NOTEminus Unless otherwise authorized tower radar displays are intended to be an aid to local controllers in meeting their responsibilities to the aircraft operating on the runways or within the surface area They are not intended to provide radar benefits to pilots except for those accrued through a more efficient and effective local control position In addition local controllers at nonapproach control towers must devote the majority of their time to visually scanning the runways and local area an assurance of continued positive radar identification could place distracting and operationally inefficient requirements upon the local controller Therefore since the requirements of Para 5minus3minus1 Application cannot be assured the radar functions prescribed above are not considered to be radar services and pilots should not be advised of being in ldquoradar contactrdquo
c Additional functions may be performed provided the procedures have been reviewed and authorized by appropriate management levels REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus4 Minima
3minus1minus10 OBSERVED ABNORMALITIES
When requested by a pilot or when you deem it necessary inform an aircraft of any observed abnormal aircraft condition
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Item) APPEARS (observed condition)
General 3minus1minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
EXAMPLEminus ldquoLanding gear appears uprdquo ldquoLanding gear appears down and in placerdquo ldquoRear baggage door appears openrdquo
3minus1minus11 SURFACE AREA RESTRICTIONS
a If traffic conditions permit approve a pilotrsquos request to cross Class C or Class D surface areas or exceed the Class C or Class D airspace speed limit Do not however approve a speed in excess of 250 knots (288 mph) unless the pilot informs you a higher minimum speed is required
NOTEminus 14 CFR Section 91117 permits speeds in excess of 250 knots (288 mph) when so required or recommended in the airplane flight manual or required by normal military operating procedures
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus16 Surface Areas
b Do not approve a pilotrsquos request or ask a pilot to conduct unusual maneuvers within surface areas of Class B C or D airspace if they are not essential to the performance of the flight
EXCEPTION A pilotrsquos request to conduct aerobatic practice activities may be approved when operating in accordance with a letter of agreement and the activity will have no adverse effect on safety of the air traffic operation or result in a reduction of service to other users
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 5minus4minus8 Aerobatic Practice Areas
NOTEminus These unusual maneuvers include unnecessary low passes unscheduled flybys practice instrument approaches to altitudes below specified minima (unless a landing or touch-and-go is to be made) or any so-called ldquobuzz jobsrdquo wherein a flight is conducted at a low altitude andor a high rate of speed for thrill purposes Such maneuvers increase hazards to persons and property and contribute to noise complaints
3minus1minus12 VISUALLY SCANNING RUNWAYS
a Local controllers must visually scan runways to the maximum extent possible
b Ground control must assist local control in visually scanning runways especially when runways are in close proximity to other movement areas
3minus1minus13 ESTABLISHING TWOminusWAY COMMUNICATIONS
Pilots are required to establish two-way radio communications before entering the Class D airspace If the controller responds to a radio call with ldquo(ac call sign) standbyrdquo radio communications have been established and the pilot can enter the Class D airspace If workload or traffic conditions prevent immediate provision of Class D services inform the pilot to remain outside the Class D airspace until conditions permit the services to be provided
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Ac call sign) REMAIN OUTSIDE DELTA AIRSPACE AND STANDBY
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus2minus1 Visual Separation
3minus1minus14 GROUND OPERATIONS WHEN VOLCANIC ASH IS PRESENT
When volcanic ash is present on the airport surface and to the extent possible
a Avoid requiring aircraft to come to a full stop while taxiing
b Provide for a rolling takeoff for all departures
NOTEminus When aircraft begin a taxi or takeoff roll on ash contaminated surfaces large amounts of volcanic ash will again become airborne This newly airborne ash will significantly reduce visibility and will be ingested by the engines of following aircraft
REFERENCEminus AIM Para 7minus5minus9 Flight Operations in Volcanic Ash
3minus1minus15 GROUND OPERATIONS RELATED TO THREEFOURminusHOUR TARMAC RULE
When a request is made by the pilotminusinminuscommand of an aircraft to return to the ramp gate or alternate deplaning area due to the ThreeFourminusHour Tarmac Rule
a Provide the requested services as soon as operationally practical or
b Advise the pilotminusinminuscommand that the reques-ted service cannot be accommodated because it would create a significant disruption to air traffic operations
General 3minus1minus6
81519 JO 711065Y
NOTEminus Facility procedures including actions that constitute a significant disruption vary by airport and must be identified in the facility directive pertaining to the ThreeFourminusHour Tarmac Rule
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Identification) TAXI TO (ramp gate or alternate deplaning area) VIA (route)
or
(Identification) EXPECT A (number) MINUTE DELAY DUE TO (ground andor landing andor departing) TRAFFIC
or
(Identification) UNABLE DUE TO OPERATIONAL DISRUPTION
REFERENCEminus DOT Rule Enhancing Airline Passenger Protections 14 CFR Part 259 commonly referred to as the ThreeFourminusHour Tarmac Rule
General 3minus1minus7
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 2 Visual Signals
3minus2minus1 LIGHT SIGNALS
Use ATC light signals from TBL 3minus2minus1 to control aircraft and the movement of vehicles equipment and personnel on the movement area when radio communications cannot be employed REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus10 Altitude Restricted Low Approach FAA Order JO 72103 Para 4minus3minus1 Letters of Agreement
3minus2minus2 WARNING SIGNAL
Direct a general warning signal alternating red and green to aircraft or vehicle operators as appropriate when
NOTEminus The warning signal is not a prohibitive signal and can be followed by any other light signal as circ*mstances permit
a Aircraft are converging and a collision hazard exists
b Mechanical trouble exists of which the pilot might not be aware
c Other hazardous conditions are present which call for intensified pilot or operator alertness These conditions may include obstructions soft field ice on the runway etc
3minus2minus3 RECEIVER-ONLY ACKNOWLEDGMENT
To obtain acknowledgment from an aircraft equipped with receiver only request the aircraft to do the following
a Fixed-wing aircraft
1 Between sunrise and sunset
(a) Move ailerons or rudders while on the ground
(b) Rock wings while in flight
2 Between sunset and sunrise Flash naviga-tion or landing lights
b Helicopters
1 Between sunrise and sunset
(a) While hovering either turn the helicopter toward the controlling facility and flash the landing light or rock the tip path plane
(b) While in flight either flash the landing light or rock the tip path plane
2 Between sunset and sunrise Flash landing light or search light
TBL 3minus2minus1
ATC Light Signals
Meaning
Color and type of signal Aircraft on the ground Aircraft in flight Movement of vehicles
equipment and personnel
Steady green Cleared for takeoff Cleared to land Cleared to cross proceed go
Flashing green Cleared to taxi Return for landing (to be followed by steady green at the proper time)
Not applicable
Steady red Stop Give way to other aircraft and continue circling
Stop
Flashing red Taxi clear of landing area or runway in use
Airport unsafeminus Do not land Clear the taxiwayrunway
Flashing white Return to starting point on airport
Not applicable Return to starting point on airport
Alternating red and green General Warning Signalminus Exercise Extreme Caution
General Warning Signalminus Exercise Extreme Caution
General Warning Signalminus Exercise Extreme Caution
Visual Signals 3minus2minus1
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 3 Airport Conditions
3minus3minus1 LANDING AREA CONDITION
If you observe or are informed of any condition which affects the safe use of a landing area
NOTEminus 1 The airport managementmilitary operations office is responsible for observing and reporting the condition of the landing area
2 It is the responsibility of the agency operating the airport to provide the tower with current information regarding airport conditions
3 A disabled aircraft on a runway after occupants are clear is normally handled by flight standards and airport managementmilitary operations office personnel in the same manner as any obstruction eg construction equipment
a Relay the information to the airport manager military operations office concerned
b Copy verbatim any information received and record the name of the person submitting it
c Confirm information obtained from other than authorized airport or FAA personnel unless this function is the responsibility of the military operations office
NOTEminus Civil airport managers are required to provide a list of airport employees who are authorized to issue information concerning conditions affecting the safe use of the airport
d If you are unable to contact the airport management or operator issue a NOTAM publiciz-ing an unsafe condition and inform the management or operator as soon as practicable
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDISABLED AIRCRAFT ON RUNWAYrsquorsquo
NOTEminus 1 Legally only the airport managementmilitary opera-tions office can close a runway
2 Military controllers are not authorized to issue NOTAMs It is the responsibility of the military operations office
e Runway Condition Codes (RwyCC)
1 Furnish RwyCC as received from the Airport Operator to aircraft via the ATIS
(a) Use the runway number followed by the RwyCC for each of the three runway segments and include the time of the report
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway TwominusSeven condition codes two two three at one zero one eight zulurdquo
(b) When an update to the RwyCC is provided verbally issue to all aircraft until the ATIS broadcast can be updated
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway (number) condition codes two three onerdquo
REFERENCEminus Advisory Circular AC 1505200minus30D Airport Winter Safety and Operations
2 Issue FICON NOTAMs upon pilot request workload permitting
f In the absence of RwyCC issue to aircraft only factual information as reported by the airport operator or pilots concerning the condition of the runway surface describing the accumulation of precipitation
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAll runways covered by compacted snow 6 inches deeprdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus12 Airport Conditions
3minus3minus2 CLOSEDUNSAFE RUNWAY INFORMATION
If an aircraft requests to takeoff land or touch-and-go on a closed or unsafe runway inform the pilot the runway is closed or unsafe and
a If the pilot persists in hisher request quote himher the appropriate parts of the NOTAM applying to the runway and inform himher that a clearance cannot be issued
b Then if the pilot insists and in your opinion the intended operation would not adversely affect other traffic inform himher that the operation will be at hisher own risk
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (runway number) CLOSEDUNSAFE
If appropriate (quote NOTAM information)
UNABLE TO ISSUE DEPARTURELANDINGTOUCHminus
Airport Conditions 3minus3minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
ANDminusGO CLEARANCE DEPARTURELANDINGTOUCHminusANDminusGO WILL BE AT YOUR OWN RISK
c Except as permitted by Paragraph 4minus8minus7 Side-Step Maneuver where parallel runways are served by separate ILS systems and one of the runways is closed the ILS associated with the closed runway should not be used for approaches unless not using the ILS would have an adverse impact on the operational efficiency of the airport
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus5 Landing Clearance FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus12 Airport Conditions
3minus3minus3 TIMELY INFORMATION
Issue airport condition information necessary for an aircraftrsquos safe operation in time for it to be useful to the pilot Include the following as appropriate
a Construction work on or immediately adjacent to the movement area
b Rough portions of the movement area
c Braking conditions caused by ice snow slush or water
d Snowdrifts or piles of snow on or along the edges of the area and the extent of any plowed area
e Parked aircraft on the movement area
f Irregular operation of part or all of the airport lighting system
g Volcanic ash on any airport surface area and whether the ash is wet or dry (if known)
NOTEminus Braking action on wet ash may be degraded Dry ash on the runway may necessitate minimum use of reverse thrust
h Other pertinent airport conditions
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus12 Airport Conditions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus9 Reporting Essential Flight Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus10 Altitude Restricted Low Approach
3minus3minus4 BRAKING ACTION
Furnish quality of braking action as received from pilots to all aircraft as follows
a Describe the quality of braking action using the terms ldquogoodrdquo ldquogood to mediumrdquo ldquomediumrdquo ldquomedium to poorrdquo ldquopoorrdquo or ldquonilrdquo If the pilot reports
braking action in other than the approved terms ask himher to categorize braking action in these terms NOTEminus The term ldquonilrdquo is used to indicate bad or no braking action
b Include type of aircraft from which the report is received EXAMPLEminus ldquoBraking action medium reported by a heavy Boeing Seven SixtyminusSevenrdquo ldquoBraking action poor reported by a Boeing Seven ThirtyminusSevenrdquo
c If the braking action report affects only a portion of a runway obtain enough information from the pilot to describe the braking action in terms easily understood by other pilots EXAMPLEminus ldquoBraking action poor first half of runway reported by a Boeing Seven FiftyminusSevenrdquo ldquoBraking action good to medium beyond the intersection of Runway Two Seven reported by an Airbus Three TwentyminusOnerdquo
NOTEminus Descriptive terms such as the first or the last half of the runway should normally be used rather than landmark descriptions such as opposite the fire station south of a taxiway etc Landmarks extraneous to the landing runway are difficult to distinguish during low visibility at night or anytime a pilot is busy landing an aircraft
d Issue the runway surface condition andor the Runway Condition Reading (RCR) if provided to all USAF and ANG aircraft Issue the RCR to other aircraft upon pilot request EXAMPLEminus ldquoIce on runway RCR zero five patchyrdquo
NOTEminus USAF offices furnish RCR information at airports serving USAF and ANG aircraft REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus12 Airport Conditions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus3minus5 Braking Action Advisories
3minus3minus5 BRAKING ACTION ADVISORIES
a When runway braking action reports are received from pilots which include the terms ldquomediumrdquo ldquopoorrdquo or ldquonilrdquo or whenever weather conditions are conducive to deteriorating or rapidly changing runway conditions include on the ATIS broadcast the statement ldquoBraking Action Advisories are in effectrdquo REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus4minus1 Automatic Terminal Information Service (ATIS)
3minus3minus2 Airport Conditions
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
b During the time Braking Action Advisories are in effect take the following action
1 Issue the latest braking action report for the runway in use to each arriving and departing aircraft early enough to be of benefit to the pilot When possible include reports from super or heavy aircraft when the arriving or departing aircraft is a super or heavy
2 If no report has been received for the runway of intended use issue an advisory to that effect
PHRASEOLOGYminus NO BRAKING ACTION REPORTS RECEIVED FOR RUNWAY (runway number)
3 Advise the Airport Operator that runway braking action reports of ldquogood to mediumrdquo ldquomediumrdquo ldquomedium to poorrdquo ldquopoorrdquo or ldquonilrdquo have been received
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 4minus3minus1 Letters of Agreement
4 Solicit PIREPs of runway braking action
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus9minus3 Content FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus1 Departure Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus1 Landing Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus12 Airport Conditions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus6minus2 PIREP Solicitation and Dissemination
3minus3minus6 ARRESTING SYSTEM OPERATION
a For normal operations arresting systems remotely controlled by ATC must remain in the retracted or down position
NOTEminus 1 USNminus Runway Arresting Gearminus barriers are not operated by ATC personnel Readinessrigging of the equipment is the responsibility of the operations department
2 A request to raise a barrier or hook cable means the barrier or cable on the departure end of the runway If an approach end engagement is required the pilot or military authority will specifically request that the approach end cable be raised
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 76104 Chapter 9 Section 3 Aircraft Arresting System Single Frequency Approach (SFA) Simulated Flameout (SFO)Emergency Landing Pattern (ELP) Operations Celestial Navigation (CELNAV) Training Para 9minus3minus1 through Para 9minus3minus8
b Raise aircraft arresting systems whenever
1 Requested by a pilot
NOTEminus The standard emergency phraseology for a pilot requesting an arresting system to be raised for immediate engagement is
ldquoBARRIER minus BARRIER minus BARRIERrdquo
or
ldquoCABLE minus CABLE minus CABLErdquo
2 Requested by military authority eg airfield manager supervisor of flying mobile control officer etc
NOTEminus USAF Web barriers at the departure end of the runway may remain in the up position when requested by the senior operational commander The IFR Enroute Supplement and AP-1 will describe specific barrier configuration ATC will advise transient aircraft of the barrier configuration using the phraseology in subpara c below
3 A military jet aircraft is landing with known or suspected radio failure or conditions (drag chutehydraulicelectrical failure etc) that indicate an arresting system may be needed Exceptions are authorized for military aircraft which cannot engage an arresting system (Cminus9 Cminus141 Cminus5 Tminus39 etc) and should be identified in a letter of agreement andor appropriate military directive
c When requested by military authority due to freezing weather conditions or malfunction of the activating mechanism the barriercable may remain in a raised position provided aircraft are advised
PHRASEOLOGYminus YOUR DEPARTURELANDING WILL BE TOWARD OVER A RAISED BARRIERCABLE ON RUNWAY (number) (location distance as appropriate)
d Inform civil and US Army aircraft whenever rubber supported cables are in place at the approach end of the landing runway and include the distance of the cables from the threshold This information may be omitted if it is published in the Domestic Notices webpage International Notices webpage or the DOD FLIP
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway One Four arresting cable one thousand feet from thresholdrdquo
e When arresting system operation has been requested inform the pilot of the indicated barriercable position
Airport Conditions 3minus3minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Identification) BARRIERCABLE INDICATES UPDOWN CLEARED FOR TAKEOFFTO LAND
f Time permitting advise pilots of the availability of all arresting systems on the runway in question when a pilot requests barrier information
g If an aircraft engages a raised barriercable initiate crash alarm procedures immediately
h For preplanned practice engagements not associated with emergencies crash alarm systems need not be activated if in accordance with local military operating procedures all required notifica-tions are made before the practice engagement
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus12 Airport Conditions
3minus3minus7 FAR FIELD MONITOR (FFM) RE-MOTE STATUS UNIT
a To meet the demand for more facilities capable of operating under CAT III weather Type II equipment is being upgraded to Integrity Level 3 This integrity level will support operations which place a high degree of reliance on ILS guidance for positioning through touchdown
b Installation of the FFM remote status indicating units is necessary to attain the integrity necessary to meet internationally agreed upon reliability values in support of CAT III operations on Type II ILS equipment The remote status indicating unit used in conjunction with Type II equipment adds a third integrity test thereby producing an approach aid which has integrity capable of providing Level 3 service
c The remote status sensing unit when installed in the tower cab will give immediate indications of localizer out-of-tolerance conditions The alarm in the FFM remote status sensing unit indicates an inoperative or an out-of-tolerance localizer signal eg the course may have shifted due to equipment
malfunction or vehicleaircraft encroachment into the critical area
d Operation of the FFM remote sensing unit will be based on the prevailing weather The FFM remote sensing unit must be operational when the weather is below CAT II ILS minimums REFERENCEminus FAA Order 675024 Appendix A Abnormal Checklist
e When the remote status unit indicates that the localizer FFM is in alarm (aural warning following the preset delay) and
1 The aircraft is outside the middle marker (MM) or in the absence of a MM frac12 mile final check for encroachment of those portions of the critical area that can be seen from the tower It is understood that the entire critical area may not be visible due to low ceilings and poor visibility The check is strictly to determine possible causal factors for the out-of-toler-ance situation If the alarm has not cleared prior to the aircraftrsquos arriving at the MM or in the absence of a MM frac12 mile final immediately issue an advisory that the FFM remote status sensing unit indicates the localizer is unreliable
2 The aircraft is between the MM or frac12 mile final and the inner marker (IM) or if the IM is not installed the CAT II Missed Approach Point (MAP) immediately issue an advisory that the FFM remote status sensing unit indicates the localizer is unreliable
PHRASEOLOGYminus CAUTION MONITOR INDICATES RUNWAY (number) LOCALIZER UNRELIABLE
3 The aircraft has passed the IM or the CAT II MAP (if the IM is not installed) there is no action requirement Although the FFM has been modified with filters which dampen the effect of false alarms you may expect alarms when aircraft are located between the FFM and the localizer antenna either on landing or on takeoff REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus12 Airport Conditions
3minus3minus4 Airport Conditions
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 4 Airport Lighting
3minus4minus1 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Whenever you become aware that an emergency has or will occur take action to provide for the operation of all appropriate airport lighting aids as required REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus4minus2 Lighting Requirements
3minus4minus2 RUNWAY END IDENTIFIER LIGHTS (REIL)
When separate onminusoff controls are provided operate runway end identifier lights
a When the associated runway lights are lighted Turn the REIL off after
1 An arriving aircraft has landed
2 A departing aircraft has left the traffic pattern area
3 It is determined that the lights are of no further use to the pilot
b As required by facility directives to meet local conditions
c As requested by the pilot
d Operate intensity setting in accordance with the values in TBL 3minus4minus1 except as prescribed in subparas b and c above
TBL 3minus4minus1
REIL Intensity SettingminusThree Step System
Settings Visibility
Day Night
3 Less than 2 miles Less than 1 mile
2 2 to 5 miles inclusive 1 to but not including 3 miles
1 When requested 3 miles or more
3minus4minus3 VISUAL APPROACH SLOPE INDICATORS (VASI)
VASI systems with remote onminusoff switching must be operated when they serve the runway in use and where intensities are controlled in accordance with TBL 3minus4minus2 and TBL 3minus4minus3 except
a As required by facility directives to meet local conditions
b As required by the pilot
TBL 3minus4minus2
VASI Intensity SettingminusTwo Step System
Step PeriodCondition
High DayminusSunrise to sunset
Low NightminusSunset to sunrise
TBL 3minus4minus3
VASI Intensity SettingminusThree Step System
Step PeriodCondition
High DayminusSunrise to sunset
Medium TwilightminusFrom sunset to 30 minutes after sunset and from 30 minutes before sunrise to sunrise and during twilight in Alaska
Low NightminusSunset to sunrise
During a 1 year period twilight may vary 26 to 43 minutes between 25 and 49N latitude
NOTEminus The basic FAA standard for VASI systems permits independent operation by means of photoelectric device This system has no onminusoff control feature and is intended for continuous operation Other VASI systems in use include those that are operated remotely from the control tower These systems may consist of either a photoelectric intensity control with only an onminusoff switch a two step intensity system or a three step intensity system REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus6minus5 Visual Approach Slope Indicator (VASI) Systems FAA Order 68502 Visual Guidance Lighting Systems
3minus4minus4 PRECISION APPROACH PATH INDICATORS (PAPI)
PAPI systems with remote onminusoff switching shall be operated when they serve the runway in use and where intensities are controlled in accordance with TBL 3minus4minus4 except
a As required by local facility directives to meet local conditions
b As requested by the pilot
NOTEminus The basic FAA standard for PAPI systems permits independent operation by means of photoelectric device This system has no onminusoff control feature and is intended for continuous operation Other PAPI systems in use include those that are operated remotely from the control tower These systems may consist of either a photoelectric
Airport Lighting 3minus4minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
intensity control with only an onminusoff switch or a fiveminusstep intensity system
REFERENCEminus FAA Order 68502 Visual Guidance Lighting Systems
TBL 3minus4minus4
PAPI Intensity Setting minus Five Step System
Step PeriodCondition
5 On Pilot Request
4 Day minus Sunrise to sunset
3 Night minus Sunset to sunrise
2 On Pilot Request
1 On Pilot Request
During a 1 year period twilight may vary 26 to 43 minutes between 25 and 49N latitude
3minus4minus5 APPROACH LIGHTS
Operate approach lights
a Between sunset and sunrise when one of the following conditions exists
1 They serve the landing runway
2 They serve a runway to which an approach is being made but aircraft will land on another runway
b Between sunrise and sunset when the ceiling is less than 1000 feet or the prevailing visibility is 5 miles or less and approaches are being made to
1 A landing runway served by the lights
2 A runway served by the lights but aircraft are landing on another runway
3 The airport but landing will be made on a runway served by the lights
c As requested by the pilot
d As you deem necessary if not contrary to pilotrsquos request
NOTEminus In the interest of energy conservation the ALS should be turned off when not needed for aircraft operations
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus4minus6 ALS Intensity Settings
3minus4minus6 ALS INTENSITY SETTINGS
When operating ALS as prescribed in Paragraph 3minus4minus5 Approach Lights operate intensity controls in accordance with the values in TBL 3minus4minus5 except
a When facility directives specify other settings to meet local atmospheric topographic and twilight conditions
b As requested by the pilot
c As you deem necessary if not contrary to pilotrsquos request
TBL 3minus4minus5
ALS Intensity Setting
Step Visibility
(Applicable to runway served by lights)
Day Night
5 Less than 1 mile When requested
4 1 to but not including 3 miles When requested
3 3 to but not including 5 miles Less than 1 mile
2 5 to but not including 7 miles 1 to 3 miles inclusive
1 When requested Greater than 3 miles
andor 6000 feet or less of the RVR on the runway served by the ALS and RVR
NOTEminus Daylight steps 2 and 3 provide recommended settings applicable to conditions in subparas b and c At night use step 4 or 5 only when requested by a pilot
3minus4minus7 SEQUENCED FLASHING LIGHTS (SFL)
Operate Sequenced Flashing Lights
NOTEminus SFL are a component of the ALS and cannot be operated when the ALS is off
a When the visibility is less than 3 miles and instrument approaches are being made to the runway served by the associated ALS
b As requested by the pilot
c As you deem necessary if not contrary to pilotrsquos request
3minus4minus8 MALSRODALS
Operate MALSRODALS that have separate onminusoff and intensity setting controls in accordance with TBL 3minus4minus6 and TBL 3minus4minus7 except
a When facility directives specify other settings to meet local atmospheric topographic and twilight conditions
3minus4minus2 Airport Lighting
81519 JO 711065Y
b As requested by the pilot
c As you deem necessary if not contrary to pilotrsquos request
TBL 3minus4minus6
Two Step MALSOne Step RAILTwo Step ODALS
Settings Visibility
Day Night
MALSODALS RAIL
Hi On
Less than 3 miles
Less than 3 miles
MALSODALS RAIL
Low
Off
When requested 3 miles or more
At locations providing partminustime control tower service if duplicate controls are not provided in the associated FSS the MALSRODALS must be set to low intensity during the hours of darkness when the tower is not staffed
TBL 3minus4minus7
Three Step MALSThree Step RAIL Three Step ODALS
Settings Visibility
Day Night
3 Less than 2 miles Less than 1 mile
2 2 to 5 miles inclusive 1 to but not including 3 miles
1 When requested 3 miles or more
At locations providing partminustime control tower service if duplicate controls are not provided in the FSS on the airport the airminustominusground radio link shall be activated during the hours of darkness when the tower is unmanned If there is no radio airminustominusground control the MALSRODALS shall be set on intensity setting 2 during the hours of darkness when the tower is not staffed
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus6minus2 Operation of Lights When Tower is Closed
3minus4minus9 ALSFminus2SSALR
a When the prevailing visibility is 34 mile or less or the RVR is 4000 feet or less operate the ALSFminus2 system as follows
1 As requested by the pilot
2 As you deem necessary if not contrary to pilot request
b Operate the SSALR system when the condi-tions in subpara a are not a factor
3minus4minus10 RUNWAY EDGE LIGHTS
Operate the runway edge light systems serving the runways in use as follows
a Between sunset and sunrise turn the lights on
1 For departures Before an aircraft taxies onto the runway and until it leaves the Class B Class C or Class D surface area
2 For arrivals
(a) IFR aircraftminusBefore the aircraft begins final approach or
(b) VFR aircraftminusBefore the aircraft enters the Class B Class C or Class D surface area and
(c) Until the aircraft has taxied off the landing runway
b Between sunrise and sunset turn the lights on as shown in subparas a1 and a2 when the surface visibility is less than 2 miles
c As required by facility directives to meet local conditions
d Different from subparas a b or c above when
1 You consider it necessary or
2 Requested by a pilot and no other known aircraft will be adversely affected
NOTEminus Pilots may request lights to be turned on or off contrary to subparas a b or c However 14 CFR Part 135 operators are required to landtakeoff on lighted runwaysheliport landing areas at night
e Do not turn on the runway edge lights when a NOTAM closing the runway is in effect
NOTEminus Application concerns use for takeoffslandings approaches and does not preclude turning lights on for use of unaffected portions of a runway for taxiing aircraft surface vehicles maintenance repair etc
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus6minus3 Incompatible Light System Operation FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus6minus9 Runway Edge Lights Associated With Medium Approach Light SystemRunway Alignment Indicator Lights
Airport Lighting 3minus4minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
3minus4minus11 HIGH INTENSITY RUNWAY RUNWAY CENTERLINE AND TOUCHDOWN ZONE LIGHTS
Operate high intensity runway and associated runway centerline and touchdown zone lights in accordance with TBL 3minus4minus8 except
a Where a facility directive specifies other settings to meet local conditions
b As requested by the pilot
c As you deem necessary if not contrary to pilot request
TBL 3minus4minus8
HIRL RCLS TDZL Intensity Setting
Step Visibility
Day Night
5 Less than 1 mile When requested
4 1 to but not including 2 miles
Less than 1 mile
3 2 to but not including 3 miles
1 to but not including 3 miles
2 When requested 3 to 5 miles inclusive
1 When requested More than 5 miles
andor appropriate RVR equivalent
3minus4minus12 HIRL ASSOCIATED WITH MALSR
Operate HIRL which control the associated MALSR in accordance with TBL 3minus4minus9 except
a As requested by the pilot
b As you deem necessary if not contrary to the pilotrsquos request
TBL 3minus4minus9
HIRL Associated with MALSR
Step Visibility
Day Night
5 Less than 1 mile When requested
4 1 to but not including 2 miles
Less than 1 mile
3 2 to but not including 3 miles
1 to but not including 3 miles
2 When requested 3 to 5 miles inclusive
1 When requested More than 5 miles
NOTEminus When going from a given brightness step setting to a lower setting rotation of the brightness control to a point below the intended step setting and then back to the appropriate step setting will ensure that the MALSR will operate at the appropriate brightness
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus4minus14 Medium Intensity Runway Lights
3minus4minus13 HIRL CHANGES AFFECTING RVR
Keep the appropriate approach controller or PAR controller informed in advance if possible of HIRL changes that affect RVR
3minus4minus14 MEDIUM INTENSITY RUNWAY LIGHTS (MIRL)
Operate MIRL or MIRL which control the associated MALSR in accordance with TBL 3minus4minus10 except
a As requested by the pilot
b As you deem necessary if not contrary to the pilotrsquos request
TBL 3minus4minus10
MIRL Intensity Setting
Step Visibility
Day Night
3 Less than 2 miles Less than 1 mile
2 2 to 3 miles 1 to 3 miles
1 When requested More than 3 miles
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus4minus12 HIRL Associated With MALSR
3minus4minus4 Airport Lighting
81519 JO 711065Y
3minus4minus15 HIGH SPEED TURNOFF LIGHTS
Operate high speed turnoff lights
a Whenever the associated runway lights are used for arriving aircraft Leave them on until the aircraft has either entered a taxiway or passed the last light
b As required by facility directives to meet local conditions
c As requested by the pilot
3minus4minus16 TAXIWAY LIGHTS
Operate taxiway lights in accordance with TBL 3minus4minus11 TBL 3minus4minus12 or TBL 3minus4minus13 except
a Where a facility directive specifies other settings or times to meet local conditions
b As requested by the pilot
c As you deem necessary if not contrary to pilot request
TBL 3minus4minus11
Three Step Taxiway Lights
Step Visibility
Day Night
3 Less than 1 mile When requested
2 When requested Less than 1 mile
1 When requested 1 mile of more
TBL 3minus4minus12
Five Step Taxiway Lights
Step Visibility
Day Night
5 Less than 1 mile When requested
4 When requested Less than 1 mile
3 When requested 1 mile or more
1 amp 2 When requested When requested
TBL 3minus4minus13
One Step Taxiway Lights
Day Night
Less than 1 mile On
NOTEminus AC 1505340-30 Design and Installation Details for Airport Visual Aides contains recommended brightness levels for variable setting taxiway lights
3minus4minus17 OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS
If controls are provided turn the lights on between sunset and sunrise
3minus4minus18 ROTATING BEACON
If controls are provided turn the rotating beacon on
a Between sunset and sunrise
b Between sunrise and sunset when the reported ceiling or visibility is below basic VFR minima
3minus4minus19 RUNWAY STATUS LIGHTS (RWSL)
TERMINAL
RWSL is equipped with automatic intensity settings and must be operated on a continuous basis except under the following conditions
a If a pilot or vehicle report indicates any portion of the RWSL system is on and is not able to accept an ATC clearance then
1 ATC must visually scan the entire runway If the runway is observed to be clear and the lights are still illuminated then the lights must be turned off and clearance re-issued
2 If a portion of the runway is not visible from the tower ATC must visually scan the ASDE system If the runway is observed to be clear and the lights are still illuminated then the lights must be turned off and clearance re-issued
b When the RWSL Operational Status displays ldquoLost Comm with Systemrdquo consider the RWSL system out of service until checked and confirmed to be operational by technical operations personnel
c Once RWSL systems are turned off they must remain off until returned to service by technical operations personnel
d Upon pilot request adjust the light intensity
Airport Lighting 3minus4minus5
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 5 Runway Selection
3minus5minus1 SELECTION
a Except where a ldquorunway userdquo program is in effect use the runway most nearly aligned with the wind when 5 knots or more or the ldquocalm windrdquo runway when less than 5 knots (set tetrahedron accordingly) unless use of another runway
NOTEminus 1 If a pilot prefers to use a runway different from that specified the pilot is expected to advise ATC
2 At airports where a ldquorunway userdquo program is established ATC will assign runways deemed to have the least noise impact If in the interest of safety a runway different from that specified is preferred the pilot is expected to advise ATC accordingly ATC will honor such requests and advise pilots when the requested runway is noise sensitive
REFERENCEminus FAA Order 84009 National Safety and Operational Criteria for Runway Use Programs
1 Will be operationally advantageous or
2 Is requested by the pilot
b When conducting aircraft operations on other than the advertised active runway state the runway in use
3minus5minus2 STOL RUNWAYS
Use STOL runways as follows
a A designated STOL runway may be assigned only when requested by the pilot or as specified in a letter of agreement with an aircraft operator
b Issue the measured STOL runway length if the pilot requests it
3minus5minus3 TAILWIND COMPONENTS
When authorizing use of runways and a tailwind component exists always state both wind direction and velocity
NOTEminus The wind may be described as ldquocalmrdquo when appropriate
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus6minus3 Reporting Weather Conditions
Runway Selection 3minus5minus1
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 6 Airport Surface Detection Procedures
3minus6minus1 EQUIPMENT USAGE
a The operational status of ASDE systems must be determined during the relief briefing or as soon as possible after assuming responsibility for the associated position
b Use ASDE systems to augment visual observa-tion of aircraft landing or departing and aircraft or vehicular movements on runways and taxiways or other parts of the movement area
1 ASDE systems with safety logic must be operated continuously
2 ASDE systems without safety logic must be operated
(a) Continuously between sunset and sunrise
(b) When visibility is less than the most distant point in the active movement area or
(c) When in your judgment its use will assist you in the performance of your duties at any time
3minus6minus2 IDENTIFICATION
a To identify an observed targettrack on an ASDE system display correlate its position with one or more of the following
1 Pilotvehicle operator position report
2 Controllerrsquos visual observation
3 An identified target observed on the ASR or CTRD
b An observed targettrack on an ASDE system display may be identified as a false target by visual observation If the area containing a suspected false target is not visible from the tower an airport operations vehicle or pilots of aircraft operating in the area may be used to conduct the visual observation
c After positive verification that a target is false through pilotvehicle operator position report or controller visual observation the track may be temporarily dropped which will remove the target from the display and safety logic processing A notation must be made to FAA Form 7230minus4 Daily Record of Facility Operation when a track is temporarily dropped
3minus6minus3 INFORMATION USAGE
a ASDE system derived information may be used to
1 Formulate clearances and control instruc-tions to aircraft and vehicles on the movement area REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 3minus6minus2 ATC Surveillance Source Use
2 Position aircraft and vehicles using the movement area
3 Determine the exact location of aircraft and vehicles or spatial relationship to other aircraft vehicles on the movement area
4 Monitor compliance with control instructions by aircraft and vehicles on taxiways and runways
5 Confirm pilot reported positions
6 Provide directional taxi information as appropriate
PHRASEOLOGYminus TURN (leftright) ON THE TAXIWAYRUNWAY YOU ARE APPROACHING
b Do not provide specific navigational guidance (exact headings to be followed) unless an emergency exists or by mutual agreement with the pilot
NOTEminus It remains the pilotrsquos responsibility to navigate visually via routes to the clearance limit specified by the controller and to avoid other parked or taxiing aircraft vehicles or persons in the movement area
c Do not allow an aircraft to begin departure roll or cross the landing threshold whenever there is an unidentified targettrack displayed on the runway
3minus6minus4 SAFETY LOGIC ALERT RESPONSES
When the system generates an alert the controller must immediately assess the situation visually and as presented on the ASDE system display then take appropriate action as follows
a When an arrival aircraft (still airborne prior to the landing threshold) activates a warning alert the controller must issue gominusaround instructions (Exception Alerts involving known formation flights as they cross the landing threshold may be disregarded if all other factors are acceptable)
Airport Surface Detection Procedures 3minus6minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
NOTEminus The intent of this paragraph is that an aircraft does not land on the runway on that approach when the safety logic system has generated a warning alert A sideminusstep maneuver or circle to land on another runway satisfies this requirement
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus8minus1 SequenceSpacing Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus6 Same Runway Separation FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus3 Same Runway Separation PCG Termminus Go Around
b When two arrival aircraft or an arrival aircraft and a departing aircraft activate an alert the controller will issue gominusaround instructions or take appropriate action to ensure intersecting runway separation is maintained
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus8 Intersecting RunwayIntersecting Flight Path Operations FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus4 Intersecting RunwayIntersecting Flight Path Separation
c For other safety logic system alerts issue instructionsclearances based on good judgment and evaluation of the situation at hand
3minus6minus5 RADARminusONLY MODE
Radarminusonly mode is an enhancement of the ASDEminusX and ASSC systems which allows the system to stay operational with safety logic processing despite a critical fault in the Multilateration (MLAT) subsys-tem The system stays in full core alert status under radarminusonly mode without data block capability
3minus6minus2 Airport Surface Detection Procedures
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 7 Taxi and Ground Movement Procedures
3minus7minus1 GROUND TRAFFIC MOVEMENT
Issue by radio or directional light signals specific instructions which approve or disapprove the movement of aircraft vehicles equipment or personnel on the movement area except where permitted in an LOA
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 4minus3minus1 Letters of Agreement FAA Order JO 72103 Para 4minus3minus2 Appropriate Subjects
a Do not issue conditional instructions that are dependent upon the movement of an arrival aircraft on or approaching the runway or a departure aircraft established on a takeoff roll Do not say ldquoLine up and wait behind landing trafficrdquo or ldquoTaxiproceed across Runway ThreeminusSix behind departinglanding Cita-tionrdquo The above requirements do not preclude issuing instructions to follow an aircraft observed to be operating on the movement area in accordance with an ATC clearanceinstruction and in such a manner that the instructions to follow are not ambiguous
b Do not issue unconditional instructions when authorizing movement on a runwaytaxiway for the purpose of airfield checks or other airport operations Instructions must ensure positive control with specific instructions to proceed on a runway or movement area and as necessary hold short instructions
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus3 Use of Active Runways FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus7minus2 Taxi and Ground Movement Operations
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAirport 1 proceed on Runway 26R hold short of Runway 18Lrdquo
ldquoAirport 1 proceed on taxi way B hold short of Runway18Lrdquo
ldquoAirport 1 proceed on Runway 26Rrdquo (additional instructions as necessary)
NOTEminus 1 The following are examples of unconditional instruc-tions and are not approved for use ldquoTHE FIELD IS YOURSrdquo ldquoCLEARED ON ALL SURFACESrdquo ldquoTHE AIRPORT IS YOURSrdquo and ldquoPROCEED ON ALL RUNWAYS AND TAXIWAYSrdquo
2 ldquoPROCEED AS REQUESTEDrdquo is not approved phraseology for instructing aircraft vehicles equipment or personnel to cross or operate on a runway
c Do not use the word ldquoclearedrdquo in conjunction with authorization for aircraft to taxi or equipment vehiclepersonnel operations Use the prefix ldquotaxirdquo ldquoproceedrdquo or ldquoholdrdquo as appropriate for aircraft instructions and ldquoproceedrdquo or ldquoholdrdquo for equipment vehiclespersonnel
d Intersection departures may be initiated by a controller or a controller may authorize an intersection departure if a pilot requests Issue the measured distance from the intersection to the runway end rounded ldquodownrdquo to the nearest 50 feet to any pilot who requests and to all military aircraft unless use of the intersection is covered in appropriate directives
NOTEminus 1 Exceptions are authorized where specific military aircraft routinely make intersection takeoffs and proced-ures are defined in appropriate directives The authority exercising operational control of such aircraft ensures that all pilots are thoroughly familiar with these procedures including the usable runway length from the applicable intersection
2 Some airports publish ldquodeclared distancesrdquo for a particular runway These are published in the Chart Supplement US or the Aeronautical Information Publication (AIP) and there is no requirement that facility personnel be aware of them These distances are a means of satisfying airport design criteria and are intended to be used by pilots andor operators for preflight performance planning only There are no special markings signing or lighting associated with declared distances and they do not limit the actual runway available for use by an aircraft Therefore they cannot be used for any air traffic control purpose If pilots inquire about the existence of declared distances refer them to the Chart Supplement US or AIP
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) AT (taxiway designator) INTERSECTION DEPARTURE (remaining length) FEET AVAILABLE
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus4 Line Up and Wait (LUAW)
e Do not use the term ldquofull lengthrdquo when the runway length available for departures has been temporarily shortened On permanently shortened runways do not use the term ldquofull lengthrdquo until the
Taxi and Ground Movement Procedures 3minus7minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
Chart Supplement US is updated to include the change(s) REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10-3-12 Airport Construction FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10-3-13 Change in Runway Length Due to Construction
3minus7minus2 TAXI AND GROUND MOVEMENT OPERATIONS
Issue the route for the aircraftvehicle to follow on the movement area in concise and easy to understand terms The taxi clearanceroute must include the specific route to follow When a taxi clearance to a runway is issued to an aircraft confirm the aircraft has the correct runway assignment
NOTEminus 1 A pilotrsquos read back of taxi instructions with the runway assignment can be considered confirmation of runway assignment
2 Movement of aircraft or vehicles on nonmovement areas is the responsibility of the pilot the aircraft operator or the airport management
a When authorizing an aircraft to taxi or a vehicle to proceed on the movement area specify the taxi instructionsroute If it is the intent to hold the aircraftvehicle short of
1 A runway issue the route up to the runway hold short point When issuing a runway crossing clearance include specific instructions on where to cross the runway
2 Any other point along the route issue
(a) the route up to the hold short point or
(b) the entire route and then state the hold short instructions
After issuing a crossing clearance specify the taxi instructionsroute an aircraftvehicle is to follow if not previously issued
NOTEminus The absence of holding instructions authorizes an aircraftvehicle to cross all taxiways that intersect the taxi route
PHRASEOLOGYminus HOLD POSITION
HOLD FOR (reason)
CROSS (runway) at (runwaytaxiway)
or
TAXICONTINUE TAXIINGPROCEED VIA (route)
or
ON (runway number or taxiways etc)
or
TO (location)
or
(direction)
or
ACROSS RUNWAY (number) at (runwaytaxiway)
or
VIA (route) HOLD SHORT OF (location)
or
FOLLOW (traffic) (restrictions as necessary)
or
BEHIND (traffic)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCross Runway TwominusEight Left at taxiway Alpha hold short of Runway TwominusEight Rightrdquo
ldquoTaxicontinue taxiingproceed to the hangarrdquo
ldquoTaxicontinue taxiingproceed straight ahead then via ramp to the hangarrdquo
ldquoTaxicontinue taxiingproceed on Taxiway Charlie hold short of Runway TwominusSevenrdquo
or
ldquoTaxicontinue taxingproceed on Charlie hold short of Runway TwominusSevenrdquo
b When authorizing an aircraft to taxi to an assigned takeoff runway state the departure runway followed by the specific taxi route Issue hold short instructions in accordance with paragraph a above when an aircraft will be required to hold short of a runway or other points along the taxi route
Taxi and Ground Movement Procedures 3minus7minus2
81519 JO 711065Y
NOTEminus If the specific taxi route ends into a connecting taxiway with the same identifier (for example taxiway ldquoArdquo connects with Taxiway ldquoA1rdquo) at the approach end of the runway the connecting taxiway may be omitted from the clearance
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) TAXI VIA (route as necessary)
or
RUNWAY (number) TAXI VIA (route as necessary)(hold short instructions as necessary)rdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway ThreeminusSix Left taxi via taxiway Alpha hold short of taxiway Charlierdquo
or
ldquoRunway ThreeminusSix Left taxi via Alpha hold short of Charlierdquo
or
ldquoRunway ThreeminusSix Left taxi via taxiway Alpha hold short of Runway TwominusSeven Rightrdquo
or
ldquoRunway ThreeminusSix Left taxi via Charlie cross Runway TwominusSeven Left hold short of Runway TwominusSeven Rightrdquo
or
ldquoRunway ThreeminusSix Left taxi via Alpha Charlie cross Runway OneminusZerordquo
c Issue a crossing clearance to aircraft for each runway their route crosses An aircraft must have crossed a previous runway before another runway crossing clearance may be issued At those airports where the taxi distance between runway centerlines is 1300 feet or less multiple runway crossings may be issued with a single clearance The air traffic manager must submit a request to the appropriate Service Area Director of Air Traffic Operations and receive approval before authorizing multiple runway crossings
NOTEminus Controllers should avoid crossing points that are not perpendicular or nearly perpendicular to the runway to be crossed (for example reverse high speed taxiways)
PHRASEOLOGYminus ldquoCross (runway) at( runwaytaxiway) hold short of
(runway)rdquo or Cross (runways) at (runwaytaxiway)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCross Runway OneminusSix Left at Taxiway Bravo hold short of Runway OneminusSix Rightrdquo ldquoCross Runway OneminusSix Left and Runway OneminusSix Right at Taxiway Bravordquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus3minus11 Multiple Runway Crossings
d When an aircraftvehicle is instructed to ldquofollowrdquo traffic and requires a runway crossing issue a runway crossing clearance in addition to the follow instructions andor hold short instructions as applicable
EXAMPLEminus ldquoFollow (traffic) cross Runway TwominusSeven Right at Taxiway Whiskeyrdquo
or
ldquoFollow (traffic) cross Runway Two SevenminusRight at Taxiway Whiskey hold short of Runway TwominusSeven Leftrdquo
e Issue a crossing clearance to vehicles for each runway their route crosses A vehicle must have crossed a previous runway before another runway crossing clearance may be issued
NOTEminus A clearance is required for vehicles to operate on any active inactive or closed runway except for vehicles operating on closed runways in accordance with a Letter of Agreement (LOA)
f Vehicles that have been issued a clearance onto a runway to conduct runway operations are authorized to cross intersecting runways unless otherwise restricted Issue hold short instructions as needed
NOTEminus Vehicles should not normally use runways as transition routes to other parts of the airfield These movements are not considered runway operations and the use of alternative routes is preferred
g Crossing of active runway(s) by aircraftvehi-cle(s)
1 During departure operations ensure that aircraftvehicles intending to cross a runway do not cross the runway holding position markings until the controller visually observes the departure aircraft in a turn or the departure aircraft has passed the point where the crossing aircraftvehicle is located regardless of altitude unless authorized in FAA Or-
Taxi and Ground Movement Procedures 3minus7minus3
JO 711065Y 81519
der JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus10 Altitude Restricted Low Approach
REFERENCEminus AIM Runway Position Holding Markings Para 2minus3minus5a FAA Order 711065 Para3minus10minus10 Altitude Restricted Low Approach
2 During arrival operations ensure the follow-ing
(a) An aircraftvehicle has completed cross-ing prior to the arriving aircraft crossing the landing threshold or
REFERENCEminus PCG Term minus Clear of Runway
(b) A crossing aircraftvehicle will not cross the runway holding position markings until the arrival has landed and either
(1) The controller has confirmed by verbal commitment from the pilot that the arriving aircraft will exit the runway prior to the point at which the crossing is intended or
(2) The controller visually observes the aircraft exiting the runway prior to the point at which the crossing is intended or
(3) The arriving aircraft has passed the point at which the crossing is intended
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus4 Intersecting RunwayIntersecting Flight Path Separation FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus3minus7 Land and Hold Short Operations (LAHSO)
h Request a read back of runway hold short instructions when it is not received from the pilotvehicle operator
PHRASEOLOGYminus READ BACK HOLD INSTRUCTIONS
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoAmerican Four Ninety Two Runway Three Six Left taxi via taxiway Charlie hold short of Runway Two Seven Rightrdquo
or
ldquoAmerican Four Ninety Two Runway Three Six Left taxi via Charlie hold short of Runway Two Seven Rightrdquo
ldquoAmerican Four Ninety Two Rogerrdquo
ldquoAmerican Four Ninety Two read back hold instructionsrdquo
2 ldquoCleveland Tower American Sixty Three is ready for departurerdquo
ldquoAmerican Sixty Three hold short of Runway Two Three Left traffic one mile finalrdquo
ldquoAmerican Sixty Three Rogerrdquo
ldquoAmerican Sixty Three read back hold instructionsrdquo
3 ldquoOPS Three proceed via taxiway Charlie hold short of Runway Two Sevenrdquo
or
ldquoOPS Three proceed via Charlie hold short of Runway Two Sevenrdquo
ldquoOPS Three Rogerrdquo
ldquoOPS Three read back hold instructionsrdquo
NOTEminus Read back hold instructions phraseology may be initiated for any point on a movement area when the controller believes the read back is necessary
i Issue progressive taxiground movement instructions when
1 A pilotoperator requests
2 The specialist deems it necessary due to traffic or field conditions eg construction or closed taxiways
3 Necessary during reduced visibility especially when the taxi route is not visible from the tower
NOTEminus Progressive instructions may include stepminusbyminusstep directions andor directional turns
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus7minus4 Runway Proximity FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus11minus1 Taxi and Ground Movement Operation
j Issue instructions to expedite a taxiing aircraft or a moving vehicle
PHRASEOLOGYminus TAXI WITHOUT DELAY (traffic if necessary)
EXITPROCEEDCROSS (runwaytaxiway) at (runwaytaxiway) WITHOUT DELAY
k Issue instructions to aircraftvehicle to hold short of an approachdeparture hold area when required
PHRASEOLOGYminus HOLD SHORT OF (runway) APPROACH
Taxi and Ground Movement Procedures 3minus7minus4
81519 JO 711065Y
HOLD SHORT OF (runway)DEPARTURE
3minus7minus3 GROUND OPERATIONS
Avoid clearances which require
a Super or heavy aircraft to use greater than normal taxiing power
b Small aircraft or helicopters to taxi in close proximity to taxiing or hover-taxi helicopters
NOTEminus Use caution when taxiing smaller aircrafthelicopters in the vicinity of larger aircrafthelicopters Controllers may use the words rotor wash jet blast or prop wash when issuing cautionary advisories
EXAMPLEminus ldquoFollow Boeing 757 Runway ThreeminusSix Left taxi via Alpha Caution jet blastrdquo
or
When appropriate
ldquoFollow CHminus53 Runway TwominusOne taxi via Bravo Caution rotor washrdquo
REFERENCEminus AC 90minus23 Aircraft Wake Turbulence Para 10 and Para 11
3minus7minus4 RUNWAY PROXIMITY
Hold a taxiing aircraft or vehicle clear of the runway as follows
a Instruct aircraft or vehicle to hold short of a specific runway
b Instruct aircraft or vehicle to hold at a specified point
c Issue traffic information as necessary
PHRASEOLOGYminus HOLD SHORT OFAT (runway number or specific point) (traffic or other information)
NOTEminus Establishing hold linessigns is the responsibility of the airport manager The standards for surface measurements markings and signs are contained in AC 1505300minus13 Airport Design AC 1505340minus1 Standards for Airport Markings and AC 1505340minus18 Standards for Airport Sign Systems The operator is responsible for properly positioning the aircraft vehicle or equipment at the appropriate hold linesign or designated point The requirements in para 3minus1minus12 Visually Scanning Runways remain valid as appropriate
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus7minus2 Taxi and Ground Movement Operations FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus10 Altitude Restricted Low Approach FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus5 VehiclesEquipmentPersonnel on Runways
3minus7minus5 PRECISION APPROACH CRITICAL AREA
a ILS critical area dimensions are described in FAA Order 675016 Siting Criteria for Instrument Landing Systems Aircraft and vehicle access to the ILS critical area must be controlled to ensure the integrity of ILS course signals whenever the official weather observation is a ceiling of less than 800 feet or visibility less than 2 miles Do not authorize vehiclesaircraft to operate in or over the critical area except as specified in subpara a1 whenever an arriving aircraft is inside the ILS outer marker (OM) or the fix used in lieu of the OM unless the arriving aircraft has reported the runway in sight or is circling to land on another runway
PHRASEOLOGYminus HOLD SHORT OF (runway) ILS CRITICAL AREA
NOTEminus All available weather sources METARsSPECIPIREPS Controller observations are reported ceilings andor visibilities and must be disseminated as described in FAA Order JO 711065 and FAA Order JO 72103
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus6minus2 PIREP Solicitation and Dissemination FAA Order JO 72103 Para 2minus9minus2 Receipt and Dissemination of Weather Observations FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus3minus1 SIGMENT and PIREP Handling FAA Order JO 79005 Para 64d Equipment for Sky Condition
1 LOCALIZER CRITICAL AREA
(a) Do not authorize vehicle or aircraft operations in or over the area when an arriving aircraft is inside the ILS OM or the fix used in lieu of the OM when the official weather observation is a
Taxi and Ground Movement Procedures 3minus7minus5
JO 711065Y 81519
ceiling of less than 800 feet or visibility less than 2 miles except
(1) A preceding arriving aircraft on the same or another runway that passes over or through the area while landing or exiting the runway
(2) A preceding departing aircraft or missed approach on the same or another runway that passes through or over the area
(b) In addition to subpara a1(a) when the official weather observation indicates a ceiling of less than 200 feet or RVR 2000 feet do not authorize vehicles or aircraft operations in or over the area when an arriving aircraft is inside the middle marker 12 final mile
2 GLIDESLOPE CRITICAL AREA Do not authorize vehicles or aircraft operations in or over the area when an arriving aircraft is inside the ILS OM or the fix used in lieu of the OM unless the arriving aircraft has reported the runway in sight or is circling to land on another runway when the official weather observation indicates a ceiling of less than 800 feet or visibility less than 2 miles
b Operators commonly conduct ldquocoupledrdquo or ldquoautolandrdquo approaches to satisfy maintenance training or reliability program requirements Promptly issue an advisory if the critical area will not be protected when an arriving aircraft advises that a ldquocoupledrdquo ldquoCATIIIrdquo ldquoautolandrdquo or similar type approach will be conducted and the official weather observation indicates a ceiling of 800 feet or more or the visibility is 2 miles or more
PHRASEOLOGYminus ILS CRITICAL AREA NOT PROTECTED
c The Department of Defense (DOD) is author-ized to define criteria for protection of precision approach critical areas at military controlled airports This protection is provided to all aircraft operating at that military controlled airport Waiver authority for DOD precision approach critical area criteria rests with the appropriate military authority
NOTEminus Signs and markings are installed by the airport operator to define the ILS critical area No point along the longitudinal axis of the aircraft is permitted past the hold line for holding purposes The operator is responsible to properly position the aircraft vehicle or equipment at the appropriate hold linesign or designated point The requirements in Para 3minus1minus12 Visually Scanning Runways remain valid as appropriate REFERENCEminus AC1505340minus1 Standards for Airport Markings
3minus7minus6 PRECISION OBSTACLE FREE ZONE (POFZ) AND FINAL APPROACH OBSTACLE CLEARANCE SURFACES (OCS)
a Ensure the POFZ is clear of traffic (aircraft or vehicles) when an aircraft on a verticallyminusguided final approach is within 2 miles of the runway threshold and the official weather observation indicates the ceiling is below 300 feet or visibility is less than 34 SM to protect aircraft executing a missed approach
NOTEminus Only horizontal surfaces (eg the wings) can penetrate the POFZ but not the vertical surfaces (eg fuselage or tail) Three hundred feet (300) is used because ATC does not measure ceilings in fifty (50) foot increments
b Ensure the final approach OCS (eg ILS LPV W X and Y surfaces) are clear of aircraftvehicles when an aircraft on the verticallyminusguided approach is within 2 miles of the runway threshold and the official weather observation indicates the ceiling is below 800 feet or visibility is less than 2 SM to protect aircraft executing a missed approach
NOTEminus 1 The POFZ and the closeminusin portion of the final approach obstacle clearance surfaces protect aircraft executing a missed approach
2 Vehicles that are less than 10 feet in height necessary for the maintenance of the airport andor navigation facilities operating outside the movement area are exempt
c If it is not possible to clear the POFZ or OCS prior to an aircraft reaching a point 2 miles from the runway threshold and the weather is less than described in subpara a or b above issue traffic to the landing aircraft
NOTEminus The POFZ andor OCS must be cleared as soon as practical
Taxi and Ground Movement Procedures 3minus7minus6
81519 JO 711065Y
PHRASEOLOGYminus ldquoUnited 623 in the event of missed approach taxiing (ACID) IN THE EVENT OF MISSED APPROACH aircraft right of runwayrdquo (issue traffic)
ldquoDelta 1058 in the event of missed approach vehicle left TAXIING AIRCRAFTVEHICLE LEFTRIGHT OF of runwayrdquo RUNWAY REFERENCEminus
FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus6 Traffic Information EXAMPLEminus AC1505300minus13 Airport Design
FIG 3minus7minus1
Precision Obstacle Free Zone (POFZ)
Taxi and Ground Movement Procedures 3minus7minus7
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 8 Spacing and Sequencing
3minus8minus1 SEQUENCESPACING APPLICATION
Establish the sequence of arriving and departing aircraft by requiring them to adjust flight or ground operation as necessary to achieve proper spacing
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF
CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF OR HOLD SHORTHOLD IN POSITIONTAXI OFF THE RUNWAY (traffic)
EXTEND DOWNWIND
MAKE SHORT APPROACH
NUMBER (landing sequence number)
FOLLOW (description and location of traffic)
or if traffic is utilizing another runway
TRAFFIC (description and location) LANDING RUNWAY (number of runway being used)
TRAFFIC (description and location) LANDING THE PARALLEL RUNWAY
CIRCLE THE AIRPORT
MAKE LEFTRIGHT THREEminusSIXTYTWO SEVENTY
GO AROUND (additional instructions as necessary)
CLEARED TO LAND
CLEARED
TOUCHminusANDminusGO or
STOPminusANDminusGO or
LOW APPROACH
CLEARED FOR THE OPTION
or
OPTION APPROVED
or
UNABLE OPTION (alternate instructions)
or
UNABLE (type of option) OTHER OPTIONS APPROVED
NOTEminus 1 The ldquoCleared for the Optionrdquo procedure will permit an instructor pilotflight examinerpilot the option to make a touch-and-go low approach missed approach stop-and-go or full stop landing This procedure will only be used at those locations with an operational control tower and will be subject to ATC approval After ATC approval of the option the pilot should inform ATC as soon as possible of any delay on the runway during their stop-and-go or full stop landing
2 For proper helicopter spacing speed adjustments may be more practical than course changes
3 Read back of hold short instructions apply when hold instructions are issued to a pilot in lieu of a takeoff clearance
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus7minus2 Taxi and Ground Movement Operations AIM Para 4minus3minus22 Option Approach
3minus8minus2 TOUCH-AND-GO OR STOP-AND-GO OR LOW APPROACH
Consider an aircraft cleared for touch-and-go stop-and-go or low approach as an arriving aircraft until it touches down (for touch-and-go) or makes a complete stop (for stop-and-go) or crosses the landing threshold (for low approach) and thereafter as a departing aircraft
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus5 VehiclesEquipmentPersonnel on Runways FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus7 Wake Turbulence Separation for Intersection Departures
3minus8minus3 SIMULTANEOUS SAME DIRECTION OPERATION
Authorize simultaneous same direction operations on parallel runways on parallel landing strips or on a runway and a parallel landing strip only when the following conditions are met
Spacing and Sequencing 3minus8minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
a Operations are conducted in VFR conditions unless visual separation is applied
b Two-way radio communication is maintained with the aircraft involved and pertinent traffic information is issued
c The distance between the parallel runways or landing strips is in accordance with those specified in TBL 3minus8minus1
TBL 3minus8minus1
Same Direction Distance Minima
Aircraft category Minimum distance (feet)
between parallel
Runway centerlines
Edges of adjacent strips or runway and strip
Category I or Category II
300 200
If either aircraft is a Category III
500 400
If either aircraft is a Heavy
700 600
NOTEminus 1 Aircraft Categories specified in TBL 3minus8minus1 are Same Runway Separation (SRS) categories as indicated in Para 3minus9minus6 Same Runway Separation
2 When conducting Simultaneous Same Direction Operations (SSDO) applicable Wake Turbulence provi-sions apply
3minus8minus4 SIMULTANEOUS OPPOSITE DIRECTION OPERATION
Authorize simultaneous opposite direction opera-tions on parallel runways on parallel landing strips or on a runway and a parallel landing strip only when the following conditions are met
a Operations are conducted in VFR conditions
b Two-way radio communication is maintained with the aircraft involved and pertinent traffic information is issued
PHRASEOLOGYminus TRAFFIC (description) ARRIVINGDEPARTINGLOW APPROACH OPPOSITE DIRECTION ON PARALLEL RUNWAYLANDING STRIP
c The distance between the runways or landing strips is in accordance with the minima in TBL 3minus8minus2
TBL 3minus8minus2
Opposite Direction Distance Minima
Type of Operation Minimum distance (feet)
between parallel
Runway centerlines
Edges of adjacent strips or runway and
strip
Between sunrise and sunset
1400 1400
Between sunset and sunrise
2800 Not authorized
3minus8minus2 Spacing and Sequencing
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 9 Departure Procedures and Separation
3minus9minus1 DEPARTURE INFORMATION
Provide current departure information as appropri-ate to departing aircraft
a Departure information contained in the ATIS broadcast may be omitted if the pilot states the appropriate ATIS code
b Issue departure information by including the following
1 Runway in use (May be omitted if pilot states ldquohave the numbersrdquo)
2 Surface wind from direct readout dial wind shear detection system or automated weather observing system information display (May be omitted if pilot states ldquohave the numbersrdquo)
3 Altimeter setting (May be omitted if pilot states ldquohave the numbersrdquo)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus7minus1 Current Settings
c Time when requested
d Issue the official ceiling and visibility when available to a departing aircraft before takeoff as follows
1 To a VFR aircraft when weather is below VFR conditions
2 To an IFR aircraft when weather is below VFR conditions or highest takeoff minima whichever is greater
NOTEminus Standard takeoff minimums are published in 14 CFR Section 91175(f) Takeoff minima other than standard are prescribed for specific airportsrunways and published in a tabular form supplement to the FAA instrument approach procedures charts and appropriate FAA Forms 8260
e Issue the route for the aircraftvehicle to follow on the movement area in concise and easy to understand terms The taxi clearance must include the specific route to follow
f USAF NOT APPLICABLE An advisory to ldquocheck density altituderdquo when appropriate
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 2minus10minus6 Broadcast Density Altitude Advisory
g Issue braking action for the runway in use as received from pilots when braking action advisories are in effect REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus7minus2 Altimeter Setting Issuance Below Lowest Usable FL FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus8 Low Level Wind ShearMicroburst Advisories FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus3minus5 Braking Action Advisories PCG Termminus Braking Action Advisories
h Runway Condition Codes Furnish RwyCC as received from the Airport Operator to aircraft via the ATIS
i For opposite direction departure operations controllers may verbally issue the RwyCC as identified in the FICON NOTAM in reverse order Controllers must not include reversed RwyCC on the ATIS broadcast
j When the ATIS is unavailable and when the runway length available for departure has been temporarily shortened controllers must ensure that pilots receive the runway number combined with a shortened announcement for all departing aircraft
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (NUMBER) SHORTENED
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway Two-Seven shortenedrdquo
3minus9minus2 DEPARTURE DELAY INFORMATION
USAUSAFUSN NOT APPLICABLE
When gate-hold procedures are in effect issue the following departure delay information as appropri-ate REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus4minus3 Gate Hold Procedures
a Advise departing aircraft the time at which the pilot can expect to receive engine startup advisory
PHRASEOLOGYminus GATE HOLD PROCEDURES ARE IN EFFECT ALL AIRCRAFT CONTACT (position) ON (frequency) FOR ENGINE START TIME EXPECT ENGINE STARTTAXI (time)
b Advise departing aircraft when to start engines andor to advise when ready to taxi
PHRASEOLOGYminus START ENGINES ADVISE WHEN READY TO TAXI
Departure Procedures and Separation 3minus9minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
or
ADVISE WHEN READY TO TAXI
c If the pilot requests to hold in a delay absorbing area the request must be approved if space and traffic conditions permit
d Advise all aircraft on GCFD frequency upon termination of gate hold procedures
PHRASEOLOGYminus GATE HOLD PROCEDURES NO LONGER IN EFFECT
3minus9minus3 DEPARTURE CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS
Inform departing IFR SVFR VFR aircraft receiving radar service and TRSA VFR aircraft of the following
a Before takeoff
1 Issue the appropriate departure control frequency and beacon code The departure control frequency may be omitted if a SID has been or will be assigned and the departure control frequency is published on the SID
PHRASEOLOGYminus DEPARTURE FREQUENCY (frequency) SQUAWK (code)
2 Inform all departing IFR military turboprop turbojet aircraft (except transport and cargo types) to change to departure control frequency If the local controller has departure frequency override transmit urgent instructions on this frequency If the override capability does not exist transmit urgent instructions on the emergency frequency
PHRASEOLOGYminus CHANGE TO DEPARTURE
3 USAF USAF control towers are authorized to inform all departing IFR military transportcargo type aircraft operating in formation flight to change to departure control frequency before takeoff
b After takeoff
1 When the aircraft is about 12 mile beyond the runway end instruct civil aircraft and military transport and cargo types to contact departure control provided further communication with you is not required
2 Do not request departing military turboprop turbojet aircraft (except transport and cargo types) to
make radio frequency or radar beacon changes before the aircraft reaches 2500 feet above the surface REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus2minus1 Visual Separation
3minus9minus4 LINE UP AND WAIT (LUAW)
a The intent of LUAW is to position aircraft for an imminent departure Authorize an aircraft to line up and wait except as restricted in subpara g when takeoff clearances cannot be issued because of traffic Issue traffic information to any aircraft so authorized Traffic information may be omitted when the traffic is another aircraft which has landed on or is taking off the runway and is clearly visible to the holding aircraft Do not use conditional phrases such as ldquobehind landing trafficrdquo or ldquoafter the departing aircraftrdquo
b First state the runway number followed by the line up and wait clearance
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) LINE UP AND WAIT
NOTEminus When using LUAW an imminent departure is one that will not be delayed beyond the time that is required to ensure a safe operation An aircraft should not be in LUAW status for more than 90 seconds without additional instructions
c Procedures
1 At facilities without a safety logic system or facilities with the safety logic system in the limited configuration
(a) Do not issue a landing clearance to an aircraft requesting a fullminusstop touchminusandminusgo stopminusandminusgo option or unrestricted low approach on the same runway with an aircraft that is holding in position or taxiing to line up and wait until the aircraft in position starts takeoff roll
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) CONTINUE TRAFFIC HOLDING IN POSITION
or
RUNWAY (number) (pattern instructions as appropriate) TRAFFIC HOLDING IN POSITION
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAmerican 528 Runway TwominusThree continue traffic holding in positionrdquo
ldquoTwin Cessna Four Four Golf Runway OneminusNiner Right base approved traffic holding in positionrdquo
3minus9minus2 Departure Procedures and Separation
81519 JO 711065Y
ldquoBaron Two Five Foxtrot Runway OneminusNiner extend downwind tower will call your base traffic holding in positionrdquo
(b) Do not authorize an aircraft to LUAW if an aircraft has been cleared to land touchminusandminusgo stopminusandndashgo option or unrestricted low approach on the same runway
2 Except when reported weather conditions are less than ceiling 800 feet or visibility less than 2 miles facilities using the safety logic system in the full core alert mode
(a) May issue a landing clearance for a fullminusstop touchminusandminusgo stopminusandminusgo option or unrestricted low approach to an arriving aircraft with an aircraft holding in position or taxiing to LUAW on the same runway or
(b) May authorize an aircraft to LUAW when an aircraft has been cleared for a full stop touchminusandminusgo stopminusandminusgo option or unrestricted low approach on the same runway
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus5 Landing Clearance
d When an aircraft is authorized to line up and wait inform it of the closest traffic within 6minusflying miles requesting a fullminusstop touchminusandminusgo stopminus andminus go option or unrestricted low approach to the same runway
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Five Runway One Eight line up and wait Traffic a Boeing Seven Thirty Seven six mile final
e Do not authorize an aircraft to line up and wait when the departure point is not visible from the tower unless the aircraftrsquos position can be verified by ASDE or the runway is used for departures only
f An aircraft may be authorized to line up and wait at an intersection between sunset and sunrise under the following conditions
1 The procedure must be approved by the appropriate Service Area Director of Air Traffic Operations
2 The procedure must be contained in a facility directive
3 The runway must be used as a departureminusonly runway
4 Only one aircraft at a time is permitted to line up and wait on the same runway
5 Document on FAA Form 7230minus4 Daily Record of Facility Operation the following ldquoLUAW at INT of RWY (number) and TWY (name) IN EFFECTrdquo when using runway as a departureminusonly runway ldquoLUAW at INT of RWY (number) and TWY (name) SUSPENDEDrdquo when runway is not used as a departureminusonly runway
g Do not authorize an aircraft to line up and wait at anytime when the intersection is not visible from the tower
h Do not authorize aircraft to simultaneously line up and wait on the same runway between sunrise and sunset unless the local assistlocal monitor position is staffed
i USN Do not authorize aircraft to line up and wait simultaneously on intersecting runways
PHRASEOLOGYminus CONTINUE HOLDING
or
TAXI OFF THE RUNWAY
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus10 Altitude Restricted Low Approach
j When aircraft are authorized to line up and wait on runways that intersect traffic must be exchanged between that aircraft and the aircraft that is authorized to line up and wait depart or arrive to the intersecting runway(s)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Five Runway Four line up and wait traffic holding Runway ThreeminusOnerdquo ldquoDelta One Runway ThreeminusOne line up and wait traffic holding Runway Fourrdquo
Or when issuing traffic information to an arrival aircraft and an aircraft that is holding on runway(s) that intersect(s)
ldquoDelta One Runway Four line up and wait traffic landing Runway ThreeminusOnerdquo ldquoUnited Five Runway ThreeminusOne cleared to land Traffic holding in position Runway Fourrdquo
Or when issuing traffic information to a departing aircraft and an aircraft that is holding on runway(s) that intersect(s)
Departure Procedures and Separation 3minus9minus3
JO 711065Y 81519
ldquoDelta One Runway ThreeminusOne line up and wait traffic departing Runway Fourrdquo ldquoUnited Five Runway Four cleared for takeoff traffic holding in position Runway ThreeminusOnerdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus8 Intersecting RunwayIntersecting Flight Path Operations FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus4 Intersecting RunwayIntersecting Flight Path Separation
k When a local controller delivers or amends an ATC clearance to an aircraft awaiting departure and that aircraft is holding short of a runway or is holding in position on a runway an additional clearance must be issued to prevent the possibility of the aircraft inadvertently taxiing onto the runway andor beginning takeoff roll In such cases append one of the following ATC instructions as appropriate
1 HOLD SHORT OF RUNWAY or
2 HOLD IN POSITION
l USAFUSN When issuing additional instruc-tions or information to an aircraft holding in takeoff position include instructions to continue holding or taxi off the runway unless it is cleared for takeoff
PHRASEOLOGYminus CONTINUE HOLDING
or
TAXI OFF THE RUNWAY
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus10 Altitude Restricted Low Approach
m When authorizing an aircraft to line up and wait at an intersection state the runway intersection
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) AT (taxiway designator) LINE UP AND WAIT
n When two or more aircraft call the tower ready for departure one or more at the full length of a runway and one or more at an intersection state the location of the aircraft at the full length of the runway when authorizing that aircraft to line up and wait
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) FULLminusLENGTH LINE UP AND WAIT
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAmerican Four Eighty Two Runway ThreeminusZero full length line up and waitrdquo
NOTEminus The controller need not state the location of the aircraft
departing the full length of the runway if there are no aircraft holding for departure at an intersection for that same runway
o Do not use the term ldquofull lengthrdquo when the runway length available for departure has been temporarily shortened On permanently shortened runways do not use the term ldquofull lengthrdquo until the Chart Supplement US is updated to include the change(s)
NOTEminus The use of the term ldquofull lengthrdquo could be interpreted by the pilot(s) as the available runway length prior to the runway being shortened
p Whenever a runway length has been temporar-ily or permanently shortened state the word ldquoshortenedrdquo immediately following the runway number as part of the line up and wait clearance
1 The addition of ldquoshortenedrdquo must be included in the line up and wait clearance for the duration of the construction project when the runway is temporarily shortened
2 The addition of ldquoshortenedrdquo must be included in the line up and wait clearance until the Chart Supplement US is updated to include the change(s) when the runway is permanently shortened
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) SHORTENED LINE UP AND WAIT
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway Two-Seven shortened line up and waitrdquo REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10-3-12 Airport Construction FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10-3-13 Change in Runway Length Due to Construction
3minus9minus5 ANTICIPATING SEPARATION
Takeoff clearance need not be withheld until prescribed separation exists if there is a reasonable assurance it will exist when the aircraft starts takeoff roll REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Clear of the Runway
3minus9minus6 SAME RUNWAY SEPARATION
Separate a departing aircraft from a preceding departing or arriving aircraft using the same runway by ensuring that it does not begin takeoff roll until
a The other aircraft has departed and crossed the runway end or turned to avert any conflict (See FIG 3minus9minus1) If you can determine distances by
3minus9minus4 Departure Procedures and Separation
81519 JO 711065Y
reference to suitable landmarks the other aircraft needs only be airborne if the following minimum distance exists between aircraft (See FIG 3minus9minus2)
1 When only Category I aircraft are involvedminus 3000 feet
2 When a Category I aircraft is preceded by a Category II aircraftminus 3000 feet
3 When either the succeeding or both are Category II aircraftminus 4500 feet
4 When either is a Category III aircraftminus 6000 feet
5 When the succeeding aircraft is a helicopter visual separation may be applied in lieu of using distance minima
FIG 3minus9minus1
Same Runway Separation [View 1]
CATEGORY I small singleminusengine propeller driven aircraft weighing 12500 lbs or less and all helicopters
CATEGORY II small twinminusengine propeller driven aircraft weighing 12500 lbs or less
CATEGORY III all other aircraft
b A preceding landing aircraft is clear of the runway (See FIG 3minus9minus3)
FIG 3minus9minus3
Preceding Landing Aircraft Clear of Runway
REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Clear of the Runway
FIG 3minus9minus2
Same Runway Separation [View 2]
NOTEminus Aircraft same runway separation (SRS) categories are specified in FAA Order JO 73601 Aircraft Type Designators and based upon the following definitions
WAKE TURBULENCE APPLICATION
c Do not issue clearances which imply or indicate approval of rolling takeoffs by super or heavy aircraft except as provided in Paragraph 3minus1minus14 Ground Operations When Volcanic Ash is Present
d Do not issue clearances to a small aircraft to line up and wait on the same runway behind a departing super or heavy aircraft to apply the necessary intervals
REFERENCEminus AC 90minus23 Aircraft Wake Turbulence
e The minima in Paragraph 5minus5minus4 Minima subparagraph g may be applied in lieu of the time interval requirements in subparagraphs f g and h When Paragraph 5minus5minus4 Minima is applied ensure that the appropriate radar separation exists at or prior to the time an aircraft becomes airborne
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 2ndash1ndash16 Authorization for Separation Services by Towers FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10ndash5ndash3 Functional Use of Certified Tower radar Displays
NOTEminus 1 The pilot may request additional separation but should make this request before taxiing on the runway
Departure Procedures and Separation 3minus9minus5
JO 711065Y 81519
2 Takeoff clearance to the following aircraft should not be FIG 3minus9minus5
issued until the time interval has passed after the preceding Same Runway Separation aircraft begins takeoff roll
f Separate aircraft taking off from the same runway or a parallel runway separated by less than 2500 feet (See FIG 3minus9minus4)
1 Heavy large or small behind super minus 3 minutes
2 Heavy large or small behind heavy minus 2 minutes
FIG 3minus9minus4
Same Runway Separation
g Separate a small behind a B757 aircraft by 2 minutes when departing
1 The same runway or a parallel runway separated by less than 700 feet (See FIG 3minus9minus5 and FIG 3minus9minus6)
FIG 3minus9minus6
Parallel Runway Separated by Less than 700 Feet
2 A parallel runway separated by 700 feet or more if projected flight paths will cross (See FIG 3minus9minus7)
3minus9minus6 Departure Procedures and Separation
81519 JO 711065Y
FIG 3minus9minus7
Parallel Runway Separated by 700 Feet or More Projected Flight Paths Cross
h Separate aircraft departing from a parallel runway separated by 2500 feet or more if projected flight paths will cross (See FIG 3minus9minus8)
1 Heavy large or small behind super minus 3 minutes
2 Heavy large or small behind heavy minus 2 minutes
FIG 3minus9minus8
Parallel Runways Separated by 2500 feet or More
i Separate aircraft when operating on a runway with a displaced landing threshold if projected flight paths will cross when either a departure follows an arrival or an arrival follows a departure by the following minima
1 Heavy large or small behind super minus 3 minutes
2 Heavy large or small behind heavy minus 2 minutes
3 Small behind B757 minus 2 minutes
j Separate an aircraft behind another aircraft that has departed or made a lowmissed approach when utilizing opposite direction takeoffs or landings on the same or parallel runways separated by less than 2500 feet by the following minima
1 Heavy large or small behind super minus 4 minutes
2 Heavy large or small behind heavy minus 3 minutes
k Separate a small aircraft behind a B757 that has departed or made a lowmissed approach by 3 minutes when utilizing opposite direction takeoffs or landings from
1 The same runway or a parallel runway separated by less than 700 feet
2 A parallel runway separated by 700 feet or more if projected flight paths will cross
l Do not approve pilot requests to deviate from the required intervals contained in subparagraphs f through k
PHRASEOLOGYminus HOLD FOR WAKE TURBULENCE
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus7 Wake Turbulence Separation for Intersection Departures
m Separate a small aircraft behind a large aircraft (except B757) that has departed or made a lowmissed approach when utilizing opposite direction takeoffs on the same runway by 3 minutes unless a pilot has initiated a request to deviate from the time interval In the latter case issue a wake turbulence cautionary advisory before clearing the aircraft for takeoff Controllers must not initiate or suggest a waiver of the time interval
NOTEminus A request for takeoff does not initiate a waiver request
n Inform aircraft when it is necessary to hold in
order to provide the required time interval
3minus9minus7 WAKE TURBULENCE SEPARATION FOR INTERSECTION DEPARTURES
a Apply the following wake turbulence criteria for intersection departures
Departure Procedures and Separation 3minus9minus7
JO 711065Y 81519
1 Separate a small aircraft weighing 12500 lbs or less taking off from an intersection on the same runway (same or opposite direction takeoff) behind a departing small aircraft weighing more than 12500 lbs by ensuring that the aircraft does not start takeoff roll until at least 3 minutes after the preceding aircraft has taken off
2 Separate a small aircraft taking off from an intersection on the same runway (same or opposite direction takeoff) behind a departing large aircraft (except B757) by ensuring that the aircraft does not start takeoff roll until at least 3 minutes after the preceding aircraft has taken off
3 Separate a small aircraft taking off from an intersection (same or opposite direction takeoff) behind a preceding departing B757 aircraft by ensuring that the small aircraft does not start takeoff roll until at least 3 minutes after the B757 has taken off from
(a) The same runway or a parallel runway separated by less than 700 feet
(b) Parallel runways separated by 700 feet or more or parallel runways separated by 700 feet or more with the runway thresholds offset by 500 feet or more if projected flight paths will cross
4 Separate aircraft departing from an intersection on the same runway (same or opposite direction takeoff) parallel runways separated by less than 2500 feet and parallel runways separated by less than 2500 feet with the runway thresholds offset by 500 feet or more by ensuring that the aircraft does not start take-off roll until the following intervals exist after the preceding aircraft has taken off
NOTEminus Apply Para 3minus9minus6 Same Runway Separation subpara f to parallel runways separated by less than 2500 feet with runway thresholds offset by less than 500 feet
(a) Heavy large or small behind super - 4 minutes
(b) Heavy large or small behind heavy - 3 minutes
5 Inform aircraft when it is necessary to hold in order to provide the required time interval
PHRASEOLOGYminus HOLD FOR WAKE TURBULENCE
NOTEminus Aircraft conducting touch-and-go and stop-and-go operations are considered to be departing from an intersection
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus8minus2 TouchminusandminusGo or StopminusandminusGo or Low Approach
b The time interval is not required when
1 A pilot has initiated a request to deviate from the time intervals contained in subpara a1 or a2
NOTEminus A request for takeoff does not initiate a waiver request the request for takeoff must be accomplished by a request to deviate from the time interval
2 USA NOT APPLICABLE The intersection is 500 feet or less from the departure point of the preceding aircraft and both aircraft are taking off in the same direction
3 Successive touch-and-go or stop-and-go operations are conducted with any aircraft following an aircraft in the pattern that requires wake turbulence separation or an aircraft departing the same runway that requires wake turbulence separation in accordance with subparas a1 a2 a3 or a4 (except for super aircraft) provided the pilot is maintaining visual separationspacing behind the preceding aircraft Issue a wake turbulence cautionary advisory and the position of the larger aircraft
NOTEminus Not authorized with a Super as the lead or departure aircraft
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus4 Minima subpar g FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus2minus1 Visual Separation
4 If action is initiated to reduce the separation between successive touch-and-go or stop-and-go operations apply the appropriate separation con-tained in subpara a1 a2 a3 or a4
c When applying the provision of subpara b
1 Issue a wake turbulence advisory before clearing the aircraft for takeoff
2 Do not clear the intersection departure for an immediate takeoff
3 Issue a clearance to permit the trailing aircraft to deviate from course enough to avoid the flight path of the preceding aircraft when applying subpara b1 or b2
3minus9minus8 Departure Procedures and Separation
81519 JO 711065Y
4 Separation requirements in accordance with Para 3minus9minus6 Same Runway Separation must also apply
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus6 Same Runway Separation
3minus9minus8 INTERSECTING RUNWAYINTER-SECTING FLIGHT PATH OPERATIONS
a Issue traffic information to each aircraft operating on intersecting runways
b Separate departing aircraft from another aircraft using an intersecting runway by ensuring that the departure does not begin takeoff roll until one of the following exists
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus21 Traffic Advisories
1 The preceding aircraft has departed and passed the intersection or is turning to avert any conflict (See FIG 3minus9minus9)
FIG 3minus9minus9
Intersecting Runway Separation
2 A preceding arriving aircraft (See FIG 3minus9minus10)
(a) Is clear of the landing runway or
(b) Has completed the landing roll on the runway and will hold short of the intersection or
(c) Has completed the landing roll and is observed turning at an exit point prior to the intersection or
(d) Has passed the intersection
REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Clear of the Runway
PCG Term ndash Landing Roll
FIG 3minus9minus10
Intersecting Runway Separation
WAKE TURBULENCE APPLICATION
3 Separate aircraft taking off behind a departing or landing aircraft on an intersecting runway if flight paths will cross (See FIG 3minus9minus11 and FIG 3minus9minus12)
NOTEminus Takeoff clearance to the following aircraft should not be issued until the appropriate time interval has passed after the preceding aircraft began takeoff roll
(a) Heavy large or small behind super minus 3 minutes
(b) Heavy large or small behind heavy minus 2 minutes
(c) Small behind B757 minus 2 minutes
FIG 3minus9minus11
Departure Behind Departure on Intersecting Runway
Departure Procedures and Separation 3minus9minus9
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
FIG 3minus9minus12
Departure Behind Arrival on Intersecting Runway
4 Pilot requests to deviate from the required time intervals must not be approved if the preceding aircraft requires wake turbulence separation
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus4 Minima Subparagraph g
3minus9minus9 NONINTERSECTING CONVERGING RUNWAY OPERATIONS
a Separate departing aircraft from an aircraft using a nonintersecting runway when the flight paths intersect by ensuring that the departure does not begin takeoff roll until one of the following exists
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus21 Traffic Advisories
1 The preceding aircraft has departed and crossed the departure runway or is turning to avert any conflict (See FIG 3minus9minus13)
FIG 3minus9minus13
Intersecting Runway Separation
2 A preceding arriving aircraft has completed the landing roll and will hold short of the projected intersection passed the projected intersection or has crossed over the departure runway (See FIG 3minus9minus14 and FIG 3minus9minus15 )
FIG 3minus9minus14
Intersecting Runway Separation
FIG 3minus9minus15
Intersecting Runway Separation
b If the extended centerline of a runway crosses a converging runway or the extended centerline of a converging runway at a distance of 1 NM or less from either departure end apply the provisions of Para 3minus9minus8 Intersecting Runway Intersecting Flight Path Operations unless the facility is using aids specified in a facility directive (may include but are not limited to ArrivalDeparture Window (ADW) ASDEminusX Virtual Runway Intersection Point (VRIP) cutminusoff points or automation) (See FIG 3minus9minus16 and FIG 3minus9minus17)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10-3-15 Go-AroundMissed Approach
3minus9minus10 Departure Procedures and Separation
81519 JO 711065Y
FIG 3minus9minus16 FIG 3minus9minus18
Intersecting Runway Separation Intersecting Runway Separation
FIG 3minus9minus17
Intersecting Runway Separation
NOTEminus Takeoff clearance to the following aircraft should not be issued until the time interval has passed from when the preceding aircraft began takeoff roll
d Separate aircraft departing behind a landing aircraft on a crossing runway if the departure will fly through the airborne path of the arrival (See FIG 3minus9minus19)
1 Heavy large or small behind super minus 3 minutes
2 Heavy large or small behind heavy minus 2 minutes
3 Small behind B757 minus 2 minutes
FIG 3minus9minus19
Intersecting Runway Separation
WAKE TURBULENCE APPLICATION
c Separate aircraft taking off behind a departing aircraft on a crossing runway if projected flight paths will cross (See FIG 3minus9minus18)
1 Heavy large or small behind super minus 3 minutes
2 Heavy large or small behind heavy minus 2 minutes
3 Small behind B757 minus 2 minutes
e Do not approve pilot requests to deviate from the required time interval if the preceding aircraft requires wake turbulence separation
Departure Procedures and Separation 3minus9minus11
JO 711065Y 81519
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus8minus3 Successive or Simultaneous Departures FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus8minus5 Departures and Arrivals on Parallel or Nonintersecting Diverging Runways FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus4 Minima Subparagraph g
3minus9minus10 TAKEOFF CLEARANCE
a When issuing a clearance for takeoff first state the runway number followed by the takeoff clearance
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRUNWAY TWO SEVEN CLEARED FOR TAKEOFFrdquo
NOTEminus Turbineminuspowered aircraft may be considered ready for takeoff when they reach the runway unless they advise otherwise REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus3minus1 Departure Terminology
b When clearing an aircraft for takeoff from an intersection state the runway intersection
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) AT (taxiway designator) CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF
c When two or more aircraft call the tower ready for departure one or more at the full length of a runway and one or more at an intersection state the location of the aircraft at the full length of the runway when clearing that aircraft for takeoff
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) FULL LENGTH CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAmerican Four Eighty Two Runway Three Zero full length cleared for takeoffrdquo
d The controller must ensure that all runways along the taxi route that lead to the departure runway are crossed before the takeoff clearance is issued except as stated in paragraph 3minus9minus10e
FIG 3minus9minus20
RunwayTaxiway Proximity
e At those airports where the airport configuration does not allow for an aircraft to completely cross one runway and hold short of the departure runway andor where airports do not have runway hold markings between runways state the runway to be crossed with the takeoff clearance if the aircraft is not able to complete a runway crossing before reaching its departure runway
PHRASEOLOGYminus CROSS RUNWAY (number) RUNWAY (number) CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCROSS RUNWAY TWO FOUR LEFT RUNWAY TWO FOUR RIGHT CLEARED FOR TAKEOFFrdquo
3minus9minus12 Departure Procedures and Separation
81519 JO 711065Y
FIG 3minus9minus21
RunwayTaxiway Proximity
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus3minus10 Takeoff Clearance PCG Termminus Clear of the Runway
f Do not use the term ldquofull lengthrdquo when the runway length available for departure has been temporarily shortened On permanently shortened runways do not use the term ldquofull lengthrdquo until the Chart Supplement US is updated to include the change(s)
NOTEminus The use of the term ldquofull lengthrdquo could be interpreted by the pilot(s) as the available runway length prior to the runway being shortened
g Whenever a runway length has been temporar-ily or permanently shortened state the word ldquoshortenedrdquo immediately following the runway number as part of the takeoff clearance This information must be issued in conjunction with the takeoff clearance
1 The addition of ldquoshortenedrdquo must be included in the takeoff clearance for the duration of the construction project when the runway is temporarily shortened
2 The addition of ldquoshortenedrdquo must be included in the takeoff clearance until the Chart Supplement
US is updated to include the change(s) when the runway is permanently shortened
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) SHORTENED CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway Two-Seven shortened cleared for takeoffrdquo
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) AT (taxiway designator) INTERSECTION DEPARTURE SHORTENED CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway Two-Seven at Juliet intersection departure shortened cleared for takeoffrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10-3-12 Airport Construction FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10-3-13 Change in Runway Length Due to Construction
h USAF When an aircraft is cleared for takeoff inform it of the closest traffic within 6 miles on final approach to the same runway If the approaching aircraft is on a different frequency inform it of the departing aircraft
i USAUSNUSAF Issue surface wind and takeoff clearance to aircraft
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) WIND (surface wind in direction and velocity) CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF
3minus9minus11 CANCELLATION OF TAKEOFF CLEARANCE
Cancel a previously issued clearance for takeoff and inform the pilot of the reason if circ*mstances require Once an aircraft has started takeoff roll cancel the takeoff clearance only for the purpose of safety
NOTEminus In no case should a takeoff clearance be canceled after an aircraft has started its takeoff roll solely for the purpose of meeting traffic management requirementsEDCT
PHRASEOLOGYminus CANCEL TAKEOFF CLEARANCE (reason)
Departure Procedures and Separation 3minus9minus13
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 10 Arrival Procedures and Separation
3minus10minus1 LANDING INFORMATION
Provide current landing information as appropriate to arriving aircraft Landing information contained in the ATIS broadcast may be omitted if the pilot states the appropriate ATIS code Runway wind and altimeter may be omitted if a pilot uses the phrase ldquohave numbersrdquo Issue landing information by including the following
NOTEminus Pilot use of ldquohave numbersrdquo does not indicate receipt of the ATIS broadcast
a Specific traffic pattern information (may be omitted if the aircraft is to circle the airport to the left)
PHRASEOLOGYminus ENTER LEFTRIGHT BASE
STRAIGHTminusIN
MAKE STRAIGHTminusIN
STRAIGHTminusIN APPROVED
RIGHT TRAFFIC
MAKE RIGHT TRAFFIC
RIGHT TRAFFIC APPROVED
CONTINUE
NOTEminus Additional information should normally be issued with instructions to continue Example ldquocontinue report one mile finalrdquo ldquocontinue expect landing clearance two mile finalrdquo etc
b Runway in use
c Surface wind
d Altimeter setting
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus7minus1 Current Settings
e Any supplementary information
f Clearance to land
g Requests for additional position reports Use prominent geographical fixes which can be easily recognized from the air preferably those depicted on
sectional charts This does not preclude the use of the legs of the traffic pattern as reporting points
NOTEminus At some locations VFR checkpoints are depicted on sectional aeronautical and terminal area charts In selecting geographical fixes depicted VFR checkpoints are preferred unless the pilot exhibits a familiarity with the local area
h Ceiling and visibility if either is below basic VFR minima
i Low level wind shear or microburst advisories when available REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus8 Low Level Wind ShearMicroburst Advisories
j Issue braking action for the runway in use as received from pilots when braking action advisories are in effect REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus3minus5 Braking Action Advisories
k Runway Condition Codes Furnish RwyCC as received from the Airport Operator to aircraft via the ATIS
l For opposite direction arrival operations controllers may verbally issue the RwyCC as identified in the FICON NOTAM in reverse order Controllers must not include reversed RwyCC on the ATIS broadcast
m If the pilot does not indicate the appropriate ATIS code and when a runway has been shortened controllers must ensure that pilots receive the runway number combined with a shortened announcement for all arriving aircraft
3minus10minus2 FORWARDING APPROACH INFORMATION BY NONAPPROACH CONTROL FACILITIES
a Forward the following as appropriate to the control facility having IFR jurisdiction in your area You may eliminate those items that because of local conditions or situations are fully covered in a letter of agreement or a facility directive
1 When you clear an arriving aircraft for a visual approach REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus4minus1 Visual Approach
Arrival Procedures and Separation 3minus10minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
2 Aircraft arrival time
3 Cancellation of IFR flight plan
4 Information on a missed approach unreported or overdue aircraft
5 Runway in use
6 Weather as required
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus6minus3 Reporting Weather Conditions
b When the weather is below 1000 feet or 3 miles or the highest circling minimums whichever is greater issue current weather to aircraft executing an instrument approach if it changes from that on the ATIS or that previously forwarded to the center approach control
3minus10minus3 SAME RUNWAY SEPARATION
a Separate an arriving aircraft from another aircraft using the same runway by ensuring that the arriving aircraft does not cross the landing threshold until one of the following conditions exists or unless authorized in Paragraph 3minus10minus10 Altitude Restric-ted Low Approach
1 The other aircraft has landed and is clear of the runway (See FIG 3minus10minus1) Between sunrise and sunset if you can determine distances by reference to suitable landmarks and the other aircraft has landed it need not be clear of the runway if the following minimum distance from the landing threshold exists
REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Clear of the Runway
FIG 3minus10minus1
Same Runway Separation
(a) When a Category I aircraft is landing behind a Category I or IIminus 3000 feet (See FIG 3minus10minus2)
FIG 3minus10minus2
Same Runway Separation
(b) When a Category II aircraft is landing behind a Category I or IIminus 4500 feet (See FIG 3minus10minus3)
FIG 3minus10minus3
Same Runway Separation
2 The other aircraft has departed and crossed the runway end (See FIG 3minus10minus4) If you can determine distances by reference to suitable landmarks and the other aircraft is airborne it need not have crossed the runway end if the following minimum distance from the landing threshold exists
(a) Category I aircraft landing behind Category I or IIminus 3000 feet
(b) Category II aircraft landing behind Category I or IIminus 4500 feet
(c) When either is a category III aircraftminus 6000 feet (See FIG 3minus10minus5)
3minus10minus2 Arrival Procedures and Separation
81519 JO 711065Y
FIG 3minus10minus4
Same Runway Separation
FIG 3minus10minus5
Same Runway Separation
3 When the succeeding aircraft is a helicopter visual separation may be applied in lieu of using distance minima
WAKE TURBULENCE APPLICATION
b Issue wake turbulence advisories and the position altitude if known and the direction of flight of
1 The super or heavy to aircraft landing behind a departingarriving super or heavy on the same or parallel runways separated by less than 2500 feet
2 The B757large aircraft to a small aircraft landing behind a departingarriving B757large aircraft on the same or parallel runways separated by less than 2500 feet
REFERENCEminus AC 90minus23 Aircraft Wake Turbulence Para 12 Pilot Responsibility
FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus10 Altitude Restricted Low Approach
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoRunway two seven left cleared to land caution wake turbulence heavy Boeing 747 departing runway two seven rightrdquo
2 ldquoNumber two follow Boeing 757 on 2-mile final Caution wake turbulencerdquo
3 ldquoTraffic Boeing 737 on 2minusmile final to the parallel runway runway two six right cleared to land Caution wake turbulencerdquo
3minus10minus4 INTERSECTING RUNWAYINTER-SECTING FLIGHT PATH SEPARATION
Issue traffic information to each aircraft operating on intersecting runways
a Separate an arriving aircraft using one runway from another aircraft using an intersecting runway or a nonintersecting runway when the flight paths intersect by ensuring that the arriving aircraft does not cross the landing threshold or flight path of the other aircraft until one of the following conditions exists
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus21 Traffic Advisories
1 The preceding aircraft has departed and passed the intersectionflight path or is airborne and turning to avert any conflict (See FIG 3minus10minus6 and FIG 3minus10minus7)
FIG 3minus10minus6
Intersecting Runway Separation
Arrival Procedures and Separation 3minus10minus3
JO 711065Y 81519
FIG 3minus10minus7 FIG 3minus10minus9
Intersecting Runway Separation Intersection Runway Separation
2 A preceding arriving aircraft is clear of the landing runway completed landing roll and will hold short of the intersectionflight path or has passed the intersectionflight path (See FIG 3minus10minus8 and FIG 3minus10minus9)
FIG 3minus10minus8
Intersection Runway Separation
NOTEminus When visual separation is being applied by the tower appropriate control instructions and traffic advisories must be issued to ensure go around or missed approaches avert any conflict with the flight path of traffic on the other runway
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus2minus1 Visual Separation subpara a2
b ldquoUSAUSAFUSN NOT APPLICABLErdquo An aircraft may be authorized to takeoff from one runway while another aircraft lands simultaneously on an intersecting runway or an aircraft lands on one runway while another aircraft lands simultaneously on an intersecting runway or an aircraft lands to hold short of an intersecting taxiway or some other predetermined point such as an approachdeparture flight path using procedures specified in the current LAHSO directive The procedure must be approved by the air traffic manager and be in accordance with a facility directive The following conditions apply
NOTEminus Application of these procedures does not relieve controllers from the responsibility of providing other appropriate separation contained in this order
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus3minus7 Land and Hold Short Operations (LAHSO)
1 A simultaneous takeoff and landing operation must only be conducted in VFR conditions
2 Instruct the landing aircraft to hold short of the intersecting runway being used by the aircraft taking off In the case of simultaneous landings and no operational benefit is lost restrict the aircraft of the lesser weight category (if known) LAHSO clearances must only be issued to aircraft that are
3minus10minus4 Arrival Procedures and Separation
81519 JO 711065Y
listed in the current LAHSO directive whose Available Landing Distance (ALD) does not exceed the landing distance requirement for the runway condition
PHRASEOLOGYminus HOLD SHORT OF RUNWAY (runway number) (traffic type aircraft or other information)
NOTEminus Pilots who prefer to use the full length of the runway or a runway different from that specified are expected to advise ATC prior to landing
3 Issue traffic information to both aircraft involved and obtain an acknowledgment from each Request a read back of hold short instructions when they are not received from the pilot of the restricted aircraft
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoRunway one eight cleared to land hold short of runway one four left traffic (type aircraft) landing runway one four leftrdquo
(When pilot of restricted aircraft responds with only acknowledgment)
ldquoRunway one four left cleared to land traffic (type aircraft) landing runway one eight will hold short of the intersectionrdquo
ldquoRead back hold short instructionsrdquo
2 ldquoRunway three six cleared to land hold short of runway three three traffic (type aircraft) departing runway three threerdquo
ldquoTraffic (type aircraft) landing runway three six will hold short of the intersection runway three three cleared for takeoffrdquo
4 Issue the measured distance from the landing threshold to the hold short point rounded ldquodownrdquo to the nearest 50minusfoot increment if requested by either aircraft
EXAMPLEminus ldquoFive thousand fifty feet availablerdquo
5 The conditions in subparas b2 3 and 4 must be met in sufficient time for the pilots to take other action if desired and no later than the time landing clearance is issued
6 Land and Hold Short runways must be free of any contamination as described in the current
LAHSO directive with no reports that braking action is less than good
7 There is no tailwind for the landing aircraft restricted to hold short of the intersection The wind may be described as ldquocalmrdquo when appropriate
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus6minus3 Reporting Weather Conditions
8 The aircraft required landing distances are listed in the current LAHSO directive
9 STOL aircraft operations are in accordance with a letter of agreement with the aircraft operatorpilot or the pilot confirms that it is a STOL aircraft
WAKE TURBULENCE APPLICATION
c Separate aircraft landing behind a departing aircraft on a crossing runway if the arrival will fly through the airborne path of the departure by the appropriate radar separation or the following interval (See FIG 3minus10minus10)
1 Heavy large or small behind super minus 3 minutes
2 Heavy large or small behind heavy minus 2 minutes
3 Small behind B757 minus 2 minutes
d Issue wake turbulence cautionary advisories the position altitude if known and direction of flight of the super heavy or B757 to REFERENCEminus AC 90minus23 Aircraft Wake Turbulence Para 11 Pilot Responsibility
FIG 3minus10minus10
Intersecting Runway Separation
Arrival Procedures and Separation 3minus10minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
1 All aircraft landing on a crossing runway behind a departing super or heavy or a small aircraft landing on a crossing runway behind a departing B757 if the arrival flight path will cross the takeoff path behind the departing aircraft rotation point (See FIG 3minus10minus11)
FIG 3minus10minus11
Intersecting Runway Separation
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway niner cleared to land Caution wake turbulence heavy CminusOne Forty One departing runway one fiverdquo
2 All VFR aircraft landing on a crossing runway behind an arriving super or heavy and VFR small aircraft landing on a crossing runway behind a B757 if the arrival flight paths will cross (See FIG 3minus10minus12)
FIG 3minus10minus12
Intersecting Runway Separation
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway niner cleared to land Caution wake turbulence Boeing Seven Fifty Seven landing runway three sixrdquo REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus4minus4 Approaches to Multiple Runways
3minus10minus5 LANDING CLEARANCE a When issuing a clearance to land first state the
runway number followed by the landing clearance If the landing runway is changed controllers must preface the landing clearance with ldquoChange to runwayrdquo followed by the runway number Controllers must then restate the runway number followed by the landing clearance PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) CLEARED TO LAND
Or
CHANGE TO RUNWAY (number RUNWAY (number) CLEARED TO LAND NOTEminus The purpose of the ldquochange to runwayrdquo phraseology and restating the runway number is to emphasize to the pilot that they are being cleared to land on a runway other than what they were expecting
b When you become aware that an aircraft is aligned with the wrong surface inform the pilot and
1 Issue control instructionsclearances or
3minus10minus6 Arrival Procedures and Separation
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited four twenty three gominusaround you appear to be aligned with the wrong runwayrdquo
ldquoAmerican sixty three gominusaround you appear to be aligned with a taxiwayrdquo
ldquoSouthwest two thirty nine you appear to be aligned with Runway 27 Left (pertinent information) Runway 27 Left cleared to landrdquo
2 If time permits verify the pilot is aligned with the correct runway Issue control instructionsclear-ances as necessary
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTwin Cessna four one four lima bravo verify you are aligned with Runway 27 Leftrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus6minus4 Safety Logic Alert Responses FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus8 Withholding Landing Clearance
c Procedures
1 Facilities without a safety logic system or facilities with the safety logic system inoperative or in the limited configuration must not clear an aircraft for a fullminusstop touchminusandminusgo stopminusandminusgo option or unrestricted low approach when a departing aircraft has been instructed to line up and wait or is holding in position on the same runway The landing clearance may be issued once the aircraft in position has started takeoff roll
2 Facilities using safety logic in the full core alert runway configuration may issue a landing clearance fullminusstop touchminusandminusgo stopminusandminusgo option or unrestricted low approach to an arriving aircraft with an aircraft holding in position or taxiing to LUAW on the same runway except when reported weather conditions are less than ceiling 800 feet or visibility less than 2 miles
d Inform the closest aircraft that is requesting a fullminusstop touchminusandminusgo stopminusandminusgo option or unrestricted low approaches when there is traffic authorized to line up and wait on the same runway
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDelta One Runway OneminusEight continue traffic holding in positionrdquo
ldquoDelta One Runway OneminusEight cleared to land Traffic holding in positionrdquo ldquoTwin Cessna Four Four Golf Runway One-Niner base approved traffic holding in positionrdquo ldquoBaron Two Five Foxtrot Runway One-Niner Right extend downwind tower will call your base traffic holding in positionrdquo
e USAUSNUSAF Issue runway identifier along with surface wind when clearing an aircraft to land touch and go stop and go low approach or the option
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) WIND (surface wind direction and velocity) CLEARED TO LAND
NOTEminus A clearance to land means that appropriate separation on the landing runway will be ensured A landing clearance does not relieve the pilot from compliance with any previously issued restriction
f Whenever a runway length has been temporarily or permanently shortened state the word ldquoshortenedrdquo immediately following the runway number as part of the landing clearance This information must be issued in conjunction with the landing clearance
1 The addition of ldquoshortenedrdquo must be included in the landing clearance for the duration of the construction project when the runway is temporarily shortened
2 The addition of ldquoshortenedrdquo must be included in the landing clearance until the Chart Supplement US is updated to include the change(s) when the runway is permanently shortened
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) SHORTENED CLEARED TO LAND
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway Two-Seven shortened cleared to landrdquo
g If landing clearance is temporarily withheld insert the word ldquoshortenedrdquo immediately after the runway number to advise the pilot to continue
PHRASEOLOGYminus RUNWAY (number) SHORTENED CONTINUE
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRunway Two-Seven shortened continuerdquo
Arrival Procedures and Separation 3minus10minus7
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10-3-12 Airport Construction FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10-3-13 Change in Runway Length Due to Construction
3minus10minus6 ANTICIPATING SEPARATION
a Landing clearance to succeeding aircraft in a landing sequence need not be withheld if you observe the positions of the aircraft and determine that prescribed runway separation will exist when the aircraft crosses the landing threshold Issue traffic information to the succeeding aircraft if a preceding arrival has not been previously reported and when traffic will be departing prior to their arrival
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAmerican Two FortyminusFive Runway OneminusEight cleared to land number two following a United SevenminusThirtyminus Seven two mile final Traffic will depart prior to your arrivalrdquo
ldquoAmerican Two FortyminusFive Runway OneminusEight cleared to land Traffic will depart prior to your arrivalrdquo
NOTEminus Landing sequence number is optional at tower facilities where the arrival sequence to the runway is established by the approach control
b Anticipating separation must not be applied when conducting LUAW operations except as authorized in paragraph 3minus10minus5c2 Issue applicable traffic information when using this provision
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAmerican Two FortyminusFive Runway OneminusEight cleared to land Traffic will be a Boeing SevenminusFiftyminusSeven holding in positionrdquo
REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Clear of the Runway
3minus10minus7 LANDING CLEARANCE WITHOUT VISUAL OBSERVATION
When an arriving aircraft reports at a position where heshe should be seen but has not been visually observed advise the aircraft as a part of the landing clearance that it is not in sight and restate the landing runway
PHRASEOLOGYminus NOT IN SIGHT RUNWAY (number) CLEARED TO LAND
NOTEminus Aircraft observance on the CTRD satisfies the visually observed requirement
3minus10minus8 WITHHOLDING LANDING CLEARANCE
Do not withhold a landing clearance indefinitely even though it appears a violation of Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations has been committed The apparent violation might be the result of an emergency situation In any event assist the pilot to the extent possible
3minus10minus9 RUNWAY EXITING
a Instruct aircraft where to turn-off the runway after landing when appropriate and advise the aircraft to hold short of a runway or taxiway if required for traffic
PHRASEOLOGYminus TURN LEFTRIGHT (taxiwayrunway)
or
IF ABLE TURN LEFTRIGHT (taxiwayrunway)
and if required
HOLD SHORT OF (runway)
NOTEminus Runway exiting or taxi instructions should not normally be issued to an aircraft prior to or immediately after touchdown
b Taxi instructions must be provided to the aircraft by the local controller when
1 Compliance with ATC instructions will be required before the aircraft can change to ground control or
2 The aircraft will be required to enter an active runway in order to taxi clear of the landing runway
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUS Air Ten Forty Two turn right next taxiway cross runway two one contact ground point sevenrdquo
ldquoUS Air Ten Forty Two turn right on Alfanext taxiway cross Bravo hold short of Charlie contact ground point sevenrdquo
NOTEminus 1 An aircraft is expected to taxi clear of the runway unless otherwise directed by ATC Pilots must not exit the landing runway on to an intersecting runway unless authorized by ATC In the absence of ATC instructions an aircraft should taxi clear of the landing runway by clearing the hold position marking associated with the landing runway even if that requires the aircraft to protrude into or enter another
3minus10minus8 Arrival Procedures and Separation
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
taxiwayramp area This does not authorize an aircraft to cross a subsequent taxiway or ramp after clearing the landing runway
REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Clear of the Runway
2 The pilot is responsible for ascertaining when the aircraft is clear of the runway by clearing the runway holding position marking associated with the landing runway
c Ground control and local control must protect a taxiwayrunwayramp intersection if an aircraft is required to enter that intersection to clear the landing runway
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus1minus7 Use of Active Runways
d Request a read back of runway hold short instructions when not received from the pilot
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAmerican Four Ninetyminustwo turn left at Taxiway Charlie hold short of Runway 27 Rightrdquo
or
ldquoAmerican Four Ninetyminustwo turn left at Charlie hold short of Runway 27 Rightrdquo
ldquoAmerican Four Ninety Two Rogerrdquo
ldquoAmerican Four Ninetyminustwo read back hold instructionsrdquo
NOTEminus Read back hold instructions phraseology may be initiated for any point on a movement area when the controller believes the read back is necessary
3minus10minus10 ALTITUDE RESTRICTED LOW APPROACH
A low approach with an altitude restriction of not less than 500 feet above the airport may be authorized except over an aircraft in takeoff position or a departure aircraft Do not clear aircraft for restricted altitude low approaches over personnel unless airport authorities have advised these personnel that the approaches will be conducted Advise the approach-ing aircraft of the location of applicable ground traffic personnel or equipment
NOTEminus 1 The 500 feet restriction is a minimum Higher altitudes should be used when warranted For example 1000 feet is more appropriate for super or heavy aircraft operating
over unprotected personnel or small aircraft on or near the runway
2 This authorization includes altitude restricted low approaches over preceding landing or taxiing aircraft Restricted low approaches are not authorized over aircraft in takeoff position or departing aircraft
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED LOW APPROACH AT OR ABOVE (altitude) TRAFFIC (description and location)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus5 VehiclesEquipmentPersonnel on Runways FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus6 Traffic Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus2minus1 Light Signals FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus3minus3 Timely Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus4 Line Up and Wait (LUAW) FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus3 Same Runway Separation
3minus10minus11 CLOSED TRAFFIC
Approvedisapprove pilot requests to remain in closed traffic for successive operations subject to local traffic conditions
PHRASEOLOGYminus LEFTRIGHT (if required) CLOSED TRAFFIC APPROVED REPORT (position if required)
or
UNABLE CLOSED TRAFFIC (additional information as required)
NOTEminus Segregated traffic patterns for helicopters to runways and other areas may be established by letter of agreement or other local operating procedures
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus7minus4 Runway Proximity FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus4 Line Up and Wait (LUAW) FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus3 Same Runway Separation
3minus10minus12 OVERHEAD MANEUVER
Issue the following to arriving aircraft that will conduct an overhead maneuver
a Pattern altitude and direction of traffic Omit either or both if standard or when you know the pilot is familiar with a nonstandard procedure
PHRASEOLOGYminus PATTERN ALTITUDE (altitude) RIGHT TURNS
b Request for report on initial approach
PHRASEOLOGYminus REPORT INITIAL
Arrival Procedures and Separation 3minus10minus9
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
c ldquoBreakrdquo information and request for pilot report Specify the point of ldquobreakrdquo only if nonstandard Request the pilot to report ldquobreakrdquo if required for traffic or other reasons
PHRASEOLOGYminus BREAK AT (specified point)
REPORT BREAK
d Overhead maneuver patterns are developed at airports where aircraft have an operational need to conduct the maneuver An aircraft conducting an overhead maneuver is VFR and the IFR flight plan is canceled when the aircraft reaches the ldquoinitial pointrdquo on the initial approach portion of the maneuver The existence of a standard overhead maneuver pattern does not eliminate the possible requirement for an aircraft to conform to conventional rectangular patterns if an overhead maneuver cannot be approved
NOTEminus Aircraft operating to an airport without a functioning control tower must initiate cancellation of the IFR flight plan prior to executing the overhead maneuver or after landing
FIG 3minus10minus13
Overhead Maneuver
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAir Force Three Six Eight Runway Six wind zero seven zero at eight pattern altitude six thousand report initialrdquo
ldquoAir Force Three Six Eight break at midfield report breakrdquo
ldquoAir Force Three Six Eight cleared to landrdquo
ldquoAlfa Kilo Two Two Runway Three One wind three three
zero at one four right turns report initialrdquo
ldquoAlfa Kilo Two Two report breakrdquo
ldquoAlfa Kilo Two Two cleared to landrdquo
e Timely and positive controller action is required to prevent a conflict when an overhead pattern could extend into the path of a departing or a missed approach aircraft Local procedures andor coordina-tion requirements should be set forth in an appropriate letter of agreement facility directive base flying manual etc when the frequency of occurrence warrants
3minus10minus13 SIMULATED FLAMEOUT (SFO) APPROACHESEMERGENCY LANDING PATTERN (ELP) OPERATIONSPRACTICE PRECAUTIONARY APPROACHES
a Authorize military aircraft to make SFOELP practice precautionary approaches if the following conditions are met
1 A letter of agreement or local operating procedure is in effect between the military flying organization and affected ATC facility
(a) Include specific coordination execution and approval procedures for the operation
(b) The exchange or issuance of traffic information as agreed to in any interfacility letter of agreement is accomplished
(c) Include a statement in the procedure that clarifies at which points SFOsELPs maymay not be terminated (See FIG 3minus10minus14 and FIG 3minus10minus16)
2 Traffic information regarding aircraft in radio communication with or visible to tower controllers which are operating within or adjacent to the flameout maneuvering area is provided to the SFOELP aircraft and other concerned aircraft
3 The high-key altitude or practice precaution-ary approach maneuvering altitudes of the aircraft concerned are obtained prior to approving the approach (See FIG 3minus10minus14 and FIG 3minus10minus16)
NOTEminus 1 Practice precautionarySFOELP approaches are authorized only for specific aircraft Any aircraft however might make precautionary approaches when engine failure is considered possible The practice precautionary approach maneuvering areaaltitudes may not conform to the standard SFOELP maneuvering areaaltitudes
3minus10minus10 Arrival Procedures and Separation
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
2 SFOELP approaches generally require high descent rates Visibility ahead and beneath the aircraft is greatly restricted
3 Pattern adjustments for aircraft conducting SFOs and ELPs may impact the effectiveness of SFO and ELP training
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus8minus12 Low Approach and Touch-and-Go FAA Order JO 76104 Para 9minus3minus7 Simulated Flameout (SFO)Emergency Landing Pattern (ELP) Operations
b For overhead SFOELP approaches
1 Request a report at the entry point
PHRASEOLOGYminus REPORT (high or low) KEY (as appropriate)
2 Request a report at low key
PHRASEOLOGYminus REPORT LOW KEY
3 At low key issue low approach clearance or alternate instructions
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus8minus1 SequenceSpacing Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus1minus7 Inflight Emergencies Involving Military Fighter-type Aircraft FAA Order JO 76104 Para 9minus3minus7 Simulated Flameout (SFO)Emergency Landing Pattern (ELP) Operations
c For straightminusin simulation flameout approaches
1 Request a position report from aircraft conducting straightminusin SFO approaches
PHRASEOLOGYminus REPORT (distance) MILE SIMULATED FLAMEOUT FINAL
2 At the appropriate position on final (normally no closer than 3 miles) issue low approach clearance or alternate instruction (See FIG 3minus10minus15)
Arrival Procedures and Separation 3minus10minus11
JO 711065Y 81519
FIG 3minus10minus14
Simulated Flameout [1]
3minus10minus12 Arrival Procedures and Separation
81519 JO 711065Y
FIG 3minus10minus15
Simulated Flameout [2]
FIG 3minus10minus16
Emergency Landing Pattern
Arrival Procedures and Separation 3minus10minus13
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 11 Helicopter Operations
3minus11minus1 TAXI AND GROUND MOVEMENT OPERATION
a When necessary for a wheeled helicopter to taxi on the surface use the phraseology in Para-graph 3minus7minus2 Taxi and Ground Movement Operations
NOTEminus Ground taxiing uses less fuel than hover-taxiing and minimizes air turbulence However under certain conditions such as rough soft or uneven terrain it may become necessary to hoverair-taxi for safety considera-tions Helicopters with articulating rotors (usually designs with three or more main rotor blades) are subject to ldquoground resonancerdquo and may on rare occasions suddenly lift off the ground to avoid severe damage or destruction
b When requested or necessary for a helicopter VTOL aircraft to proceed at a slow speed above the surface normally below 20 knots and in ground effect use the following phraseology supplemented as appropriate with the phraseology in Paragraph 3minus7minus2 Taxi and Ground Movement Operations
PHRASEOLOGYminus HOVER-TAXI (supplemented as appropriate from Para 3minus7minus2 Taxi and Ground Movement Operations)
CAUTION (dust blowing snow loose debris taxiing light aircraft personnel etc)
NOTEminus Hover-taxiing consumes fuel at a high burn rate and helicopter downwash turbulence (produced in ground effect) increases significantly with larger and heavier helicopters
REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Hover Taxi AIM Para 4minus3minus17 VFR Helicopter Operations at Controlled Airports
c When requested or necessary for a helicopter to proceed expeditiously from one point to another normally below 100 feet AGL and at airspeeds above 20 knots use the following phraseology supplemen-ted as appropriate with the phraseology in Paragraph 3minus7minus2 Taxi and Ground Movement Operations
PHRASEOLOGYminus AIR-TAXI
VIA (direct as requested or specified route)
activeinactive runway)
AVOID (aircraftvehiclespersonnel) If required
REMAIN AT OR BELOW (altitude)
CAUTION (wake turbulence or other reasons above)
LAND AND CONTACT TOWER
or
HOLD FOR (reasonminus takeoff clearance release landingtaxiing aircraft etc)
NOTEminus Air-taxi is the preferred method for helicopter movements on airports provided ground operationsconditions permit Air-taxi authorizes the pilot to proceed above the surface either via hover-taxi or flight at speeds more than 20 knots Unless otherwise requested or instructed the pilot is expected to remain below 100 feet AGL The pilot is solely responsible for selecting a safe airspeed for the altitudeoperation being conducted REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Air Taxi AIM Para 4minus3minus17 VFR Helicopter Operations at Controlled Airports
WAKE TURBULENCE APPLICATION
d Avoid clearances which require small aircraft or helicopters to taxi in close proximity to taxiing or hover-taxi helicopters REFERENCEminus AC 90minus23 Aircraft Wake Turbulence Para 10 and Para 11
3minus11minus2 HELICOPTER TAKEOFF CLEARANCE
a Issue takeoff clearances from movement areas other than active runways or in diverse directions from active runways with additional instructions as necessary Whenever possible issue takeoff clear-ance in lieu of extended hoverminustaxi or airminustaxi operations
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Present position taxiway helipad numbers) MAKE RIGHTLEFT TURN FOR (direction points of compass heading NAVAID radial) DEPARTUREDEPARTURE ROUTE (number name or code) AVOID (aircraft vehiclespersonnel)
TO (location heliport helipad operatingmovement area
Helicopter Operations 3minus11minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
or
REMAIN (direction) OF (active runways parking areas passenger terminals etc)
CAUTION (power lines unlighted obstructions trees wake turbulence etc)
CLEARED FOR TAKEOFF
b If takeoff is requested from nonminusmovement areas an area not authorized for helicopter use or an area off the airport and in your judgment the operation appears to be reasonable use the following phraseology instead of the takeoff clearance in subpara a
PHRASEOLOGYminus DEPARTURE FROM (requested location) WILL BE AT YOUR OWN RISK (additional instructions as necessary) USE CAUTION (if applicable)
c Unless agreed to by the pilot do not issue downwind takeoffs if the tailwind exceeds 5 knots
NOTEminus A pilot request to takeoff from a given point in a given direction constitutes agreement
3minus11minus3 HELICOPTER DEPARTURE SEPARATION
Separate a departing helicopter from other heli-copters by ensuring that it does not takeoff until one of the following conditions exists
NOTEminus Helicopters performing air-taxiing operations within the boundary of the airport are considered to be taxiing aircraft
a A preceding departing helicopter has left the takeoff area (See FIG 3minus11minus1)
FIG 3minus11minus1
Helicopter Departure Separation
b A preceding arriving helicopter has taxied off the landing area (See FIG 3minus11minus2)
FIG 3minus11minus2
Helicopter Departure Separation
3minus11minus2 Helicopter Operations
81519 JO 711065Y
3minus11minus4 HELICOPTER ARRIVAL SEPARATION
Separate an arriving helicopter from other helicopters by ensuring that it does not land until one of the following conditions exists
a A preceding arriving helicopter has come to a stop or taxied off the landing area (See FIG 3minus11minus3 and FIG 3minus11minus4)
FIG 3minus11minus3
Helicopter Arrival Separation
FIG 3minus11minus4
Helicopter Arrival Separation
b A preceding departing helicopter has left the landing area (See FIG 3minus11minus5)
FIG 3minus11minus5
Helicopter Arrival Separation
3minus11minus5 SIMULTANEOUS LANDINGS OR TAKEOFFS
Authorize helicopters to conduct simultaneous landings or takeoffs if the distance between the landing or takeoff points is at least 200 feet and the courses to be flown do not conflict Refer to surface markings to determine the 200 foot minimum or instruct a helicopter to remain at least 200 feet from another helicopter (See FIG 3minus11minus6)
FIG 3minus11minus6
Simultaneous Helicopter Landings or Takeoffs
Helicopter Operations 3minus11minus3
JO 711065Y 81519
3minus11minus6 HELICOPTER LANDING CLEARANCE
a Issue landing clearances to helicopters going to movement areas other than active runways or from diverse directions to points on active runways with additional instructions as necessary Whenever possible issue a landing clearance in lieu of extended hoverminustaxi or airminustaxi operations
PHRASEOLOGYminus MAKE APPROACH STRAIGHTminusINCIRCLING LEFT RIGHT TURN TO (location runway taxiway helipad Maltese cross) ARRIVALARRIVAL ROUTE (number name or code)
HOLD SHORT OF (active runway extended runway centerline other)
REMAIN (directiondistance eg 700 feet 1 12 miles) OFFROM (runway runway centerline other helicopter aircraft)
CAUTION (power lines unlighted obstructions wake tur-bulence etc)
CLEARED TO LAND
b If landing is requested to non-movement areas an area not authorized for helicopter use or an area off the airport and in your judgment the operation appears to be reasonable use the following phraseology instead of the landing clearance in subpara a
PHRASEOLOGYminus LANDING AT (requested location) WILL BE AT YOUR OWN RISK (additional instructions as necessary) USE CAUTION (if applicable)
c Unless agreed to by the pilot do not issue downwind landings if the tailwind exceeds 5 knots
NOTEminus A pilot request to land at a given point from a given direction constitutes agreement
3minus11minus4 Helicopter Operations
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 12 Sea Lane Operations
3minus12minus1 APPLICATION
Where sea lanes are established and controlled apply the provisions of this section
3minus12minus2 DEPARTURE SEPARATION
Separate a departing aircraft from a preceding departing or arriving aircraft using the same sea lane by ensuring that it does not commence takeoff until
a The other aircraft has departed and crossed the end of the sea lane or turned to avert any conflict (See FIG 3minus12minus1) If you can determine distances by reference to suitable landmarks the other aircraft need only be airborne if the following minimum distance exists between aircraft
1 When only Category I aircraft are involvedminus 1500 feet
2 When a Category I aircraft is preceded by a Category II aircraftminus 3000 feet
3 When either the succeeding or both are Category II aircraftminus 3000 feet
4 When either is a Category III aircraftminus 6000 feet (See FIG 3minus12minus2)
FIG 3minus12minus1
Sea Lane Departure Operations
FIG 3minus12minus2
Sea Lane Departure Operations
b A preceding landing aircraft has taxied out of the sea lane
NOTEminus Due to the absence of braking capability caution should be exercised when instructing a float plane to hold a position as the aircraft will continue to move because of prop generated thrust Therefore clearance to line up and wait should be followed by takeoff or other clearance as soon as is practical
3minus12minus3 ARRIVAL SEPARATION
Separate an arriving aircraft from another aircraft using the same sea lane by ensuring that the arriving aircraft does not cross the landing threshold until one of the following conditions exists
a The other aircraft has landed and taxied out of the sea lane Between sunrise and sunset if you can determine distances by reference to suitable landmarks and the other aircraft has landed it need not be clear of the sea lane if the following minimum distance from the landing threshold exists
Sea Lane Operations 3minus12minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
1 When a Category I aircraft is landing behind a Category I or IIminus 2000 feet (See FIG 3minus12minus3)
FIG 3minus12minus3
Sea Lane Arrival Operations
2 When a Category II aircraft is landing behind a Category I or IIminus 2500 feet (See FIG 3minus12minus4)
FIG 3minus12minus4
Sea Lane Arrival Operations [View 2]
b The other aircraft has departed and crossed the end of the sea lane or turned to avert any conflict (See FIG 3minus12minus5) If you can determine distances by reference to suitable landmarks and the other aircraft is airborne it need not have crossed the end of the sea
lane if the following minimum distance from the landing threshold exists
1 When only Category I aircraft are involvedminus 1500 feet
2 When either is a Category II aircraftminus 3000 feet
3 When either is a Category III aircraftminus 6000 feet (See FIG 3minus12minus6)
FIG 3minus12minus5
Sea Lane Arrival Operations
FIG 3minus12minus6
Sea Lane Arrival Operations
3minus12minus2 Sea Lane Operations
81519 JO 711065Y
Chapter 4 IFR
Section 1 NAVAID Use Limitations
4minus1minus1 ALTITUDE AND DISTANCE LIMITATIONS
When specifying a route other than an established airway or route do not exceed the limitations in the table on any portion of the route which lies within controlled airspace (For altitude and distance limitations see TBL 4minus1minus1 TBL 4minus1minus2 and TBL 4minus1minus3) (For correct application of altitude and distance limitations see FIG 4minus1minus1 and FIG 4minus1minus2)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus1minus5 Fix Use FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus6minus2 Methods
TBL 4minus1minus1
VORVORTACTACAN NAVAIDs Normal Usable Altitudes and Radius Distances
Class Altitude Distance (miles)
T 12000 and below 25
L Below 18000 40
H Below 14500 40
H 14500 minus 17999 100
H 18000 minus FL 450 130
H Above FL 450 100
TBL 4minus1minus2
LMF Radio Beacon (RBN) Usable Radius Distances for All Altitudes
Class Power (watts) Distance (miles)
CL Under 25 15
MH Under 50 25
H 50 minus 1999 50
HH 2000 or more 75
FIG 4minus1minus1
Application of Altitude and Distance Limitations [Application 1]
FIG 4minus1minus2
Application of Altitude and Distance Limitations [Application 2]
TBL 4minus1minus3
ILS Usable Height and Distance
Height (feet) above transmitter
Distance (miles from transmitter)
4500 10 (for glideslope)
4500 18 (for localizer)
Use the current flight check heightaltitude limitations if different from the above minima
4minus1minus2 EXCEPTIONS
Altitude and distance limitations need not be applied when any of the following conditions are met
a Routing is initiated by ATC or requested by the pilot and radar monitoring is provided
EXCEPTION-GNSS equipped aircraft G L S and V not on a random impromptu route
NAVAID Use Limitations 4minus1minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
NOTEminus 1 Except for GNSS-equipped aircraft G L S and V not on a random impromptu route Paragraph 5minus5minus1 Application requires radar separation be provided to RNAV aircraft operating at and below FL450 on Q routes or random RNAV routes excluding oceanic airspace
2 When a clearance is issued beyond the altitude andor distance limitations of a NAVAID in addition to being responsible for maintaining separation from other aircraft and airspace the controller is responsible for providing aircraft with information and advice related to significant deviations from the expected flight path
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus3 Procedural Preference FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus4minus2 Route Structure Transitions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus1minus10 Deviation Advisories FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus1 Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 6minus5minus4 Minima Along Other Than Established Airways or Routes AIM Para 5-1-8c Direct Flights AIM Para 5-1-8d Area Navigation (RNAV) PCG Term - Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)[ICAO]
b Operational necessity requires and approval has been obtained from the Frequency Management and Flight Inspection Offices to exceed them
c Requested routing is via an MTR
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus6minus2 Methods
4minus1minus3 CROSSING ALTITUDE
Use an altitude consistent with the limitations of the aid when clearing an aircraft to cross or hold at a fix
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus6minus2 Methods
4minus1minus4 VFR-ON-TOP
Use a route not meeting service volume limitations only if an aircraft requests to operate ldquoVFR-on-toprdquo on this route
NOTEminus Aircraft equipped with TACAN only are expected to
1 Define route of flight between TACAN or VORTAC NAVAIDs in the same manner as VOR-equipped aircraft
2 Except in Class A airspace submit requests for ldquoVFR-on-toprdquo flight where insufficient TACAN or VORTAC NAVAIDs exist to define the route
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus6minus2 Methods
4minus1minus5 FIX USE
Request aircraft position reports only over fixes shown on charts used for the altitude being flown except as follows
NOTEminus Waypoints filed in random RNAV routes automatically become compulsory reporting points for the flight unless otherwise advised by ATC
a Unless the pilot requests otherwise use only those fixes shown on high altitude en route charts high altitude instrument approach procedures charts and SID charts when clearing military turbojet single-piloted aircraft
b Except for military single-piloted turbojet aircraft unpublished fixes may be used if the name of the NAVAID and if appropriate the radialcourse azimuth and frequencychannel are given to the pilot An unpublished fix is defined as one approved and planned for publication which is not yet depicted on the charts or one which is used in accord with the following REFERENCEminus FAA Order 82603 United States Standard for Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) Chapter 17 Basic Holding Criteria
1 Unpublished fixes are formed by the en route radial and either a DME distance from the same NAVAID or an intersecting radial from an off-route VORVORTACTACAN DME must be used in lieu of off-route radials whenever possible
2 Except where known signal coverage restric-tions exist an unpublished fix may be used for ATC purposes if its location does not exceed NAVAID altitude and distance limitation and when off-route radials are used the angle of divergence meets the criteria prescribed below
NOTEminus Unpublished fixes should not negate the normal use of published intersections Frequent routine use of an unpublished fix would justify establishing a fix
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus1minus1 Altitude and Distance Limitations
3 Do not hold aircraft at unpublished fixes below the lowest assignable altitude dictated by terrain clearance for the appropriate holding pattern airspace area (template) regardless of the MEA for the route being flown
4 When the unpublished fix is located on an off-route radial and the radial providing course
NAVAID Use Limitations 4minus1minus2
81519 JO 711065Y
guidance it must be used consistent with the following divergence angles
(a) When holding operations are involved with respect to subparas (b) and (c) below the angle of divergence must be at least 45 degrees
(b) When both NAVAIDs involved are located within 30 NM of the unpublished fix the minimum divergence angle is 30 degrees
(c) When the unpublished fix is located over 30 NM from the NAVAID generating the off-course radial the minimum divergence angle must increase 1 degree per NM up to 45 NM eg 45 NM would require 45 degrees
(d) When the unpublished fix is located beyond 45 NM from the NAVAID generating the off-course radial the minimum divergence angle
must increase 12 degree per NM eg 130 NM would require 88 degrees
c Fixes contained in the route description of MTRs are considered filed fixes
d TACAN-only aircraft (type suffix M N or P) possess TACAN with DME but no VOR or LF navigation system capability Assign fixes based on TACAN or VORTAC facilities only
NOTEminus TACAN-only aircraft can never be held overhead the NAVAID be it TACAN or VORTAC
e DME fixes must not be established within the no-course signal zone of the NAVAID from which inbound holding course information would be derived REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus5minus3 NAVAID Fixes FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus6minus2 Methods
NAVAID Use Limitations 4minus1minus3
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 2 Clearances
4minus2minus1 CLEARANCE ITEMS
Issue the following clearance items as appropriate in the order listed below
a Aircraft identification
b Clearance limit
1 When the clearance limit is an airport the word ldquoairportrdquo must follow the airport name
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT
2 When the clearance limit is a NAVAID and the NAVAID type is known the type of NAVAID must follow the NAVAID name
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (NAVAID name and type)
3 When the clearance limit is an intersection or waypoint and the type is known the type must follow the intersection or waypoint name
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (intersection or waypoint name and type)
c Standard Instrument Departure (SID)
d Route of flight including PDRPDARPAR when applied
e Altitude data in the order flown
f Mach number if applicable
g USAF When issuing a clearance to an airborne aircraft containing an altitude assignment do not include more than one of the following in the same transmission
1 Frequency change
2 Transponder change
3 Heading
4 Altimeter setting
5 Traffic information containing an altitude
h Holding instructions
i Any special information
j Frequency and beacon code information
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus8 IFRminusVFR and VFRminusIFR Flights FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus5minus7 Altitude Information
4minus2minus2 CLEARANCE PREFIX
a Prefix a clearance information or a request for information which will be relayed to an aircraft through a nonminusATC facility by stating ldquoAminusTminusC clearsrdquo ldquoAminusTminusC advisesrdquo or ldquoAminusTminusC requestsrdquo
b Flight service stations and ARTCC Flight Data Units must prefix a clearance with the appropriate phrase ldquoATC clearsrdquo ldquoATC advisesrdquo etc
4minus2minus3 DELIVERY INSTRUCTIONS
Issue specific clearance delivery instructions if appropriate
4minus2minus4 CLEARANCE RELAY
Relay clearances verbatim REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus4minus4 Communications Failure
4minus2minus5 ROUTE OR ALTITUDE AMENDMENTS
a Amend route of flight in a previously issued clearance by one of the following
1 State which portion of the route is being amended and then state the amendment
PHRASEOLOGYminus CHANGE (portion of route) TO READ (new portion of route)
2 State the amendment to the route and then state that the rest of the route is unchanged
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Amendment to route) REST OF ROUTE UNCHANGED
3 Issue a clearance ldquodirectrdquo to a point on the previously issued route
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED DIRECT (fixwaypoint)
Or
CLEARED DIRECT (destination) AIRPORT
NOTEminus Clearances authorizing ldquodirectrdquo to a point on a previously issued route do not require the phrase ldquorest of route
Clearances 4minus2minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
unchangedrdquo However it must be understood where the previously cleared route is resumed When necessary ldquorest of route unchangedrdquo may be used to clarify routing
4 Issue the entire route by stating the amendment
EXAMPLEminus (Cessna 21A has been cleared to the Airville Airport via V41 Delta VOR V174 Alfa VOR direct Airville Airport maintain 9000 After takeoff the aircraft is rerouted via V41 Frank intersection V71 Delta VOR V174 Alfa VOR The controller issues one of the following as an amended clearance)
1 ldquoCessna Two One Alfa change Victor FortyminusOne Delta to read Victor FortyminusOne Frank Victor SeventyminusOne Deltardquo
2 ldquoCessna Two One Alfa cleared via Victor FortyminusOne Frank Victor SeventyminusOne Delta rest of route un-changedrdquo
3 ldquoCessna Two One Alfa cleared via Victor FortyminusOne Frank Victor SeventyminusOne Delta Victor One Seventyminus Four Alfa VminusOminusR direct Airville airport maintain Niner Thousandrdquo
b When route or altitude in a previously issued clearance is amended restate all applicable altitude restrictions
EXAMPLEminus 1 (A departing aircraft is cleared to cross Ollis intersection at or above 3000 Gordonsville VOR at or above 12000 maintain FL 200 Shortly after departure the altitude to be maintained is changed to FL 240 Because altitude restrictions remain in effect the controller issues an amended clearance as follows)
ldquoAmend altitude Cross Ollis intersection at or above Three Thousand cross Gordonsville VminusOminusR at or above One Two Thousand maintain Flight Level Two Four Zerordquo
(Shortly after departure altitude restrictions are no longer applicable the controller issues an amended clearance as follows)
ldquoClimb and maintain Flight Level Two Four Zerordquo
2 (An aircraft is cleared to climb via a SID with published altitude restrictions Shortly after departure the top altitude is changed to FL 230 and compliance with the altitude restrictions is still required the controller issues an amended clearance as follows)
ldquoClimb via SID except maintain Flight Level Two Three Zerordquo
NOTEminus 1 Restating previously issued altitude to ldquomaintainrdquo is an amended clearance If altitude to ldquomaintainrdquo is changed or restated whether prior to departure or while airborne and previously issued altitude restrictions are omitted altitude restrictions are canceled including SIDSTAR altitude restrictions if any
2 Crossing altitudes and speed restrictions on Obstacle Departure Procedures (ODPs) cannot be canceled or amended by ATC
c Issue an amended clearance if a speed restriction is declined because it cannot be complied with concurrently with a previously issued altitude restriction
EXAMPLEminus (An aircraft is cleared to cross Gordonsville VOR at 11000 Shortly thereafter heshe is cleared to reduce hisher airspeed to 300 knots The pilot informs the controller heshe is unable to comply with both clearances simultaneously The controller issues an amended clearance as follows)
ldquoCross Gordonsville VOR at One One Thousand Then reduce speed to Three Zero Zerordquo
NOTEminus The phrase ldquodo the best you canrdquo or comparable phrases are not valid substitutes for an amended clearance with altitude or speed restrictions
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus18 Operational Requests FAA Order JO 711065 Section 6 Vectoring Para 5minus6minus2 Methods FAA Order JO 711065 Section 7 Speed Adjustment Para 5minus7minus2 Methods
d Air traffic control specialists should avoid route andor altitude changes for aircraft participating in the North American Route Program (NRP) and that are displaying ldquoNRPrdquo in the remarks section of their flight plan
NOTEminus Air traffic control specialists retain the latitude necessary to tactically resolve conflicts Every effort should be made to ensure the aircraft is returned to the original filed flight planaltitude as soon as conditions warrant
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus4 Operational Priority FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus2minus15 North American Route Program (NRP) Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus3minus2 En Route Data Entries FAA Order JO 72103 Chapter 18 Section 17 North American Route Program
Clearances 4minus2minus2
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
4minus2minus6 THROUGH CLEARANCES
You may clear an aircraft through intermediate stops
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED THROUGH (airport) TO (fix)
4minus2minus7 ALTRV CLEARANCE
Use the phrase ldquovia approved altitude reservation flight planrdquo if the aircraft will operate in an approved ALTRV
PHRASEOLOGYminus VIA APPROVED ALTITUDE RESERVATION (mission name) FLIGHT PLAN
NOTEminus An ALTRV normally includes the departure climb cruise and arrival phases of flight up to and including holding pattern or pointtime at which ATC provides separation between aircraft
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus3minus3 Abbreviated Departure Clearance
4minus2minus8 IFRminusVFR AND VFRminusIFR FLIGHTS
a Clear an aircraft planning IFR operations for the initial part of flight and VFR for the latter part to the fix at which the IFR part ends
b Treat an aircraft planning VFR for the initial part of flight and IFR for the latter part as a VFR departure Issue a clearance to this aircraft when it requests IFR clearance approaching the fix where it proposes to start IFR operations The phraseology CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT AS FILED may be used with abbreviated departure clearance procedures
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus3minus3 Abbreviated Departure Clearance
c When an aircraft changes from VFR to IFR the controller must assign a beacon code to Mode-C equipped aircraft that will allow MSAW alarms
d When VFR aircraft operating below the minimum altitude for IFR operations requests an IFR clearance and the pilot informs you or you are aware that they are unable to climb in VFR conditions to the minimum IFR altitude
1 Before issuing a clearance ask if the pilot is able to maintain terrain and obstruction clearance during a climb to the minimum IFR altitude
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Aircraft call sign) ARE YOU ABLE TO MAINTAIN YOUR OWN TERRAIN AND OBSTRUCTION CLEARANCE UNTIL REACHING (appropriate MVAMIAMEAOROCA) NOTEminus Pilots of popminusup aircraft are responsible for terrain and obstacle clearance until reaching minimum instrument altitude (MIA) or minimum en route altitude (MEA) Pilot compliance with an approved FAA procedure or an ATC instruction transfers that responsibility to the FAA therefore do not assign (or imply) specific course guidance that will (or could) be in effect below the MIA or MEA
EXAMPLEminus ldquoNovember Eight Seven Six are you able to provide your own terrain and obstruction clearance between your present altitude and six thousand feetrdquo
2 If the pilot is able to maintain their own terrain and obstruction clearance issue the appropri-ate IFR clearance as prescribed in Para 4minus2minus1 Clearance Items and Para 4minus5minus6 Minimum En Route Altitudes
3 If the pilot states that they are unable to maintain terrain and obstruction clearance instruct the pilot to maintain VFR and to state intentions
4 If appropriate apply the provisions of Para 10minus2minus7 VFR Aircraft In Weather Difficulty or Para 10minus2minus9 Radar Assistance Techniques as necessary
4minus2minus9 CLEARANCE ITEMS
The following guidelines must be utilized to facilitate the processing of airfile aircraft
a Ensure the aircraft is within your area of jurisdiction unless otherwise coordinated
b Obtain necessary information needed to provide IFR service
c Issue clearance to destination short range clearance or an instruction to the pilot to contact an FSS if the flight plan cannot be processed If clearance is to destination airport the phraseology CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT must be used If clearance is to a NAVAID state the name of the NAVAID followed by the type of NAVAID if the type is known If clearance is to an intersection or waypoint and the type is known the type must follow the intersection or waypoint name
NOTEminus These procedures do not imply that the processing of
Clearances 4minus2minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
airfiles has priority over another ATC duty to be performed
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus2minus1 Recording Information
4minus2minus10 CANCELLATION OF IFR FLIGHT PLAN
a If necessary before instructing an IFR aircraft arriving at an airport not served by an air traffic control tower or flight service station to change to the common traffic advisory frequency provide the pilot with instructions on how to cancel hisher IFR flight plan
1 Airports with an airground communications station
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Call sign) REPORT CANCELLATION OF IFR ON
(frequency)
2 Airports without an airground communica-tions station
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Call sign) REPORT CANCELLATION OF IFR THIS
FREQUENCY OR WITH FLIGHT SERVICE
Or
(Call sign) REPORT CANCELLATION OF IFR THIS
FREQUENCY OR WITH (FSS serving the area or the ATC
controlling facility)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoN13WA report cancellation of IFR this frequency or with
McAlester Radiordquo
b Respond to a pilotrsquos cancellation of hisher IFR flight plan as follows
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Call sign) IFR CANCELLATION RECEIVED
Clearances 4minus2minus4
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 3 Departure Procedures
4minus3minus1 DEPARTURE TERMINOLOGY
Avoid using the term ldquotakeoffrdquo except to actually clear an aircraft for takeoff or to cancel a takeoff clearance Use such terms as ldquodepartrdquo ldquodeparturerdquo or ldquoflyrdquo in clearances when necessary
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus9 Takeoff Clearance FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus11 Cancellation of Takeoff Clearance
4minus3minus2 DEPARTURE CLEARANCES
Include the following items in IFR departure clearances
NOTEminus When considered necessary controllers or pilots may initiate read backs of a clearance Some pilots may be required by company rule to do so
a Always include the airport of departure when issuing a departure clearance for relay to an aircraft by an FSS dispatcher etc
b Clearance Limit
1 Specify the destination airport when practi-cable even though it is outside controlled airspace Issue short range clearances as provided for in any procedures established for their use
(a) When the clearance limit is an airport the word ldquoairportrdquo must follow the airport name
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT
(b) When the clearance limit is a NAVAID and the NAVAID type is known the type of NAVAID must follow the NAVAID name
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (NAVAID name and type)
(c) When the clearance limit is an intersection or waypoint and the type is known the type must follow the intersection or waypoint name
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (intersection or waypoint name and type)
2 For Air Force One (AF1) operations do not specify the destination airport
NOTEminus Presidential detail is responsible for ensuring the accuracy of the destination airport
PHRASEOLOGYminus DESTINATION AS FILED
c Departure Procedures
1 Specify direction of takeoffturn or initial heading to be flown after takeoff as follows
(a) Locations with Airport Traffic Control ServiceminusSpecify direction of takeoffturn or initial heading as necessary consistent with published
(1) Departure Procedures (DP) If an aircraft is vectored off a published Standard Instrument Departure (SID) or Obstacle Departure Procedure (ODP) that vector cancels the DP and ATC becomes responsible for separation from terrain and or obstructions IFR aircraft must be assigned an altitude
(2) Diverse Vector Areas (DVA) The assignment of an initial heading using a DVA can be given to the pilot as part of the initial clearance but must be given no later than with the takeoff clearance Once airborne an aircraft assigned headings within the DVA can be vectored below the MVAMIA Controllers cannot interrupt an aircraftrsquos climb in the DVA until the aircraft is at or above the MVAMIA NOTEminus It is important for controllers to understand that there can be differences in published climb gradients applicable to individual departure procedures serving the same airport or runway Assigning a different departure procedure without the pilot being able to reminusbrief may result in the pilot rejecting the new procedure REFERENCEminus AIM Para 5minus2minus7 Departure Control AIM Para 5minus2minus9 Instrument Departure Procedures (DP) minus Obstacle Departure Procedures (ODP) and Standard Instrument Departures (SID)
(b) Locations without Airport Traffic Control Service but within a Class E surface area specify direction of takeoffturn or initial heading if necessary Obtainsolicit the pilotrsquos concurrence concerning a turn or heading before issuing them in a clearance NOTEminus Direction of takeoff and turn after takeoff can be obtainedsolicited directly from the pilot or relayed by an FSS dispatcher etc as obtainedsolicited from the pilot
Departure Procedures 4minus3minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
(c) At all other airportsminus Do not specify direction of takeoffturn after takeoff If necessary to specify an initial heading to be flown after takeoff issue the initial heading so as to apply only within controlled airspace
2 Where an obstacle departure procedure (ODP) has been published for a location and pilot compliance is necessary to ensure separation include the procedure as part of the ATC clearance
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDepart via the (airport name)(runway number) departure procedurerdquo Or ldquoDepart via the (graphic ODP name) obstacle departure procedurerdquo
NOTEminus Some aircraft are required by 14 CFR 91175 to depart a runway under IFR using the ODP absent other instructions from ATC
NOTEminus IFR takeoff minimums and obstacle departure procedures are prescribed for specific airportsrunways and published in either a textual or graphic form with the label (OBSTACLE) in the procedure title and documented on an appropriate FAA Form 8260 To alert pilots of their existence instrument approach procedure charts are annotated with a symbol
3 Do not solicit use of the Visual Climb over Airport (VCOA) option
NOTEminus Pilots will specifically advise ATC of their intent to use the VCOA option
4 Compatibility with a procedure issued may be verified by asking the pilot if items obtained solicited will allow himher to comply with local traffic pattern terrain or obstruction avoidance
PHRASEOLOGYminus FLY RUNWAY HEADING
DEPART (direction or runway)
TURN LEFTRIGHT
WHEN ENTERING CONTROLLED AIRSPACE (instruction) FLY HEADING (degrees) UNTIL REACHING (altitude point or fix) BEFORE PROCEEDING ON COURSE
FLY A (degree) BEARINGAZIMUTH FROMTO (fix) UNTIL (time)
or
UNTIL REACHING (fix or altitude)
and if required
BEFORE PROCEEDING ON COURSE
EXAMPLEminus ldquoVerify right turn after departure will allow compliance with local traffic patternrdquoor ldquoVerify this clearance will allow compliance with terrain or obstruction avoidancerdquo
NOTEminus If a published IFR departure procedure is not included in an ATC clearance compliance with such a procedure is the pilotrsquos prerogative
5 SIDs
(a) Assign a SID (including transition if necessary) Assign a PDR or the route filed by the pilot only when a SID is not established for the departure route to be flown or the pilot has indicated that heshe does not wish to use a SID
NOTEminus Departure procedure descriptive text contained within parentheses (for example ldquoJimmy One (RNAV) Departurerdquo) is not included in departure clearance phraseology
PHRASEOLOGYminus (SID name and number) DEPARTURE
(SID name and number) DEPARTURE (transition name) TRANSITION
EXAMPLEminus ldquoStroudsburg One Departurerdquo ldquoStroudsburg One Departure Sparta Transitionrdquo
NOTEminus If a pilot does not wish to use a SID issued in an ATC clearance or any other SID published for that location heshe is expected to advise ATC
(b) If it is necessary to assign a crossing altitude which differs from the SID altitude emphasize the change to the pilot
PHRASEOLOGYminus (SID name and number) DEPARTURE EXCEPT CROSS (revised altitude information)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoStroudsburg One Departure except cross Quaker at
4minus3minus2 Departure Procedures
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
five thousandrdquo
ldquoAstoria Two Departure except cross Astor waypoint at six thousandrdquo
(c) Specify altitudes when they are not included in the SID
PHRASEOLOGYminus (SID name and number) DEPARTURE CROSS (fix) AT (altitude)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoStroudsburg One Departure Cross Jersey intersection at four thousand Cross Range intersection at six thousandrdquo
ldquoEngle Two departure Cross Pilim waypoint at or above five thousand Cross Engle waypoint at or above seven thousand Cross Gorge waypoint at niner thousandrdquo
d Route of flight Specify one or more of the following
1 Airway route course heading azimuth arc or vector
2 The routing a pilot can expect if any part of the route beyond a short range clearance limit differs from that filed
PHRASEOLOGYminus EXPECT FURTHER CLEARANCE VIA (airways routes or fixes)
e Altitude Use one of the following in the order of preference listed
NOTEminus Turbojet aircraft equipped with afterburner engines may occasionally be expected to use afterburning during their climb to the en route altitude When so advised by the pilot the controller may be able to plan hisher traffic to accommodate the high performance climb and allow the pilot to climb to hisher planned altitude without restriction
REFERENCEminus PCG Climb Via Top Altitude
1 To the maximum extent possible Air Force One will be cleared unrestricted climb to
(a) 9000rsquo AGL or higher
(b) If unable 9000rsquo AGL or higher then the highest available altitude below 9000rsquo AGL
2 Assign the altitude requested by the pilot
3 Assign an altitude as near as possible to the altitude requested by the pilot and
(a) Inform the pilot when to expect clearance to the requested altitude unless instructions are contained in the specified SID or
(b) If the requested altitude is not expected to be available inform the pilot what altitude can be expected and whenwhere to expect it
4 Use one of the following when the SID contains published crossing restrictions
(a) Instruct aircraft to ldquoClimb via SIDrdquo
(b) Instruct the aircraft to ldquoClimb via SID except maintain (altitude)rdquo when a top altitude is not published or when it is necessary to issue an interim altitude
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCleared to Johnston Airport Scott One departure Jonez transition Q One Fortyminusfive Climb via SIDrdquo
ldquoCleared to Johnston Airport Scott One departure Jonez transition Q One Fortyminusfive Climb via SID except maintain flight level one eight zerordquo
ldquoCleared to Johnston Airport Scott One departure Jonez transition Q One Fortyminusfive Climb Via SID except maintain flight level one eight zero expect flight level three five zero one zero minutes after departurerdquo
NOTEminus 1 Use of ldquoClimb via SID Except Maintainrdquo to emphasize a published procedural constraint is an inappropriate use of this phraseology
2 Considering the principle that the last ATC clearance issued has precedence over the previous the phraseology ldquomaintain (altitude)rdquo alone cancels previously issued altitude restrictions including SIDSTAR altitude restric-tions unless they are restated or modified REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus5 Route or Altitude Amendments AIM 4minus4minus10 Adherence to Clearance
5 When a SID does not contain published crossing restrictions andor is a SID with a Radar Vector segment or a Radar Vector SID or a SID is constructed with a Radar Vector segment and contains published crossing restrictions after the vector segment instruct aircraft to ldquoMAINTAIN (altitude)rdquo
NOTEminus 1 14 CFR Section 91185 says that in the event of a two-way radio communication failure in VFR conditions or if VFR conditions are encountered after the failure the pilot must continue the flight under VFR and land as soon as practicable That section also says that when the failure occurs in IFR conditions the pilot must continue flight at
Departure Procedures 4minus3minus3
JO 711065Y 81519
the highest of the following altitudes or flight levels for the route segment being flown
a The altitude or flight level assigned in the last ATC clearance received
b The minimum altitude (converted if appropriate to minimum flight level as prescribed in 14 CFR Sec-tion 91121(c)) for IFR operations (This altitude should be consistent with MEAs MOCAs etc)
c The altitude or flight level ATC has advised may be expected in a further clearance
2 If the expected altitude is the highest of the preceding choices the pilot should begin to climb to that expected altitude at the time or fix specified in the clearance The choice to climb to the expected altitude is not applicable if the pilot has proceeded beyond the specified fix or if the time designated in the clearance has expired
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLIMB AND MAINTAIN (the altitude as near as possible to the pilotrsquos requested altitude) EXPECT (the requested altitude or an altitude different from the requested altitude) AT (time or fix)
and if applicable
(pilotrsquos requested altitude) IS NOT AVAILABLE
EXAMPLEminus 1 A pilot has requested flight level 350 Flight level 230 is immediately available and flight level 350 will be available at the Appleton zero five zero radial 35 mile fix The clearance will read ldquoClimb and maintain flight level two three zero Expect flight level three five zero at Appleton zero five zero radial three five mile fixrdquo
2 A pilot has requested 9000 feet An altitude restriction is required because of facility procedures or requirements Assign the altitude and advise the pilot at what fixtime the pilot may expect the requested altitude The clearance could read ldquoClimb and maintain five thousand Expect niner thousand one zero minutes after departurerdquo
3 A pilot has requested 17000 feet which is unavailable You plan 15000 feet to be the pilotrsquos highest altitude prior to descent to the pilotrsquos destination but only 13000 feet is available until San Jose VOR Advise the pilot of the expected altitude change and at what fixtime to expect clearance to 15000 feet The clearance will read ldquoClimb and maintain one three thousand Expect one five thousand at San Jose One seven thousand is not availablerdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus3minus3 Abbreviated Departure Clearance FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus8minus2 Initial Heading FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus5 Route or Altitude Amendments AIM 4-4-10 Adherence to Clearance
4minus3minus3 ABBREVIATED DEPARTURE CLEARANCE
a Issue an abbreviated departure clearance if its use reduces verbiage and the following conditions are met REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus8 IFR-VFR and VFR-IFR Flights
1 The route of flight filed with ATC has not been changed by the pilot company operations officer input operator or in the stored flight plan program prior to departure
NOTEminus A pilot will not accept an abbreviated clearance if the route of flight filed with ATC has been changed by himher or the company or the operations officer before departure Heshe is expected to inform the control facility on initial radio contact if heshe cannot accept the clearance It is the responsibility of the company or operations officer to inform the pilot when they make a change
2 All ATC facilities concerned have sufficient route of flight information to exercise their control responsibilities
NOTEminus The route of flight information to be provided may be covered in letters of agreement
3 When the flight will depart IFR destination airport information is relayed between the facilities concerned prior to departure
EXAMPLEminus 1 A tower or flight service station relay of destination airport information to the center when requesting clearance
ldquoRequest clearance for United Four Sixty-One to OrsquoHarerdquo
2 A center relay to the tower or flight service station when initiating a clearance ldquoClearance for United Four Sixty-One to OrsquoHarerdquo
NOTEminus Pilots are expected to furnish the facility concerned with destination airport information on initial radio call-up This will provide the information necessary for detecting any destination airport differences on facility relay
4 The assigned altitude according to the provisions in Para 4minus3minus2 Departure Clearances subparagraph e is stated in the clearance
b If it is necessary to modify a filed route of flight in order to achieve computer acceptance due for example to incorrect fix or airway identification the contraction ldquoFRCrdquo meaning ldquoFull Route Clearance
4minus3minus4 Departure Procedures
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
Necessaryrdquo or ldquoFRC(fix)rdquo will be added to the remarks ldquoFRCrdquo or ldquoFRC(fix)rdquo must always be the first item of intra-center remarks When ldquoFRCrdquo or ldquoFRC(fix)rdquo appears on a flight progress strip the controller issuing the ATC clearance to the aircraft must issue a full route clearance to the specified fix or if no fix is specified for the entire route
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCleared to Missoula International Airport Chief Two Departure to Angley direct Salina then as filed maintain one seven thousandrdquo
NOTEminus Changes such as those made to conform with traffic flows and preferred routings are only permitted to be made by the pilot (or hisher operations office) or the controller responsible for initiating the clearance to the aircraft
c Specify the destination airport in the clearance
d When no changes are required in the filed route state the phrase ldquoCleared to (destination) airport ([SID name and number] and SID transition as appropriate) then as filedrdquo If a SID is not assigned follow with ldquoAs filedrdquo If required add any additional instructions or information including requested altitude if different than assigned
e Use one of the following when the SID contains published crossing restrictions
1 Instruct aircraft to ldquoClimb via SIDrdquo
2 Instruct aircraft to ldquoClimb via SID except maintain (altitude)rdquo when a top altitude is not published or when it is necessary to issue an interim altitude
NOTEminus Use of ldquoClimb via SID Except Maintainrdquo to emphasize a published procedural constraint is an inappropriate use of this phraseology
f Instruct aircraft to MAINTAIN (altitude) when
1 No SID is assigned
2 A SID does not contain published crossing restrictions andor is a SID with a Radar Vector segment or is a Radar Vector SID
3 A SID is constructed with a Radar Vector segment and contains published crossing restrictions after the vector segment
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT
and as appropriate
(SID name and number) DEPARTURE THEN AS FILED
When the SID does not contain published crossing restrictions andor is a SID with a Radar Vector segment or a Radar Vector SID or is a SID with a radar vector segment and contains published crossing restrictions after the vector segment
MAINTAIN (altitude) (additional instructions or information)
Or when a SID contains published crossing restrictions
CLIMB VIA SID
CLIMB VIA SID EXCEPT MAINTAIN (altitude) (additional instructions or information)
If a SID is not assigned
CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT AS FILED MAINTAIN (altitude)
and if required
(additional instructions or information)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCleared to Reynolds Airport David Two Departure Kingham Transition then as filed Maintain niner thousand Expect flight level four one zero one zero minutes after departurerdquo
ldquoCleared to Reynolds Airport David Two Departure Kingham Transition then as filed Climb via SIDrdquo
ldquoCleared to Reynolds Airport David Two Departure Kingham Transition then as filed Climb via SID except maintain flight level two four zero Expect flight level four one zero one zero minutes after departure
ldquoCleared to Reynolds Airport as filed Maintain niner thousand Expect flight level four one zero one zero minutes after departurerdquo
NOTEminus 1 SIDs are excluded from ldquocleared as filedrdquo procedures
2 If a pilot does not wish to accept an ATC clearance to fly a SID heshe is expected to advise ATC or state ldquoNO SIDrdquo in hisher flight plan remarks
REFERENCEminus PCG Climb Via Top Altitude
Departure Procedures 4minus3minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
g When a filed route will require revisions the controller responsible for initiating the clearance to the aircraft must either
1 Issue a FRCFRC until a fix
2 Specify the assigned altitude to maintain or Climb Via SID or Climb Via SID except maintain (altitude) as appropriate
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT
Or when the SID does not contain published crossing restrictions and or is a SID with a Radar Vector segment or a Radar Vector SID
(SID name and number) DEPARTURE (transition name) TRANSITION THEN AS FILED EXCEPT CHANGE ROUTE TO READ (amended route portion) MAINTAIN (altitude)
Or when the SID contains published crossing restrictions
CLIMB VIA SID
CLIMB VIA SID EXCEPT MAINTAIN (altitude) and if required
(additional instructions or information)
If a SID is not assigned
CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT AS FILED EXCEPT CHANGE ROUTE TO READ (amended route portion) MAINTAIN (altitude)
and if required
(additional instructions or information)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCleared to Reynolds Airport South Boston One Departure then as filed except change route to read South Boston Victor Twenty Greensboro Maintain eight thousand report leaving four thousandrdquo
ldquoCleared to Reynolds Airport South Boston One Departure then as filed except change route to read South Boston Victor Twenty Greensboro climb via SIDrdquo
ldquoCleared to Reynolds Airport South Boston One Departure then as filed except change route to read South Boston Victor Twenty Greensboro climb via SID except
maintain flight level one eight zero expect flight level three one zero one zero minutes after departurerdquo
ldquoCleared to Reynolds Airport as filed except change route to read South Boston Victor Twenty Greensboro Maintain eight thousand report leaving four thousandrdquo
ldquoCleared to Reynolds Airport via Victor Ninety-one Albany then as filed Maintain six thousandrdquo
h In a nonradar environment specify one two or more fixes as necessary to identify the initial route of flight
1 Specify the destination airport when practic-able followed by the word ldquoairportrdquo even though it is outside controlled airspace
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT
2 When the clearance limit is a NAVAID the type of NAVAID must follow the NAVAID name
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (NAVAID name and type)
3 When the clearance limit is an intersection or waypoint and the type is known the type must follow the intersection or waypoint name
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (intersection or waypoint name and type)
EXAMPLEminus The filed route of flight is from Hutchinson V10 Emporia thence V10N and V77 to St Joseph The clearance will read ldquoCleared to Watson Airport as filed via Emporia maintain Seven Thousandrdquo
i Do not apply these procedures when a pilot requests a detailed clearance or to military operations conducted within ALTRV stereo routes operations above FL 600 and other military operations requiring special handling
NOTEminus Departure clearance procedures and phraseology for military operations within approved altitude reservations military operations above FL 600 and other military operations requiring special handling are contained in separate procedures in this order or in a LOA as appropriate REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus7 ALTRV Clearance FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus14 Military Operations Above FL 600
4minus3minus6 Departure Procedures
81519 JO 711065Y
4minus3minus4 DEPARTURE RESTRICTIONS CLEARANCE VOID TIMES HOLD FOR RELEASE AND RELEASE TIMES
Assign departure restrictions clearance void times hold for release or release times when necessary to separate departures from other traffic or to restrict or regulate the departure flow
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus3minus1 Overdue Aircraft FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus4minus1 Traffic Restrictions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus4minus3 Traffic Resumption
a Clearance Void Times
1 When issuing clearance void times at airports not served by control towers provide alternative instructions requiring the pilots to advise ATC of their intentions no later than 30 minutes after the clearance void time if not airborne
2 The facility delivering a clearance void time to a pilot must issue a time check A void time issued using a specified number of minutes does not require a time check
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARANCE VOID IF NOT OFF BY (clearance void time)
and if required
IF NOT OFF BY (clearance void time) ADVISE (facility) NOT LATER THAN (time) OF INTENTIONS
TIME (time in hours minutes and the nearest quarter minute)
or
CLEARANCE VOID IF NOT OFF IN (number of minutes) MINUTES
and if required
IF NOT OFF IN (number of minutes) MINUTES ADVISE (facility) OF INTENTIONS WITHIN (number of minutes) MINUTES
b Hold For Release (HFR)
1 ldquoHold for releaserdquo instructions must be used when necessary to inform a pilot or a controller that a departure clearance is not valid until additional instructions are received
REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Hold for Release
2 When issuing hold for release instructions include departure delay information
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Aircraft identification) CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT AS FILED MAINTAIN (altitude)
and if required
(additional instructions or information)
HOLD FOR RELEASE EXPECT (time in hours andor minutes) DEPARTURE DELAY
3 When conditions allow release the aircraft as soon as possible
PHRASEOLOGYminus To another controller
(aircraft identification) RELEASED
To a flight service specialist or Flight Data Communication Specialist (FDCS)
ADVISE (aircraft identification) RELEASED FOR DEPARTURE
To a pilot at an airport not served by a control tower
(aircraft identification) RELEASED FOR DEPARTURE
c Release Times
1 Release times must be issued to pilots when necessary to specify the earliest time an aircraft may depart
NOTEminus A release time is a departure restriction issued to a pilot (either directly or through authorized relay) to separate a departing aircraft from other traffic
2 The facility issuing a release time to a pilot must issue a time check A release time using a specified number of minutes does not require a time check
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Aircraft identification) RELEASED FOR DEPARTURE AT (time in hours andor minutes)
and if required
IF NOT OFF BY (time) ADVISE (facility) NOT LATER THAN (time) OF INTENTIONS
TIME (time in hours minutes and nearest quarter minute)
(Aircraft identification) RELEASED FOR DEPARTURE
Departure Procedures 4minus3minus7
JO 711065Y 81519
IN (number of minutes) MINUTES
and if required
IF NOT OFF IN (number of minutes) MINUTES ADVISE (facility) OF INTENTIONS WITHIN (number of minutes) MINUTES
d When expect departure clearance times (EDCT) are assigned through traffic management programs excluding overriding call for release (CFR) operations as described in subparagraph e the departure terminal must to the extent possible plan ground movement of aircraft destined to the affected airport(s) so that flights are sequenced to depart no earlier than 5 minutes before and no later than 5 minutes after the EDCT Do not release aircraft on their assigned EDCT if a ground stop (GS) applicable to that aircraft is in effect unless approval has been received from the originator of the GS
e Call for Release (CFR) When CFR is in effect release aircraft so they are airborne within a window that extends from 2 minutes prior and ends 1 minute after the assigned time unless otherwise coordinated
NOTEminus 1 Subparagraph (e) applies to all facilities
2 Coordination may be verbal electronic or written
1 If an aircraft has begun to taxi or requests taxi in a manner consistent with meeting the EDCT the aircraft must be released Additional coordination is not required
2 If an aircraft requests taxi or clearance for departure inconsistent with meeting the EDCT window ask the pilot to verify the EDCT
(a) If the pilotrsquos EDCT is the same as the FAA EDCT the aircraft is released consistent with the EDCT
(b) If the pilotrsquos EDCT is not the same as the FAA EDCT refer to Trust and Verify Note below
3 If an aircraft requests taxi too late to meet the EDCT contact the ATCSCC through the appropriate TMU
NOTEminus (Trust amp Verify) EDCTs are revised by Air Carriers and Traffic Management for changing conditions en route or at affected airport(s) Terminal controllersrsquo use of aircraft reported EDCT for departure sequencing should be verified with the appropriate TMU prior to departure if this can be accomplished without the aircraft incurring delay beyond the EDCT reported by the aircraft The preferred method for verification is the Flight Schedule Monitor (FSM) If the EDCT cannot be verified without incurring additional delay the aircraft should be released based on the pilot reported EDCT The aircraft operator is responsible for operating in a manner consistent to meet the EDCT
4minus3minus5 GROUND STOP
Do not release an aircraft if a ground stop (GS) applicable to that aircraft is in effect without the approval of the originator of the GS
4minus3minus6 DELAY SEQUENCING
When aircraft elect to take delay on the ground before departure issue departure clearances to them in the order in which the requests for clearance were originally made if practicable
4minus3minus7 FORWARD DEPARTURE DELAY INFORMATION
Inform approach control facilities andor towers of anticipated departure delays
4minus3minus8 COORDINATION WITH RECEIVING FACILITY
a Coordinate with the receiving facility before the departure of an aircraft if the departure point is less than 15 minutes flying time from the transferring facilityrsquos boundary unless an automatic transfer of data between automated systems will occur in which case the flying time requirement may be reduced to 5 minutes or replaced with a mileage from the boundary parameter when mutually agreeable to both facilities
NOTEminus Agreements requiring additional time are encouraged between facilities that need earlier coordination However when agreements establish mandatory radar handoff procedures coordination needs only be effected in a timely manner prior to transfer of control REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Chapter 5 Section 4 Transfer of Radar Identification Para 5minus4minus1 Application
4minus3minus8 Departure Procedures
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
b The actual departure time or a subsequent strip posting time must be forwarded to the receiving facility unless assumed departure times are agreed upon and that time is within 3 minutes of the actual departure time
4minus3minus9 VFR RELEASE OF IFR DEPARTURE
When an aircraft which has filed an IFR flight plan requests a VFR departure through a terminal facility FSS ARTCC Flight Data Unit or airground communications station
a After obtaining if necessary approval from the facilitysector responsible for issuing the IFR clearance you may authorize an IFR flight planned aircraft to depart VFR Inform the pilot of the proper frequency and if appropriate where or when to contact the facility responsible for issuing the clearance
PHRASEOLOGYminus VFR DEPARTURE AUTHORIZED CONTACT (facility) ON (frequency) AT (location or time if required) FOR CLEARANCE
b If the facilitysector responsible for issuing the clearance is unable to issue a clearance inform the pilot and suggest that the delay be taken on the ground If the pilot insists upon taking off VFR and obtaining an IFR clearance in the air inform the facilitysector holding the flight plan of the pilotrsquos intentions and if possible the VFR departure time
4minus3minus10 FORWARDING DEPARTURE TIMES
TERMINAL
Unless alternate procedures are prescribed in a letter of agreement or automatic departure messages are being transmitted between automated facilities forward departure times to the facility from which you received the clearance and also to the terminal departure controller when that position is involved in the departure sequence
NOTEminus 1 Letters of agreement prescribing assumed departure times or mandatory radar handoff procedures are alternatives for providing equivalent procedures
2 The letters ldquoDMrdquo flashing in the data block signify unsuccessful transmission of a departure message
Departure Procedures 4minus3minus9
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 4 Route Assignment
4minus4minus1 ROUTE USE
Clear aircraft via routes consistent with the altitude stratum in which the operation is to be conducted by one or more of the following
NOTEminus Except for certain NAVAIDsroutes used by scheduled air carriers or authorized for specific uses in the control of IFR aircraft Air Traffic Service (ATS) routes and NAVAIDs established for use at specified altitudes are shown on US government charts or DOD FLIP charts
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus5minus2 NAVAID Terms FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus1minus2 Exceptions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus5minus6 Minimum En Route Altitudes FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus6minus1 Application
a Designated ATS routes
PHRASEOLOGYminus VIA
VICTOR (color) (airway number)(the word Romeo when RNAV for existing Alaska routes)
or
J (route number) (the word Romeo when RNAV for existing Alaska routes)
or
Q (route number)
or
Tango (route number)
or
SUBSTITUTE (ATS route) FROM (fix) to (fix)
or
IR (route number)
CROSSJOIN VICTOR(color) (airway number) (number of miles) MILES (direction) OF (fix)
b Radials courses azimuths to or from NAVAIDs
PHRASEOLOGYminus VIA
(name of NAVAID) (specified) RADIALCOURSE AZIMUTH
or
(fix) AND (fix)
or
RADIALS OF (ATS route) AND (ATS route)
c Random routes
1 When not being radar monitored GNSS-equipped RNAV aircraft on random RNAV routes must be cleared via or reported to be established on a point-to-point route
(a) The points must be published NAVAIDs waypoints fixes or airports recallable from the aircraftrsquos navigation database The points must be displayed on controller video maps or depicted on the controller chart displayed at the control position When applying nonradar separation the maximum distance between points must not exceed 500 miles
(b) Protect 4 miles either side of the route centerline
(c) Assigned altitudes must be at or above the highest MIA along the projected route segment being flown including the protected airspace of that route segment
2 Impromptu
PHRASEOLOGYminus DIRECT (name of NAVAIDwaypointfixairport)
NOTEminus A random impromptu routing is a direct course initiated by ATC or requested by the pilot during flight Aircraft are cleared from their present position to a NAVAID waypoint fix or airport
3 Point-to-Point
PHRASEOLOGYminus After (fix) proceed direct (fix)
NOTEminus A point-to-point route segment begins and ends with a published NAVAID waypoint fix or airport
d DME arcs of NAVAIDS
Route Assignment 4minus4minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
e Radials courses azimuths and headings of departure or arrival routes
f SIDsSTARs
g Vectors
h Fixes defined in terms of degree-distance from NAVAIDs for special military operations
i Courses azimuths bearings quadrants or radials within a radius of a NAVAID
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO FLY (general direction from NAVAID) OF (NAVAID name and type) BETWEEN (specified) COURSES TOBEARINGS FROMRADIALS (NAVAID name when a NDB) WITHIN (number of miles) MILE RADIUS
or
CLEARED TO FLY (specified) QUADRANT OF (NAVAID name and type) WITHIN (number of miles) MILE RADIUS
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoCleared to fly east of Allentown VORTAC between the zero four five and the one three five radials within four zero mile radiusrdquo
2 ldquoCleared to fly east of Crystal Lake radio beacon between the two two five and the three one five courses to Crystal Lake within three zero mile radiusrdquo
3 ldquoCleared to fly northeast quadrant of Philipsburg VORTAC within four zero mile radiusrdquo
j Fixeswaypoints defined in terms of
1 Published name or
2 Degree-distance from NAVAIDs or
3 Latitudelongitude coordinates state the latitude and longitude in degrees and minutes including the direction from the axis such as North or West or
PHRASEOLOGYminus ldquo32 DEGREES 45 MINUTES NORTH 105 DEGREES 37 MINUTES WESTrdquo
4 Offset from published or established ATS route at a specified distance and direction for random (impromptu) RNAV Routes
PHRASEOLOGYminus DIRECT (fixwaypoint)
DIRECT TO THE (facility) (radial) (distance) FIX
OFFSET(distance) RIGHTLEFT OF (route)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDirect SUNOLrdquo ldquoDirect to the Appleton three one zero radial two five mile fixrdquo ldquoOffset eight miles right of Victor sixrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus3minus8 Aircraft Equipment Suffix FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus5minus3 NAVAID Fixes FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus1minus2 Exceptions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus1 Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 6minus5minus4 Minima Along Other Than Established Airways or Routes PCG Term - Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)[ICAO]
4minus4minus2 ROUTE STRUCTURE TRANSITIONS
To effect transition within or between route structures clear an aircraft by one or more of the following methods based on NAVAIDs or RNAV
a Vector aircraft to or from radials courses or azimuths of the ATS route assigned
b Assign a SIDSTAR
c Clear departing or arriving aircraft to climb or descend via radials courses or azimuths of the ATS route assigned
d Clear departing or arriving aircraft directly to or between the NAVAIDs forming the ATS route assigned
e Clear aircraft to climb or descend via the ATS route on which flight will be conducted
f Clear aircraft to climb or descend on specified radials courses or azimuths of NAVAIDs
g Clear RNAV aircraft between designated or established ATS routes via random RNAV routes to a NAVAID waypoint airport or fix on the new route Provide radar monitoring to aircraft transitioning via random RNAV routes
EXCEPTION GNSSminusequipped aircraft G L S and V on pointminustominuspoint routes or transitioning between two pointminustominuspoint routes via an impromptu route
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus1minus2 Exceptions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus4minus1 Route Use FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus1 Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 6minus5minus4 Minima Along Other Than Established Airways Or Routes PCG Term minus Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)[ICAO]
4minus4minus2 Route Assignment
81519 JO 711065Y
4minus4minus3 DEGREE-DISTANCE ROUTE DEFINITION FOR MILITARY OPERATIONS
EN ROUTE
a Do not accept a military flight plan whose route or route segments do not coincide with designated airways or jet routes or with a direct course between NAVAIDs unless it is authorized in subpara b and meets the following degree-distance route definition and procedural requirements
1 The route or route segments must be defined in the flight plan by degree-distance fixes composed of
(a) A location identifier
(b) Azimuth in degrees magnetic and
(c) Distance in miles from the NAVAID used
EXAMPLEminus ldquoMKE 030025rdquo
2 The NAVAIDs selected to define the degree-distance fixes must be those authorized for use at the altitude being flown and at a distance within the published service volume area
3 The distance between the fixes used to define the route must not exceed
(a) Below FL 180minus 80 miles
(b) FL 180 and aboveminus 260 miles and
(c) For celestial navigation routes all altitudesminus 260 miles
4 Degree-distance fixes used to define a route must be considered compulsory reporting points except that an aircraft may be authorized by ATC to omit reports when traffic conditions permit
5 Military aircraft using degree-distance route definition procedures must conduct operations in accordance with the following
(a) Unless prior coordination has been effected with the appropriate air traffic control facility flight plan the departure and the arrival phases to conform with the routine flow of traffic when operating within 75 miles of the departure and the arrival airport Use defined routes or airways or direct courses between NAVAIDs or as otherwise required to conform to the normal flow of traffic
(b) Flight plans must be filed at least 2 hours before the estimated time of departure
b The following special military operations are authorized to define routes or portions of routes by degree-distance fixes
1 Airborne radar navigation radar bomb scoring (RBS) and airborne missile programming conducted by the USAF USN and RAF
2 Celestial navigation conducted by the USAF USN and RAF
3 Target aircraft operating in conjunction with air defense interceptors and air defense interceptors while en route to and from assigned airspace
4 Missions conducted above FL 450
5 USN fighter and attack aircraft operating in positive control airspace
6 USNUSMC aircraft TACAN equipped operating within the Honolulu FIRHawaiian airways area
7 USAFUSNUSMC aircraft flight planned to operate on MTRs
8 USAF Air Mobility Command (AMC) aircraft operating on approved station-keeping equipment (SKE) routes in accordance with the conditions and limitations listed in FAA Exemption No 4371 to 14 CFR Section 91177(a)(2) and 14 CFR Section 91179(b)(1)
4minus4minus4 ALTERNATIVE ROUTES
When any part of an airway or route is unusable because of NAVAID status clear aircraft that are not RNAV capable via one of the following alternative routes
a A route depicted on current US Government chartspublications Use the word ldquosubstituterdquo immediately preceding the alternative route in issuing the clearance
b A route defined by specifying NAVAID radials courses or azimuths
c A route defined as direct to or between NAVAIDs
d Vectors NOTEminus Inform area navigation aircraft that will proceed to the NAVAID location of the NAVAID outage
4minus4minus5 CLASS G AIRSPACE
Include routes through Class G airspace only when requested by the pilot
Route Assignment 4minus4minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
NOTEminus 1 Separation criteria are not applicable in Class G airspace Traffic advisories and safety alerts are applicable within Class G airspace to aircraft that are in direct communication with ATC
2 Flight plans filed for random RNAV routes through Class G airspace are considered a request by the pilot
3 Flight plans containing MTR segments inthrough Class G airspace are considered a request by the pilot
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus1 ATC Service PCG Class G Airspace PCG Uncontrolled Airspace
4minus4minus6 DIRECT CLEARANCES
a Unless operational necessity dictates do not issue a routing clearance that will take an aircraft off of its flight plan route if
1 The aircraft is part of a known traffic management initiative
2 The part of the route under consideration for the direct routing is within a protected segment If a
flight routing within a protected segment is amended coordination must be accomplished as follows
(a) ATCS with TMU
(b) Terminal facility TMU with overlying ARTCC TMU
(c) ARTCC TMU (for amendments outside their facility) with ATCSCC
b EN ROUTE Do not issue revised routing clearances that will take an aircraft off its flight plan route past the last fix in your facilityrsquos airspace unless requested by the pilot or operational necessity dictates
NOTEminus Nothing in this paragraph must preclude a controller from issuing a routing clearance that conforms to a letter of agreement or standard operating procedure within their own facility or between facilities is required to maintain separation or comply with traffic flow management initiatives
4minus4minus4 Route Assignment
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
Section 5 Altitude Assignment and Verification
4minus5minus1 VERTICAL SEPARATION MINIMA
Separate instrument flight rules (IFR) aircraft using the following minima between altitudes
a Up to and including FL 410minus 1000 feet
b Apply 2000 feet at or above FL 290 between nonminusRVSM aircraft and all other aircraft at or above FL 290
c Above FL 410minus 2000 feet except
1 In oceanic airspace above FL 450 between a supersonic and any other aircraftminus 4000 feet
2 Above FL 600 between military aircraftminus 5000 feet
NOTEminus Oceanic separation procedures are supplemented in Chapter 8 Section 7 Section 8 Section 9 and Section 10
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus5 Vertical Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 6minus6minus1 Application REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus14 Military Operations Above FL FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus5minus3 Exceptions
Aircraft Operating
On course degrees
magnetic Assign Examples
Above FL 410 0 through 179 Odd cardinal FL 450 flight levels at FL 490 intervals of 4000 feet beginning with FL 450
FL 530
180 through 359 Odd cardinal FL 430 flight levels at FL 470 intervals of 4000 feet beginning with FL 430
FL 510
One way Any course Any cardinal FL 270 routes (except altitude or FL 280 in composite flight level FL 290 systems) below FL 410 FL 300
or any odd FL 310 cardinal flight FL 410 level above FL 430 FL 410 FL 450
Within an ALTRV
Any course Any altitude or flight level
In aerial Any course Altitude blocks 050B080 refueling as requested FL 180B220 tracks and Any altitude or FL 280B310 anchors flight level
600
4minus5minus2 FLIGHT DIRECTION
Clear aircraft at altitudes accordingTBL 4minus5minus1
TBL 4minus5minus1
Altitude Assignment
Aircraft Operating
On course degrees
magnetic Assign Examples
Below 3000 feet above surface
Any course Any altitude
At and below FL 410
0 through 179 Odd cardinal altitude or flight levels at intervals of 2000 feet
3000 5000 FL 310 FL 330
180 through 359 Even cardinal altitude or flight levels at intervals of 2000 feet
4000 6000 FL 320 FL 340
FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus7minus5 Altitude Assignments FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus3minus2 Separation Minima
4minus5minus3 EXCEPTIONS
When traffic meteorological conditions or aircraft operational limitations prevent assignment of to the altitudes prescribed in Para 4minus5minus2 Flight Direction assign any cardinal altitude or flight level below FL 410 or any odd cardinal flight level at or above FL 410 without regard to direction of flight as follows
NOTEminus See Para 2minus3minus10 Control Symbology for control abbreviations and symbols to be used in conjunction with this paragraph
a For traffic conditions take this action only if one of the following conditions exists
1 Aircraft remain within a facilityrsquos area and prior approval is obtained from other affected positions or sectors or the operations are covered in a Facility Directive
2 Aircraft will proceed beyond the facilityrsquos area and specific operations and procedures
Altitude Assignment and Verification 4minus5minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
permitting random altitude assignment are covered in a letter of agreement between the appropriate facilities
b Military aircraft are operating on random routes and prior approval is obtained from the facility concerned
c For meteorological conditions take this action only if you obtain prior approval from other affected positions or sectors within your facility and if necessary from the adjacent facility concerned
d For aircraft operational limitations take this action only if the pilot informs you the available appropriate altitude exceeds the operational limita-tions of hisher aircraft and only after you obtain prior approval from other affected positions or sectors within your facility and if necessary from the adjacent facility concerned
e For mission requirements take this action only when the aircraft is operating on an MTR
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus7minus5 Altitude Assignments FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus3minus2 Separation Minima
4minus5minus4 LOWEST USABLE FLIGHT LEVEL
If a change in atmospheric pressure affects a usable flight level in your area of jurisdiction use TBL 4minus5minus2 to determine the lowest usable flight level to clear aircraft at or above 18000 feet MSL
TBL 4minus5minus2
Lowest Usable FL
Altimeter Setting Lowest Usable FL
2992rdquo or higher 180
2991rdquo to 2892rdquo 190
2891rdquo to 2792rdquo 200
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus3minus2 Separation Minima
4minus5minus5 ADJUSTED MINIMUM FLIGHT LEVEL
When the prescribed minimum altitude for IFR operations is at or above 18000 feet MSL and the atmospheric pressure is less than 2992rdquo add the appropriate adjustment factor from TBL 4minus5minus3 to the flight level equivalent of the minimum altitude in feet to determine the adjusted minimum flight level
TBL 4minus5minus3
Minimum FL Adjustment
Altimeter Setting Adjustment Factor
2992rdquo or higher None
2991rdquo to 2942rdquo 500 feet
2941rdquo to 2892rdquo 1000 feet
2891rdquo to 2842rdquo 1500 feet
2841rdquo to 2792rdquo 2000 feet
4minus5minus6 MINIMUM EN ROUTE ALTITUDES (MEA)
Except as provided in subparas a and b below assign altitudes at or above the MEA for the route segment being flown When a lower MEA for subsequent segments of the route is applicable issue the lower MEA only after the aircraft is over or past the FixNAVAID beyond which the lower MEA applies unless a crossing restriction at or above the higher MEA is issued
a An aircraft may be cleared below the MEA but not below the MOCA for the route segment being flown if the altitude assigned is at least 300 feet above the floor of controlled airspace and one of the following conditions are met
NOTEminus Controllers must be aware that in the event of radio communications or GNSS failure a pilot will climb to the MEA for the route segment being flown
1 For aircraft using VOR VORTAC or TACAN for navigation this applies only within 22 miles of that NAVAID
2 When radar procedures are used the following actions are taken
(a) In the absence of a published MOCA assign altitudes at or above the MVA or MIA along the route of flight and
(b) Lost communications instructions are issued
3 The aircraft is GNSS equipped
b An aircraft may be cleared to operate on jet routes below the MEA (but not below the prescribed minimum altitude for IFR operations) or above the maximum authorized altitude if in either case radar service is provided
4minus5minus2 Altitude Assignment and Verification
81519 JO 711065Y
NOTEminus Minimum en route and maximum authorized altitudes for certain jet route segments have been established above the floor of the jet route structure due to limitations on navigational signal coverage
c Where a higher altitude is required because of an MEA the aircraft must be cleared to begin climb to the higher MEA as follows
1 If no MCA is specified prior to or immediately after passing the fix where the higher MEA is designated (See FIG 4minus5minus1)
FIG 4minus5minus1
No MCA Specified
2 If a MCA is specified prior to the fix so as to cross the fix at or above the MCA (See FIG 4minus5minus2)
FIG 4minus5minus2
MCA Specified
d GNSS MEAs may be approved on published ATS routes Air traffic may assign GNSS MEAs to GNSSminusequipped aircraft where established
NOTEminus On high altitude ATS routes the GNSS MEA is FL180 unless published higher
e Where MEAs have not been established clear an aircraft at or above the minimum altitude for IFR operations prescribed by 14 CFR Section 91177
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus8 IFR-VFR and VFR-IFR Flights FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus4minus1 Route Use FAA Order JO 711065 Chapter 5 Section 6 Para 5minus6minus1 Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus7minus5 Altitude Assignments
4minus5minus7 ALTITUDE INFORMATION
Issue altitude instructions as follows REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus1 Clearance Items
a Altitude to maintain or cruise When issuing cruise in conjunction with an airport clearance limit and an unpublished route will be used issue an appropriate crossing altitude to ensure terrain clearance until the aircraft reaches a fix point or route where the altitude information is available to the pilot When issuing a cruise clearance to an airport which does not have a published instrument approach a cruise clearance without a crossing restriction may be issued
PHRASEOLOGYminus MAINTAINCRUISE (altitude) MAINTAIN (altitude) UNTIL (time fix waypoint)
or
(number of miles or minutes) MILESMINUTES PAST (fix waypoint)
CROSS (fix point waypoint)
or
INTERCEPT (route) AT OR ABOVE (altitude) CRUISE (altitude)
NOTEminus 1 The crossing altitude must assure IFR obstruction clearance to the point where the aircraft is established on a segment of a published route or instrument approach procedure
2 When an aircraft is issued a cruise clearance to an airport which does not have a published instrument approach procedure it is not possible to satisfy the requirement for a crossing altitude that will ensure terrain clearance until the aircraft reaches a fix point or route where altitude information is available to the pilot Under those conditions a cruise clearance without a crossing restriction authorizes a pilot to determine the minimum IFR altitude as prescribed in 14 CFR Section 91177 and descend to it at pilot discretion if it is lower than the altitude specified in the cruise clearance
b Instructions to climb or descend including restrictions as required Specify a time restriction
Altitude Assignment and Verification 4minus5minus3
JO 711065Y 81519
reference the UTC clock reading with a time check If you are relaying through an authorized communic-ations provider such as ARINC FSS etc advise the radio operator to issue the current time to the aircraft when the clearance is relayed The requirement to issue a time check must be disregarded if the clearance is issued via Controller Pilot Data Link Communications (CPDLC)
EXCEPTION If you are in direct two-way VHFUHF voice communication with the pilot and the aircraft is in radar contact you may specify an elapsed time interval restriction in full minute increments only without any reference to the UTC clock The time restriction begins once the clearance has been acknowledged by the pilot
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoUnited Four Seventeen climb to reach one three thousand at two two one fiverdquo ldquoTime two two one one and oneminusquarterrdquo The pilot is expected to be level at 13000 feet at 2215 UTC
2 Through RelayminusldquoSpeedbird Five climb to reach flight level threeminusfive zero at oneminustwominusoneminusfive timerdquo (Issue a time check)
3 In radar contact and in direct controller to pilot two-way VHFUHF voice communication - ldquoUnited Four Seventeen descend to reach flight level three five zero within two minutesrdquo The time restriction begins once the clearance has been acknowledged by the pilot
4 ldquoUnited Four Seventeen climb to leave flight level three three zero within two minutes maintain flight level three five zerordquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 1minus2minus1 Word Meanings FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus4minus17 Numbers Usage
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLIMBDESCEND AND MAINTAIN (altitude)
If required
AFTER PASSING (fix waypoint)
or
AT (time) (time in hours minutes and nearest quarter minute)
CLIMBDESCEND TO REACH (altitude) AT (time (issue time check) or fix waypoint)
or
AT (time) CLIMBDESCEND AND MAINTAIN (altitude) WHEN ESTABLISHED AT LEAST (number of miles or minutes) MILESMINUTES PAST (fix waypoint) ON THE (NAVAID) (specified) RADIAL CLIMBDESCEND TO REACH (altitude) AT (time or fix waypoint)
or
A POINT (number of miles) MILES (direction) OF (name of DME NAVAID)
or
MAINTAIN (altitude) UNTIL (time (issue time check) fix waypoint) THEN CLIMBDESCEND AND MAINTAIN (altitude)
Through relay
CLIMB TO REACH (altitude) AT (time) (issue a time check)
Or
Using a time interval while in radar contact and in direct controller to pilot two-way VHFUHF voice communication
CLIMBDESCEND TO REACHLEAVE (altitude) WITHIN (number) MINUTES MAINTAIN (altitude) Or
CLIMBDESCEND TO REACHLEAVE (altitude) IN (number) MINUTES OR LESS MAINTAIN (altitude)
c Specified altitude for crossing a specified fix or waypoint or specified altitude for crossing a distance (in miles) and direction from a specified fix or waypoint
PHRASEOLOGYminus CROSS (fix waypoint) AT (altitude) CROSS (fix waypoint) AT OR ABOVEBELOW (altitude) CROSS (number of miles) MILES (direction) OF (name of fix waypoint) AT (altitude) CROSS (number of miles) MILES (direction) OF (name of fix waypoint) AT OR ABOVEBELOW (altitude)
d A specified altitude over a specified fix for that portion of a descent clearance where descent at pilotrsquos discretion is permissible At any other time it is practicable authorize climbdescent at pilotrsquos discretion
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLIMBDESCEND AT PILOTrsquoS DISCRETION
4minus5minus4 Altitude Assignment and Verification
81519 JO 711065Y
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Four Seventeen descend and maintain six thou-sandrdquo
NOTEminus The pilot is expected to commence descent upon receipt of the clearance and to descend at the suggested rates specified in the AIM Para 4minus4minus10 Adherence to Clearance until reaching the assigned altitude of 6000 feet
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Four Seventeen descend at pilotrsquos discretion maintain six thousandrdquo
NOTEminus The pilot is authorized to conduct descent within the context of the term ldquoat pilotrsquos discretionrdquo as described in the AIM
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Four Seventeen cross Lakeview VminusOminusR at or above flight level two zero zero descend and maintain six thousandrdquo
NOTEminus The pilot is authorized to conduct descent ldquoat pilotrsquos discretionrdquo until reaching Lakeview VOR The pilot must comply with the clearance provision to cross the Lakeview VOR at or above FL 200 and after passing Lakeview VOR the pilot is expected to descend at the rates specified in the AIM until reaching the assigned altitude of 6000 feet
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Four Seventeen cross Lakeview VminusOminusR at and maintain six thousandrdquo
NOTEminus The pilot is authorized to conduct descent ldquoat pilotrsquos discretionrdquo but must comply with the clearance provision to cross Lakeview VOR at 6000 feet
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Four Seventeen descend now to flight level two seven zero cross Lakeview VminusOminusR at or below one zero thousand descend and maintain six thousandrdquo
NOTEminus The pilot is expected to promptly execute and complete descent to FL 270 upon receipt of the clearance After reaching FL 270 the pilot is authorized to descend ldquoat pilotrsquos discretionrdquo until reaching Lakeview VOR The pilot must comply with the clearance provision to cross Lakeview VOR at or below 10000 feet After Lakeview VOR the pilot is expected to descend at the rates specified in the AIM until reaching 6000 feet
NOTEminus 1 A descent clearance which specifies a crossing altitude authorizes descent at pilotrsquos discretion for that portion of the flight to which the crossing altitude restriction applies
2 Any other time that authorization to descend at pilotrsquos discretion is intended it must be specifically stated by the controller
3 The pilot may need to know of any future restrictions that might affect the descent including those that may be issued in another sector in order to properly plan a descent at pilotrsquos discretion
4 Controllers need to be aware that the descent rates in the AIM are only suggested and aircraft will not always descend at those rates
REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Pilotrsquos Discretion
e When a portion of a climbdescent may be authorized at the pilotrsquos discretion specify the altitude the aircraft must climbdescend to followed by the altitude to maintain at the pilotrsquos discretion
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLIMBDESCEND NOW TO (altitude) THEN CLIMBDESCEND AT PILOTrsquoS DISCRETION MAINTAIN (altitude)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited Three Ten descend now to flight level two eight zero then descend at pilotrsquos discretion maintain flight level two four zerordquo
NOTEminus 1 The pilot is expected to commence descent upon receipt of the clearance and to descend as prescribed in the AIM Para 4minus4minus10 Adherence to Clearance until FL 280 At that point the pilot is authorized to continue descent to FL 240 within context of the term ldquoat pilotrsquos discretionrdquo as described in the AIM
2 Controllers need to be aware that the descent rates are only suggested and aircraft will not always descend at those rates
f When the ldquopilotrsquos discretionrdquo portion of a climbdescent clearance is being canceled by assigning a new altitude inform the pilot that the new altitude is an ldquoamended altituderdquo
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAmerican Eighty Three amend altitude descend and maintain Flight Level two six zerordquo
NOTEminus American Eighty Three at FL 280 has been cleared to descend at pilotrsquos discretion to FL 240 Subsequently the altitude assignment is changed to FL 260 Therefore pilotrsquos discretion is no longer authorized
g Altitude assignments involving more than one altitude
PHRASEOLOGYminus MAINTAIN BLOCK (altitude) THROUGH (altitude)
Altitude Assignment and Verification 4minus5minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
h Instructions to vertically navigate SIDsSTARs with published crossing restrictions (Climb ViaDe-scend Via)
1 When established on the SIDSTAR
2 When navigating a published route inbound to the STAR
3 When cleared direct to a waypointfix without a published altitude assign a crossing altitude
PHRASEOLOGYminus DESCEND VIA (STAR name and number)
DESCEND VIA (STAR name and number and runway transition number)
DESCEND VIA (STAR name and number and runway number)
CLIMB VIA (SID name and number)
PROCEED DIRECT (fixwaypoint)CROSS (waypointfix) at (altitude) THEN DESCEND VIA (STAR name and number)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDescend via the Eagul Five arrivalrdquo
ldquoDescend via the Wynde Eight Arrival Runway 28 right transitionrdquo
ldquoDescend via the Lendy One Arrival Runway 22 leftrdquo
ldquoClimb via the Dawgs Four Departurerdquo
ldquoProceed direct Denis cross Denis at or above flight level two zero zero then descend via the Mmell One arrivalrdquo
NOTEminus Pilots must comply with all published speed restrictions on SIDsSTARs independent of a climb via or descend via clearance Clearance to ldquodescent viardquo authorizes pilots 1 To descend at pilot discretion to meet published restrictions on a STAR Pilots navigating on a STAR must maintain the last assigned altitude until receiving clearance to descend via Once leaving an altitude the pilot may not return to that altitude without an ATC clearance 2 When cleared direct to a waypoint to descend at pilot discretion to meet restrictions on the procedure ATC assumes obstacle clearance responsibility for aircraft not yet established or taken off of a procedure
3 To adjust speeds prior to reaching waypoints with published speed restrictions
NOTEminus When cleared for SIDs that contain published speed restrictions the pilot must comply with those speed restrictions independent of any ldquoclimb viardquo clearance Clearance to ldquoclimb viardquo authorizes pilots 1 When used in the IFR departure clearance in a PDC DCL or when subsequently cleared after departure to a waypoint depicted on a SID to join a procedure after departure or resume a procedure 2 When vertical navigation is interrupted and an altitude is assigned to maintain which is not contained on the published procedure to climb from that previously-as-signed altitude at pilotrsquos discretion to the altitude depicted for the next waypoint ATC must ensure obstacle clearance until the aircraft is established on the lateral and vertical path of the SID 3 Once established on the depicted departure to climb and to meet all published or assigned altitude and speed restrictions
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus4minus2 Route Structure Transitions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus5minus6 Minimum En Route Altitudes FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus9 Separation From Obstructions PCG Climb Via Descend Via
NOTEminus Pilots cleared for vertical navigation using the phraseo-logy ldquodescend viardquo or ldquoclimb viardquo must inform ATC upon initial contact of the altitude leaving the runway transition or landing direction if assigned (STARs) and any assigned restrictions not published on the procedure
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDelta One Twenty One leaving flight level one niner zero descending via the Eagul Five arrival runway two-six transitionrdquo
ldquoDelta One Twenty One leaving flight level one niner zero for one two thousand descending via the Eagul Five arrival runway two-six transitionrdquo
ldquoJetBlue six zero two leaving flight level two one zero descending via the Ivane Two arrival landing southrdquo
ldquoCactus Seven Eleven leaving two thousand climbing via the Laura Two departurerdquo
ldquoCactus Seven Eleven leaving two thousand for one-six thousand climbing via the Laura Two departurerdquo
REFERENCEminus AIM Para 5-2-8 Instrument Departure Procedures (DP) minus Obstacle Departure Procedures (ODP) and Standard Instrument Departures (SID) PCG Top Altitude Bottom Altitude AIM Para 5-4-1 Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) Procedures
4minus5minus6 Altitude Assignment and Verification
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
4 A ldquodescend viardquo clearance must not be used where procedures contain only published ldquoexpectrdquo altitude andor speed restrictions
NOTEminus Pilots are not expected to comply with published ldquoexpectrdquo restrictions in the event of lost communications unless ATC has specifically advised the pilot to expect these restrictions as part of a further clearance
5 ldquoDescend viardquo may be used on procedures that contain both ldquoexpectrdquo and required altitude and speed restrictions only if altitude andor speed restrictions or alternate restrictions are issued for the fixwaypoint associated with all expect restrictions
6 ldquoDescend viardquo clearances may also be issued if an aircraft is past all fixeswaypoints that have expect restrictions
7 If it is necessary to assign a crossing altitude which differs from the STAR or SID altitude emphasize the change to the pilot
PHRASEOLOGYminus DESCEND VIA (STAR name and number) ARRIVAL EXCEPT CROSS (fix point waypoint) (revised altitude information)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited 454 descend via the Haris One Arrival except cross Haris at or above one six thousandrdquo
NOTEminus The aircraft should track laterally and vertically on the Haris One Arrival and should descend so as to cross Haris at or above 16000 remainder of the arrival must be flown as published
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLIMB VIA SID EXCEPT CROSS (fix point waypoint) (revised altitude information)
CLIMB VIA (SID name and number) EXCEPT CROSS (fix point waypoint) (revised altitude information)
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoClimb via SID except cross Mkala at or above seven thousandrdquo
NOTEminus In Example 1 the aircraft will comply with the assigned SID departure lateral path and any published speed and altitude restrictions and climb so as to cross Mkala at or above 7000 remainder of the departure must be flown as published
EXAMPLEminus 2 (There is a published altitude at Dvine WP) ldquoProceed direct Dvine Climb via the Suzan Two departure except cross Mkala at or above seven thousandrdquo
NOTEminus In Example 2 the aircraft will join the Suzan Two departure at Dvine at the published altitude and then comply with the published lateral path and any published speed or altitude restrictions The aircraft will climb so as to cross Mkala at or above 7000 remainder of the departure must be flown as published
8 When an aircraft has been issued an interim altitude and after departure ATC can subsequently clear the aircraft to climb to the original top altitude published in a SID that contains published crossing restrictions instruct aircraft to ldquoclimb via SIDrdquo When issuing a different altitude and compliance with published restrictions is still required instruct aircraft to ldquoclimb via SID except maintain (altitude)rdquo
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLIMB VIA SID
CLIMB VIA SID EXCEPT MAINTAIN (altitude)
EXAMPLEminus 1 (An aircraft was issued the Teddd One departure ldquoclimb via SIDrdquo in the IFR departure clearance An interim altitude of 10000 was issued instead of the published top altitude of FL 230 after departure ATC is able to issue the published top altitude) ldquoClimb via SIDrdquo
NOTEminus In Example 1 the aircraft will track laterally and vertically on the Teddd One departure and initially climb to 10000 Once re-issued the ldquoclimb viardquo clearance the interim altitude is canceled aircraft will continue climb to FL230 while complying with published restrictions
EXAMPLEminus 2 (Using Example 1 after departure ATC is able to issue an altitude higher than the published top altitude) ldquoClimb via SID except maintain flight level two six zerordquo
NOTEminus In Example 2 the aircraft will track laterally and vertically on the Teddd One departure and initially climb to 10000 once issued ldquoclimb viardquo clearance to FL260 the aircraft will continue climb while complying with published restrictions
9 If it is necessary to assign an interim altitude or assign a bottom or top altitude not contained on a STAR or SID the provisions of subpara 4minus5minus7h may be used in conjunction with subpara 4minus5minus7a
Altitude Assignment and Verification 4minus5minus7
JO 711065Y 81519
PHRASEOLOGYminus DESCEND VIA THE (STAR name and number) ARRIVAL EXCEPT AFTER (fix) MAINTAIN (revised altitude information)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoUnited 454 descend via the Eagul Five Arrival except after Geeno maintain one zero thousandrdquo
NOTEminus The aircraft should track laterally and vertically on the Eagul Five Arrival and should descend so as to comply with all speed and altitude restrictions until reaching Geeno and then maintain 10000 Upon reaching 10000 aircraft should maintain 10000 until cleared by ATC to continue to descend
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus1 Clearance Information AIM Para 5minus4minus1 Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) Procedures
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLIMB VIA SID EXCEPT AFTER (waypoint name) MAINTAIN (altitude)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoClimb via SID except after Baret maintain flight level one niner zerordquo
NOTEminus 1 Considering the principle that the last ATC clearance issued has precedence over the previous the phraseology ldquomaintain (altitude)rdquo alone cancels previously issued altitude restrictions including SIDSTAR altitude restrictions unless they are restated or modified and authorizes an unrestricted climb or descent Speed restrictions remain in effect unless the controller explicitly cancels the speed restrictions
2 Restate ldquoclimbdescend viardquo and then use ldquoexceptrdquo or ldquoexcept maintainrdquo phraseology to modify published restrictions or assign a new topbottom altitude Use ldquoresumerdquo phraseology with ldquomaintainrdquo to rejoin a route and assign a new altitude where compliance with published altitude restrictions is not required
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus5 Route or Altitude Amendments FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus6minus2 Methods AIM 4-4-10 Adherence to Clearance AIM Para 5-2-8 Instrument Departure Procedures (DP) minus Obstacle Departure Procedures (ODP) and Standard Instrument Departures (SID)
i When a pilot is unable to accept a clearance issue revised instructions to ensure positive control and approved separation
NOTEminus 1 14 CFR Section 91123 states that a pilot is not allowed to deviate from an ATC clearance ldquothat has been
obtainedunless an amended clearance is obtainedrdquo (except when an emergency exists)
2 A pilot is therefore expected to advise the controller if a clearance cannot be accepted when the clearance is issued ldquoWe will tryrdquo and other such acknowledgements do not constitute pilot acceptance of an ATC clearance
3 Controllers are expected to issue ATC clearances which conform with normal aircraft operational capabilities and do not require ldquolast minuterdquo amendments to ensure approved separation
4 ldquoExpediterdquo is not to be used in lieu of appropriate restrictions to ensure separation
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus1minus3 Providing Assistance
4minus5minus8 ANTICIPATED ALTITUDE CHANGES
If practicable inform an aircraft when to expect climb or descent clearance or to request altitude change from another facility
PHRASEOLOGYminus EXPECT HIGHERLOWER IN (number of miles or minutes) MILESMINUTES
or
AT (fix) REQUEST ALTITUDEFLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE FROM (name of facility)
If required
AT (time fix or altitude)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus2minus6 IFR Flight Progress Data
4minus5minus9 ALTITUDE CONFIRMATIONminus NONRADAR
a Request a pilot to confirm assigned altitude on initial contact and when position reports are received unless
NOTEminus For the purpose of this paragraph ldquoinitial contactrdquo means a pilotrsquos first radio contact with each sectorposition
1 The pilot states the assigned altitude or
2 You assign a new altitude to a climbing or descending aircraft or
3 TERMINAL The aircraft was transferred to you from another sectorposition within your facility (intrafacility)
4minus5minus8 Altitude Assignment and Verification
81519 JO 711065Y
PHRASEOLOGYminus (In level flight situations)
VERIFY AT (altitudeflight level)
(In climbingdescending situations)
(if aircraft has been assigned an altitude below the lowest useable flight level)
VERIFY ASSIGNED ALTITUDE (altitude)
(If aircraft has been assigned a flight level at or above the lowest useable flight level)
VERIFY ASSIGNED FLIGHT LEVEL (flight level)
b USA Reconfirm all pilot altitude read backs
PHRASEOLOGYminus (If altitude read back is correct) AFFIRMATIVE (altitude)
(If altitude read back is not correct) NEGATIVE CLIMBDESCEND AND MAINTAIN (altitude)
or
NEGATIVE MAINTAIN (altitude)
Altitude Assignment and Verification 4minus5minus9
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 6 Holding Aircraft
4minus6minus1 CLEARANCE TO HOLDING FIX
Consider operational factors such as length of delay holding airspace limitations navigational aids altitude meteorological conditions when necessary to clear an aircraft to a fix other than the destination airport Issue the following
a Clearance limit (if any part of the route beyond a clearance limit differs from the last routing cleared issue the route the pilot can expect beyond the clearance limit)
PHRASEOLOGYminus EXPECT FURTHER CLEARANCE VIA (routing)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoExpect further clearance via direct Stillwater VminusOminusR Victor Two Twenty-Six Snapy intersection direct Newarkrdquo
b Holding instructions
1 Holding instructions may be eliminated when you inform the pilot that no delay is expected
2 When the assigned procedure or route being flown includes a charted pattern you may omit all holding instructions except the charted holding direction and the statement ldquoas publishedrdquo Always issue complete holding instructions when the pilot requests them
NOTEminus The most generally used holding patterns are depicted on US Government or commercially produced lowhigh altitude en route area and STAR Charts
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (fix) HOLD (direction) AS PUBLISHED
or
CLEARED TO (fix) NO DELAY EXPECTED
c EFC Do not specify this item if no delay is expected
1 When additional holding is expected at any other fix in your facilityrsquos area state the fix and your best estimate of the additional delay When more than one fix is involved state the total additional en route delay (omit specific fixes)
NOTEminus Additional delay information is not used to determine pilot action in the event of two-way communications failure Pilots are expected to predicate their actions solely on the provisions of 14 CFR Section 91185
PHRASEOLOGYminus EXPECT FURTHER CLEARANCE (time)
and if required
ANTICIPATE ADDITIONAL (time in minuteshours) MINUTEHOUR DELAY AT (fix)
or
ANTICIPATE ADDITIONAL (time in minuteshours) MINUTEHOUR EN ROUTE DELAY
EXAMPLEminus 1 ldquoExpect further clearance one niner two zero anticipate additional three zero minute delay at Sweetrdquo
2 ldquoExpect further clearance one five one zero anticipate additional three zero minute en route delayrdquo
2 When additional holding is expected in an approach control area state the total additional terminal delay
PHRASEOLOGYminus EXPECT FURTHER CLEARANCE (time)
and if required
ANTICIPATE ADDITIONAL (time in minuteshours) MINUTEHOUR TERMINAL DELAY
3 TERMINAL When terminal delays exist or are expected inform the appropriate center or approach control facility so that the information can be forwarded to arrival aircraft
4 When delay is expected issue items in subparas a and b at least 5 minutes before the aircraft is estimated to reach the clearance limit If the traffic situation requires holding an aircraft that is less than 5 minutes from the holding fix issue these items immediately
NOTEminus 1 The AIM indicates that pilots should start speed reduction when 3 minutes or less from the holding fix The additional 2 minutes contained in the 5minusminute require-ment are necessary to compensate for different pilotcontroller ETAS at the holding fix minor differences
Holding Aircraft 4minus6minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
in clock times and provision for sufficient planning and reaction times
2 When holding is necessary the phrase ldquodelay indefiniterdquo should be used when an accurate estimate of the delay time and the reason for the delay cannot immediately be determined ie disabled aircraft on the runway terminal or center sector saturation weather below landing minimums etc In any event every attempt should be made to provide the pilot with the best possible estimate of hisher delay time and the reason for the delay Controllerssupervisors should consult as appropriate with personnel (other sectors weather forecasters the airport management other facilities etc) who can best provide this information
PHRASEOLOGYminus DELAY INDEFINITE (reason if known) EXPECT FURTHER CLEARANCE (time) (After determining the reason for the delay advise the pilot as soon as possible)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCleared to Drewe hold west as published expect further clearance via direct Sidney VminusOminusR one three one five anticipate additional two zero minute delay at Woodyrdquo
ldquoCleared to Aston hold west on Victor two twenty-five seven mile leg left turns expect further clearance one niner two zero anticipate additional one five minute terminal delayrdquo
ldquoCleared to Wayne no delay expectedrdquo
ldquoCleared to Wally hold north as published delay indefinite snow removal in progress expect further clearance one one three zerordquo
4minus6minus2 CLEARANCE BEYOND FIX
a If no delay is expected issue a clearance beyond the clearance limit as soon as possible and whenever possible at least 5 minutes before the aircraft reaches the fix
b Include the following items when issuing clearance beyond a clearance limit
1 Clearance limit or approach clearance
2 Route of flight Specify one of the following
(a) Complete details of the route (airway route course fix(es) azimuth course heading arc or vector)
(b) The phrase ldquovia last routing clearedrdquo Use this phrase only when the most recently issued
routing to the new clearance limit is valid and verbiage will be reduced
PHRASEOLOGYminus VIA LAST ROUTING CLEARED
3 Assigned altitude if different from present altitude
NOTEminus Except in the event of a two-way communications failure when a clearance beyond a fix has not been received pilots are expected to hold as depicted on US Government or commercially produced (meeting FAA requirements) lowhigh altitude en route and area or STAR charts If no holding pattern is charted and holding instructions have not been issued pilots should ask ATC for holding instructions prior to reaching the fix If a pilot is unable to obtain holding instructions prior to reaching the fix the pilot is expected to hold in a standard pattern on the course on which the aircraft approached the fix and request further clearance as soon as possible
4minus6minus3 DELAYS
a Advise your supervisor or flow controller as soon as possible when you delay or expect to delay aircraft
b When arrival delays reach or are anticipated to reach 30 minutes take the following action
1 EN ROUTE The center responsible for transferring control to an approach control facility or for a nonapproach control destination the center in whose area the aircraft will land must issue total delay information as soon as possible after the aircraft enters the centerrsquos area Whenever possible the delay information must be issued by the first center controller to communicate with the aircraft
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus14minus9 ERAM Computer Entry of Hold Information
2 TERMINAL When tower en route control service is being provided the approach control facility whose area contains the destination airport must issue total delay information as soon as possible after the aircraft enters its approach control area Whenever possible the delay information must be issued by the first terminal controller to communicate with the aircraft
3 Unless a pilot requests delay information the actions specified in subparas 1 and 2 above may be omitted when total delay information is available to pilots via ATIS
4minus6minus2 Holding Aircraft
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Airport) ARRIVAL DELAYS (time in minuteshours)
4minus6minus4 HOLDING INSTRUCTIONS
When issuing holding instructions specify
a Direction of holding from the fixwaypoint
b Holding fix or waypoint
NOTEminus The holding fix may be omitted if included at the beginning of the transmission as the clearance limit
c Radial course bearing track azimuth airway or route on which the aircraft is to hold
d Leg length in miles if DME or RNAV is to be used Specify leg length in minutes if the pilot requests it or you consider it necessary
e Direction of holding pattern turns only if left turns are to be made the pilot requests it or you consider it necessary
PHRASEOLOGYminus HOLD (direction) OF (fixwaypoint) ON (specified radial course bearing track airway azimuth(s) or route)
If leg length is specified
(number of minutesmiles) MINUTEMILE LEG
If direction of turn is specified
LEFTRIGHT TURNS
f Issue maximum holding airspeed advisories when an aircraft is
1 Approved to exceed the maximum airspeed of a pattern and is cleared into a holding pattern that will protect for the greater speed or
2 Observed deviating from the holding pattern airspace area or
3 Cleared into an airspeed restricted holding pattern in which the icon has not been published
EXAMPLEminus Due to turbulence a turboprop requests to exceed the recommended maximum holding airspeed ATCS may clear the aircraft into a pattern that protects for the airspeed request and must advise the pilot of the maximum holding airspeed for the holding pattern airspace area
PHRASEOLOGYminus ldquoMAXIMUM HOLDING AIRSPEED IS TWO ONE ZERO KNOTSrdquo
4minus6minus5 VISUAL HOLDING POINTS
You may use as a holding fix a location which the pilot can determine by visual reference to the surface if heshe is familiar with it
PHRASEOLOGYminus HOLD AT (location) UNTIL (time or other condition)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus1minus4 Visual Holding of VFR Aircraft
4minus6minus6 HOLDING FLIGHT PATH DEVIATION
Approve a pilotrsquos request to deviate from the prescribed holding flight path if obstacles and traffic conditions permit
4minus6minus7 UNMONITORED NAVAIDs
Separate an aircraft holding at an unmonitored NAVAID from any other aircraft occupying the course which the holding aircraft will follow if it does not receive signals from the NAVAID
4minus6minus8 ILS PROTECTIONCRITICAL AREAS
When the official weather observation indicates a
ceiling of less than 800 feet or visibility of 2 miles do not authorize aircraft to hold below 5000 feet AGL inbound toward the airport on or within 1 statute mile of the localizer between the ILS OM or the fix used in lieu of the OM and the airport USAF The holding restriction applies only when an arriving aircraft is between the ILS OM or the fix used in lieu of the OM and the runway REFERENCEminus FAA Order 82603 United States Standard for Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) Chapter 17 Basic Holding Criteria
Holding Aircraft 4minus6minus3
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 7 Arrival Procedures
4minus7minus1 CLEARANCE INFORMATION
Clear an arriving aircraft to a clearance limit by specifying the following
a Name of fix or airport
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT Or CLEARED TO (NAVAID name and type if known) Or CLEARED TO (intersection or waypoint name and type if known)
b Route of flight including a STARRNAV STARFMSP and STARRNAV STARFMSP trans-ition if appropriate Assign a STARRNAV STARFMSP and STARRNAV STARFMSP trans-ition to any aircraft in lieu of other routes eg airways or preferential arrival routes when the routings are the same The clearance must include the name and transition if necessary of the STARRNAV STARFMSP to be flown
TERMINAL When the STARRNAV STARFMSP transition is designed to provide course guidance to multiple runways the facility must state intended runway number on initial contact or as soon as practical If the runway assignment or any subsequent runway change is not issued prior to 10 NM from the runway transition waypoint radar vectors to final must be provided
PHRASEOLOGYminus (STARRNAV STARFMSP name and number) ARRIVAL (STARRNAV STARFMSP name and number) ARRIVAL (transition name) TRANSITION CHANGEAMEND TRANSITION TO (runway number) CHANGEAMEND TRANSITION TO (runway number) TURN LEFTRIGHT or HEADING (heading) FOR VECTOR TO FINAL APPROACH COURSE
EXAMPLEminus ldquoRosewood One arrivalrdquo ldquoRosewood One arrival Delta transitionrdquo ldquoChange transition to Runway 09 rightrdquo ldquoAmend transition to Runway 22 left turn right heading 180 for vector to final approach courserdquo
NOTEminus 1 If a civil pilot does not wish to use a STAR issued in an ATC clearance or any other STAR published for that location the pilot is expected to advise ATC
2 Arrival procedure descriptive text contained within parentheses (for example ldquoDevine One (RNAV) Arrivalrdquo) are not included in arrival clearance phraseology
c Altitude instructions as follows
1 Assigned altitude or
2 Instructions to vertically navigate on the STARFMSP or STARFMSP transition
EXAMPLEminus ldquoBayview Three Arrival Helen Transition maintain Flight Level Three Three Zerordquo ldquoDescend via the Civit One Arrivalrdquo ldquoDescend via the Lendy One Arrival Runway 22 leftrdquo
ldquoCross JCT at Flight Level Two Four Zerordquo ldquoDescend via the Coast Two Arrivalrdquo ldquoCivit One Arrival Descend and Maintain Flight Level Two Four Zerordquo REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus5minus7 Altitude Information AIM Para 5minus4minus1 Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) Area Navigation (RNAV) STAR and Flight Management System Procedures (FMSP) for Arrivals
d Issue holding instructions EFC and additional delay information as required
e Instructions regarding further communications as appropriate REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus17 Radio Communications Transfer
4minus7minus2 ADVANCE DESCENT CLEARANCE
EN ROUTE
Take the following action when exercising control of aircraft landing at an airport located in an adjacent centerrsquos control area near the common boundary
a Coordinate with the receiving facility for a lower altitude and issue a clearance to the aircraft as appropriate
b Initiate this action at a distance sufficient from destination to allow for normal descent and speed reduction
4minus7minus3 SINGLE FREQUENCY APPROACHES (SFA)
TERMINAL
Where SFA procedures for military single-piloted turbojet aircraft on an IFR flight plan are contained in
Arrival Procedures 4minus7minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
a letter of agreement do not require a radio frequency change after the aircraft begins approach or after initial contact during an en route descent until a landing or low approach has been completed except under the following conditions
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 76104 Special Operations Para 9minus3minus6 Single Frequency Approach (SFA) PCG Termminus Single-Piloted Aircraft
a During daylight hours while the aircraft is in VFR conditions
b On pilot request
c When pilot cancels IFR flight plan
d In an emergency situation
e When aircraft is cleared for visual approach
4minus7minus4 RADIO FREQUENCY AND RADAR BEACON CHANGES FOR MILITARY AIRCRAFT
When military single-piloted turbojet aircraft will conduct an approach wholly or partly in IFR conditions or at night take the following action
NOTEminus It is known that the mental distraction and the inadvertent movement of aircraft controls resulting from the pilotrsquos turning reaching or leaning to change frequencies can induce spatial disorientation (vertigo)
a Avoid radio frequency and radar beacon changes to the maximum extent that communications capabilities and traffic will permit However when changes are required
1 Give instructions early enough to allow the change before the aircraft reaches the approach fix or handoff point
2 Keep frequencyradar beacon changes to a minimum below 2500 feet above the surface
3 Avoid requiring frequencyradar beacon changes during the time the aircraft is making a turn
b When traffic volume requires a frequency other than the one used by aircraft making approaches may be assigned for use in transferring control to the approach control facility
TERMINAL
c If practicable use a frequency common to both the GCA unit and approach control to minimize frequency changes
d When a GCA unit is not able to communicate on a common frequency a change to a GCA frequency may be authorized
e When a nonradar approach will be made aircraft may be instructed to change to tower frequency when
1 The reported ceiling is at or above 1500 feet and visibility is 5 statute miles or more
2 The aircraft reports able to proceed by visual reference to the surface
3 The aircraft requests and is cleared for a contact approach
4 The aircraft is cleared for a visual approach
f Avoid making frequencyradar beacon changes after an aircraft begins a high altitude approach
g In the event of a missed approach do not require a frequencyradar beacon change before the aircraft reaches the missed approach altitude the MEA or the MVA REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus6 Function Code Assignments
4minus7minus5 MILITARY TURBOJET EN ROUTE DESCENT
Provide military turbojet aircraft the same arrival procedures that are provided for nonmilitary turbojet aircraft except
NOTEminus It is the responsibility of the pilot to request a high altitude approach if heshe does not want normal arrival handling
a An en route descent may be used in a nonradar environment however radar capability should exist which will permit the aircraft to be vectored to the final approach course of a published high altitude instrument approach procedure or PARASR approach Do not use this procedure if other than normal vectoring delays are anticipated
b Prior to issuance of a descent clearance below the highest initial approach fix altitude established for any high altitude instrument approach procedure for the destination airport inform the aircraft
1 Type of approach to expect
EXAMPLEminus ldquoExpect VminusOminusR approach to runway three twordquo
Arrival Procedures 4minus7minus2
81519 JO 711065Y
2 Radar vectors will be provided to the final approach course
EXAMPLEminus ldquoExpect surveillanceprecision approach to runway one seven radar vectors to final approach courserdquo
3 Current weather whenever the ceiling is below 1000 feet (USAF 1500 feet) or the highest circling minimum whichever is greater or when the visibility is less than 3 miles
EXAMPLEminus ldquoExpect ILS approach to runway eight radar vectors to localizer course Weather (reported weather)rdquo
c If ATIS is provided and the pilot advises heshe has received the current ATIS broadcast before the descent clearance in subpara b is issued omit those items in subpara b that are contained in the broadcast
d To avoid requiring an aircraft to fly at low altitudes for an excessive distance descent clearance should be issued at a point determined by adding 10 to the first two digits of the flight level
EXAMPLEminus For FL 370 37 10 = 47 miles
NOTEminus Turbojet en route descents are based on a rate of descent of 4000 to 6000 feet per minute
e Do not terminate the en route descent of an aircraft without the consent of the pilot except as required by radar outage or an emergency situation
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus8minus4 Altitude Assignment for Military High Altitude Instrument Approaches
4minus7minus6 ARRIVAL INFORMATION
EN ROUTE
a Forward the following information to nonap-proach control towers soon enough to permit adjustment of the traffic flow or to FSSs (Alaska Only) soon enough to provide local airport advisory where applicable
1 Aircraft identification
2 Type of aircraft
3 ETA
4 Type of instrument approach procedure the aircraft will execute or
5 For SVFR the direction from which the aircraft will enter Class B Class C Class D or
Class E surface area and any altitude restrictions that were issued or
6 For aircraft executing a contact approach the position of the aircraft
NOTEminus Specific time requirements are usually stated in a letter of agreement
b Forward the following information to approach control facilities before transfer of control jurisdiction
NOTEminus Transfer points are usually specified in a letter of agreement
1 Aircraft identification
2 Type of aircraft and appropriate aircraft equipment suffix
3 ETA or actual time and proposed or actual altitude over clearance limit The ETA need not be given if the arrival information is being forwarded during a radar handoff
4 Clearance limit (when other than the destination airport) and EFC issued to the aircraft Clearance limit may be omitted when provided for in a letter of agreement
5 Time fix or altitude when control responsi-bility is transferred to the approach control facility This information may be omitted when provided for in a letter of agreement
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Identification) (type of aircraft) ESTIMATEDOVER (clearance limit) (time) (altitude) EFC (time)
If required
YOUR CONTROL
or
YOUR CONTROL AT (time fix or altitude)
4minus7minus7 WEATHER INFORMATION
EN ROUTE
When an available official weather report indicates weather conditions are below a 1000minusfoot (USAF 1500minusfoot) ceiling or below the highest circling minimum whichever is higher or less than three-miles visibility for the airport concerned transmit the weather report and changes classified as
Arrival Procedures 4minus7minus3
JO 711065Y 81519
special weather observations to an arriving aircraft prior to or as part of the approach clearance when
a It is transmitted directly to the pilot via center controller-to-pilot communications
b It is relayed through a communications station other than an air carrier company radio or through a nonapproach control facility You may do this by telling the station or nonapproach control facility to issue current weather
4minus7minus8 BELOW MINIMA REPORT BY PILOT
If an arriving aircraft reports weather conditions are below hisher landing minima
NOTEminus Determination that existing weathervisibility is adequate for approachlanding is the responsibility of the pilotaircraft operator
a Issue appropriate instructions to the aircraft to hold or proceed to another airport
b Adjust as necessary the position in the landing sequence of any other aircraft desiring to make approaches and issue approach clearances accord-ingly
4minus7minus9 TRANSFER OF JURISDICTION
Transfer radio communications and control respons-ibility early enough to allow the receiving facility to clear an aircraft beyond the clearance limit before the aircraft reaches it
4minus7minus10 APPROACH INFORMATION
a Both en route and terminal approach control sectors must provide current approach information to aircraft destined to airports for which they provide approach control services This information must be provided on initial contact or as soon as possible thereafter Approach information contained in the ATIS broadcast may be omitted if the pilot states the appropriate ATIS code For pilots destined to an airport without ATIS items 3minus5 below may be omitted after the pilot advises receipt of the automated weather otherwise issue approach information by including the following
1 Approach clearance or type approach to be expected if two or more approaches are published and
the clearance limit does not indicate which will be used
2 Runway if different from that to which the instrument approach is made
3 Surface wind
4 Ceiling and visibility if the reported ceiling at the airport of intended landing is below 1000 feet or below the highest circling minimum whichever is greater or the visibility is less than 3 miles
5 Altimeter setting for the airport of intended landing REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Chapter 2 Section 7 Altimeter Settings
b Upon pilot request controllers must inform pilots of the frequency where automated weather data may be obtained and if appropriate that airport weather is not available
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Airport) AWOSASOS WEATHER AVAILABLE ON (frequency)
1 ASOSAWOS must be set to provide one minute weather at uncontrolled airports that are without groundminustominusair weather broadcast capability by a CWO NWS or FSS observer
2 Controllers will consider the longminusline disseminated weather from an automated weather system at an uncontrolled airport as trend information only and must rely on the pilot for the current weather information for that airport
3 Controllers must issue the last longminusline disseminated weather to the pilot if the pilot is unable to receive the ASOSAWOS broadcast
NOTEminus Aircraft destined to uncontrolled airports which have automated weather data with broadcast capability should monitor the ASOSAWOS frequency to ascertain the current weather at the airport The pilot should advise the controller when heshe has received the broadcast weather and state hisher intentions
c Issue any known changes classified as special weather observations as soon as possible Special weather observations need not be issued after they are included in the ATIS broadcast and the pilot states the appropriate ATIS code
d Advise pilots when the ILS on the runway in use is not operational if that ILS is on the same frequency as an operational ILS serving another runway
Arrival Procedures 4minus7minus4
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
EXAMPLEminus ldquoExpect visual approach runway two five right runway two five right IminusLminusS not operationalrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus7minus2 Altimeter Setting Issuance Below Lowest Usable FL FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus10minus2 Approach Information 14 CFR Section 91129 Operations in Class D Airspace Subpara (d)(2)
e TERMINAL If multiple runway transitions are depicted on a STAR procedure advise pilots of the runway assignment on initial contact or as soon as possible thereafter
4minus7minus11 ARRIVAL INFORMATION BY APPROACH CONTROL FACILITIES
TERMINAL
a Forward the following information to nonap-proach control towers soon enough to permit adjustment of the traffic flow or to FSSs soon enough to provide local airport advisory where applicable
1 Aircraft identification
2 Type of aircraft
3 ETA
4 Type of instrument approach procedure the aircraft will execute or
5 For SVFR the direction from which the aircraft will enter Class B Class C Class D or Class E surface area and any altitude restrictions that were issued or
6 For aircraft executing a contact approach the position of the aircraft
NOTEminus Specific time requirements are usually stated in a letter of agreement
b Forward the following information to the tower when the tower and TRACON are part of the same facility
1 Aircraft identification
2 Type aircraft if required for separation purposes
3 Type of instrument approach procedure andor runway if differing from that in use
NOTEminus The local controller has the responsibility to determine whether or not conditions are adequate for the use of
STARS data on the CTRD where a facility directive authorizes its use for the transfer of arrival data
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 12minus6minus4 Use of STARS Quick Look Functions
c Where the collocated or satellite tower has STARS data displayed on its CTRD the STARS modify or quick look functions may be used to forward arrival data provided that a facility directive at the collocated tower or a letter of agreement with the satellite tower exists which outlines procedures for using STARS for transferring this data
d Forward the following information to centers
1 Where two or more instrument approach procedures are published for the airport the particular procedure which an aircraft can expect or that it will be vectored toward the airport for a visual approach
2 Highest altitude being used by the approach control facility at the holding fix
3 Average time interval between successive approaches
4 Arrival time of aircraft over the holding fix or if control has been transferred to you before an aircraft has reached the fix a statement or other indication acknowledging receipt of control responsibility
5 Revised EFC if different by 10 minutes or more from that issued by the center
6 Missed approaches if they affect center operations
7 Information relating to an unreported or overdue aircraft
4minus7minus12 AIRPORT CONDITIONS
a EN ROUTE Before issuing an approach clearance and subsequently as changes occur inform an aircraft of any abnormal operation of approach and landing aids and of destination airport conditions that you know of which might restrict an approach or landing This information may be omitted if it is contained in the ATIS broadcast and the pilot states that heshe has received the appropriate ATIS code
NOTEminus 1 Airport conditions information in the provision of en route approach control service does not include the following
Arrival Procedures 4minus7minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
a The airport surface environment other than the landing area(s) (eg TAXIWAY APRON or SERVICE keyword NOTAMs)
b Obstruction information (eg OBST NOTAMs) for aircraft that will be cleared for an instrument approach
c Information pertaining to cold temperature compensa-tion
2 When advised of special use airspace (SUA) or military training route (MTR) activation appropriate action is taken to separate nonparticipating IFR aircraft from those activities when required andor to issue applicable advisories as warranted When meeting this requirement there is no requirement for controllers to additionally issue the associated D NOTAM activating that SUA or MTR to the pilot Accordingly D NOTAMs for SUA that contain the accountability codes SUAE SUAC and SUAW are not required to be issued
3 Although a pilot may have obtained NOTAM information during preminusflight briefings airport conditions may have changed in flight Therefore a pilot stating or a controller asking if they ldquohave the NOTAMSrdquo does not relieve the controller of the responsibility of issuing airport conditions that might restrict an approach or landing Additionally controller instructions to contact FSS to obtain the NOTAMs does not relieve the controller of their responsibilities specified in this paragraph
b TERMINAL On first contact or as soon as possible thereafter and subsequently as changes occur inform an aircraft of any abnormal operation of approach and landing aids and of destination airport conditions that you know of which might restrict an approach or landing This information may be omitted if it is contained in the ATIS broadcast and the pilot states the appropriate ATIS code
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Chapter 3 Section 3 Airport Conditions
c Issue RwyCC contained in a FICON NOTAM to aircraft in accordance with one of the following
1 Before or when an approach clearance is issued
2 Before an en route descent clearance is issued
3 TERMINAL Prior to departure
4 As soon as possible after receipt of any subsequent changes in previously issued RwyCC information
d RwyCC may be issued in lieu of the complete FICON NOTAM Issue the complete FICON NOTAM upon pilot request workload permitting
EXAMPLEminus Boston Runway Two Seven field condition three three three one hundred percent two inches dry snow over compacted snow Observed at one five three zero zulu
NOTEminus RwyCC may be transmitted via the ATIS as prescribed in Paragraphs 2minus9minus3 Content 3minus3minus1 Landing Area Condition 3minus9minus1 Departure Information and 3minus10minus1 Landing Information
e TERMINAL Where RCRs are provided transmit this information to USAF and ANG aircraft Issue the RCR to other aircraft upon pilot request
NOTEminus USAF offices furnish RCR information at airports serving USAF and ANG aircraft
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus9minus3 Content FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus3minus1 Landing Area Condition FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus1 Departure Information FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus10minus1 Landing Information
4minus7minus13 SWITCHING ILS RUNWAYS
TERMINAL
When a change is made from one ILS to another at airports equipped with multiple systems which are not used simultaneously coordinate with the facilities which use the fixes formed by reference to these NAVAIDs
Arrival Procedures 4minus7minus6
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 8 Approach Clearance Procedures
4minus8minus1 APPROACH CLEARANCE
a Clear aircraft for ldquostandardrdquo or ldquospecialrdquo instrument approach procedures only
1 To require an aircraft to execute a particular instrument approach procedure specify in the approach clearance the name of the approach as published on the approach chart Where more than one procedure is published on a single chart and a specific procedure is to be flown amend the approach clearance to specify execution of the specific approach to be flown If only one instrument approach of a particular type is published the approach needs not be identified by the runway reference
2 An aircraft conducting an ILS or LDA approach must be advised at the time an approach clearance is issued when the glideslope is reported out of service unless the title of the published approach procedure allows (for example ILS or LOC Rwy 05)
3 Standard instrument approach procedures (SIAP) must begin at an initial approach fix (IAF) or an intermediate fix (IF) if there is not an IAF
4 Where adequate radar coverage exists radar facilities may vector aircraft to the final approach course in accordance with Paragraph 5minus9minus1 Vectors to Final Approach Course and Paragraph 5minus9minus2 Final Approach Course Interception
5 Where adequate radar coverage exists radar facilities may clear an aircraft to any fix 3 NM or more prior to the FAF along the final approach course at an intercept angle not greater than 30 degrees
6 Controllers must not disapprove a pilot request to cold temperature compensate in conjunc-tion with the issuance of an approach clearance
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED (type) APPROACH
CLEARED APPROACH
(To authorize a pilot to execute hisher choice of instrument approach)
CLEARED (specific procedure to be flown) APPROACH
(Where more than one procedure is published on a single
chart and a specific procedure is to be flown)
CLEARED (ILSLDA) APPROACH GLIDESLOPE UNUSABLE
(To authorize a pilot to execute an ILS or an LDA approach when the glideslope is out of service)
CLEARED LOCALIZER APPROACH
(When the title of the approach procedure contains ldquoor LOCrdquo)
CANCEL APPROACH CLEARANCE (additional instructions as necessary)
(When it is necessary to cancel a previously issued approach clearance)
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCleared Approachrdquo ldquoCleared (V-O-RI-L-SLocalizer) Approachrdquo ldquoCleared L-D-A Runway Three-Six Approachrdquo ldquoCleared Localizer Back Course Runway One-Three Approachrdquo ldquoCleared (GPSRNAV Z) Runway Two-Two Approachrdquo ldquoCleared BRANCH ONE Arrival and (ILSRNAV) Runway One-Three Approachrdquo ldquoCleared I-L-S Runway Three-Six Approach glideslope unusablerdquo ldquoCleared S-D-F Approachrdquo ldquoCleared G-L-S Approachrdquo
NOTEminus 1 Clearances authorizing instrument approaches are issued on the basis that if visual contact with the ground is made before the approach is completed the entire approach procedure will be followed unless the pilot receives approval for a contact approach is cleared for a visual approach or cancels their IFR flight plan
2 Approach clearances are issued based on known traffic The receipt of an approach clearance does not relieve the pilot of hisher responsibility to comply with applicable Parts of Title 14 of the Code of Federal Regulations and the notations on instrument approach charts which levy on the pilot the responsibility to comply with or act on an instruction for example ldquoStraight-in minima not authorized at nightrdquo ldquoProcedure not authorized when glideslopeglidepath not usedrdquo ldquoUse of procedure limited to aircraft authorized to use airportrdquo or ldquoProcedure not authorized at nightrdquo or Snowflake icon with associated temperature
Approach Clearance Procedures 4minus8minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
3 In some cases the name of the approach as published is used to identify the approach even though a component of the approach aid other than the localizer on an ILS is inoperative
4 Where more than one procedure to the same runway is published on a single chart each must adhere to all final approach guidance contained on that chart even though each procedure will be treated as a separate entity when authorized by ATC
5 The use of alphabetical identifiers in the approach name with a letter from the end of the alphabet for example X Y Z such as ldquoHI TACAN Z Rwy 6L or RNAV(GPS) Y Rwy 04rdquo denotes multiple straight-in approaches to the same runway that use the same approach aid
6 Alphabetical suffixes with a letter from the beginning of the alphabet for example A B C denote a procedure that does not meet the criteria for straight-in landing minimums authorization
7 14 CFR Section 91175(j) requires a pilot to receive a clearance to conduct a procedure turn when vectored to a final approach course or fix conducting a timed approach or when the procedure specifies ldquoNO PTrdquo
8 An aircraft which has been cleared to a holding fix and prior to reaching that fix is issued a clearance for an approach but not issued a revised routing that is ldquoproceed direct tordquo may be expected to proceed via the last assigned route a feeder route (if one is published on the approach chart) and then to commence the approach as published If by following the route of flight to the holding fix the aircraft would overfly an IAF or the fix associated with the beginning of a feeder route to be used the aircraft is expected to commence the approach using the published feeder route to the IAF or from the IAF as appropriate that is the aircraft would not be expected to overfly and return to the IAF or feeder route
9 Approach name items contained within parenthesis for example RNAV (GPS) Rwy 04 are not included in approach clearance phraseology
10 Pilots are required to advise ATC when intending to apply cold temperature compensation to instrument approach segments Pilots must advise ATC of the amount of compensation required for each affected segment on initial contact or as soon as possible Pilots are not required to advise ATC when correcting on the final segment only Controllers may delay the issuance of an approach clearance to comply with approved separation requirements when informed that a pilot will apply cold temperature compensation (CTC) Pilots will not apply altitude compensation unless authorized when assigned an altitude prior to an approach clearance Consideration should be given to vectoring aircraft at or above the
requested compensating altitude if possible This eliminates pilots having to climb once on the approach
REFERENCEminus FAA Order 82603 United States Standard for Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) PCG Term ndash Cold Temperature Compensation AIM Paragraph 5-1-17 Cold Temperature Operations AIM Paragraph 5-5-4 Instrument Approach
11 There are some systems for example Enhanced Flight Vision System (EFVS) which allow pilots to conduct Instrument Approach Procedures (IAP) when the reported weather is below minimums prescribed on the IAP to be flown
REFERENCEminus 14 CFR sect 91175(l) PCG Term EFVS
b For aircraft operating on unpublished routes issue the approach clearance only after the aircraft is
1 Established on a segment of a published route or instrument approach procedure or (See FIG 4minus8minus1)
EXAMPLEminus The aircraft is established on a segment of a published route at 5000 feet ldquoCleared V-O-R Runway Three Four Approachrdquo
FIG 4minus8minus1
Approach Clearance Example
2 Assigned an altitude to maintain until the aircraft is established on a segment of a published route or instrument approach procedure (See FIG 4-8-2)
EXAMPLEminus Aircraft 1 is cleared direct LEFTT The MVA in the area is 3000 feet and the aircraft is at 4000 feet ldquoCross LEFTT at or above three thousand five hundred cleared RNAV Runway One Eight Approachrdquo
4minus8minus2 Approach Clearance Procedures
81519 JO 711065Y
The MVA in the area is 3000 feet and Aircraft 2 is at 3000 feet ldquoCleared direct LEFTT direct CENTR maintain three thousand until CENTR cleared straight-in RNAV Runway One Eight Approachrdquo
FIG 4minus8minus2
Approach Clearance Example
NOTEminus 1 The altitude assigned must assure IFR obstruction clearance from the point at which the approach clearance is issued until established on a segment of a published route or instrument approach procedure
2 If the altitude assignment is VFR-on-top it is conceivable that the pilot may elect to remain high until arrival over the final approach fix which may require the pilot to circle to descend so as to cross the final approach fix at an altitude that would permit landing
3 An aircraft is not established on an approach until at or above an altitude published on that segment of the approach
REFERENCEminus FAA Order 82603 United States Standard for Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) Para 10-2
c Except for visual approaches do not clear an aircraft direct to the FAF unless it is also an IAF wherein the aircraft is expected to execute the depicted procedure turn or hold-in-lieu of procedure turn
d Intercept angles greater than 90 degrees may be used when a procedure turn a hold-in-lieu of procedure turn pattern or arrival holding is depicted and the pilot will execute the procedure
e If a procedure turn hold-in-lieu of procedure turn or arrival holding pattern is depicted and the
angle of intercept is 90 degrees or less the aircraft must be instructed to conduct a straight-in approach if ATC does not want the pilot to execute a procedure turn or hold-in-lieu of procedure turn (See FIG 4minus8minus3)
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED STRAIGHT-IN (type) APPROACH
NOTEminus 1 Restate ldquocleared straight-inrdquo in the approach clear-ance even if the pilot was advised earlier to expect a straight-in approach
2 Some approach charts have an arrival holding pattern depicted at the IAF using a ldquothin linerdquo holding symbol It is charted where holding is frequently required prior to starting the approach procedure so that detailed holding instructions are not required The arrival holding pattern is not authorized unless assigned by ATC
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCleared direct SECND maintain at or above three thousand until SECND cleared straight-in ILS Runway One-Eight approachrdquo
REFERENCEminus AIM Paragraph 5-4-5 Instrument Approach Procedure Charts AIM Paragraph 5-4-9 Procedure Turn and Hold-in-lieu of Procedure Turn
FIG 4minus8minus3
Approach Clearance Example For Aircraft On a Conventional Approach
Approach Clearance Procedures 4minus8minus3
JO 711065Y 81519
EXAMPLEminus Aircraft 1 can be cleared direct to XYZ VORTAC or SECND because the intercept angle is 90 degrees or less
Aircraft 2 cannot be cleared to XYZ VORTAC because the intercept angle is greater than 90 degrees
Aircraft 2 can be cleared to SECND if allowed to execute the hold-in-lieu of procedure turn pattern
f Except when applying radar procedures timed or visual approaches clear an aircraft for an approach to an airport when the preceding aircraft has landed or canceled IFR flight plan
g Where instrument approaches require radar monitoring and radar services are not available do not use the phraseology ldquocleared approachrdquo which allows the pilot hisher choice of instrument approaches
RNAV APPLICATION
h For RNAVminusequipped aircraft operating on unpublished routes issue approach clearance for conventional or RNAV SIAP including approaches with RF legs only after the aircraft is (See FIG 4minus8minus4)
1 Established on a heading or course direct to the IAF at an intercept angle not greater than 90 degrees and is assigned an altitude in accordance with b2 Radar monitoring is required to the IAF for RNAV (RNP) approaches when no holdminusinminuslieu of procedure turn is executed
EXAMPLEminus Aircraft 1 can be cleared direct to CENTR The intercept angle at that IAF is 90 degrees or less The minimum altitude for IFR operations (14 CFR section 91177) along the flight path to the IAF is 3000 feet If a hold in lieu of procedure turn pattern is depicted at an IAF and a TAA is not defined the aircraft must be instructed to conduct a straight-in approach if ATC does not want the pilot to
execute a hold-in-lieu procedure turn ldquoCleared direct CENTR maintain at or above three thousand until CENTR cleared straight-in RNAV Runway One-Eight Approachrdquo
2 Established on a heading or course direct to the IF at an angle not greater than 90 degrees provided the following conditions are met
(a) Assign an altitude in accordance with b2 that will permit a normal descent to the FAF
NOTEminus Controllers should expect aircraft to descend at approximately 150-300 feet per nautical mile when applying guidance in subpara h2(a)
(b) Radar monitoring is provided to the IF
(c) The SIAP must identify the intermediate fix with the letters ldquoIFrdquo
(d) For procedures where an IAF is pub-lished the pilot is advised to expect clearance to the IF at least 5 miles from the fix
EXAMPLEminus ldquoExpect direct CENTR for RNAV Runway One-Eight Approachrdquo
3 Established on a heading or course direct to a fix between the IF and FAF at an intercept angle not greater than 30 degrees and assigned an altitude in accordance with b2
EXAMPLEminus Aircraft 1 is more than 5 miles from SHANN The minimum altitude for IFR operations (14 CFR Section 91177) along the flight path to SHANN is 3000 feet SHANN is a step down fix between the IFIAF (CENTR) and the FAF To clear Aircraft 1 to SHANN ATC must ensure the intercept angle for the intermediate segment at SHANN is not greater than 30 degrees and must be cleared to an altitude that will allow a normal descent to the FAF ldquoCleared direct SHANN cross SHANN at or above three thousand cleared RNAV Runway One-Eight Approachrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order 711065 Par 5-6-2 Methods FAA Order 711065 Chapter 5 Section 9 Radar Arrivals
Approach Clearance Procedures 4minus8minus4
81519 JO 711065Y
FIG 4minus8minus4
Approach Clearance Example For RNAV Aircraft
EXAMPLEminus Aircraft 2 cannot be cleared direct to CENTR unless the aircraft is allowed to execute the hold-in-lieu of procedure turn The intercept angle at that IFIAF is greater than 90 degrees The minimum altitude for IFR operations (14 CFR Section 91177) along the flight path to the IAF is 3000 feet ldquoCleared direct CENTR maintain at or above three thousand until CENTR cleared RNAV Runway One-Eight approachrdquo The pilot is expected to proceed direct CENTR and execute the hold-in-lieu of procedure turn
Aircraft 2 can be cleared direct LEFTT The intercept angle at that IAF is 90 degrees or less The minimum altitude for IFR operations (14 CFR Section 91177) along the flight path to the IAF is 3000 feet ldquoCleared direct LEFTT maintain at or above three thousand until LEFTT cleared RNAV Runway One-Eight Approachrdquo The pilot does not have to be cleared for a straight-in approach since no hold-in-lieu of procedure turn pattern is depicted at LEFTT
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Chapter 5 Section 9 Radar Arrivals
i Clear RNAVminusequipped aircraft conducting RNAV instrument approach procedures that contain radius to fix (RF) legs
1 Via published transitions or
2 In accordance with paragraph h
3 Do not clear aircraft direct to any waypoint beginning or within an RF leg
4 Do not assign fixwaypoint crossing speeds in excess of charted speed restrictions
NOTEminus 1 RNAV approaches (containing RF legs) that commence at 10000 feet or above require special procedures that will be site specific and specified in a facility directive
2 An RF leg is defined as a curved segment indicating a constant radius circular path about a defined turn center that begins at a waypoint RF legs may have maximum airspeeds charted for procedural containment that must be followed
3 If an aircraft is vectored off the procedure expect the aircraft to request a return to an IAF
FIG 4minus8minus5
Radius to Fix (RF) and Track to Fix (TF)
NOTEminus 1 The segment between THIRD and FORTH in FIG 4minus8minus5 is an RF leg
2 The straight segments between waypoints in FIG 4minus8minus5 are TF legs
j Where a terminal arrival area (TAA) has been established to support RNAV approaches use the procedures under subpara b above (See FIG 4minus8minus6)
NOTEminus 1 Aircraft that are within the lateral boundary of a TAA and at or above the TAA minimum altitude are established on the approach and may be issued an approach clearance without an altitude restriction
Approach Clearance Procedures 4minus8minus5
JO 711065Y 81519
2 The TAA minimum altitude may be higher than the MVAMIA If an aircraft is below the TAA minimum altitude it must either be assigned an altitude to maintain until established on a segment of a published route or instrument approach procedure or climbed to the TAA altitude
EXAMPLEminus Aircraft 1 The aircraft is at or above the minimum TAA altitude and within the lateral boundary of the TAA ldquoCleared RminusNAV Runway One Eight Approachrdquo Aircraft 2 The MVA is 3000 feet and the aircraft is level at 4000 feet The TAA minimum altitude is 4200 feet The aircraft must be assigned an altitude to maintain until established on a segment of the approach ldquoCross RIGHT at or above three thousand cleared RminusNAV Runway One Eight Approachrdquo Aircraft 3 The aircraft is inbound to the CHARR IAF on an unpublished direct route at 7000 feet The minimum IFR altitude for IFR operations (14 CFR Section 91177) along this flight path to the IAF is 5000 feet ldquoCleared direct CHARR maintain at or above five thousand until entering the TAA cleared RNAV Runway OneminusEight Approachrdquo
FIG 4minus8minus6
Basic ldquoTrdquo and TAA Design
k When GPS TESTING NOTAMs are published and testing is actually occurring inform pilots requesting or cleared for a RNAV approach that GPS may not be available and request intentions Do not resume RNAV approach operations until certain that GPS interference is no longer a factor or such GPS testing exercise has ceased
l During times when pilots report GPS anomalies request the pilotrsquos intentions andor clear that aircraft
for an alternative approach if available and operational Announce to other aircraft requesting an RNAV approach that GPS is reported unavailable and request intentions REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus10 NAVAID Malfunctions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus12 Airport Conditions
m When clearing an aircraft for an RNAV approach and a GPS NOTAM is published (a WAAS NOTAM is not issued) both GPS and WAAS may become unavailable Therefore when a GPS anomaly is reported request the pilotrsquos intentions
NOTEminus WAAS UNAVAILABLE NOTAMs are published to indicate a failure of a WAAS system component Airborne GPSWAAS equipment may revert to GPSminusonly operation which satisfies the requirements for basic RNAV (GPS) approaches to the airport of intended landing or filed alternate airport if airborne equipment is approved for such operations
4minus8minus2 CLEARANCE LIMIT
Issue approach or other clearances as required specifying the destination airport as the clearance limit if airport traffic control service is not provided even though this is a repetition of the initial clearance
PHRASEOLOGYminus CLEARED TO (destination) AIRPORT
4minus8minus3 RELAYED APPROACH CLEARANCE
TERMINAL
Include the weather report when it is required and available when an approach clearance is relayed through a communication station other than an air carrier company radio You may do this by telling the station to issue current weather
4minus8minus4 ALTITUDE ASSIGNMENT FOR MILITARY HIGH ALTITUDE INSTRUMENT APPROACHES
Altitudes above those shown on the high altitude instrument approach procedures chart may be specified when required for separation
NOTEminus To preclude the possibility of aircraft exceeding rate-of-descent or airspeed limitations the maximum altitudes which may be assigned for any portion of the high altitude instrument approach procedure will be determined through coordination between the ATC facility concerned
4minus8minus6 Approach Clearance Procedures
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
and the military authority which originated the high altitude instrument approach procedure
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus7minus5 Military Turbojet En Route Descent
4minus8minus5 SPECIFYING ALTITUDE
Specify in the approach clearance the altitude shown in the approach procedures when adherence to that altitude is required for separation When vertical separation will be provided from other aircraft by pilot adherence to the prescribed maximum minimum or mandatory altitudes the controller may omit specifying the altitude in the approach clearance
NOTEminus Use FAA or NGA instrument approach procedures charts appropriate for the aircraft executing the approach
4minus8minus6 CIRCLING APPROACH
a Circling approach instructions may only be given for aircraft landing at airports with operational control towers
b Include in the approach clearance instructions to circle to the runway in use if landing will be made on a runway other than that aligned with the direction of instrument approach When the direction of the circling maneuver in relation to the airportrunway is required state the direction (eight cardinal compass points) and specify a left or right basedownwind leg as appropriate
PHRASEOLOGYminus CIRCLE TO RUNWAY (number)
or
CIRCLE (direction using eight cardinal compass points) OF THE AIRPORTRUNWAY FOR A LEFTRIGHT BASEDOWNWIND TO RUNWAY (number)
NOTEminus Where standard instrument approach procedures (SIAPs) authorize circling approaches they provide a basic minimum of 300 feet of obstacle clearance at the MDA within the circling area considered The dimensions of these areas expressed in distances from the runways vary for the different approach categories of aircraft In some cases a SIAP may otherwise restrict circling approach maneuvers
c Do not issue clearances such as ldquoextend downwind legrdquo which might cause an aircraft to
exceed the circling approach area distance from the runways within which required circling approach obstacle clearance is assured
4minus8minus7 SIDEminusSTEP MANEUVER
TERMINAL
Side-step Maneuver When authorized by an instru-ment approach procedure you may clear an aircraft for an approach to one runway and inform the aircraft that landing will be made on a parallel runway
EXAMPLEminus ldquoCleared IminusLminusS Runway seven left approach Side-step to runway seven rightrdquo
NOTEminus Side-step maneuvers require higher weather minima MDA These higher minimaMDA are published on the instrument approach charts
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus3minus2 ClosedUnsafe Runway Information PCG Termminus Sideminusstep Maneuver
4minus8minus8 COMMUNICATIONS RELEASE
If an IFR aircraft intends to land at an airport not served by a tower or FSS approve a change to the advisory service frequency when you no longer require direct communications
PHRASEOLOGYminus CHANGE TO ADVISORY FREQUENCY APPROVED
NOTEminus An expeditious frequency change permits the aircraft to receive timely local airport traffic information in accordance with AC 90minus66 NonminusTowered Airport Flight Operations
4minus8minus9 MISSED APPROACH
Except in the case of a VFR aircraft practicing an instrument approach an approach clearance automat-ically authorizes the aircraft to execute the missed approach procedure depicted for the instrument approach being flown An alternate missed approach procedure as published on the appropriate FAA Form 8260 or appropriate military form may be assigned when necessary Once an aircraft com-mences a missed approach it may be radar vectored
Approach Clearance Procedures 4minus8minus7
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
NOTEminus 1 Alternate missed approach procedures are published on the appropriate FAA Form 8260 or appropriate military form and require a detailed clearance when they are issued to the pilot
2 In the event of a missed approach involving a turn unless otherwise cleared the pilot will proceed to the missed approach point before starting that turn
3 Pilots must advise ATC when intending to apply cold temperature compensation and of the amount of compensation required Pilots will not apply altitude compensation unless authorized when assigned an altitude if provided an initial heading to fly or radar vectors in lieu of published missed approach procedures Consideration should be given to vectoring aircraft at or above the requested compensating altitude if possible
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus8minus11 Practice Approaches FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus6minus3 Vectors Below Minimum Altitude FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus8minus3 Successive or Simultaneous Departures FAA Order 826019 Flight Procedures and Airspace Para 8minus6minus6 FAA Order 82603 United States Standard for Terminal Instrument Procedures (TERPS) Para 2minus8minus1 and Chapter 16 AIM Paragraph 5-5-5 Missed Approach
4minus8minus10 APPROACH INFORMATION
Specify the following in the approach clearance when the pilot says heshe is unfamiliar with the procedure
a Initial approach altitude
b Direction and distance from the holding fix within which procedure turn is to be completed
c Altitude at which the procedure turn is to be made
d Final approach course and altitude
e Missed approach procedures if considered necessary
PHRASEOLOGYminus INITIAL APPROACH AT (altitude) PROCEDURE TURN AT (altitude) (number) MINUTESMILES (direction) FINAL APPROACH ON (name of NAVAID) (specified) COURSERADIALAZIMUTH AT (altitude)
f Applicable notations on instrument approach charts which levy on the pilot the responsibility to comply with or act on an instruction for example ldquoStraight-in minima not authorized at nightrdquo ldquoProcedure not authorized when glideslopeglidepath not usedrdquo ldquoUse of procedure limited to aircraft authorized to use airportrdquo ldquoProcedure not authorized
at nightrdquo or a Snowflake icon indicating mandatory cold temperature compensation REFERENCEminus AIM Paragraph 5-1-17 Cold Temperature Operations AIM Paragraph 5-5-4 Instrument Approach AIM Paragraph 5-5-5 Missed Approach
4minus8minus11 PRACTICE APPROACHES
Except for military aircraft operating at military airfields ensure that neither VFR nor IFR practice approaches disrupt the flow of other arriving and departing IFR or VFR aircraft Authorize withdraw authorization or refuse to authorize practice approaches as traffic conditions require Normally approaches in progress should not be terminated
NOTEminus The priority afforded other aircraft over practice instrument approaches is not intended to be so rigidly applied that it causes grossly inefficient application of services
a Separation
1 IFR aircraft practicing instrument ap-proaches must be afforded approved separation in accordance with Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 and Chapter 7 minima until
(a) The aircraft lands and the flight is terminated or
(b) The pilot cancels the flight plan
2 Where procedures require application of IFR separation to VFR aircraft practicing instrument approaches IFR separation in accordance with Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 and Chapter 7 must be provided Controller responsibil-ity for separation begins at the point where the approach clearance becomes effective Except for super or heavy aircraft 500 feet vertical separation may be applied between VFR aircraft and between a VFR and an IFR aircraft REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 6minus4minus4 Practice Instrument Approaches FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus4minus5 Practice Instrument Approaches
3 Where separation services are not provided to VFR aircraft practicing instrument approaches the controller must
(a) Instruct the pilot to maintain VFR
(b) Advise the pilot that separation services are not provided
PHRASEOLOGYminus ldquo(Aircraft identification) MAINTAIN VFR PRACTICE
4minus8minus8 Approach Clearance Procedures
81519 JO 711065Y
APPROACH APPROVED NO SEPARATION SERVICES PROVIDEDrdquo
(c) Provide traffic information or advise the pilot to contact the appropriate facility
4 If an altitude is assigned including at or abovebelow altitudes the altitude specified must meet MVA minimum safe altitude or minimum IFR altitude criteria REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus7minus5 Altitude Assignments
5 All VFR aircraft must be instructed to maintain VFR on initial contact or as soon as possible thereafter
NOTEminus This advisory is intended to remind the pilot that even though ATC is providing IFR-type instructions the pilot is responsible for compliance with the applicable parts of the CFR governing VFR flight
b Missed Approaches
1 Unless alternate instructions have been issued IFR aircraft are automatically authorized to execute the missed approach depicted for the instrument approach being flown REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus8minus9 Missed Approach
2 VFR aircraft are not automatically authorized to execute the missed approach procedure This authorization must be specifically requested by the pilot and approved by the controller When a missed approach has been approved and the practice approach is conducted in accordance with paragraph
4minus8minus11 a2 separation must be provided throughout the procedure including the missed approach If the practice approach is conducted in accordance with paragraph 4minus8minus11 a3 separation services are not required during the missed approach
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus2minus1 Visual Separation
4minus8minus12 LOW APPROACH AND TOUCH-AND-GO
Consider an aircraft cleared for a touch-and-go low approach or practice approach as an arriving aircraft until that aircraft touches down or crosses the landing threshold thereafter consider the aircraft as a departing aircraft Before the aircraft begins its final descent issue the appropriate departure instructions the pilot is to follow upon completion of the approach (in accordance with Para 4minus3minus2 Departure Clearances) Climb-out instructions must include a specific heading or a route of flight and altitude except when the aircraft will maintain VFR and contact the tower
EXAMPLEminus ldquoAfter completing low approach climb and maintain six thousand Turn right heading three six zerordquo
ldquoMaintain VFR contact towerrdquo
(Issue other instructions as appropriate)
NOTEminus Climb-out instructions may be omitted after the first approach if instructions remain the same
Approach Clearance Procedures 4minus8minus9
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
Chapter 5 Radar
Section 1 General
5minus1minus1 PRESENTATION AND EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE
Provide radar service only if you are personally satisfied that the radar presentation and equipment performance is adequate for the service being provided
NOTEminus The provision of radar service is not limited to the distance and altitude parameters obtained during the commission-ing flight check FAA Order 82001 United States Standard Flight Inspection Manual Chapter 14 Surveillance describes the surveillance flight inspection procedures
5minus1minus2 ALIGNMENT ACCURACY CHECK
TERMINAL
a At locations not equipped with Digital Terminal Automation Systems (DTAS) during relief briefing or as soon as possible after assuming responsibility for a control position check the operating equipment for alignment accuracy and display acceptability Recheck periodically throughout the watch
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Chapter 3 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 and Chapter 11 Comparable Military Directives
1 Check the alignment of the radar video display by assuring that the videodigital map or overlay is properly aligned with a permanent target of known range and azimuth on the radar display Where possible check one permanent target per quadrant
2 Accuracy of the radar video display must be verified for digitized radar systems by using the moving target indicator (MTI) reflectors fixed location beacon transponders (Parrots) beacon realminustime quality control (RTQC) symbols or calibration performance monitor equipment (CPME) beacon targets
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 3minus7minus1 Tolerance for Radar Fix Accuracy
3 Digital Terminal Automation Systems (DTAS) conduct continuous selfminusmonitoring of
alignment accuracy therefore controller alignment checks are not required
5minus1minus3 ATC SURVEILLANCE SOURCE USE
Use approved ATC Surveillance Sources REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus1minus4 Beacon Range Accuracy FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus16 Inoperative or Malfunctioning Interrogator
a Secondary radar may be used as the sole display source as follows
1 In Class A airspace REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus17 Failed Transponder in Class A Airspace 14 CFR Section 91135 Operations in Class A Airspace
2 Outside Class A airspace or where mix of Class A airspacenonminusClass A airspace exists only when
(a) Additional coverage is provided by secondary radar beyond that of the primary radar or
(b) The primary radar is temporarily unusable or out of service Advise pilots when these conditions exist or
PHRASEOLOGYminus PRIMARY RADAR UNAVAILABLE (describe location) RADAR SERVICES AVAILABLE ON TRANSPONDER OR ADSminusB EQUIPPED AIRCRAFT ONLY
NOTEminus 1 Advisory may be omitted when provided on ATIS and pilot indicates having ATIS information
2 This provision is to authorize secondary radar only operations where there is no primary radar available and the condition is temporary
(c) A secondary radar system is the only source of radar data for the area of service When the system is used for separation beacon range accuracy is assured as provided in Paragraph 5minus1minus4 Beacon Range Accuracy TERMINAL Advise pilots when these conditions exist
NOTEminus Advisory may be omitted when provided on ATIS or by other appropriate notice to pilots
General 5minus1minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
b TERMINAL Do not use secondary radar only to conduct surveillance (ASR) final approaches unless an emergency exists and the pilot concurs
c All procedures and requirements relating to ATC services using secondary radar targets apply to ATC services provided to targets derived from ADS-B and WAM
NOTEminus Targets derived from WAM cannot be used to provide 3 NM separation in the EAS 3 NM targets are not derived from WAM within the EAS
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para4minus1minus2 Exceptions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus4minus2 Route Structure Transitions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus1 Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 6minus5minus4 Minima Along Other Than Established Airways or Routes FAA Order JO 711065 Chapter 6 Nonradar FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus4 Minima FAA Order JO 72103 Para 3minus6minus2 ATC Surveillance Source Use
5minus1minus4 BEACON RANGE ACCURACY
a You may use beacon targets for separation purposes if beacon range accuracy is verified by one of the following methods
NOTEminus 1 The check for verification of beacon range accuracy accomplished by correlation of beacon and primary radar targets of the same aircraft is not a check of display accuracy Therefore it is not necessary that it be done using the same display with which separation is being provided nor the same targets being separated
2 Narrowband and Full Digital Automation Systems Technical operations personnel verify beacon range accuracy for automated narrowband display equipment and Full Digital Terminal Automation Systems Con-sequently further verification by the controller is unnecessary
1 Correlate beacon and primary targets of the same aircraft (not necessarily the one being provided separation) to assure that they coincide
2 When beacon and primary targets of the same aircraft do not coincide correlate them to assure that any beacon displacement agrees with the specified distance and direction for that particular radar system
3 Refer to beacon range monitoring equipment where so installed
b If beacon range accuracy cannot be verified you may use beacon targets only for traffic information REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus1minus3 ATC Surveillance Source Use
5minus1minus5 ELECTRONIC ATTACK (EA) ACTIVI-TY
a Refer all EA activity requests to the appropriate center supervisor REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 76104 Chapter 2 Section 7 Electronic Attack (EA) and Testing Coordination
NOTEminus EA activity can subsequently result in a request to apply EA videos to the radar system which may necessitate the decertification of the narrowband search radar The Systems Engineer should be consulted concerning the effect of EA on the operational use of the narrowband radar prior to approvingdisapproving requests to conduct EA activity
b When EA activity interferes with the opera-tional use of radar
1 EN ROUTE Request the responsible mili-tary unit or aircraft if initial request was received directly from pilot to suspend the activity
2 TERMINAL Request suspension of the activity through the ARTCC If immediate cessation of the activity is required broadcast the request directly to the EA aircraft on the emergency frequency Notify the ARTCC of direct broadcast as soon as possible
c When previously suspended activity will no longer interfere
1 EN ROUTE Inform the NORAD unit or aircraft that it may be resumed
2 TERMINAL Inform the ARTCC or aircraft that it may be resumed Obtain approval from the ARTCC prior to broadcasting a resume clearance directly to the aircraft
d In each stop request include your facility name type of EA activity (chaff dispensingminus ldquostreamrdquoldquoburstrdquo or electronic jammingminus ldquobuzzerrdquo) radar band affected and when feasible expected duration of suspension
PHRASEOLOGYminus BIG PHOTO (identification if known) (name) CENTERTOWERAPPROACH CONTROL
General 5minus1minus2
81519 JO 711065Y
To stop EA activity
STOP STREAMBURST IN AREA (area name) (degree and distance from facility)
or
STOP BUZZER ON (frequency band or channel)
To resume EA activity
RESUME STREAMBURST
or
RESUME BUZZER ON (frequency band or channel)
5minus1minus6 SERVICE LIMITATIONS
a When radar mapping is not available limit radar services to
1 Separating identified aircraft targets
2 Vectoring aircraft to intercept a PAR final approach course
3 Providing radar service in areas that ensure no confliction with traffic on airways other ATC areas of jurisdiction restricted or prohibited areas terrain etc
b EN ROUTE When the position symbol associated with the data block falls more than one history behind the actual aircraft target or there is no target symbol displayed the Mode C information in the data block must not be used for the purpose of determining separation
c Report radar malfunctions immediately for corrective action and for dispatch of a Notice to Airmen Advise adjacent ATC facilities when appropriate
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus9 Reporting Essential Flight Information FAA Order JO 72103 Chapter 3 Chapter 7 Chapter 10 Section 5 and Chapter 11 Section 2
5minus1minus7 ELECTRONIC CURSOR
TERMINAL
a An electronic cursor may be used to aid in identifying and vectoring an aircraft and to give finer delineation to a video map Do not use it as a
substitute for a video map or map overlay eg to form intersections airway boundaries final approach courses etc
b Fixed electronic cursors may be used to form the final approach course for surveillance approaches conducted by military operated mobile radar facilities
5minus1minus8 MERGING TARGET PROCEDURES
a Except while they are established in a holding pattern apply merging target procedures to all radar identified
1 Aircraft at 10000 feet and above
2 Turbojet aircraft regardless of altitude REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Turbojet Aircraft
3 Presidential aircraft regardless of altitude
b Issue traffic information to those aircraft listed in subpara a whose targets appear likely to merge unless the aircraft are separated by more than the appropriate vertical separation minima
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTraffic twelve orsquoclock seven miles eastbound MDminus80 at one seven thousandrdquo
ldquoUnited Sixteen and American Twenty-five traffic twelve orsquoclock one zero miles opposite direction eastbound seven twenty seven at flight level three three zero westbound MDminusEighty at flight level three one zerordquo
c When both aircraft in subpara b are in RVSM airspace and vertically separated by 1000 feet if either pilot reports they are unable to maintain RVSM due to turbulence or mountain wave vector either aircraft to avoid merging with the target of the other aircraft
EXAMPLEminus ldquoDelta One Twenty Three fly heading two niner zero vector for traffic Traffic twelve orsquoclock one zero miles opposite direction MDminus80 eastbound at flight level three two zerordquo
d If the pilot requests vector hisher aircraft to avoid merging with the target of previously issued traffic
NOTEminus Aircraft closure rates are so rapid that when applying merging target procedures controller issuance of traffic must be commenced in ample time for the pilot to decide if a vector is necessary
General 5minus1minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
e If unable to provide vector service inform the pilot
NOTEminus The phraseology ldquoUnable RVSM due turbulence (or mountain wave)rdquo is only intended for severe turbulence or other weather encounters with altitude deviations of approximately 200 feet or more
5minus1minus9 HOLDING PATTERN SURVEIL-LANCE
Provide radar surveillance of outer fix holding pattern airspace areas or any portions thereof shown on your radar scope (displayed on the video map or scribed on the map overlay) whenever aircraft are holding there Attempt to detect any aircraft that stray outside the area If you detect an aircraft straying outside the area assist it to return to the assigned airspace
5minus1minus10 DEVIATION ADVISORIES
Inform an aircraft when it is observed in a position and on a track which will obviously cause the aircraft to deviate from its protected airspace area If necessary help the aircraft to return to the assigned protected airspace
NOTEminus 1 RNAV ATS routes have a width of 8 miles and laterally protected airspace of 4 miles on each side of the route centerline
2 Navigation system performance requirements for operations on RNAV ATS routes require the aircraft system be capable of remaining within 2 miles of the route centerline Aircraft approaching this limit may be experiencing a navigation system error or failure
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus5 Route or Altitude Amendments FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus9minus3 Methods FAA Order JO 74002 Para 20-5-2 RNAV Route Criteria AC90-100A US Terminal and En Route Area Navigation (RNAV) Operations Para 8a Navigation System Accuracy
5minus1minus11 RADAR FIX POSTING
EN ROUTE
A controller is required to manually record at least once the observed or reported time over a fix for each controlled aircraft in their sector of responsibility only when the flight progress recording components of the EAS FDP are not operational
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 6minus1minus6 Flight Progress Strip Usage FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus1minus8 Flight Progress Strip Usage
5minus1minus12 POSITION REPORTING
If necessary you may request an aircraft to provide an estimate or report over a specific fix After an aircraft receives the statement ldquoradar contactrdquo from ATC it discontinues reporting over compulsory reporting points It resumes normal position reporting when ATC informs it ldquoradar contact lostrdquo or ldquoradar service terminatedrdquo REFERENCEminus PCG Termminus Radar Contact
a When required inform an aircraft of its position with respect to a fix or airway
PHRASEOLOGYminus OVERPASSING (fix)
(Number of miles) MILES FROM (fix)
(Number of miles) MILES (direction) OF (fix airway or location)
CROSSINGJOININGDEPARTING (airway or route)
INTERCEPTINGCROSSING (name of NAVAID) (specified) RADIAL
5minus1minus13 RADAR SERVICE TERMINATION
a Inform aircraft when radar service is terminat-ed
PHRASEOLOGYminus RADAR SERVICE TERMINATED (nonradar routing if required)
b Radar service is automatically terminated and the aircraft needs not be advised of termination when
NOTEminus 1 Termination of radar monitoring when conducting simultaneous ILS approaches is prescribed in Para 5minus9minus7 Simultaneous Independent Approachesminus Dual amp Triple
2 Termination of radar monitoring where PAR equipment is used to monitor approaches is prescribed in Para 5minus13minus3 Monitor Information
1 An aircraft cancels its IFR flight plan except within Class B airspace Class C airspace TRSA or where basic radar service is provided
2 An aircraft conducting an instrument visual or contact approach has landed or has been instructed to change to advisory frequency
General 5minus1minus4
81519 JO 711065Y
3 At tower-controlled airports where radar coverage does not exist to within 12 mile of the end of the runway arriving aircraft must be informed when radar service is terminated REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus5minus6 Radar Tolerances
4 TERMINAL An arriving VFR aircraft re-ceiving radar service to a tower-controlled airport within Class B airspace Class C airspace TRSA or where basic radar service is provided has landed or to all other airports is instructed to change to tower or advisory frequency
5 TERMINAL An aircraft completes a radar approach REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus6minus12 Service Provided When Tower is Inoperative
General 5minus1minus5
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
Section 2 BeaconADSminusB Systems
5minus2minus1 ASSIGNMENT CRITERIA
a General
1 Mode 3A is designated as the common militarycivil mode for air traffic control use
2 Make beacon code assignments to only ADSminusB andor transponderminusequipped aircraft
NOTEminus Aircraft equipped with ADSminusB are also still required to have an operable transponder The ATCminusassigned code is one of the required message elements of ADSminusB Out
b Unless otherwise specified in a directive or a letter of agreement make code assignments to departing en route and arriving aircraft in accordance with the procedures specified in this section for the code environment in which you are providing ATC service Give first preference to the use of discrete codes
PHRASEOLOGYminus SQUAWK THREEALFA (code)
or
SQUAWK (code)
NOTEminus A code environment is determined by an operating positionrsquossectorrsquos equipment capability to decode radar beacon targets using either the first and second or all four digits of a beacon code
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus2 DISCRETE ENVIRONMENT
a Issue discrete beacon codes assigned by the computer Computer-assigned codes may be modi-fied as required
1 TERMINAL Aircraft that will remain within the terminal facilityrsquos delegated airspace must be assigned a code from the code subset allocated to the terminal facility
2 TERMINAL Unless otherwise specified in a facility directive or a letter of agreement aircraft that will enter an adjacent STARS facilityrsquos delegated airspace must be assigned a beacon code assigned by the ARTCC computer
NOTEminus 1 This will provide the adjacent facility advance information on the aircraft and will cause auto-acquisition of the aircraft prior to handoff
2 When an IFR aircraft or a VFR aircraft that has been assigned a beacon code by the ARTCC computer and whose flight plan will terminate in another facilityrsquos area cancels ATC service or does not activate the flight plan ensure that appropriate action is taken to remove strips (RS message) on that aircraft
b Make handoffs to other positionssectors on the computer-assigned code
c Coastal facilities accepting ldquooverrdquo traffic that will subsequently be handed-off to an oceanic ARTCC must reassign a new discrete beacon code to an aircraft when it first enters the receiving facilityrsquos airspace The code reassignment must be accom-plished by inputting an appropriate message into the computer and issued to the pilot while operating in the first sectorposition in the receiving facilityrsquos airspace
NOTEminus Per an agreement between FAA and the Department of Defense 17 Code subsets in the NBCAP have been reserved for exclusive military use outside NBCAP airspace To maximize the use of these subsets they have been allocated to ARTCCrsquos underlying NBCAP airspace that do not abut an oceanic ARTCCrsquos area To preclude a potential situation where two aircraft might be in the same airspace at the same time on the same discrete code it is necessary to reassign an aircraft another code as specified in subpara c REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus4 Mixed Environment FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus10 VFR Code Assignments FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus3 NONDISCRETE ENVIRONMENT
a Assign appropriate nondiscrete beacon codes from the function codes specified in Paragraph 5minus2minus6 Function Code Assignments
b Unless otherwise coordinated at the time of handoff make handoffs to other positionssectors on an appropriate nondiscrete function code REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus4 Mixed Environment FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus10 VFR Code Assignments FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
BeaconADSminusB Systems 5minus2minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
5minus2minus4 MIXED ENVIRONMENT
a When discrete beacon code capability does not exist in your area of responsibility comply with the procedures specified in Paragraph 5minus2minus3 Nondis-crete Environment
NOTEminus In a mixed code environment a situation may exist where a discrete-equipped positionsector exchanges control of aircraft with nondiscrete-equipped facilities or vice versa
b When discrete beacon code capability exists in your area of responsibility
1 Comply with the procedures specified in Paragraph 5minus2minus2 Discrete Environment and
2 Unless otherwise coordinated at the time of handoff assign aircraft that will enter the area of responsibility of a nondiscrete-equipped position sector an appropriate nondiscrete function code from the codes specified in Paragraph 5minus2minus6 Function Code Assignments prior to initiating a handoff
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus8 IFR-VFR and VFR-IFR Flights FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus10 VFR Code Assignments FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus5 RADAR BEACON CODE CHANGES
Unless otherwise specified in a directive or a letter of agreement or coordinated at the time of handoff do not request an aircraft to change from the code it was squawking in the transferring facilityrsquos area until the aircraft is within your area of responsibility
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus8 IFR-VFR and VFR-IFR Flights FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus6 FUNCTION CODE ASSIGNMENTS
Unless otherwise specified by a directive or a letter of agreement make nondiscrete code assignments from the following categories
a Assign codes to departing IFR aircraft as follows
1 Code 2000 to an aircraft which will climb to FL 240 or above or to an aircraft which will climb to FL 180 or above where the base of Class A airspace and the base of the operating sector are at FL 180 and for interfacility handoff the receiving sector is also stratified at FL 180 The en route code must not be
assigned until the aircraft is established in the high altitude sector
2 Code 1100 to an aircraft which will remain below FL 240 or below FL 180 as above
3 For handoffs from terminal facilities when so specified in a letter of agreement as follows
(a) Within NBCAP airspaceminus Code 0100 to Code 0400 inclusive or any other code authorized by the appropriate service area office
(b) Outside NBCAP airspaceminus Code 1000 or one of the codes from 0100 to 0700 inclusive or any other code authorized by the appropriate service area office
b Assign codes to en route IFR aircraft as follows
NOTEminus 1 FL 180 may be used in lieu of FL 240 where the base of Class A airspace and the base of the operating sector are at FL 180 and for interfacility handoff the receiving sector is also stratified at FL 180
2 The provisions of subparas b2(b) and (c) may be modified by facility directive or letter of agreement when operational complexities or simplified sectorization indicate Letters of agreement are mandatory when the operating sectors of two facilities are not stratified at identical levels The general concept of utilizing Codes 2100 through 2500 within Class A airspace should be adhered to
1 Aircraft operating below FL 240 or when control is transferred to a controller whose area includes the stratum involved
(a) Code 1000 may be assigned to aircraft changing altitudes
(b) Code 1100 to an aircraft operating at an assigned altitude below FL 240 Should an additional code be operationally desirable Code 1300 must be assigned
2 Aircraft operating at or above FL 240 or when control is transferred to a controller whose area includes the stratum involved
(a) Code 2300 may be assigned to aircraft changing altitudes
(b) Code 2100 to an aircraft operating at an assigned altitude from FL 240 to FL 330 inclusive Should an additional code be operationally desirable Code 2200 must be assigned
(c) Code 2400 to an aircraft operating at an assigned altitude from FL 350 to FL 600 inclusive
5minus2minus2 BeaconADSminusB Systems
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
Should an additional code be operationally desirable Code 2500 must be assigned
3 Code 4000 when aircraft are operating on a flight plan specifying frequent or rapid changes in assigned altitude in more than one stratum or other conditions of flight not compatible with a stratified code assignment
NOTEminus 1 Categories of flight that can be assigned Code 4000 include certain flight test aircraft MTR missions aerial refueling operation requiring descent involving more than one stratum ALTRVs where continuous monitoring of ATC communications facilities is not required and frequent altitude changes are approved and other aircraft operating on flight plans requiring special handling by ATC
2 Military aircraft operating VFR or IFR in restricted warning areas or VFR on VR routes will adjust their transponders to reply on Code 4000 unless another code has been assigned by ATC or coordinated if possible with ATC
c Assign the following codes to arriving IFR aircraft except military turbojet aircraft as specified in Paragraph 4minus7minus4 Radio Frequency and Radar Beacon Changes for Military Aircraft
NOTEminus FL 180 may be used in lieu of FL 240 where the base of Class A airspace and the base of the operating sector are at FL 180 and for interfacility handoff the receiving sector is also stratified at FL 180
1 Code 2300 may be assigned for descents while above FL 240
2 Code 1500 may be assigned for descents into and while within the strata below FL 240 or with prior coordination the specific code utilized by the destination controller or the code currently assigned when descent clearance is issued
3 The applicable en route code for the holding altitude if holding is necessary before entering the terminal area and the appropriate code in subparas 1 or 2
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus2minus8 IFR-VFR and VFR-IFR Flights FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus3 Nondiscrete Environment FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus4 Mixed Environment FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus10 VFR Code Assignments FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus7 EMERGENCY CODE ASSIGNMENT
Assign codes to emergency aircraft as follows
a Code 7700 when the pilot declares an emergency and the aircraft is not radar identified
PHRASEOLOGYminus SQUAWK MAYDAY ON 7700
b After radio and radar contact have been established you may request other than single-piloted helicopters and single-piloted turbojet aircraft to change from Code 7700 to another code appropriate for your radar beacon code environment
NOTEminus 1 The code change based on pilot concurrence the nature of the emergency and current flight conditions will signify to other radar facilities that the aircraft in distress is identified and under ATC control
2 Pilots of single-piloted helicopters and single-piloted turbojet aircraft may be unable to reposition transponder controls during the emergency
PHRASEOLOGYminus RADAR CONTACT (position) IF FEASIBLE SQUAWK (code)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
c The following must be accomplished on a Mode C equipped VFR aircraft which is in emergency but no longer requires the assignment of Code 7700
1 TERMINAL Assign a beacon code that will permit terminal minimum safe altitude warning (MSAW) alarm processing
2 EN ROUTE An appropriate keyboard entry must be made to ensure en route MSAW (EMSAW) alarm processing
5minus2minus8 RADIO FAILURE
When you observe a Code 7600 display apply the procedures in Paragraph 10minus4minus4 Communications Failure
NOTEminus Should a transponder-equipped aircraft experience a loss of two-way radio communications capability the pilot can be expected to adjust hisher transponder to Code 7600
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
BeaconADSminusB Systems 5minus2minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
5minus2minus9 UNMANNED AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS (UAS) LOST LINK
Code 7400 may be displayed by unmanned aircraft systems (UAS) when the control link between the aircraft and the pilot is lost Lost link procedures are programmed into the flight management system and associated with the flight plan being flown
When you observe a Code 7400 display do the following
a Determine the lost link procedure as outlined in the Special Airworthiness Certificate or Certificate of Waiver or Authorization (COA)
b Coordinate as required to allow UAS to execute the lost link procedure
c Advise the OSCIC when feasible so the event can be documented
d If you observe or are informed by the PIC that the UAS is deviating from the programmed Lost Link procedure or is encountering another anomaly treat the situation in accordance with FAA Order JO 711065 Chapter 10 Section 1 Paragraph 10minus1minus1c
NOTEminus 1 The available lost link procedure should at a minimum include lost link route of flight lost link orbit points lost link altitudes communications procedures and preplanned flight termination points if the event recovery of the UAS is deemed unfeasible
2 Each lost link procedure may differ and is dependent upon airframe and operation These items are contained in the flightrsquos Certificate of Authorization or Waiver (COA) and must be made available to ATC personnel in their simplest form at positions responsible for Unmanned Aircraft (UAs)
3 Some UA airframes (Global Hawk) will not be programmed upon the NAS Automation roll out to squawk 7400 These airframes will continue to squawk 7600 should a lost link occur The ATC Specialist must apply the same procedures described above
5minus2minus10 VFR CODE ASSIGNMENTS
a For VFR aircraft receiving radar advisories assign an appropriate function code or computer-assigned code for the code environment in which you are providing service
NOTEminus 1 Paragraph 5minus2minus2 Discrete Environment Paragraph 5minus2minus3 Nondiscrete Environment and Paragraph 5minus2minus4 Mixed Environment specify code assignment procedures to follow for the three code environments
2 Paragraph 5minus2minus6 Function Code Assignments specifies the function code allocation from which an appropriate code for the aircraft indicated in subpara a should be selected In the terminal environment additional function codes may be authorized by the appropriate service area office
1 If the aircraft is outside of your area of responsibility and an operational benefit will be gained by retaining the aircraft on your frequency for the purpose of providing services ensure that coordination has been effected
(a) As soon as possible after positive identification and
(b) Prior to issuing a control instruction or providing a service other than a safety alerttraffic advisory
NOTEminus Safety alertstraffic advisories may be issued to an aircraft prior to coordination if an imminent situation may be averted by such action Coordination should be effected as soon as possible thereafter
b Instruct IFR aircraft which cancel an IFR flight plan and are not requesting radar advisory service and VFR aircraft for which radar advisory service is being terminated to squawk the VFR code
PHRASEOLOGYminus SQUAWK VFR
or
SQUAWK 1200
NOTEminus 1 Aircraft not in contact with an ATC facility may squawk 1255 in lieu of 1200 while en route tofrom or within the designated firefighting area(s)
2 VFR aircraft which fly authorized SAR missions for the USAF or USCG may be advised to squawk 1277 in lieu of 1200 while en route tofrom or within the designated search area
3 Gliders not in contact with an ATC facility should squawk 1202 in lieu of 1200 Gliders operate under some flight and maneuvering limitations They may go from essentially stationary targets while climbing and thermal-ing to moving targets very quickly They can be expected to make radical changes in flight direction to find lift and cannot hold altitude in a response to an ATC request
5minus2minus4 BeaconADSminusB Systems
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
Gliders may congregate together for short periods of time to climb together in thermals and may cruise together in loose formations while traveling between thermals
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711066 National Beacon Code Allocation Plan
c When an aircraft changes from VFR to IFR the controller must assign a beacon code to Mode C equipped aircraft that will allow MSAW alarms
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus11 BEACON CODE FOR PRESSURE SUIT FLIGHTS AND FLIGHTS ABOVE FL 600
a Mode 3A Code 4400 and discrete Codes 4440 through 4465 are reserved for use by Rminus71 Fminus12 Uminus2 Bminus57 pressure suit flights and aircraft operations above FL 600
NOTEminus The specific allocation of the special use codes in subset 4400 is in FAA Order JO 711066 National Beacon Code Allocation Plan (NBCAP)
b Ensure that aircraft remain on Code 4400 or one of the special use discrete codes in the 4400 subset if filed as part of the flight plan Except when unforeseen events such as weather deviations equipment failure etc cause more than one aircraft with same Mode 3A discrete beacon codes to be in the same or adjacent ARTCCrsquos airspace at the same time a controller may request the pilot to make a code change squawk standby or to stop squawk as appropriate
NOTEminus Due to the inaccessibility of certain equipment to the flight crews Code 4400 or a discrete code from the 4400 subset is preset on the ground and will be used throughout the flight profile including operations below FL 600 Controllers should be cognizant that not all aircraft may be able to accept the transponder changes identified in the exception Emergency Code 7700 however can be activated
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus12 AIR DEFENSE EXERCISE BEACON CODE ASSIGNMENT
EN ROUTE
Ensure exercise FAKER aircraft remain on the exercise flight plan filed discrete beacon code
NOTEminus 1 NORAD will ensure exercise FAKER aircraft flight plans are filed containing discrete beacon codes from the Department of Defense code allocation specified in FAA Order JO 76104 Special Operations Appendix 6
2 NORAD will ensure that those FAKER aircraft assigned the same discrete beacon code are not flight planned in the same or any adjacent ARTCCrsquos airspace at the same time (Simultaneous assignment of codes will only occur when operational requirements necessitate)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus13 STANDBY OPERATION
You may instruct an aircraft operating on an assigned code to change the transponderADSminusB to ldquostandbyrdquo position
a When approximately 15 miles from its destination and you no longer desire operation of the transponderADSminusB or
b When necessary to reduce clutter in a multiminustarget area provided you instruct the pilot to return the transponderADSminusB to ldquonormalrdquo position as soon as possible thereafter
PHRASEOLOGYminus SQUAWK STANDBY
or
SQUAWK NORMAL REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus14 CODE MONITOR
Continuously monitor the Mode 3A radar beacon codes assigned for use by aircraft operating within your area of responsibility when nonminusautomated beacon decoding equipment (eg 10minuschannel decoder) is used to display the target symbol REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus6 Function Code Assignments
NOTEminus In addition to alphanumeric and control symbology processing enhancements the MEARTS and STARS systems are equipped with automatic beacon decoders Therefore in facilities where the automatic beacon decoders are providing the control slash video there is no
BeaconADSminusB Systems 5minus2minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
requirement to have the nonminusautomated decoding equipment operating simultaneously
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 3minus6minus4 Monitoring of Mode 3A Radar Beacon Codes
a This includes the appropriate IFR code actually assigned and additionally Code 1200 Code 1202 Code 1255 and Code 1277 unless your area of responsibility includes only Class A airspace During periods when ring-around or excessive VFR target presentations derogate the separation of IFR traffic the monitoring of VFR Code 1200 Code 1202 Code 1255 and Code 1277 may be temporarily discontin-ued
b Positions of operation which contain or are immediately adjacent to a restricted area warning area VR route or other categories where Code 4000 can be assigned must monitor Code 4000 and any other code used in lieu of 4000 If by local coordination with the restrictedwarning area or VR route user a code other than 4000 is to be exclusively used then this code must be monitored
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus6 Function Code Assignments
c If a normally assigned beacon code disappears check for a response on the following codes in the order listed and take appropriate action
NOTEminus When Codes 7500 andor 7600 have been preselected it will be necessary for the IDminusSELminusOFF switches for these codes to be left in the off position so that beacon target for an aircraft changing to one of these codes will disappear thereby alerting the controller to make the check This check will not be required if automatic alerting capability exists
1 Code 7500 (hijack code)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 10minus2minus6 Hijacked Aircraft
2 Code 7600 (loss of radio communications code)
5minus2minus15 FAILURE TO DISPLAY ASSIGNED BEACON CODE OR INOPERATIVEMAL-FUNCTIONING TRANSPONDER
a Inform an aircraft with an operable transponder that the assigned beacon code is not being displayed
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Identification) RESET TRANSPONDER SQUAWK (appropriate code)
b Inform an aircraft when its transponder appears to be inoperative or malfunctioning
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Identification) YOUR TRANSPONDER APPEARS INOPERATIVEMALFUNCTIONING RESET SQUAWK (appropriate code)
c Ensure that the subsequent control position in the facility or the next facility as applicable is notified when an aircraft transponder is malfunction-inginoperative
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus16 INOPERATIVE OR MALFUNCTIONING INTERROGATOR
Inform aircraft concerned when the ground interro-gator appears to be inoperative or malfunctioning
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Name of facility or control function) BEACON INTERROGATOR INOPERATIVEMALFUNCTIONING
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus1minus3 ATC Surveillance Source Use FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus17 FAILED TRANSPONDER OR ADSminusB OUT TRANSMITTER
Disapprove a request or withdraw a previously issued approval to operate with a failed transponder or ADSminusB Out solely on the basis of traffic conditions or other operational factors
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus1minus3 ATC Surveillance Source Use FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus18 VALIDATION OF MODE C READOUT
Ensure that Mode C altitude readouts are valid after accepting an interfacility handoff initial track start track start from coastsuspend tabular list or during and after an unreliable Mode C readout except as follows
NOTEminus Consider a Mode C readout unreliable when any condition not just those that display an indicator in the Data Block exists that indicates that the Mode C may be in error
a CTRDminusequipped tower cabs are not required to validate Mode C altitude readouts after accepting
5minus2minus6 BeaconADSminusB Systems
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
interfacility handoffs from TRACONs according to the procedures in Paragraph 5minus4minus3 Methods subparagraph a4
b ERAM facilities are not required to validate Mode C altitude readouts after accepting interfacility handoffs from other ERAM facilities except
1 After initial track start or track start from coast is required or
2 During and after the display of a missing unreasonable exceptional or otherwise unreliable Mode C readout indicator
c Consider an altitude readout valid when
1 It varies less than 300 feet from the pilot reported altitude or
PHRASEOLOGYminus (If aircraft is known to be operating below the lowest useable flight level)
SAY ALTITUDE
or
(If aircraft is known to be operating at or above the lowest useable flight level)
SAY FLIGHT LEVEL
2 You receive a continuous readout from an aircraft on the airport and the readout varies by less than 300 feet from the field elevation or
NOTEminus A continuous readout exists only when the altitude filter limits are set to include the field elevation
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus24 Altitude Filters FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus14minus5 Selected Altitude Limits
3 You have correlated the altitude information in your data block with the validated information in a data block generated in another facility (by verbally coordinating with the other controller) and your readout is exactly the same as the readout in the other data block
d When unable to validate the readout do not use the Mode C altitude information for separation
e Whenever you observe an invalid Mode C readout below FL 180
1 Issue the correct altimeter setting and confirm the pilot has accurately reported the altitude
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Location) ALTIMETER (appropriate altimeter) VERIFY ALTITUDE
2 If the altitude readout continues to be invalid
(a) Instruct the pilot to turn off the altitude-reporting part of hisher transponder and include the reason and
(b) Notify the operations supervisor-in-charge of the aircraft call sign
PHRASEOLOGYminus STOP ALTITUDE SQUAWK ALTITUDE DIFFERS BY (number of feet) FEET
f Whenever you observe an invalid Mode C readout at or above FL 180 unless the aircraft is descending below Class A airspace
1 Verify that the pilot is using 2992 inches of mercury as the altimeter setting and has accurately reported the altitude
PHRASEOLOGYminus VERIFY USING TWO NINER NINER TWO AS YOUR ALTIMETER SETTING
(If aircraft is known to be operating at or above the lowest useable flight level)
VERIFY FLIGHT LEVEL
2 If the Mode C readout continues to be invalid
(a) Instruct the pilot to turn off the altitude-reporting part of hisher transponder and include the reason and
(b) Notify the operational supervisor-in-charge of the aircraft call sign
PHRASEOLOGYminus STOP ALTITUDE SQUAWK ALTITUDE DIFFERS BY (number of feet) FEET
g Whenever possible inhibit altitude readouts on all consoles when a malfunction of the ground equipment causes repeated invalid readouts
5minus2minus19 ALTITUDE CONFIRMATIONminus MODE C
Request a pilot to confirm assigned altitude on initial contact unless
NOTEminus For the purpose of this paragraph ldquoinitial contactrdquo means a pilotrsquos first radio contact with each sectorposition
a The pilot states the assigned altitude or
BeaconADSminusB Systems 5minus2minus7
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
b You assign a new altitude to a climbing or a descending aircraft or
c The Mode C readout is valid and indicates that the aircraft is established at the assigned altitude or
d TERMINAL The aircraft was transferred to you from another sectorposition within your facility (intrafacility)
PHRASEOLOGYminus (In level flight situations)VERIFY AT (altitudeflight level)
(In climbingdescending situations)
(if aircraft has been assigned an altitude below the lowest useable flight level)
VERIFY ASSIGNED ALTITUDE (altitude)
or
(If aircraft has been assigned a flight level at or above the lowest useable flight level)
VERIFY ASSIGNED FLIGHT LEVEL (flight level)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus20 ALTITUDE CONFIRMATIONminus NONminusMODE C
a Request a pilot to confirm assigned altitude on initial contact unless
NOTEminus For the purpose of this paragraph ldquoinitial contactrdquo means a pilotrsquos first radio contact with each sectorposition
1 The pilot states the assigned altitude or
2 You assign a new altitude to a climbing or a descending aircraft or
3 TERMINAL The aircraft was transferred to you from another sectorposition within your facility (intrafacility)
PHRASEOLOGYminus (In level flight situations)VERIFY AT (altitudeflight level)
(In climbingdescending situations)VERIFY ASSIGNED ALTITUDEFLIGHT LEVEL (altitudeflight level)
b USA Reconfirm all pilot altitude read backs
PHRASEOLOGYminus (If the altitude read back is correct)
AFFIRMATIVE (altitude)
(If the altitude read back is not correct)
NEGATIVE CLIMBDESCEND AND MAINTAIN (altitude)
or
NEGATIVE MAINTAIN (altitude)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus21 AUTOMATIC ALTITUDE REPORTING
Inform an aircraft when you want it to turn onoff the automatic altitude reporting feature of its transponder
PHRASEOLOGYminus SQUAWK ALTITUDE
or
STOP ALTITUDE SQUAWK
NOTEminus Controllers should be aware that not all aircraft have a capability to disengage the altitude squawk independently from the beacon code squawk On some aircraft both functions are controlled by the same switch
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus18 Validation of Mode C Readout FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods PCG Termminus Automatic Altitude Report
5minus2minus22 INFLIGHT DEVIATIONS FROM TRANSPONDERMODE C REQUIREMENTS BETWEEN 10000 FEET AND 18000 FEET
Apply the following procedures to requests to deviate from the Mode C transponder requirement by aircraft operating in the airspace of the 48 contiguous states and the District of Columbia at and above 10000 feet MSL and below 18000 feet MSL excluding the airspace at and below 2500 feet AGL
NOTEminus 1 14 CFR Section 91215(b) provides in part that all US registered civil aircraft must be equipped with an operable coded radar beacon transponder when operating in the altitude stratum listed above Such transponders must have
5minus2minus8 BeaconADSminusB Systems
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
a Mode 3A 4096 code capability replying to Mode 3A interrogation with the code specified by ATC or a Mode S capability replying to Mode 3A interrogations with the code specified by ATC The aircraft must also be equipped with automatic pressure altitude reporting equipment having a Mode C capability that automatically replies to Mode C interrogations by transmitting pressure altitude information in 100minusfoot increments
2 The exception to 14 CFR Section 91215 (b) is 14 CFR Section 91215(b)(5) which states except balloons gliders and aircraft without engineminusdriven electrical systems
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Chapter 20 Temporary Flight Restrictions
a Except in an emergency do not approve inflight requests for authorization to deviate from 14 CFR Section 91215(b)(5)(i) requirements originated by aircraft without transponder equipment installed
b Approve or disapprove other inflight deviation requests or withdraw approval previously issued to such flights solely on the basis of traffic conditions and other operational factors
c Adhere to the following sequence of action when an inflight VFR deviation request is received from an aircraft with an inoperative transponder or Mode C or is not Mode C equipped
1 Suggest that the aircraft conduct its flight in airspace unaffected by the CFRs
2 Suggest that the aircraft file an IFR flight plan
3 Suggest that the aircraft provide a VFR route of flight and maintain radio contact with ATC
d Do not approve an inflight deviation unless the aircraft has filed an IFR flight plan or a VFR route of flight is provided and radio contact with ATC is maintained
e You may approve an inflight deviation request which includes airspace outside your jurisdiction without the prior approval of the adjacent ATC sectorfacility providing a transponderMode C status report is forwarded prior to control transfer
f Approve or disapprove inflight deviation requests within a reasonable period of time or advise when approvaldisapproval can be expected
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus23 BEACON TERMINATION
Inform the pilot when you want their aircraftrsquos transponder and ADSminusB Out turned off
PHRASEOLOGYminus
STOP SQUAWK
(For a military aircraft when you do not know if the military service requires that it continue operating on another mode)
STOP SQUAWK (mode in use)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
5minus2minus24 ALTITUDE FILTERS
TERMINAL
Set altitude filters to display Mode C altitude readouts to encompass all altitudes within the controllerrsquos jurisdiction Set the upper limits no lower than 1000 feet above the highest altitude for which the controller is responsible In those stratified positions set the lower limit to 1000 feet or more below the lowest altitude for which the controller is responsible When the positionrsquos area of responsibility includes down to an airport field elevation the facility will normally set the lower altitude filter limit to encompass the field elevation so that provisions of Paragraph 2minus1minus6 Safety Alert and Para-graph 5minus2minus18 Validation of Mode C Readout subpara c2 may be applied Air traffic managers may authorize temporary suspension of this requirement when target clutter is excessive
5minus2minus25 INOPERATIVE OR MALFUNCTIONING ADS-B TRANSMITTER
a Except as provided in Paragraph 5minus2minus27 inform an aircraft when the ADSminusB transmitter appears to be inoperative or malfunctioning Notify the OSCIC of the aircraft call sign and location of aircraft
PHRASEOLOGYminus YOUR ADSminusB TRANSMITTER APPEARS TO BE INOPERATIVE MALFUNCTIONING
b If a malfunctioning ADSminusB transmitter is jeopardizing the safe execution of air traffic control functions instruct the aircraft to stop ADSminusB transmissions and notify the OSCIC
BeaconADSminusB Systems 5minus2minus9
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
PHRASEOLOGYminus STOP ADSminusB TRANSMISSIONS AND IF ABLE SQUAWK THREEALFA (code)
NOTEminus Not all aircraft have a capability to disengage the ADSminusB transmitter independently from the beacon code squawk
5minus2minus26 ADSminusB ALERTS
a Call Sign MisminusMatch (CSMM) A CSMM alert will occur when the transmitted ADSminusB Flight Identification (FLT ID) does not match the flight plan aircraft identification Inform the aircraft of the CSMM
PHRASEOLOGYminus YOUR ADSminusB FLIGHT ID DOES NOT MATCH YOUR FLIGHT PLAN AIRCRAFT IDENTIFICATION
b Duplicate ICAO Address If the broadcast ICAO address is shared with one or more flights in the same ADSminusB Service Area (regardless of altitude) and radar reinforcement is not available target resolution may be lost on one or both targets
NOTEminus Duplicate ICAO Address Alerts appear as ldquoDArdquo and are associated with the Data Block (DB) on STARS systems Duplicate ICAO Address Alerts appear as ldquoDUPrdquo and are associated with the DB on MEARTS systems Duplicate ICAO Address Alerts appear as ldquoDuplicate 24minusbit Addressrdquo at the AT Specialist Workstation on ERAM systems
c If a CSMM or Duplicate ICAO address is jeopardizing the safe execution of air traffic control functions instruct the aircraft to stop ADSminusB transmissions and notify the OSCIC
PHRASEOLOGYminus STOP ADSminusB TRANSMISSIONS AND IF ABLE SQUAWK THREEALFA (code)
NOTEminus Not all aircraft are capable of disengaging the ADSminusB transmitter independently from the transponder
5minus2minus27 ADSminusB OUT OFF OPERATIONS
Operators of aircraft with functional ADSminusB Out avionics installed and requesting an exception from the requirement to transmit at all times must obtain authorization from FAA System Operations Security The OSCIC should inform you of any ADSminusB Out OFF operations in your area of jurisdiction
a Do not inform such aircraft that their ADSminusB transmitter appears to be inoperative
b Do not approve any pilot request for ADSminusB Out OFF operations Notify the OSCIC of the request including the aircraft call sign and location
NOTEminus 14 CFR Section 91225(f) requires in part that ldquoeach person operating an aircraft equipped with ADSndashB Out must operate this equipment in the transmit mode at all times unless otherwise authorized by the FAA when that aircraft is performing a sensitive government mission for national defense homeland security intelligence or law enforcement purposes and transmitting would compro-mise the operations security of the mission or pose a safety risk to the aircraft crew or people and property in the air or on the groundrdquo
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus25 Inoperative or Malfunctioning ADSminusB Transmitter FAA Order JO 72103 Para 5ndash4ndash9 ADSminusB Out OFF Operations FAA Order JO 711067 Para 11 Responsibilities
5minus2minus10 BeaconADSminusB Systems
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
Section 3 Radar Identification
5minus3minus1 APPLICATION
Before you provide radar service establish and maintain radar identification of the aircraft involved except as provided in Paragraph 5minus5minus1 Application subparas b2 b3 and in Paragraph 8minus5minus5 Radar Identification Application
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus9 Use of Tower Radar Displays FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus1minus1 Presentation and Equipment Performance
5minus3minus2 PRIMARY RADAR IDENTIFICATION METHODS
Identify a primary radar beacon or ADSminusB target by using one of the following methods
a Observing a departing aircraft target within 1 mile of the takeoff runway end at airports with an operating control tower provided one of the following methods of coordination is accomplished
1 A verbal rollingboundary notification is issued for each departure or
2 A nonverbal rollingboundary notification is used for each departure aircraft
NOTEminus Nonverbal notification can be accomplished via the use of a manual or electronic ldquodrop tuberdquo or automation
b Observing a target whose position with respect to a fix (displayed on the video map scribed on the map overlay or displayed as a permanent echo) or a visual reporting point (whose range and azimuth from the radar antenna has been accurately determined and made available to the controller) corresponds with a direct position report received from an aircraft and the observed track is consistent with the reported heading or route of flight If a TACANVORTAC is located within 6000 feet of the radar antenna the TACANVORTAC may be used as a reference fix for radar identification without being displayed on the video map or map overlay
NOTEminus 1 Establishment of radar identification through use of DME position information can be complicated by the fact that some military TACANs are not collocated with frequencyminuspaired VORs and might be separated from them by as much as 31 miles
2 Visual reporting points used for RADAR identification are limited to those most used by pilots and whose range and azimuth have been determined by supervisory personnel
c Observing a target make an identifying turn or turns of 30 degrees or more provided the following conditions are met NOTEminus Use of identifying turns or headings which would cause the aircraft to follow normal IFR routes or known VFR flight paths might result in misidentification When these circ*mstances cannot be avoided additional methods of identification may be necessary
1 Except in the case of a lost aircraft a pilot position report is received which assures you that the aircraft is within radar coverage and within the area being displayed
2 Only one aircraft is observed making these turns
3 For aircraft operating in accordance with an IFR clearance you either issue a heading away from an area which will require an increased minimum IFR altitude or have the aircraft climb to the highest minimum altitude in your area of jurisdiction before you issue a heading REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus9 Use of Tower Radar Displays FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus12minus11 Surveillance Unusable
5minus3minus3 BEACONADSminusB IDENTIFICATION METHODS
When using only Mode 3A radar beacon or ADSminusB to identify a target use one of the following methods
a Request the pilot to activate the ldquoIDENTrdquo feature of the transponderADSminusB and then observe the identification display PHRASEOLOGYminus IDENT SQUAWK (code) AND IDENT
b Request the pilot to change to a specific discrete or nondiscrete code as appropriate and then observe the target or code display change If a code change is required in accordance with Section 2 BeaconADSminus B Systems of this chapter use the codes specified therein
c Request the pilot to change their transponder ADSminusB to ldquostandbyrdquo After you observe the target
Radar Identification 5minus3minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
disappear for sufficient scans to assure that loss of target resulted from placing the transponderADSminusB in ldquostandbyrdquo position request the pilot to return the transponder to normal operation and then observe the reappearance of the target
PHRASEOLOGYminus SQUAWK STANDBY
then
SQUAWK NORMAL
d EN ROUTE An aircraft may be considered identified when the full data block is automatically associated with the target symbol of an aircraft that is squawking a discrete code assigned by the computer
NOTEminus Paired LDBs in ERAM do not display a beacon code
PHRASEOLOGYminus SQUAWK (4 digit discrete code) AND IF YOUR ALTITUDE REPORTING EQUIPMENT IS TURNED OFF SQUAWK ALTITUDE
NOTEminus The AIM informs pilots to adjust Mode C transponders and ADSminusB with altitude reporting capability activated unless deactivation is requested by ATC ldquoSquawk altituderdquo is included here to provide applicable phraseology
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus9 Use of Tower Radar Displays FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus6 Position Information
5minus3minus4 TERMINAL AUTOMATION SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION METHODS
TERMINAL
a Consider an auto-acquired aircraft as identified when the data block is displayed and is visible to you and one of the following conditions exist
1 The radar or beacon identification procedures have been used to confirm the identity of the tagged target
2 The aircraft is being handed off using a NAS automated system and one of the following does not appear in the data block ldquoCSTrdquo ldquoNATrdquo ldquoNTrdquo ldquoAMBrdquo ldquoOLDrdquo ldquoNBrdquo ldquoTUrdquo ldquoAMrdquo ldquoOLrdquo or ldquoTRKrdquo
b Use the data block to maintain target identity unless it is in a coast status or displaced from the appropriate target
c A displaced data block must be updated at all times
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus9 Use of Tower Radar Displays
5minus3minus5 QUESTIONABLE IDENTIFICATION
a Use more than one method of identification when proximity of targets duplication of observed action or any other circ*mstances cause doubt as to target identification
b If identification is questionable for any reason take immediate action to reminusidentify the aircraft or terminate radar service Identify the aircraft as follows
1 As described in Paragraph 5minus3minus2 Primary Radar Identification Methods or Paragraph 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods
2 En route Ensure that all primary targets are displayed when radar identification is lost or is questionable
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus3 Methods
5minus3minus6 POSITION INFORMATION
Inform an aircraft of its position whenever radar identification is established by means of identifying turns or by any of the beacon identification methods outlined in Paragraph 5minus3minus3 BeaconADSminusB Identification Methods Position information need not be given when identification is established by position correlation or when a departing aircraft is identified within 1 mile of the takeoff runway end
5minus3minus7 IDENTIFICATION STATUS
a Inform an aircraft of radar contact when
1 Initial radar identification in the ATC system is established
2 Subsequent to loss of radar contact or terminating radar service radar identification is reestablished
PHRASEOLOGYminus RADAR CONTACT (position if required)
b Inform an aircraft when radar contact is lost
PHRASEOLOGYminus RADAR CONTACT LOST (alternative instructions when required)
Radar Identification 5minus3minus2
JO 711065Y8151913020 JO 711065Y CHG 1
5minus3minus8 TARGET MARKERS
EN ROUTE
Retain data blocks that are associated with the appropriate target symbol in order to maintain continuous identity of aircraft Retain the data block until the aircraft has exited the sector or delegated airspace and all potential conflicts have been resolved including an aircraft that is a point out The data block must display flight identification and altitude information as a minimum The displayed altitude may be assigned interim or reported
ERAM When you have separation responsibility for an aircraft and a paired track exists display a full data block (FDB)
5minus3minus9 TARGET MARKERS
TERMINAL
a Retain data blocks that are associated with the appropriate target symbol in order to maintain continuous identity of aircraft Retain the data block
until the aircraft has exited the sector or delegated airspace and all potential conflicts have been resolved including an aircraft that is a point out The data block must display flight identification and altitude information as a minimum
NOTEminus Where delegated airspace extends beyond Class B andor Class C airspace the following will apply If a VFR aircraft is clear of Class B and Class C airspace and radar services have been terminated then retention of the data block is no longer required
b During prearranged coordination procedures the controllers who penetrate another controllerrsquos airspace must display data block information of that controllerrsquos aircraft which must contain at a minimum the position symbol and altitude information REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus14 Coordinate Use of Airspace FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus3 Methods FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus8 Automated Information Transfer (AIT) FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus9 Prearranged Coordination FAA Order JO 72103 Para 3minus7minus7 Prearranged Coordination
Radar Identification 5minus3minus3
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
Section 4 Transfer of Radar Identification
5minus4minus1 APPLICATION
To provide continuous radar service to an aircraft and facilitate a safe orderly and expeditious flow of traffic it is often necessary to transfer radar identification of an aircraft from one controller to another This section describes the terms methods and responsibilities associated with this task Interfacility and intrafacility transfers of radar identification must be accomplished in all areas of radar surveillance except where it is not operationally feasible Where such constraints exist they must be
a Covered in letters of agreement which clearly state that control will not be based upon a radar handoff or
b Coordinated by the transferring and receiving controllers for a specified period of time
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus3minus8 Coordination with Receiving Facility
5minus4minus2 TERMS
a Handoff An action taken to transfer the radar identification of an aircraft from one controller to another controller if the aircraft will enter the receiving controllerrsquos airspace and radio communica-tions with the aircraft will be transferred
b Radar Contact The term used to inform the controller initiating a handoff that the aircraft is identified and approval is granted for the aircraft to enter the receiving controllerrsquos airspace
c Point Out An action taken by a controller to transfer the radar identification of an aircraft to another controller and radio communications will not be transferred
d Point Out Approved The term used to inform the controller initiating a point out that the aircraft is identified and that approval is granted for the aircraft to enter the receiving controllerrsquos airspace as coordinated without a communications transfer or the appropriate automated system response
e Traffic A term used to transfer radar identification of an aircraft to another controller for the purpose of coordinating separation action Traffic is normally issued
1 In response to a handoff or point out
2 In anticipation of a handoff or point out or
3 In conjunction with a request for control of an aircraft
f Traffic Observed The term used to inform the controller issuing the traffic restrictions that the traffic is identified and that the restrictions issued are understood and will be complied with
5minus4minus3 METHODS
a Transfer the radar identification of an aircraft by at least one of the following methods
1 Physically point to the target on the receiving controllerrsquos display
2 Use landline voice communications
3 Use automation capabilities
NOTEminus Automated handoff capabilities are only available when FDP is operational
4 TERMINAL Use the ldquoModifyrdquo or ldquoQuick Lookrdquo functions for data transfer between the TRACON and tower cab only if specific procedures are established in a facility directive The local controller has the responsibility to determine whether or not conditions are adequate for the use of STARS data on the TDW REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 12minus6minus4 Use of Stars Quick Look Functions
b When making a handoff point-out or issuing traffic restrictions relay information to the receiving controller in the following order
1 The position of the target relative to a fix map symbol or radar target known and displayed by both the receiving and transferring controller Mileage from the reference point may be omitted when relaying the position of a target if a full data block associated with the target has been forced on the receiving controllerrsquos radar display
EXAMPLEminus ldquoPoint out Southwest of Richmond VOR rdquo
2 The aircraft identification as follows
(a) The aircraft call sign or
Transfer of Radar Identification 5minus4minus1
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
(b) The discrete beacon code of the aircraft during interfacility point-outs only if both the receiving and the transferring controllers agree
NOTEminus Acceptance of a point-out using the discrete beacon code as the aircraftrsquos identification constitutes agreement
(c) EN ROUTE The Computer Identification Number (CID) during intrafacility point-outs
EXAMPLEminus ldquoPoint Out Southwest of Richmond VOR C-I-D 123helliprdquo
3 The assigned altitude appropriate restrictions and information that the aircraft is climbing or descending if applicable except when interintrafacility directives ensure that the altitude information will be known by the receiving controller
NOTEminus When physically pointing to the target you do not have to state the aircraft position
4 Advise the receiving controller of pertinent information not contained in the data block or available flight data unless covered in an LOA or facility directive Pertinent information may include
(a) Assigned heading
(b) Speedaltitude restrictions
(c) Observed track or deviation from the last route clearance
(d) Any other pertinent information
PHRASEOLOGYminus HANDOFFPOINT-OUTTRAFFIC (aircraft position) (aircraft ID)
or
(discrete beacon code point-out only) (altitude restrictions and other pertinent information if applicable)
c When receiving a handoff point-out or traffic restrictions respond to the transferring controller as follows
PHRASEOLOGYminus (Aircraft ID) (restrictions if applicable) RADAR CONTACT
or
(aircraft ID or discrete beacon code) (restrictions if
applicable) POINT-OUT APPROVED
or
TRAFFIC OBSERVED
or
UNABLE (appropriate information as required)
d If any doubt as to target identification exists after attempting confirmation in accordance with this section apply the provisions of Paragraph 5minus3minus5 Questionable Identification
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus18 Validation of Mode C Readout
5minus4minus4 TRAFFIC
a When using the term ldquotrafficrdquo for coordinating separation the controller issuing traffic must issue appropriate restrictions
b The controller accepting the restrictions must be responsible to ensure that approved separation is maintained between the involved aircraft
5minus4minus5 TRANSFERRING CONTROLLER HANDOFF
The transferring controller must
a Complete a radar handoff prior to an aircraftrsquos entering the airspace delegated to the receiving controller
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus14 Coordinate Use of Airspace FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus15 Control Transfer FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus6 Receiving Controller Handoff
b Verbally obtain the receiving controllerrsquos approval prior to making any changes to an aircraftrsquos flight path altitude speed or data block information while the handoff is being initiated or after acceptance unless otherwise specified by a LOA or a facility directive
c Ensure that prior to transferring communications
1 Potential violations of adjacent airspace and potential conflicts between aircraft in their own area of jurisdiction are resolved
2 Coordination has been accomplished with all controllers through whose area of jurisdiction the aircraft will pass prior to entering the receiving
Transfer of Radar Identification 5minus4minus2
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
controllerrsquos area of jurisdiction unless otherwise specified by a LOA or a facility directive
3 Restrictions issued to ensure separation are passed to the receiving controller
d After transferring communications continue to comply with the requirements of subparas c1 and 2
e Comply with restrictions issued by the receiving controller unless otherwise coordinated
f Comply with the provisions of Paragraph 2minus1minus17 Radio Communications Transfer subparas a and b To the extent possible transfer communica-tions when the transfer of radar identification has been accepted
NOTEminus Before the STARS ldquomodifyquick lookrdquo function is used to transfer radar identification a facility directive which specifies communication transfer points is required
g Advise the receiving controller of pertinent information not contained in the data block or flight progress strip unless covered in a LOA or facility directive Pertinent information includes
1 Assigned heading
2 Air speed restrictions
3 Altitude information issued
4 Observed track or deviation from the last route clearance
5 The beacon code if different from that normally used or previously coordinated
6 Any other pertinent information
h Ensure that the data block is associated with the appropriate target
i Initiate verbal coordination to verify the position of primary or nondiscrete targets when using the automated handoff functions except for intrafacility handoffs using single-sensor systems or multisensor systems operating in a mosaic RDP mode
j Initiate verbal coordination before transferring control of a track when ldquoCSTrdquo ldquoFAILrdquo ldquoNONErdquo ldquoNBrdquo ldquoNXrdquo ldquoIFrdquo ldquoNTrdquo or ldquoTRKrdquo is displayed in the data block
k Advise the receiving controller if radar monitoring is required
l Issue restrictions to the receiving controller which are necessary to maintain separation from other aircraft within your area of jurisdiction before releasing control of the aircraft
m Consider the target being transferred as identified on the receiving controllerrsquos display when the receiving controller acknowledges receipt verbally or has accepted an automated handoff
n Accomplish the necessary coordination with any intervening controllers whose area of jurisdiction is affected by the receiving controllerrsquos delay in the climb or the descent of an aircraft through the vertical limits of your area of jurisdiction when the receiving controller advises you of that delay before accepting the transfer of radar identification unless otherwise specified by a LOA or a facility directive
5minus4minus6 RECEIVING CONTROLLER HANDOFF
The receiving controller must
a Ensure that the target position corresponds with the position given by the transferring controller or that there is an appropriate association between an automated data block and the target being transferred before accepting a handoff REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus14 Coordinate Use of Airspace FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus15 Control Transfer FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus5 Transferring Controller Handoff
b Issue restrictions that are needed for the aircraft to enter your sector safely before accepting the handoff
c Comply with restrictions issued by the transferring controller unless otherwise coordinated
d After accepting a handoff from another controller confirm the identity of primary target by advising the aircraft of its position and of a beacon target by observing a code change an ldquoidentrdquo reply or a ldquostandbyrdquo squawk unless one of these was used during handoff These provisions do not apply at those towers and GCAs which have been delegated the responsibility for providing radar separation within designated areas by the parent approach control facility and the aircraft identification is assured by sequencing or positioning prior to the handoff REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus9minus5 Approach Separation Responsibility
Transfer of Radar Identification 5minus4minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 1 13020
e When using appropriate equipment consider a discrete beacon targetrsquos identity to be confirmed when
1 The data block associated with the target being handed off indicates the computer assigned discrete beacon code is being received or
2 You observe the deletion of a discrete code that was displayed in the data block or
NOTEminus When the aircraft generated discrete beacon code does not match the computer assigned beacon code the code generated will be displayed in the data block When the aircraft changes to the assigned discrete code the code disappears from the data block In this instance the observance of code removal from the data block satisfies confirmation requirements
3 You observe the numeric display of a discrete code that an aircraft has been instructed to squawk or reports squawking
f Take the identified action prior to accepting control of a track when the following indicators are displayed in the data block
1 ldquoAMBrdquo and ldquoAMrdquo advise the other facility that a disparity exists between the position declared by their computer and that declared by your STARS system
2 ldquoNATrdquo ldquoNTrdquo or ldquoTUrdquo advise the other facility if a disparity exists between the position declared by their computer and the actual target position
3 ldquoDATArdquo ldquoCSTrdquo ldquoNONErdquo ldquoNXrdquo ldquoOLDrdquo or ldquoOLrdquo initiate verbal coordination
g ERAM Notify the OS when a MISM is displayed in the data block
h Advise the transferring controller prior to accepting the transfer of radar identification that you will delay the climb or the descent of an aircraft through the vertical limits of the transferring controllerrsquos area of jurisdiction unless otherwise specified in a LOA or a facility directive
i If you decide after accepting the transfer of radar identification to delay the aircraftrsquos climb or descent through the vertical limits of the transferring controllerrsquos area of jurisdiction advise the transferring controller of that decision as soon as possible
5minus4minus7 POINT OUT
a The transferring controller must
1 Obtain approval before permitting an aircraft to enter the receiving controllerrsquos delegated airspace
(a) EN ROUTE Automated approval may be utilized in lieu of verbal approval If the receiving controller takes no action revert to verbal proce-dures
NOTEminus 1 Use fourth line data for aircraft not on their flight plan route
2 Where specified in a letter of agreement some facilities may restrict interfacility automated point outs
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus10minus1 En Route Or Oceanic Sector Team Responsibilities FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus3 Methods FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus10 En Route Fourth Line Data Block Usage FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus14minus3 Computer Entry of Flight Plan Information
(b) TERMINAL Automated point out ap-proval may be utilized in lieu of verbal provided the procedures are contained in a facility directiveLOA
2 Obtain the receiving controllerrsquos approval before making any changes to an aircraftrsquos flight path altitude speed or data block information after the point out has been approved
3 Comply with restrictions issued by the receiving controller unless otherwise coordinated
4 Be responsible for subsequent radar handoffs and communications transfer including flight data revisions and coordination unless otherwise agreed to by the receiving controller or as specified in a LOA
b The receiving controller must
1 Ensure that the target position corresponds with the position given by the transferring controller or that there is an association between a computer data block and the target being transferred prior to approving a point out
2 Be responsible for separation between point out aircraft and other aircraft for which heshe has separation responsibility
3 Issue restrictions necessary to provide separation from other aircraft within hisher area of jurisdiction
Transfer of Radar Identification 5minus4minus4
81519 JO 711065Y
5minus4minus8 AUTOMATED INFORMATION TRANSFER (AIT)
Transfer radar identification altitude control andor en route fourth line control information without verbal coordination under the following conditions
a During radar handoff and
b Via information displayed in full data blocks and
c When following procedures specified in your facility AIT directive andor LOA
NOTEminus Information transferred using AIT procedures may be biminusdirectional and may involve more than two sectors Complete coordination awareness of traffic flow and understanding of each positionrsquos responsibilities concern-ing AIT procedures cannot be overemphasized
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus10 En Route Fourth Line Data Block Usage FAA Order JO 72103 Para 4minus3minus8 Automated Information Transfer (AIT)
5minus4minus9 PREARRANGED COORDINATION
Prearranged coordination allowing aircraft under your control to enter another controllerrsquos area of jurisdiction may only be approved provided procedures are established and published in a facility directiveLOA in accordance with FAA Order JO 72103 Paragraph 3minus6minus7 Prearranged Coordination
NOTEminus Under no circ*mstances may one controller permit an aircraft to enter anotherrsquos airspace without proper coordination Coordination can be accomplished by several means ie radar handoff automated information transfer verbal pointminusout and by prearranged coordination procedures identified in a facility directive that clearly describe the correct application Airspace boundaries should not be permitted to become barriers to the efficient movement of traffic In addition complete coordination awareness of traffic flow and understanding of each positionrsquos responsibility concerning penetration of anotherrsquos airspace cannot be overemphasized
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus14 Coordinate Use of Airspace FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus3 Methods FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus8 Automated Information Transfer (AIT) FAA Order JO 72103 Para 3minus6minus7 Prearranged Coordination
5minus4minus10 EN ROUTE FOURTH LINE DATA BLOCK USAGE
a The fourth line of the data block must be displayed When used for forwarding control information only the specified messages listed in this section may be used Any additional control information must be forwarded via other communications methods Free text may be used by individual sector teams for recording information the team deems appropriate for managing the sector but must be removed prior to initiation of identification transfer REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus5 Transferring Controller Handoff subpara b FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus8 Automated Information Transfer (AIT)
b The en route fourth line data block area must be used for coordination purposes only in association with radar identified aircraft
c When automated information transfer (AIT) procedures are applied en route fourth line usage for transfer of control information must be specifically defined within facility AIT directive REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus8 Automated Information Transfer (AIT) FAA Order JO 72103 Para 4minus3minus8 Automated Information Transfer (AIT)
d Coordination format for assigned headings must use the designation character ldquoHrdquo preceding a threeminusdigit number
EXAMPLEminus H080 H270
e Aircraft assigned a heading until receiving a fix or joining a published route must be designated with assigned heading format followed by the fix or route
EXAMPLEminus H080ALB 080J121 PHALB
NOTEminus 1 The notation ldquoPHrdquo may be used to denote present heading
2 The character ldquoHrdquo may be omitted as a prefix to the heading assignment only if necessary due to character field limitations and it does not impede understanding
f Coordination format for weather deviations must use the designated characters D-deviation L-left R-right
Transfer of Radar Identification 5minus4minus5
JO 711065Y 81519
N-north E-east S-south W-west F ndash direct next NAVAIDwaypoint D+2 headings ndash deviate between
NOTEminus 1 Two digits specify turns in degrees and must include direction character(s) Three digits specify heading(s)
2 The inclusion of a NAVAID waypoint or F indicates that the pilot has been authorized to deviate for weather and must rejoin the route at the next NAVAID waypoint or fix in the route of flight in accordance with the phraseology in paragraph 2minus6minus4
EXAMPLEminus D90ATL DLKD75U D090F
3 The absence of a NAVAID waypoint or F indicates that the pilot has been authorized to deviate for weather only and the receiving controller must provide a clearance to rejoin the route in accordance with paragraph 2minus1minus15c
EXAMPLEminus DN D20L D30R D080+120
g Coordination format for assigned airspeeds must use the designation character ldquoSrdquo preceding a threeminusdigit number
NOTEminus A ldquo+rdquo notation may be added to denote an assigned speed at or greater than the displayed value A ldquominusrdquo notation may be added to denote an assigned speed at or less than the displayed value
EXAMPLEminus S210 S250 S250+ S280minus
h Aircraft assigned a Mach number must use the designation ldquoMrdquo preceding the twominusdigit assigned value
EXAMPLEminus M80 M80+ M80minus REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus4minus10 En Route Fourth Line Data Block Usage subpara gNOTE
i Aircraft authorized to conduct celestial navigation training within 30 NM of the route centerline specified within the en route clearance
EXAMPLEminus CELNAV
j Coordination format for aircraft requesting an altitude change must use the designation characters ldquoRQrdquo preceding a threeminusdigit number
EXAMPLEminus RQ170 RQ410
k Coordination format for aircraft requesting a route change must use the designation ldquoRQrdquo preceding a specific fix identifier
EXAMPLEminus RQLAX RQNEUTO
l The acceptance of a handoff by the receiving controller must constitute receipt of the information contained within the en route fourth line data block This information must not be modified outside of the controllerrsquos area of jurisdiction unless verbally coordinated or specified in a Letter of Agreement or Facility Directive It is the responsibility of the receiving controller to advise the transferring controller if any information is not understood or needs to be revised
NOTEminus Due to system and character limitations the usage of these standardized entries may require additional support via facility directive in order to provide complete coordination
m All other control information must be coordinated via other methods
Transfer of Radar Identification 5minus4minus6
81519 JO 711065Y
Section 5 Radar Separation
5minus5minus1 APPLICATION
a Radar separation must be applied to all RNAV aircraft operating at and below FL450 on Q routes or random RNAV routes excluding oceanic airspace
EXCEPTION GNSS-equipped aircraft G L S and V on pointminustominuspoint routes or transitioning between two pointminustominuspoint routes via an impromptu route
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 71105 Para 2minus3minus8 Aircraft Equipment Suffixes FAA Order JO 71105 TBL 2minus3minus10 Aircraft Equipment Suffixes FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus4minus1 Route Use AIM Para 5-1-8 Area Navigation (RNAV) AIM Para 5-3-4 Area Navigation (RNAV) Routes PCG Term - Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)[ICAO] PCG Term - Global Positioning Satellite Wide Area Augmentation Minimum En Route IFR Altitude (GPSWAAS MEA) PCG Term ndash Parallel Offset Route
b Radar separation may be applied between
1 Radar identified aircraft
2 An aircraft taking off and another radar identified aircraft when the aircraft taking off will be radar-identified within 1 mile of the runway end
3 A radar-identified aircraft and one not radar-identified when either is cleared to climb descend through the altitude of the other provided
(a) The performance of the radar system is adequate and as a minimum primary radar targets or ASRminus9Full Digital Radar Primary Symbol targets are being displayed on the display being used within the airspace within which radar separation is being applied and
(b) Flight data on the aircraft not radar-identified indicate it is a type which can be expected to give adequate primaryASRminus9Full Digital Radar Primary Symbol return in the area where separation is applied and
(c) The airspace within which radar separa-tion is applied is not less than the following number of miles from the edge of the radar display
(1) When less than 40 miles from the antennaminus 6 miles
(2) When 40 miles or more from the antennaminus 10 miles
(3) Narrowband radar operationsminus 10 miles and
(d) Radar separation is maintained between the radar-identified aircraft and all observed primary ASRminus9Full Digital Radar Primary Symbol and secondary radar targets until nonradar separation is established from the aircraft not radar identified and
(e) When the aircraft involved are on the same relative heading the radar-identified aircraft is vectored a sufficient distance from the route of the aircraft not radar identified to assure the targets are not superimposed prior to issuing the clearance to climbdescend REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus1minus2 Exceptions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus4minus1 Route Use FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus1 Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus8 Additional Separation for Formation Flights FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus9minus5 Approach Separation Responsibility
4 A radar-identified aircraft and one not radar-identified that is in transit from oceanic airspace or non-radar offshore airspace into an area of known radar coverage where radar separation is applied as specified in Paragraph 8minus5minus5 Radar Identification Application until the transiting aircraft is radar-identified or the controller establishes other approved separation in the event of a delay or inability to establish radar identification of the transiting aircraft REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus2minus6 IFR Flight Progress Data FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus1minus1 Presentation and Equipment Performance FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus3minus1 Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 8minus1minus8 Use of Control Estimates FAA Order JO 711065 Para 8minus5minus5 Radar Separation
5minus5minus2 TARGET SEPARATION
Apply radar separation
a Between the centers of primary radar targets however do not allow a primary target to touch another primary target or a beacon control slash
b Between the ends of beacon control slashes
c Between the end of a beacon control slash and the center of a primary target
d Allminusdigital displays Between the centers of digital targets do not allow digital targets to touch
Radar Separation 5minus5minus1
JO 711065Y 81519
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus9minus7 Simultaneous Independent Approachesminus Dual amp Triple
5minus5minus3 TARGET RESOLUTION
a A process to ensure that correlated radar targets or digitized targets do not touch
b Mandatory traffic advisories and safety alerts must be issued when this procedure is used
NOTEminus This procedure must not be provided utilizing mosaic radar systems
c Target resolution must be applied as follows
1 Between the edges of two primary targets or the edges of primary digitized targets
2 Between the end of the beacon control slash and the edge of a primary target or primary digitized target
3 Between the ends of two beacon control slashes
5minus5minus4 MINIMA
Separate aircraft by the following minima
a TERMINAL Single Sensor ASR or Digital Terminal Automation System (DTAS)
NOTEminus Includes single sensor long range radar mode
1 When less than 40 miles from the antennaminus 3 miles
2 When 40 miles or more from the antennaminus 5 miles
3 For single sensor ASRminus9 with Mode S when less than 60 miles from the antennaminus 3 miles
4 For single sensor ASRminus11 MSSR Beacon when less than 60 miles from the antennaminus 3 miles
NOTEminus Wake turbulence procedures specify increased separation minima required for certain classes of aircraft because of the possible effects of wake turbulence
b TERMINAL FUSION
1 Fusion target symbol ndash 3 miles
2 When displaying ISR in the data block- 5 miles
NOTEminus In the event of an unexpected ISR on one or more aircraft the ATCS working that aircraft must transition from 3-mile to 5-mile separation or establish some other form of approved separation (visual or vertical) as soon as feasible This action must be timely but taken in a reasonable fashion using the controllerrsquos best judgment as not to reduce safety or the integrity of the traffic situation For example if ISR appears when an aircraft is established on final with another aircraft on short final it would be beneficial from a safety perspective to allow the trailing aircraft to continue the approach and land rather than terminate a stabilized approach
3 If TRK appears in the data block handle in accordance with Paragraph 5minus3minus7 Identification Status subparagraph b and take appropriate steps to establish non-radar separation
4 ADS-B may be integrated as an additional surveillance source when operating in FUSION mode The display of ADS-B targets is permitted and does not require radar reinforcement
NOTEminus ADS-B surveillance must only be used when operating in FUSION
5 The use of ADS-B only information may be used to support all radar requirements associated with any published instrument procedure that is annotated ldquoRadar Requiredrdquo
6 The ADS-B Computer Human Interface (CHI) may be implemented by facilities on a sector by sector or facility wide basis when the determination is made that utilization of the ADS-B CHI provides an operational advantage to the controller
c EBUS Terminal MosaicMulti-Sensor Mode
NOTEminus MosaicMultiminusSensor Mode combines radar input from 2 to 16 sites into a single picture utilizing a mosaic grid composed of radar sort boxes
1 Below FL 600minus 5 miles
2 At or above FL 600minus 10 miles
3 Facility directives may specify 3 miles for areas meeting all of the following conditions
(a) Radar site adaptation is set to single sensor
(b) Significant operational advantages can be obtained
(c) Within 40 miles of the antenna
(d) Up to and including FL 230
5minus5minus2 Radar Separation
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
(e) Facility directives specifically define the area where the separation can be applied and define the requirements for displaying the area on the controllerrsquos display
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 8-2-1 Three Mile Airspace Operations
4 When transitioning from terminal to en route control 3 miles increasing to 5 miles or greater provided
(a) The aircraft are on diverging routes courses andor
(b) The leading aircraft is and will remain faster than the following aircraft and
(c) Separation constantly increasing and the first center controller will establish 5 NM or other appropriate form of separation prior to the aircraft departing the first center sector and
(d) The procedure is covered by a letter of agreement between the facilities involved and limited to specified routes andor sectorspositions
d ERAM
1 Below FL 600- 5 miles
2 At or above FL 600- 10 miles
3 Up to and including FL 230 where all the following conditions are met ndash 3 miles
(a) Within the 3 NM separation area and
(1) Within 40 NM of the preferred radar or
(2) Within 60 NM of the preferred radar when using ASRminus9 with Mode S or ASRminus11 MSSR Beacon or
(3) When operating in trackminusbased display mode
(b) The preferred sensor andor ADSminusB is providing reliable targets
(c) Facility directives specifically define the 3 NM separation area
(d) The 3 NM separation area is displayable on the video map
(e) Involved aircraft are displayed using the 3 NM target symbol
NOTEminus ADSminusB allows the expanded use of 3 NM separation in
approved areas It is not required for and does not affect the use of radar for 3 NM separation
4 When transitioning from terminal to en route control 3 miles increasing to 5 miles or greater provided
(a) The aircraft are on diverging routes courses andor
(b) The leading aircraft is and will remain faster than the following aircraft and
(c) Separation constantly increasing and the first center controller will establish 5 NM or other appropriate form of separation prior to the aircraft departing the first center sector and
(d) The procedure is covered by a letter of agreement between the facilities involved and limited to specified routes andor sectorspositions
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 8-2-1 Three Mile Airspace Operations
e MEARTS Mosaic Mode
1 Below FL 600- 5 miles
2 At or above FL 600- 10 miles
3 For areas meeting all of the following conditions ndash 3 miles
(a) Radar site adaptation is set to single sensor mode
NOTEminus 1 Single Sensor Mode displays information from the radar input of a single site
2 Procedures to convert MEARTS Mosaic Mode to MEARTS Single Sensor Mode at each PVDMDM will be established by facility directive
(b) Significant operational advantages can be obtained
(c) Within 40 NM of the sensor or within 60 NM of the sensor when using ASRminus9 with Mode S or ASRminus11 MSSR Beacon and within the 3 NM separation area
(d) Up to and including FL230
(e) Facility directives specifically define the area where the separation can be applied and define the requirements for displaying the area on the controllerrsquos PVDMDM
4 MEARTS Mosaic Mode Utilizing Single Source Polygon (San Juan CERAP and Honolulu
Radar Separation 5minus5minus3
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 2 71620
Control Facility only) when meeting all of the following conditionsndash 3 miles
(a) Up to and including FL230 within 40 miles from the antenna or within 60 NM when using ASRminus9 with Mode S or ASRminus11 MSSR Beacon and targets are from the adapted sensor
(b) The single source polygon must be displayed on the controllerrsquos PVDMDM
(c) Significant operational advantages can be obtained
(d) Facility directives specifically define the single source polygon area where the separation can be applied and specify procedures to be used
(e) Controller must commence a transition to achieve either vertical separation or 5 mile lateral separation in the event that either target is not from the adapted sensor
f STARS MultiminusSensor Mode
NOTEminus 1 In MultiminusSensor Mode STARS displays targets as filled and unfilled boxes depending upon the targetrsquos distance from the radar site providing the data Since there is presently no way to identify which specific site is providing data for any given target utilize separation standards for targets 40 or more miles from the antenna
2 When operating in STARS Single Sensor Mode if TRK appears in the data block handle in accordance with Paragraph 5minus3minus7 Identification Status subpara b and take appropriate steps to establish nonradar separation
3 TRK appears in the data block whenever the aircraft is being tracked by a radar site other than the radar currently selected Current equipment limitations preclude a target from being displayed in the single sensor mode however a position symbol and data block including altitude information will still be displayed Therefore low altitude alerts must be provided in accordance with Paragraph 2minus1minus6 Safety Alert
WAKE TURBULENCE APPLICATION
g Separate aircraft operating directly behind or following an aircraft conducting an instrument approach by the minima specified and in accordance with the following
NOTEminus Consider parallel runways less than 2500 feet apart as a single runway because of the possible effects of wake turbulence
1 When operating within 2500 feet of the flight path of the leading aircraft over the surface of the earth and less than 1000 feet below
(a) TERMINAL Behind super
(1) Heavy - 6 miles
(2) Large - 7 miles
(3) Small - 8 miles
(b) EN ROUTE Behind super - 5 miles unless the super is operating at or below FL240 and below 250 knots then
(1) Heavy - 6 miles
(2) Large - 7 miles
(3) Small - 8 miles
(c) Behind heavy
(1) Heavy - 4 miles
(2) Large or small - 5 miles
2 Separate small aircraft behind a B757 by 4 miles when operating within 2500 feet of the flight path of the leading aircraft over the surface of the earth andor less than 500 feet below
3 TERMINAL When departing parallel runways separated by less than 2500 feet the 2500 feet requirement in subparagraph 2 is not required when a small departs the parallel runway behind a B757 Issue a wake turbulence cautionary advisory and instructions that will establish lateral separation in accordance with subparagraph 2 Do not issue instructions that will allow the small to pass behind the B757
NOTEminus 1 The application of Paragraph 5minus8minus3 Successive or Simultaneous Departures satisfies this requirement
2 Consider runways separated by less than 700 feet as a single runway because of the possible effects of wake turbulence
WAKE TURBULENCE APPLICATION
h In addition to subpara g separate an aircraft landing behind another aircraft on the same runway or one making a touch-and-go stop-and-go or low approach by ensuring the following minima will exist at the time the preceding aircraft is over the landing threshold
Radar Separation 5minus5minus4
JO 711065Y8151971620 JO 711065Y CHG 2
NOTEminus Consider parallel runways less than 2500 feet apart as a single runway because of the possible effects of wake turbulence
1 Small behind largeminus 4 miles
2 Small behind heavyminus 6 miles
If the landing threshold cannot be determined apply the above minima as constant or increasing at the closest point that can be determined prior to the landing threshold
i TERMINAL When NOWGT is displayed in an aircraft data block provide 10 miles separation behind the preceding aircraft and 10 miles separation to the succeeding aircraft
j TERMINAL 25 nautical miles (NM) separa-tion is authorized between aircraft established on the final approach course within 10 NM of the landing runway when operating in FUSION or single sensor slant range mode if the aircraft remains within 40 miles of the antenna and
1 The leading aircraftrsquos weight class is the same or less than the trailing aircraft
2 Super and heavy aircraft are permitted to participate in the separation reduction as the trailing aircraft only
3 An average runway occupancy time of 50 seconds or less is documented
4 CTRDs are operational and used for quick glance references
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus1minus9 Use of Tower Radar Displays
5 Turnoff points are visible from the control tower
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus19 Wake Turbulence FAA Order JO 711065 Para 3minus9minus6 Same Runway Separation FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus7 Passing or Diverging FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus9 Separation from Obstructions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus8minus3 Successive or Simultaneous Departures FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus9minus5 Approach Separation Responsibility FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus6minus7 Sequencing FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus7minus3 Separation FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus8minus3 Separation FAA Order JO 72103 Para 10minus4minus10 Reduced Separation on Final
5minus5minus5 VERTICAL APPLICATION
Aircraft not laterally separated may be vertically separated by one of the following methods
a Assign altitudes to aircraft provided valid Mode C altitude information is monitored and the applicable separation minima is maintained at all times REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus5minus1 Vertical Separation Minima FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus18 Validation of Mode C Readout FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus7minus3 Separation FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus8minus3 Separation FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus9minus4 Separation
b Assign an altitude to an aircraft after the aircraft previously at that altitude has been issued a climbdescent clearance and is observed (valid Mode C) or reports leaving the altitude NOTEminus 1 Consider known aircraft performance characteristics pilot furnished andor Mode C detected information which indicate that climbdescent will not be consistent with the rates recommended in the AIM
2 It is possible that the separation minima described in Paragraph 4minus5minus1 Vertical Separation Minima Para-graph 7minus7minus3 Separation Paragraph 7minus8minus3 Separation or Paragraph 7minus9minus4 Separation might not always be maintained using subpara b However correct application of this procedure will ensure that aircraft are safely separated because the first aircraft must have already vacated the altitude prior to the assignment of that altitude to the second aircraft REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus3 Procedural Preference FAA Order JO 711065 Para 4minus5minus1 Vertical Separation Minima FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus2minus18 Validation of Mode C Readout FAA Order JO 711065 Para 6minus6minus1 Application
5minus5minus6 EXCEPTIONS
a Do not use Mode C to effect vertical separation with an aircraft on a cruise clearance contact approach or as specified in Paragraph 5minus15minus4 System Requirements subpara f3 REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 6minus6minus2 Exceptions FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus4minus6 Contact Approach PCG Termminus Cruise
b Assign an altitude to an aircraft only after the aircraft previously at that altitude is observed at or passing through another altitude separated from the first by the appropriate minima when
1 Severe turbulence is reported
2 Aircraft are conducting military aerial refueling
Radar Separation 5minus5minus5
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus13 Military Aerial Refueling
3 The aircraft previously at that altitude has been issued a climbdescent at pilotrsquos discretion
5minus5minus7 PASSING OR DIVERGING
a TERMINAL In accordance with the following criteria all other approved separation may be discontinued and passing or diverging separation applied when
1 Single Site ASR or FUSION Mode
(a) Aircraft are on oppositereciprocal courses and you have observed that they have passed each other or aircraft are on same or crossing coursesassigned radar vectors and one aircraft has crossed the projected course of the other and the angular difference between their coursesassigned radar vectors is at least 15 degrees
NOTEminus Two aircraft both assigned courses andor radar vectors with an angular difference of at least 15 degrees is considered a correct application of this paragraph
(b) The tracks are monitored to ensure that the primary targets beacon control slashes FUSION target symbols or full digital terminal system primary andor beacon target symbols will not touch
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 1minus2minus2 Course Definitions
2 Single Site ARSR or FUSION Mode when target refresh is only from an ARSR or when in FUSION Mode minus ISR is displayed
(a) Aircraft are on oppositereciprocal courses and you have observed that they have passed each other or aircraft are on same or crossing coursesassigned radar vectors and one aircraft has crossed the projected course of the other and the angular difference between their coursesassigned radar vectors is at least 45 degrees
NOTEminus Two aircraft both assigned courses andor radar vectors with an angular difference of at least 45 degrees is considered a correct application of this paragraph
(b) The tracks are monitored to ensure that the primary targets beacon control slashes FUSION target symbols or full digital terminal system primary andor beacon target symbols will not touch
3 Although approved separation may be discontinued the requirements of Paragraph 5minus5minus4 Minima subpara g must be applied when wake turbulence separation is required REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 1minus2minus2 Course Definitions
NOTEminus Apply en route separation rules when using multiminussensor mode
b EN ROUTE Vertical separation between aircraft may be discontinued when they are on opposite courses as defined in Paragraph 1minus2minus2 Course Definitions and
1 You are in communications with both aircraft involved and
2 You tell the pilot of one aircraft about the other aircraft including position direction type and
3 One pilot reports having seen the other aircraft and that the aircraft have passed each other and
4 You have observed that the radar targets have passed each other and
5 You have advised the pilots if either aircraft is classified as a super or heavy aircraft
6 Although vertical separation may be discon-tinued the requirements of Paragraph 5minus5minus4 Minima subpara g must be applied when wake turbulence separation is required
EXAMPLEminus ldquoTraffic twelve orsquoclock Boeing Seven Twenty Seven opposite direction Do you have it in sightrdquo
(If the answer is in the affirmative)
ldquoReport passing the trafficrdquo
(When pilot reports passing the traffic and the radar targets confirm that the traffic has passed issue appropriate control instructions)
5minus5minus8 ADDITIONAL SEPARATION FOR FORMATION FLIGHTS
Because of the distance allowed between formation aircraft and lead aircraft additional separation is necessary to ensure the periphery of the formation is adequately separated from other aircraft adjacent airspace or obstructions Provide supplemental separation for formation flights as follows
5minus5minus6 Radar Separation
JO 711065Y81519123120 JO 711065Y CHG 3
a Separate a standard formation flight by adding 1 mile to the appropriate radar separation minima
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus13 Formation Flights FAA Order JO 711065 Para 5minus5minus1 Application FAA Order JO 711065 Para 7minus7minus3 Separation PCG Termminus Formation Flight
b Separate two standard formation flights from each other by adding 2 miles to the appropriate separation minima
c Separate a nonstandard formation flight by applying the appropriate separation minima to the perimeter of the airspace encompassing the nonstandard formation or from the outermost aircraft of the nonstandard formation whichever applies
d If necessary for separation between a nonstandard formation and other aircraft assign an appropriate beacon code to each aircraft in the formation or to the first and last aircraft in-trail
NOTEminus The additional separation provided in Paragraph 5minus5minus8 Additional Separation for Formation Flights is not normally added to wake turbulence separation when a formation is following a heavier aircraft since none of the formation aircraft are likely to be closer to the heavier aircraft than the lead aircraft (to which the prescribed wake turbulence separation has been applied)
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 9minus2minus13 Military Aerial Refueling
5minus5minus9 SEPARATION FROM OBSTRUCTIONS
a TERMINAL Separate aircraft from prominent obstructions depicted on the radar display by the following minima
1 When less than 40 miles from the antennaminus 3 miles
2 When 40 miles or more from the antennaminus 5 miles
3 For single sensor ASRminus9 with Mode S when less than 60 miles from the antenna ndash 3 miles
4 For single sensor ASRminus11 MSSR Beacon when less than 60 miles from the antenna ndash 3 miles
5 FUSION
(a) Fusion target symbol ndash 3 miles
(b) When ISR is displayed ndash 5 miles
NOTEminus When operating in FUSION distances from the antenna listed in paragraph 5minus5minus9 a1 through a4 do not apply
b TERMINAL Vertical separation of aircraft above a prominent obstruction depicted on the radar display and contained within a buffer area may be discontinued after the aircraft has passed the obstruction
c EAS Apply the radar separation minima specified in Paragraph 5minus5minus4 Minima
5minus5minus10 ADJACENT AIRSPACE
a If coordination between the controllers concerned has not been effected separate radar-controlled aircraft from the boundary of adjacent airspace in which radar separation is also being used by the following minima REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 711065 Para 2minus1minus14 Coordinate Use of Airspace
1 When less than 40 miles from the antennaminus 1 12 miles
2 When 40 miles or more from the antennaminus 2 12 miles
3 EAS
(a) Below Flight Level 600minus 2 12 miles
(b) Flight Level 600 and aboveminus 5 miles
b Separate radar-controlled aircraft from the boundary of airspace in which nonradar separation is being used by the following minima
1 When less than 40 miles from the antennaminus 3 miles
2 When 40 miles or more from the antennaminus 5 miles
3 EAS
(a) Below Flight Level 600minus 5 miles
(b) Flight Level 600 and aboveminus 10 miles
c The provisions of subparas a and b do not apply to VFR aircraft being provided Class B Class C or TRSA services Ensure that the targets of these aircraft do not touch the boundary of adjacent airspace
d VFR aircraft approaching Class B Class C Class D or TRSA airspace which is under the control jurisdiction of another air traffic control facility should either be provided with a radar handoff
Radar Separation 5minus5minus7
JO 711065Y 8151931507711065R CHG 2JO 711065Y CHG 3 123120
or be advised that radar service is terminated given their position in relation to the Class B Class C Class D or TRSA airspace and the ATC frequency if known for the airspace to be entered These actions should be accomplished in sufficient time for the pilot to obtain the required ATC approval prior to entering the airspace involved or to avoid the airspace
5minus5minus11 EDGE OF SCOPE
Separate a radar-controlled aircraft climbing or descending through the altitude of an aircraft that has been tracked to the edge of the scopedisplay by the following minima until nonradar separation has been established
a When less than 40 miles from the antennaminus 3 miles from edge of scope
b When 40 miles or more from the antennaminus 5 miles from edge of scope
c EAS
1 Below Flight Level 600minus 5 miles
2 Flight Level 600 and aboveminus 10 miles
5minus5minus12 BEACON TARGET DISPLACEMENT
When using a radar target display with a previously specified beacon target displacement to separate a beacon target from a primary target adjacent airspace obstructions or terrain add a 1 mile correction factor to the applicable minima The maximum allowable beacon target displacement which may be specified by the facility air traffic manager is 12 mile
REFERENCEminus FAA Order JO 72103 Para 3minus6minus4 Monitoring of Mode 3A Radar Beacon Codes
5minus5minus8 Radar Separation
